Page 1


Partners of the worldwide T.E.A. Group

We are pleased to present this 4th edition of our T.E.A. Product Range of engineering components catalogue 2015. New products have been added to our range, and specifications have been updated. Although this catalogue contains comprehensive specifications on most of our product range, further data is available via our web site www.tea.net.au and on our current CD, and of course, you can always contact our friendly T.E.A. team for additional faxed or emailed pages. T.E.A. takes pride in offering our customers an efficient and reliable service, from prompt attention to enquiries, quick quotations and same day despatch when possible. We look forward to being of good service to you.

The purchaser acknowledges that it is selecting the product and/or system choices for its particular application, and is relying on its own expertise and not the expertise of T.E.A. Transmissions in making such selections. Technical advice or review provided by T.E.A. Transmissions with respect to the use of T.E.A. Transmissions products is given in good faith and without charge, and T.E.A. Transmissions assumes no obligation of liability for the advice given. Advice provided is to be accepted at the customer's risk. All care has been taken in the compilation of these pages, however, errors may occur. Please do not use the information contained herein for critical applications without first re-checking the information with your own engineering department. No responsibility will be accepted by T.E.A. Transmissions or the directors of the said company for any loss of any kind that may be incurred in anyway whatsoever from the use of the information provided in these pages. ABN - 51003173920


0

1

5

6

228 Timing Belts & Pulleys 229

.230-231

Permanent Magnetic, Double Loop, Trasco, Bellows, Helix, Oldham, Unilat, Multibeam, Slip Clutches.......232-254


Titanium Grade 2, round bar, metric and imperial diameters...................................................................................277

304


Metric Spur Gears Module 1 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel

AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045

15

tu

p p

p

q

dk do

BH8 d p

q

q

q

25

Module 1

t

t

Pitch 3.1416 Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do

Part No.

No. of Teeth

Drilled Hole BH8

Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do

Part No.

No. of Teeth

TEA 1012 TEA 1013 TEA 1014 TEA 1015

12 13 14 15

5 5 5 6

9 10 10 12

14 15 16 17

12 13 14 15

TEA 1044 TEA 1045 TEA 1046 TEA 1047

44 45 46 47

10 10 10 10

30 30 30 30

46 47 48 49

44 45 46 47

TEA 1016 TEA 1017 TEA 1018 TEA 1019

16 17 18 19

6 8 8 8

13 14 15 15

18 19 20 21

16 17 18 19

TEA 1048 TEA 1049 TEA 1050 TEA 1051

48 49 50 51

10 10 12 12

30 30 30 40

50 51 52 53

48 49 50 51

TEA 1020 TEA 1021 TEA 1022 TEA 1023

20 21 22 23

8 8 8 8

16 16 18 18

22 23 24 25

20 21 22 23

TEA 1052 TEA 1053 TEA 1054 TEA 1055

52 53 54 55

12 12 12 12

40 40 40 40

54 55 56 57

52 53 54 55

TEA 1024 TEA 1025 TEA 1026 TEA 1027

24 25 26 27

8 8 8 8

20 20 20 20

26 27 28 29

24 25 26 27

TEA 1056 TEA 1057 TEA 1058 TEA 1059

56 57 58 59

12 12 12 12

40 40 40 40

58 59 60 61

56 57 58 59

TEA 1028 TEA 1029 TEA 1030 TEA 1031

28 29 30 31

8 8 8 10

20 20 20 25

30 31 32 33

28 29 30 31

TEA 1060 TEA 1061 TEA 1062 TEA 1063

60 61 62 63

12 12 12 12

40 50 50 50

62 63 64 65

60 61 62 63

TEA 1032 TEA 1033 TEA 1034 TEA 1035

32 33 34 35

10 10 10 10

25 25 25 25

34 35 36 37

32 33 34 35

TEA 1064 TEA 1065 TEA 1066 TEA 1067

64 65 66 67

12 12 12 12

50 50 50 50

66 67 68 69

64 65 66 67

TEA 1036 TEA 1037 TEA 1038 TEA 1039

36 37 38 39

10 10 10 10

25 25 25 25

38 39 40 41

36 37 38 39

TEA 1068 TEA 1069 TEA 1070

68 69 70

12 12 12

50 50 50

70 71 72

68 69 70

TEA 1040 TEA 1041 TEA 1042 TEA 1043

40 41 42 43

10 10 10 10

25 30 30 30

42 43 44 45

40 41 42 43

Larger gears are available as hubless version please see page 7, (some sizes from stock). Larger gears with hubs are also available on request. - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.

Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. Our entire SNB range of steel spur gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

1


Metric Spur Gears Module 1.5 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel

AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045

17

tu

p p

p

q

dk do

BH8 d p

q

q

q

30

Module 1.5

t

t

Pitch 4.7124 Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do

Part No.

No. of Teeth

Drilled Hole BH8

Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do

Part No.

No. of Teeth

TEA 1512 TEA 1513 TEA 1514 TEA 1515

12 13 14 15

8 8 8 8

14 14 18 18

21.0 22.5 24.0 25.5

18.0 19.5 21.0 22.5

TEA 1544 TEA 1545 TEA 1546 TEA 1547

44 45 46 47

14 14 14 14

50 50 50 50

69.0 70.5 72.0 73.5

66.0 67.5 69.0 70.5

TEA 1516 TEA 1517 TEA 1518 TEA 1519

16 17 18 19

8 8 8 8

20 20 20 20

27.0 28.5 30.0 31.5

24.0 25.5 27.0 28.5

TEA 1548 TEA 1549 TEA 1550 TEA 1551

48 49 50 51

14 14 14 15

50 50 50 60

75.0 76.5 78.0 79.5

72.0 73.5 75.0 76.5

TEA 1520 TEA 1521 TEA 1522 TEA 1523

20 21 22 23

8 10 10 10

25 25 25 25

33.0 34.5 36.0 37.5

30.0 31.5 33.0 34.5

TEA 1552 TEA 1553 TEA 1554 TEA 1555

52 53 54 55

15 15 15 15

60 60 60 60

81.0 82.5 84.0 85.5

78.0 79.5 81.0 82.5

TEA 1524 TEA 1525 TEA 1526 TEA 1527

24 25 26 27

10 10 12 12

25 25 30 30

39.0 40.5 42.0 43.5

36.0 37.5 39.0 40.5

TEA 1556 TEA 1557 TEA 1558 TEA 1559

56 57 58 59

15 15 15 15

60 60 60 60

87.0 88.5 90.0 91.5

84.0 85.5 87.0 88.5

TEA 1528 TEA 1529 TEA 1530 TEA 1531

28 29 30 31

12 12 12 12

30 30 30 35

45.0 46.5 48.0 49.5

42.0 43.5 45.0 46.5

TEA 1560 TEA 1561 TEA 1562 TEA 1563

60 61 62 63

15 20 20 20

60 70 70 70

93.0 94.5 96.0 97.5

90.0 91.5 93.0 94.5

TEA 1532 TEA 1533 TEA 1534 TEA 1535

32 33 34 35

12 12 12 12

35 35 35 35

51.0 52.5 54.0 55.5

48.0 49.5 51.0 52.5

TEA 1564 TEA 1565 TEA 1566 TEA 1567

64 65 66 67

20 20 20 20

70 70 70 70

99.0 100.5 102.0 103.5

96.0 97.5 99.0 100.5

TEA 1536 TEA 1537 TEA 1538 TEA 1539

36 37 38 39

12 12 12 12

35 40 40 40

57.0 58.5 60.0 61.5

54.0 55.5 57.0 58.5

TEA 1568 TEA 1569 TEA 1570

68 69 70

20 20 20

70 70 70

105.0 106.5 108.0

102.0 103.5 105.0

TEA 1540 TEA 1541 TEA 1542 TEA 1543

40 41 42 43

12 14 14 14

40 40 50 50

63.0 64.5 66.0 67.5

60.0 61.5 63.0 64.5

Larger gears are available as hubless version, please see page 7, (some sizes from stock). Larger gears with hubs are also available from our SNB range - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.

Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. Our entire SNB range of steel spur gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

2


Metric Spur Gears Module 2 Pressure Angle 20째

Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045

20

tu

p p

p

q

dk do

BH8 d p

q

q

q

35

Module 2

t

t

Pitch 6.2832 Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do

Part No.

No. of Teeth

24 26 28 30

TEA 2044 TEA 2045 TEA 2046 TEA 2047

44 45 46 47

16 16 16 16

60 60 60 60

92 94 96 98

88 90 92 94

36 38 40 42

32 34 36 38

TEA 2048 TEA 2049 TEA 2050 TEA 2051

48 49 50 51

16 16 16 20

70 70 70 70

100 102 104 106

96 98 100 102

30 30 30 30

44 46 48 50

40 42 44 46

TEA 2052 TEA 2053 TEA 2054 TEA 2055

52 53 54 55

20 20 20 20

70 70 70 70

108 110 112 114

104 106 108 110

12 12 12 12

35 35 40 40

52 54 56 58

48 50 52 54

TEA 2056 TEA 2057 TEA 2058 TEA 2059

56 57 58 59

20 20 20 20

70 70 70 70

116 118 120 122

112 114 116 118

28 29 30 31

12 14 14 14

40 40 40 45

60 62 64 66

56 58 60 62

TEA 2060 TEA 2061 TEA 2062 TEA 2063

60 61 62 63

20 20 20 20

70 80 80 80

124 126 128 130

120 122 124 126

TEA 2032 TEA 2033 TEA 2034 TEA 2035

32 33 34 35

14 14 14 14

45 45 45 45

68 70 72 74

64 66 68 70

TEA 2064 TEA 2065 TEA 2066 TEA 2067

64 65 66 67

20 20 20 20

80 80 80 80

132 134 136 138

128 130 132 134

TEA 2036 TEA 2037 TEA 2038 TEA 2039

36 37 38 39

14 14 14 14

45 50 50 50

76 78 80 82

72 74 76 78

TEA 2068 TEA 2069 TEA 2070

68 69 70

20 20 20

80 80 80

140 142 144

136 138 140

TEA 2040 TEA 2041 TEA 2042 TEA 2043

40 41 42 43

14 16 16 16

50 60 60 60

84 86 88 90

80 82 84 86

Part No.

No. of Teeth

Drilled Hole BH8

TEA 2012 TEA 2013 TEA 2014 TEA 2015

12 13 14 15

10 10 10 10

18 19 20 22

28 30 32 34

TEA 2016 TEA 2017 TEA 2018 TEA 2019

16 17 18 19

10 10 10 10

24 25 25 25

TEA 2020 TEA 2021 TEA 2022 TEA 2023

20 21 22 23

10 12 12 12

TEA 2024 TEA 2025 TEA 2026 TEA 2027

24 25 26 27

TEA 2028 TEA 2029 TEA 2030 TEA 2031

Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do

Larger gears are available as hubless version please see page 7, (some sizes from stock). Larger gears with hubs are also available in our SNB range - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.

Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. Our entire SNB range of steel spur gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

3


Metric Spur Gears Module 2.5 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel

AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045

25

tu

p p

p

q

dk do

BH8d p

q

q

q

40

Module 2.5

t

t

Pitch 7.8540 Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do

Part No.

No. of Teeth

Drilled Hole BH8

30.0 32.5 35.0 37.5

TEA 2544 TEA 2545 TEA 2546 TEA 2547

44 45 46 47

20 20 20 20

70 70 70 80

115.0 117.5 120.0 122.5

110.0 112.5 115.0 117.5

45.0 47.5 50.0 52.5

40.0 42.5 45.0 47.5

TEA 2548 TEA 2549 TEA 2550 TEA 2551

48 49 50 51

20 20 20 20

80 80 80 90

125.0 127.5 130.0 132.5

120.0 122.5 125.0 127.5

40 40 45 45

55.0 57.5 60.0 62.5

50.0 52.5 55.0 57.5

TEA 2552 TEA 2553 TEA 2554 TEA 2555

52 53 54 55

20 20 20 20

90 90 90 90

135.0 137.5 140.0 142.5

130.0 132.5 135.0 137.5

14 14 14 14

45 50 50 50

65.0 67.5 70.0 72.5

60.0 62.5 65.0 67.5

TEA 2556 TEA 2557 TEA 2558 TEA 2559

56 57 58 59

20 20 20 20

100 100 100 100

145.0 147.5 150.0 152.5

140.0 142.5 145.0 147.5

28 29 30 31

14 14 16 16

50 50 55 55

75.0 77.5 80.0 82.5

70.0 72.5 75.0 77.5

TEA 2560

60

20

100

155.0

150.0

TEA 2532 TEA 2533 TEA 2534 TEA 2535

32 33 34 35

16 16 16 16

55 55 55 60

85.0 87.5 90.0 92.5

80.0 82.5 85.0 87.5

TEA 2536 TEA 2537 TEA 2538 TEA 2539

36 37 38 39

16 16 16 16

60 60 60 60

95.0 97.5 100.0 102.5

90.0 92.5 95.0 97.5

TEA 2540 TEA 2541 TEA 2542 TEA 2543

40 41 42 43

20 20 20 20

70 70 70 70

105.0 107.5 110.0 112.5

100.0 102.5 105.0 107.5

Part No.

No. of Teeth

Drilled Hole BH 8

TEA 2512 TEA 2513 TEA 2514 TEA 2515

12 13 14 15

10 10 10 10

22 25 28 30

35.0 37.5 40.0 42.5

TEA 2516 TEA 2517 TEA 2518 TEA 2519

16 17 18 19

12 12 12 12

32 35 35 35

TEA 2520 TEA 2521 TEA 2522 TEA 2523

20 21 22 23

14 14 14 14

TEA 2524 TEA 2525 TEA 2526 TEA 2527

24 25 26 27

TEA 2528 TEA 2529 TEA 2530 TEA 2531

Hub Outside Pitch Diam. Diam. Diam. d dk do

Larger gears are available as hubless version please see page 7, (some sizes from stock). Larger gears with hubs are available from our SNB range - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.

Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. Our entire SNB range of steel spur gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

4


Metric Spur Gears Module 3 & Module 4 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045 30

40

tu

tu

p p

p p

p

p

q

dk do

q

BH8 d

dk do

BH8 d

p

p

q

q

q

q

q

q

50

t

Module 3

60

t

Module 4

Pitch 9.4248 Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do

t

t

Pitch 12.5664

Part No.

No. of Teeth

36 39 42 45

TEA 4012 TEA 4013 TEA 4014 TEA 4015

12 13 14 15

14 14 14 14

35 40 45 45

56 60 64 68

48 52 56 60

54 57 60 63

48 51 54 57

TEA 4016 TEA 4017 TEA 4018 TEA 4019

16 17 18 19

15 15 15 15

50 50 50 60

72 76 80 84

64 68 72 76

45 45 50 50

66 69 72 75

60 63 66 69

TEA 4020 TEA 4021 TEA 4022 TEA 4023

20 21 22 23

15 20 20 20

60 70 70 75

88 92 96 100

80 84 88 92

16 16 16 16

50 60 60 60

78 81 84 87

72 75 78 81

TEA 4024 TEA 4025 TEA 4026 TEA 4027

24 25 26 27

20 20 20 20

75 75 75 75

104 108 112 116

96 100 104 108

28 29 30 31

16 16 16 20

60 60 60 70

90 93 96 99

84 87 90 93

TEA 4028 TEA 4029 TEA 4030 TEA 4031

28 29 30 31

20 20 20 20

75 75 75 80

120 124 128 132

112 116 120 124

TEA 3032 TEA 3033 TEA 3034 TEA 3035

32 33 34 35

20 20 20 20

70 70 70 70

102 105 108 111

96 99 102 105

TEA 4032 TEA 4033 TEA 4034 TEA 4035

32 33 34 35

20 20 20 20

80 80 80 80

136 140 144 148

128 132 136 140

TEA 3036 TEA 3037 TEA 3038 TEA 3039

36 37 38 39

20 20 20 20

70 80 80 80

114 117 120 123

108 111 114 117

TEA 4036

36

20

80

152

144

TEA 3040 TEA 3041 TEA 3042 TEA 3043

40 41 42 43

20 20 20 20

80 90 90 90

126 129 132 135

120 123 126 129

TEA 3044 TEA 3045 TEA 3046 TEA 3047

44 45 46 47

20 20 20 20

90 90 90 90

138 141 144 147

132 135 138 141

TEA 3048

48

20

100

150

144

Part No.

No. of Teeth

TEA 3012 TEA 3013 TEA 3014 TEA 3015

12 13 14 15

12 12 12 12

25 25 30 35

42 45 48 51

TEA 3016 TEA 3017 TEA 3018 TEA 3019

16 17 18 19

15 15 15 15

38 42 45 45

TEA 3020 TEA 3021 TEA 3022 TEA 3023

20 21 22 23

15 15 15 15

TEA 3024 TEA 3025 TEA 3026 TEA 3027

24 25 26 27

TEA 3028 TEA 3029 TEA 3030 TEA 3031

Drilled Hub Outside Pitch Hole Diam. Diam. Diam. BH8 d dk do

Larger gears without hubs are available, please see page 8. Larger gears with hubs are available from our SNB range - please visit our web site www.tea.net.au for specifications.

Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. The entire range of SNB steel spur gears is still available, please visit our website for specifications. www.tea.net.au All specificationss are subject to change without notice.

5


Metric Spur Gears Modules 5, 6 & 8 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045 Module 5

50

tu

p p

p

q

BH8 d

dk do

p

q

q

q

75

t

t

Pitch 15.7080

Part No.

No. of Teeth

TEA5012 TEA5013 TEA5014 TEA5015

12 13 14 15

16 16 20 20

45 50 55 60

70 75 80 85

60 65 70 75

TEA5016 TEA5017 TEA5018 TEA5019

16 17 18 19

20 20 20 20

65 70 70 70

90 95 100 105

80 85 90 95

TEA5020 TEA5021 TEA5022 TEA5023 TEA5024 TEA5025 TEA5026 TEA5027

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25

80 80 80 90 90 90 100 100

110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145

100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135

TEA5028 TEA5029 TEA5030

28 29 30

25 25 25

100 100 100

150 155 160

140 145 150

Module 6 60

tu

Drilled Hub Hole Diam. BH8 d

Outside Diam. dk

Pitch Diam. do

Pitch 18.8496

Part No.

No. of Teeth

Drilled Hole BH8

Hub Diam. d

Outside Diam. dk

Pitch Diam. do

TEA6012 TEA6013 TEA6015 TEA6016

12 13 15 16

20 20 20 20

54 60 70 75

84 90 102 108

72 78 90 96

TEA6018 TEA6020 TEA6024 TEA6025

18 20 24 25

20 20 25 25

80 90 110 110

120 132 156 162

108 120 144 150

p p

p

q

dk do

BH8 d p

2t q

q

q

80

t

t

Module 8 60

tu

Pitch 25.133

Part No.

No. of Teeth

Drilled Hole BH8

Hub Diam. d

Outside Diam. dk

Pitch Diam. do

SN8015 SN8018 SN8020 SN8024

15 18 20 24

30 30 40 40

100 110 120 120

136 160 176 208

120 144 160 192

SN8030 SN8036 SN8040

30 36 40

40 50 50

160 160 180

256 304 336

240 288 320

p p

p

q

dk do

BH8 d p

q

q

q

85

t

t

Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance.

Larger gears for Modules 5 & 6 are available as hubless gears please see page 8. Larger gears for Modules 5, 6 & 8 are available with hubs from our SNB range. The entire range of SNB spurs gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

6


Metric Spur Gears - hubless Modules 1-2.5

Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045 17

15

tu

tu

p p

p p

q

q

dk do

dk do

BH8

BH8 p

p

q

q

Module 1 Part No.

q

q

Module 1.5

Pitch 3.1416 No. Drilled Outside of Hole Diam. Teeth BH8 dk

Pitch Diam. do

TEA1072NH TEA1075NH TEA1076NH TEA1080NH

72 75 76 80

12 12 12 12

74 77 78 82

72 75 76 80

TEA1085NH TEA1090NH TEA1095NH TEA10100NH

85 90 95 100

12 12 12 12

87 92 97 102

85 90 95 100

TEA10110NH TEA10114NH TEA10120NH TEA10127NH

110 114 120 127

12 12 12 12

112 116 122 129

110 114 120 127

Part No. TEA1572NH TEA1575NH TEA1576NH TEA1580NH

Pitch 4.7124

No. Drilled Outside of Hole Diam. Teeth BH8 dk

Pitch Diam. do

72 75 76 80

20 20 20 20

110.0 115.5 117.0 123.0

108.0 112.5 114.0 120.0

85 90 95 100

20 20 20 20

130.5 138.0 145.5 153.0

127.5 135.0 142.5 150.0

110 114 120 127

20 20 20 20

168.0 174.0 183.0 193.5

165.0 171.0 180.0 190.5

a

TEA1585NH TEA1590NH TEA1595NH TEA15100NH a

TEA15110NH TEA15114NH TEA15120NH TEA15127NH

25

20

tu

tu

p p

p p

q

q

dk do

dk do

BH8

BH8 p

p

q

q

q

q

Module 2 Part No. TEA2072NH TEA2075NH TEA2076NH TEA2080NH

Module 2.5

Pitch 6.2832 No. Drilled Outside of Hole Diam. Teeth B8 dk H

Pitch Diam. do

72 75 76 80

20 20 20 20

148 154 156 164

144 150 152 160

85 90 95 100

20 20 20 20

174 184 194 204

170 180 190 200

110 114 120 127

20 20 20 20

224 232 244 258

220 228 240 254

Part No. TEA2565NH TEA2570NH TEA2572NH TEA2575NH TEA2576NH TEA2580NH TEA2585NH TEA2590NH

H

Outside Diam. dk

Pitch Diam. do

65 70 72 75

20 20 20 20

167.5 180.0 185.0 192.5

162.5 175.0 180.0 187.5

76 80 85 90

20 25 25 25

195.0 205.0 217.5 230.0

190.0 200.0 212.5 225.0

95 100 110 114

25 25 25 25

242.5 255.0 280.0 290.0

237.5 250.0 275.0 285.0

120 127

25 25

305.0 322.5

300.0 317.5

a

a

TEA20110NH TEA20114NH TEA20120NH TEA20127NH

No. Drilled of Hole Teeth B8

a

a

TEA2085NH TEA2090NH TEA2095NH TEA20100NH

Pitch 7.8540

TEA2595NH TEA25100NH TEA25110NH TEA25114NH a

TEA25120NH TEA25127NH

Notes:

All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. The entire range of SNB spurs gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

7


Metric Spur Gears - hubless

Part No.

Pitch Diam. do

No. of Teeth

Part No.

TEA3050NH TEA3052NH TEA3055NH TEA3057NH

50 52 55 57

25 25 25 25

156 162 171 177

150 156 165 171

TEA4038NH TEA4040NH TEA4045NH TEA4048NH

TEA3060NH TEA3065NH TEA3070NH TEA3072NH

60 65 70 72

25 25 25 25

186 201 216 222

180 195 210 216

TEA3075NH TEA3076NH TEA3080NH TEA3085NH

75 76 80 85

25 25 25 25

231 234 246 261

225 228 240 255

TEA3090NH TEA3095NH TEA30100NH TEA30110NH

90 95 100 110

25 25 25 25

276 291 306 336

270 285 300 330

q

H8

q

Module 4 Pitch 12.5664

B

p

q

tu

p p

do dk

No. Drilled Outside of Hole Diam. Teeth BH8 dk

40

q

H8

p

q

Module 3 Pitch 9.4248

B

Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Steel AS1443-1994 1045-AISI C1045

q

30

p p

tu

Modules 3-6

do dk

Drilled Outside Hole Diam. BH8 dk

Pitch Diam. do

38 40 45 48

25 25 25 25

160 168 188 200

152 160 180 192

TEA4050NH TEA4052NH TEA4055NH TEA4057NH

50 52 55 57

25 25 25 25

208 216 228 236

200 208 220 228

TEA4060NH TEA4065NH TEA4070NH TEA4075NH

60 65 70 75

25 25 25 25

248 268 288 308

240 260 280 300

76 80 85 90

25 25 25 25

312 328 348 368

304 320 340 360

95 100 110 114

25 25 25 25

388 408 448 464

380 400 440 456

a

a

342 360 381

Outside Diam. dk

Pitch Diam. do

a

TEA5032NH TEA5035NH TEA5038NH TEA5040NH

50

H8

60

tu

p p

q

Part No.

No. Drilled of Hole Teeth BH8

B

q

Module 5 Pitch 15.7080

p

348 366 387

q

30 30 30

tu

114 120 127

a

TEA4095NH TEA40100NH TEA40110NH TEA40114NH

p p

TEA30114NH TEA30120NH TEA30127NH

TEA4076NH TEA4080NH TEA4085NH TEA4090NH

do dk

32 35 38 40

25 25 30 30

170 185 200 210

160 175 190 200

45 48 50 52

30 30 30 30

235 250 260 270

225 240 250 260

55 57 60 65

30 30 30 30

285 295 310 335

275 285 300 325

a

70 75 76 80

30 30 30 30

360 385 390 410

350 375 380 400

a

85 90 95 100

30 30 30 30

435 460 485 510

425 450 475 500

110 114

30 30

560 580

550 570

q

dk do

B

H8

p

a

TEA5045NH TEA5048NH TEA5050NH TEA5052NH

Module 6 Pitch 18.8496

a

TEA5055NH TEA5057NH TEA5060NH TEA5065NH

Part No. TEA6028NH TEA6030NH TEA6032NH TEA6035NH

a

TEA5070NH TEA5075NH TEA5076NH TEA5080NH

TEA6038NH TEA6040NH

a

TEA5085NH TEA5090NH TEA5095NH TEA50100NH a

TEA50110NH TEA50114NH

No. Drilled of Hole Teeth BH8

q

q

Outside Diam. dk

Pitch Diam. do

28 30 32 35

25 25 25 25

180 192 204 222

168 180 192 210

38 40

25 25

240 252

220 240

Notes: All dimensions are in mm. 1045 steel is heat treatable for higher performance. The entire range of SNB spurs gears with hubs is still available, please visit our website for full specifications. www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

8


Metric Spur Gears Modules 1-4

Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Stainless Steel 1.4305 AS2837-1986-303 AISI 303

b

tu

p p

p

q

dk do

BH8 N p

q

q

q

H

tu

F

Module

Part No.

No. of Teeth

1

SNE1012 SNE1015 SNE1020 SNE1025 SNE1030 SNE1040

12 15 20 25 30 40

5 6 8 8 8 10

9 12 17 22 25 30

14 17 22 27 32 42

12 15 20 25 30 40

16 16 16 16 16 16

8 8 8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8 8 8

0.15 0.23 0.48 0.7 1.0 1.7

SNE1512 SNE1515 SNE1520 SNE1525 SNE1530 SNE1540

12 15 20 25 30 40

6 8 8 10 10 12

13 18 25 30 35 45

21 25.5 33 40.5 48 63

18 22.5 30 37.5 45 60

24 24 24 24 24 24

12 12 12 12 12 12

12 12 12 12 12 12

0.5 0.9 1.7 2.6 3.5 5.8

SNE2012 SNE2015 SNE2020 SNE2025 SNE2030 SNE2040

12 15 20 25 30 40

10 12 15 15 15 20

18 24 33 43 50 60

28 34 44 54 64 84

24 30 40 50 60 80

30 30 27 30 30 30

14 14 14 14 14 14

16 16 16 16 16 16

1.3 2.1 4.0 6.3 8.6 14.6

SNE2512 SNE2515 SNE2520 SNE2525 SNE2530 SNE2540

12 15 20 25 30 40

10 15 15 15 15 20

23 30 40 55 65 80

35 42.5 55 67.5 80 105

30 37.5 50 62.5 75 100

37 37 37 37 37 37

17 17 17 17 17 17

20 20 20 20 20 20

2.2 4.0 7.6 11.7 16.5 28.7

SNE3012 SNE3015 SNE3020 SNE3025 SNE3030 SNE3040

12 15 20 25 30 40

15 15 15 15 20 20

25 35 45 60 75 100

42 51 66 81 96 126

36 45 60 75 90 120

43 43 43 43 43 43

19 19 19 19 19 19

24 24 24 24 24 24

4.9 7.3 13.3 20.4 30.1 52.4

SNE4012 SNE4015 SNE4020 Pitch 12.5664 SNE4025 SNE4030 SNE4040

12 15 20 25 30 40

20 20 20 20 20 20

35 45 65 75 80 100

56 68 88 108 128 168

48 60 80 100 120 160

55 55 52 55 55 55

25 23 23 23 23 23

32 32 32 32 32 32

12.2 16.8 30.2 46.2 65.8 115.4

Pitch 3.1416

1.5 Pitch 4.7124

2 Pitch 6.2832

2.5 Pitch 7.8540

3 Pitch 9.4248

4

Drilled Hole BH8

t

t

Hub Outside Diam. Diam. N Dk

Pitch Diam. Do

Length Overall F

H

Face Width b

Torque Md (Nm)

Notes: All measurements are in mm unless otherwise stated. The listed torques: Md (Nm) are based on a rotation speed of 200rpm and refer to a combination of two pinions of the corresponding type. SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for Hertzian stress) for continuous operation. 1 Nm = 0.737561 lbs.f.ft. All specifications are subject to change without notice. TEA type gear dimensions according to drawings.

9


Metric Spur Gears Module 0.5 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Injection Moulded Acetal copolymer (POM) Module 0.5 No. of Teeth

Hole B

Pitch Diam. Do

Pitch 1.57

Outside Diam. Dk

Hub Diam. N

E

Length Overall F

c

Face Width b

Part No.

12 13 14 15

2 2 2 3

6 6.5 7 7.5

7 7.5 8 8.5

4 4 5 6

7 7 7 10

3 3 3 3

SH 0512 SH 0513 SH 0514 SH 0515

16 17 18 19

3 3 4 4

8 8.5 9 9.5

9 9.5 10 10.5

6 6 8 8

10 10 10 10

3 3 3 3

SH 0516 SH 0517 SH 0518 SH 0519

20 21 22 23

4 4 4 4

10 10.5 11 11.5

11 11.5 12 12.5

8 8 10 10

10 10 10 10

3 3 3 3

SH 0520 SH 0521 SH 0522 SH 0523

24 25 26 27

4 4 4 4

12 12.5 13 13.5

13 13.5 14 14.5

10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10

3 3 3 3

SH 0524 SH 0525 SH 0526 SH 0527

28 30 32 35

4 4 4 4

14 15 16 17.5

15 16 17 18.5

10 12 12 12

10 10 10 10

3 3 3 3

SH 0528 SH 0530 SH 0532 SH 0535

36 38 40 42

4 4 4 4

18 19 20 21

19 20 21 22

12 12 12 12

14.5 16

10 10 10 10

2 2

3 3 3 3

SH 0536 SH 0538 SH 0540 SH 0542

45 48 50 52

4 6 6 6

22.5 24 25 26

23.5 25 26 27

12 15 15 15

18.5 19 20 21

10 10 10 10

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

SH 0545 SH 0548 SH 0550 SH 0552

54 55 56 60

6 6 6 6

27 27.5 28 30

28 28.5 29 31

15 15 15 15

22 23 23 24

10 10 10 10

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

SH 0554 SH 0555 SH 0556 SH 0560

64 65 70 72

6 6 6 6

32 32.5 35 36

33 33.5 36 37

15 15 15 15

25 27 29 30

10 10 10 10

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

SH 0564 SH 0565 SH 0570 SH 0572

75 80 90 96

6 6 6 6

37.5 40 45 48

38.5 41 46 49

15 15 15 15

33 36 39 42

10 10 10 10

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

SH 0575 SH 0580 SH 0590 SH 0596

100 120

6 6

50 60

51 61

15 15

44 54

10 10

2 2

3 3

SH05100 SH05120

All specificatsions are subject to change without notice.

Module 0.7

Dimensions in mm

Pitch = 2.199mm - also available - Please contact T.E.A.

10


Metric Spur Gears Module 1 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Injection Moulded Acetal copolymer (POM) Module 1 Pitch 3.1416 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth

Hole B

Pitch Diam. Do

Outside Diam. Dk

Hub Diam. N

c

Face Width b

Part No.

12 13 14 15

4 4 4 4

12 13 14 15

14 15 16 17

9 9 9 9

17 17 17 17

9 9 9 9

SH 1012 SH 1013 SH 1014 SH 1015

16 17 18 19

4 4 4 4

16 17 18 19

18 19 20 21

9 9 9 9

13.5 13.5

17 17 17 17

6 6

9 9 9 9

SH 1016 SH 1017 SH 1018 SH 1019

20 21 22 23

4 5 5 5

20 21 22 23

22 23 24 25

9 12 12 12

13.5 16 16 16

17 17 17 17

6 6 6 6

9 9 9 9

SH 1020 SH 1021 SH 1022 SH 1023

24 25 26 27

6 6 6 6

24 25 26 27

26 27 28 29

15 15 15 15

19 19 19 19

18 18 18 18

6 6 6 6

9 9 9 9

SH 1024 SH 1025 SH 1026 SH 1027

28 30 32 35

6 6 6 8

28 30 32 35

30 32 34 37

15 15 18 18

22 22 24.5 24.5

18 18 18 18

6 6 4.6 4.6

9 9 9 9

SH 1028 SH 1030 SH 1032 SH 1035

36 38 40 42

8 8 8 8

36 38 40 42

38 40 42 44

18 18 18 18

28 28 28 28

18 18 18 18

4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6

9 9 9 9

SH 1036 SH 1038 SH 1040 SH 1042

45 48 50 52

8 8 8 8

45 48 50 52

47 50 52 54

18 18 18 21

37 37 37 47

18 18 18 18

4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6

9 9 9 9

SH 1045 SH 1048 SH 1050 SH 1052

54 55 56 58

8 8 8 8

54 55 56 58

56 57 58 60

21 21 21 21

47 47 47 58

18 18 18 18

4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6

9 9 9 9

SH 1054 SH 1055 SH 1056 SH 1058

60 64 65 70

8 10 10 10

60 64 65 70

62 66 67 72

21 21 21 21

47 57 57 57

18 18 18 18

4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6

9 9 9 9

SH 1060 SH 1064 SH 1065 SH 1070

72 75 80 85

10 10 10 10

72 75 80 85

74 77 82 87

21 21 21 21

67 67 67 77.9

18 18 18 18

4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6

9 9 9 9

SH 1072 SH 1075 SH 1080 SH 1085

90 100 110 120

10 12 12 12

90 100 110 120

92 102 112 122

21 24 24 24

77 87 97 107

18 18 18 18

4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6

9 9 9 9

SH 1090 SH10100 SH10110 SH10120

130 140

12 12

130 140

132 142

24 24

115 125

18 18

4.6 4.6

9 9

SH10130 SH10140

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Module 1.25

E

Length Overall F

Pitch = 3.927mm - also available - Please contact T.E.A.

11


Metric Spur Gears Module 1.5 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Injection Moulded Acetal copolymer (POM) Module 1.5 Pitch 4.7124 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth

Hole B

Pitch Diam. Do

Outside Diam. Dk

Hub Diam. N

12 13 14 15

6 6 6 6

18 19.5 21 22.5

21 22.5 24 25.5

14 14 14 14

16 17 18 19

6 6 8 8

24 25.5 27 28.5

27 28.5 30 31.5

14 14 17 17

20 21 22 23

8 8 8 8

30 31.5 33 34.5

33 34.5 36 37.5

17 17 17 17

23 23 23

23 23 23 23

24 25 26 27

8 8 8 8

36 37.5 39 40.5

39 40.5 42 43.5

19 19 19 19

27 27 27 27

28 30 32 35

8 10 10 10

42 45 48 52.5

45 48 51 55.5

19 24 24 24

36 38 40 42

10 10 10 10

54 57 60 63

57 60 63 66

45 48 50 52

10 10 12 12

67.5 72 75 78

54 55 60 70

12 12 12 14

80 90

14 14

Module 2

Face Width b

Part No.

23 23 23 23

12 12 12 12

SH 1512 SH 1513 SH 1514 SH 1515

23 23 23 23

12 12 12 12

SH 1516 SH 1517 SH 1518 SH 1519

5 5 5

12 12 12 12

SH 1520 SH 1521 SH 1522 SH 1523

23 23 23 23

5 5 5 5

12 12 12 12

SH 1524 SH 1525 SH 1526 SH 1527

27 35 35 43

23 23 23 23

5 5 5 5

12 12 12 12

SH 1528 SH 1530 SH 1532 SH 1535

24 24 24 24

43 43 50 50

23 23 23 23

5 5 5 5

12 12 12 12

SH 1536 SH 1538 SH 1540 SH 1542

70.5 75 78 81

24 24 27 27

50 50 65 65

23 23 23 23

5 5 5 5

12 12 12 12

SH 1545 SH 1548 SH 1550 SH 1552

81 82.5 90 105

84 85.5 93 108

27 27 27 30

65 65 65 90

23 23 23 23

5 5 5 5

12 12 12 12

SH 1554 SH 1555 SH 1560 SH 1570

120 135

123 138

30 30

106 118

23 23

5 5

12 12

SH 1580 SH 1590

c

Face Width b

Part No.

15 15 15 15

SH 2012 SH 2013 SH 2014 SH 2015

15 15 15 15

SH 2016 SH 2017 SH 2018 SH 2019

E

Length Overall F

c

Module 2 Pitch 6.2832 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth

Hole B

Pitch Diam. Do

Outside Diam. Dk

Hub Diam. N

12 13 14 15

8 8 8 8

24 26 28 30

28 30 32 34

18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5

16 17 18 19

8 8 8 8

32 34 36 38

36 38 40 42

17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5

Note: Module 2 to 70 teeth continued on page 13. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

12

E

Length Overall F 27 27 27 27

23 25 26 26

27 27 27 27

6 6 6 6


Metric Spur Gears Module 2 Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Injection Moulded Acetal copolymer (POM) Module 2 Pitch 6.2832 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth

Hole B

Pitch Diam. Do

Outside Diam. Dk

Hub Diam. N

E

Length Overall F

c

Face Width b

Part No.

20 21 22 23

10 10 10 10

40 42 44 46

44 46 48 50

20.5 20.5 20.5 20.5

29 29 29 36

27 27 27 27

6 6 6 6

15 15 15 15

SH 2020 SH 2021 SH 2022 SH 2023

24 25 26 27

10 10 10 10

48 50 52 54

52 54 56 58

24 24 24 24

36 36 40 40

27 27 27 27

6 6 6 6

15 15 15 15

SH 2024 SH 2025 SH 2026 SH 2027

28 30 32 35

10 10 10 12

56 60 64 70

60 64 68 74

24 24 26 26

40 46 46 56

27 27 27 27

6 6 6 6

15 15 15 15

SH 2028 SH 2030 SH 2032 SH 2035

36 38 40 42

12 12 12 12

72 76 80 84

76 80 84 88

26 26 26 26

56 64 64 64

27 27 27 27

6 6 6 6

15 15 15 15

SH 2036 SH 2038 SH 2040 SH 2042

45 48 50 55

14 14 14 14

90 96 100 110

94 100 104 114

30 30 30 30

70 76 80 90

27 27 27 27

6 6 6 6

15 15 15 15

SH 2045 SH 2048 SH 2050 SH 2055

60 70

14 14

120 140

124 144

30 30

100 110

27 27

6 6

15 15

SH 2060 SH 2070

Note: see page 12 for Module 2 12-19 teeth

Module 3

Module 3 Pitch 9.4248 Dimensions in mm No. of Teeth

Hole B

Pitch Diam. Do

Outside Diam. Dk

Hub Diam. N

E

Length Overall F

c

Face Width b

12 13 14 15

12 12 12 12

36 39 42 45

42 45 48 51

24 24 24 24

30

34 34 34 34

Part No.

8

19 19 19 19

SH 3012 SH 3013 SH 3014 SH 3015

16 17 18 19

12 12 12 12

48 51 54 57

54 57 60 63

24 24 24 24

30 30 38 38

34 34 34 34

8 8 8 8

19 19 19 19

SH 3016 SH 3017 SH 3018 SH 3019

20 21 22 23

12 12 12 12

60 63 66 69

66 69 72 75

24 24 24 24

38 45 45 52

34 34 34 34

8 8 8 8

19 19 19 19

SH 3020 SH 3021 SH 3022 SH 3023

24 25 26 27

12 14 14 14

72 75 78 81

78 81 84 87

24 28 28 28

52 58 58 58

34 34 34 34

8 8 8 8

19 19 19 19

SH 3024 SH 3025 SH 3026 SH 3027

28 30 32 33

14 14 16 16

84 90 96 99

90 96 102 105

28 28 32 32

68 68 71 71

34 34 34 34

8 8 8 8

19 19 19 19

SH 3028 SH 3030 SH 3032 SH 3033

35 38 40 45

16 16 16 16

105 114 120 135

111 120 126 141

32 32 32 32

80 89 95 110

34 34 34 34

8 8 8 8

19 19 19 19

SH 3035 SH 3038 SH 3040 SH 3045

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

13


Metric Racks Actual Tooth Sizes Pictured

Module 0.5 Pitch 1.57 Module 1.0 Pitch 3.1416 Module 1.5 Pitch 4.7124

Module 2.0 Pitch 6.2832

Module 2.5 Pitch 7.8540

Module 3.0 Pitch 9.4248 Module 4.0 Pitch 12.5664

Module 5.0 Pitch 15.7080

Module 6.0 Pitch 18.8496

14


Metric Racks Pitch & Diagrams of actual size see page 14 Modules 1-8

Pressure Angle 20° Material: Steel - unhardened CK45 - AS1443-1994-1045 C40 - AS1443-AISI1040

Dimensions in mm

hh11

15 15 15

15 15 15

14 (0-0.2) 14 14

500 1000 2000

1.6 (3.6)

BZ 10/500 BZ 10/1000 BZ 10/2000

17 17 17

17 17 17

15.5(0-0.25) 15.5 15.5

500 1000 2000

2.1 (4.6)

BZ 15/500 BZ 15/1000 BZ 15/2000

20 20 20

20 20 20

18 (0-0.25) 18 18

500 1000 2000

2.8 (6.2)

BZ 20/500 BZ 20/1000 BZ 20/2000

25 25 25

25 25 25

22.5 22.5 22.5

500 1000 2000

4.4 (9.7)

BZ 25/500 BZ 25/1000 BZ 25/2000

30 30 30

30 30 30

27 (0-0.3) 27 27

500 1000 2000

6.3 (13.9)

BZ 30/500 BZ 30/1000 BZ 30/2000

40 40 40

40 40 40

36 (0-0.3) 36 36

500 1000 2000

11.2 (24.7)

BZ 40/500 BZ 40/1000 BZ 40/2000

50 50 50

50 50 50

45 (0-0.35) 45 45

500 1000 2000

15.9 (35.1)

BZ 50/500 BZ 50/1000 BZ 50/2000

6

60 60

60 60

54 (0-0.4) 54

1000 2000

24.3 (53.6)

BZ 60/1000 BZ 60/2000

8

80 80

80 80

72 (0-0.5) 72

1000 2000

42.7 (94.2)

BZ 80/1000 BZ 80/2000

Module 1

1.5

L

2

2.5

3

b h

4

5

do

Approx. Weight per mtr. kg (lbs)

Face Width bh11

Height +10

do

(tolerance)

Length 0 L (mm)

Part No.

Notes: 3 mtr. lengths available on request. Machined ends for continuous mounting available. Pitch error ±0.1mm/mtr 5mm cutting wastage - please state exact length required. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Modules 1-3 Pressure Angle 20° Material: Stainless Steel Milled AS2837-1986-303 AISI 303

L

Dimensions in mm

Module

b h

do

1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5

Face Width bh11

Height hh11

8 12 16 20 24 30 40

8 12 16 20 24 30 40

do

Old P/N Length L (mm)

Old Part No.

New P/N 500mm

New P/N 1000mm

7 10.5 14 17.5 21 26 35

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

ZE 10/1000 ZE 15/1000 ZE 20/1000 ZE 25/1000 ZE 30/1000 ZE 40/1000 ZE 50/1000

130506 130516 130526 130536 130546 130556 130566

130507 130517 130527 130537 130547 130557 130567

Notes: Dimensions the same as above Steel Rack available on request. Longer lengths available on request. Cumulative pitch error 0.15 / 1000mm All specifications are subject to change without notice.

15


Metric Racks - Round Profile Modules 1-6

Pressure Angle 20° Material: Steel C40h7 AS1443-1040 Dimensions in mm Module

Dh7

do

1

10 10 10

9 9 9

500 1000 2000

0.55 (1.21)

RZ 10/500 RZ 10/1000 RZ 10/2000

15 15 15

13.5 13.5 13.5

500 1000 2000

1.33 (2.94)

RZ 15/500 RZ 15/1000 RZ 15/2000

20 20 20

18 18 18

500 1000 2000

2.3 (5.07)

RZ 20/500 RZ 20/1000 RZ 20/2000

25 25 25

22.5 22.5 22.5

500 1000 2000

3.38 (7.46)

RZ 25/500 RZ 25/1000 RZ 25/2000

30 30 30

27 27 27

500 1000 2000

5.12 (11.29)

RZ 30/500 RZ 30/1000 RZ 30/2000

40 40 40

36 36 36

500 1000 2000

9.09 (20.04)

RZ 40/500 RZ 40/1000 RZ 40/2000

50 50 50

45 45 45

500 1000 2000

13.54 (29.85)

RZ 50/500 RZ 50/1000 RZ 50/2000

50 50

44 44

1000 2000

1.5

2

L

2.5

3

4 Dh7

do

Length L (mm)+100

Approx. Weight per mtr. kg (lbs).

5

6

Pitch error < ± 0.005mm. Added up errors < ± 0.1mm on 1000mm 5mm cutting wastage, please state exact length required. Round rack is also available in 3 mtr lengths on request. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

Modules 1-3

Pressure Angle 20° Material: Stainless Steel AS2837-1986-303-4305 AISI 303

L

Dh7

do

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Also available in Module 4 & 5.

16

Part No.

RZ 60/1000 RZ 60/2000


Metric Racks Modules 0.5 - 3

Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Plastic Hostaform C Acetal copolymer (POM) Dimensions in mm Module

bh11

hh11

0.5 1 1.5 2 3

4 9 12 15.4 19.4

4.5 9 12 11 15

do

L (mm)

Part No.

4 8 10.5 9 12

250 250 250 250 250

ZH 0525 ZH 1025 ZH 1525 ZH 2025 ZH 3025

Material: Plastic Machined Polyamide L

Dimensions in mm Module

bh11

hh11

do

L (mm)

Part No.

1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5

15 17 20 25 30 40 50

15 17 20 25 30 40 50

14 15.5 18 22.5 27 36 45

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

ZP 10/15 ZP 15/17 ZP 20/20 ZP 25/25 ZP 30/30 ZP 40/40 ZP 50/50

b h

Adjacent pitch error (mm) 0.008. Cumulative pitch error (1000mm) 0.15. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

do

Metric Helical Racks & Gears Modules 0.3 & 0.5

Pressure Angle 20째 Material: Brass 20o b

L

h

Helical Rack Dimensions in mm Module

b

h

L

Part No.

0.3 0.5

5 10

3 4

250 250

SN 03/250 MS SN 05/250 MS

Helical Gear Dimensions in mm 20

o

b

No. of Teeth

0.3

0.5

tu

p p

Module p

q

dk do

BH8 N p

q

qq

t

L

t

Hole. BH7

Hub Diam. N

Outside Diam. Dk

Pitch Diam do

12 15 18 20 24 30

2 2 3 3 3 3

3 4 5 6 7 9

4.4 5.3 6.3 6.9 8.2 10.1

18 22 25 30 34

5 6 6 8 8

8 10 12 14 16

10.5 12.7 14.2 16.9 19.0

All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

17

L

Face Width b

Part No.

3.8 4.7 5.7 6.3 7.6 9.5

9 9 9 9 9 10

5 5 5 5 5 5

SN0312MS SN0315MS SN0318MS SN0320MS SN0324MS SN0330MS

9.5 11.7 13.2 15.9 18.0

16 16 16 16 16

10 10 10 10 10

SN0518MS SN0522MS SN0525MS SN0530MS SN0534MS


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:1

Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4 On request: 303 Stainless Steel Brass - Modules 0.5, 0.75, 1 Zinc die-cast

Ratio 1:1 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z Part No.

1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0

16 16 16 16

8 10 13 16

19 22 30 35

26.1 34.8 43.5 52.2

9.5 9.5 10.0 12.5

15.4 16.4 18.3 22.6

16.9 18.9 21.3 26.1

24 28 33 40

5.9 8.6 10.1 12.5

K1100 K1101 K1102 K1103

3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0

16 16 16 16

19 22 25 27

40 45 50 54

60.1 69.7 78.4 87.1

15.0 17.5 19.5 21.0

26.6 30.3 34.7 37.6

30.1 35.5 40.2 43.6

47 54 61 67

13.2 16.4 18.7 19.3

K1104 K1105 K1106 K1107

5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

19 22 26 30

30 33 36 40

60 66 72 80

102.1 117.1 137.1 157.1

23.5 24.0 25.0 28.0

43.0 46.0 50.0 57.0

49.0 52.0 56.0 63.0

77 85 96 109

24.4 27.9 32.2 37.8

K1108 K1109 K1110 K1111

Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.

100

300

500

700

1000

1500

2000

2500

K1100 K1101 K1102 K1103

0.014 0.036 0.073 0.110

0.073 0.147 0.220 0.368

0.110 0.220 0.368 0.662

0.257 0.368 0.662 0.846

0.300 0.478 0.772 1.177

0.368 0.700 1.030 1.472

0.404 0.736 1.777 1.803

0.441 0.795 1.324 2.060

K1104 K1105 K1106 K1107

0.147 0.294 0.368 0.441

0.515 0.809 1.104 1.508

0.846 1.435 1.766 2.502

1.324 1.840 2.355 3.385

1.766 2.384 3.238 4.636

2.281 3.312 4.416 5.704

2.760 3.750

K1108 K1109 K1110 K1111

0.809 1.777 1.435 1.913

2.134 2.907 3.753 5.004

3.312 4.452 5.888 7.654

4.452 5.888 7.654 9.862

5.851 7.360 9.494 12.430

P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n

Performance: hardened: 2.5 x value indicated nitrided: 1.5 x value indicated

SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

18


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:1.25 Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4

Ratio 1:1.25 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z Part No.

1.5

16 20

10 12

20 24

26.4 31.9

9.5 10.4

15 16

16.8 19.0

26 26

6.7 6.7

K1120

2.0

16 20

12 14

26 28

35.1 42.5

10.7 13.0

18 20

20.9 23.6

33 33

8.9 8.9

K1121

2.5

16 20

14 16

32 34

43.9 53.1

9.9 14.0

20 23

22.8 26.3

38 38

11.2 11.2

K1122

3.0

16 20

16 18

36 40

52.7 63.8

9.3 16.0

22 26

25.7 29.9

44 44

13.4 13.4

K1123

3.5

16 20

20 22

44 48

61.5 74.4

12.2 19.0

27 31

30.7 35.5

52 52

15.7 15.7

K1124

4.0

16 20

22 24

50 52

70.3 85.0

12.5 21.0

30 34

33.6 39.2

58 58

17.9 17.9

K1125

4.5

16 20

25 27

54 58

79.0 95.6

17.0 24.0

35 40

39.6 45.9

67 67

20.1 20.1

K1126

5.0

16 20

28 30

56 60

87.8 106.2

19.0 28.0

39 45

44.5 51.5

75 75

22.4 22.4

K1127

Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.

100

300

500

700

1000

1500

2000

2500

K1120 K1121 K1122 K1123

0.014 0.095 0.121 0.146

0.042 0.169 0.191 0.294

0.069 0.184 0.331 0.552

0.094 0.242 0.441 0.735

0.131 0.294 0.566 0.920

0.185 0.404 0.846 1.288

0.232 0.515 1.030 1.619

0.368 0.653 1.236 1.840

K1124 K1125 K1126 K1127

0.192 0.294 0.331 0.552

0.515 0.736 1.104 1.619

0.883 1.288 1.803 2.392

1.104 1.692 2.355 3.128

1.582 2.208 3.164 4.048

2.024 2.944 4.416 5.520

2.796 3.569

P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n

Performance: hardened: nitrided:

SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

19

2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:1.5

Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4

Ratio 1:1.5 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z Part No.

1.5

16 24

8 10

18 22

26.5 37.7

10.0 11.5

17.8 18.5

18.8 20.0

30 27

7.6 7.6

K1150

2.0

16 24

11 13

22 26

35.3 50.2

10.0 12.0

19.1 18.7

21.1 21.7

36 31

10.1 10.1

K1151

2.5

16 24

14 16

28 32

44.1 62.8

10.5 14.0

21.9 22.6

24.4 26.4

43 38

12.6 12.6

K1152

3.0

16 24

17 19

34 38

53.0 75.3

11.0 16.5

24.7 26.5

27.7 31.0

50 45

15.1 15.1

K1153

3.5

16 24

20 23

40 46

61.8 87.9

12.5 20.5

28.5 32.4

32.0 37.7

58 54

17.7 17.7

K1154

4.0

16 24

23 26

46 52

70.6 100.4

14.0 23.0

32.2 36.3

36.2 42.3

66 61

20.2 20.2

K1155

4.5

16 24

25 29

50 58

79.4 113.0

16.5 25.0

37.0 40.2

41.5 47.0

75 68

22.7 22.7

K1156

16 24

28 32

56 64

88.3 125.5

17.5 28.0

39.8 44.3

44.8 51.8

82 75

25.5 25.5

K1157

5.0

Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.

100

300

500

700

1000

1500

2000

2500

K1150 K1151 K1152 K1153

0.036 0.143 0.179 0.210

0.081 0.184 0.294 0.552

0.147 0.294 0.404 0.846

0.165 0.331 0.588 1.067

0.184 0.404 0.772 1.361

0.257 0.588 1.104 1.803

0.353 0.736 1.361 2.208

0.772 0.883 1.700 2.723

K1154 K1155 K1156 K1157

0.294 0.368 0.441 0.662

0.883 1.067 1.472 2.097

1.214 1.692 2.355 3.201

1.545 2.208 3.128 4.195

2.100 2.980 4.268 5.483

2.796 4.084 5.556 7.360

3.459 5.115

P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n

Performance: hardened: nitrided:

SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

20

2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:2

Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4

Ratio 1:2 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z Part No.

1.5

15 30

8 11

18 24

25.5 46.3

10.4 12.0

18.8 17.6

19.8 19.6

34 26

8.8 8.8

K1200

2.0

15 30

11 14

22 28

33.6 61.8

10.0 12.4

21.6 19.6

23.1 22.4

42 31

11.7 11.7

K1201

2.5

15 30

14 18

28 36

41.9 77.2

11.2 15.8

25.5 24.8

27.3 28.3

51 39

14.7 14.7

K1202

3.0

15 30

17 22

34 44

50.4 92.7

13.2 20.1

30.5 30.9

32.6 35.1

61 48

17.6 17.6

K1203

3.5

15 30

20 25

40 50

58.8 108.1

14.4 22.5

34.4 35.1

36.9 40.0

70 55

20.5 20.5

K1204

4.0

15 30

23 30

46 60

67.1 123.6

15.5 27.8

38.4 42.2

41.2 47.8

79 65

23.5 23.5

K1205

4.5

15 30

26 34

52 68

75.5 139.0

16.7 31.1

42.2 47.4

45.4 53.7

88 73

26.4 26.4

K1206

5.0

15 30

29 37

58 74

83.9 154.5

17.8 33.5

46.2 51.5

49.7 58.5

97 80

29.3 29.3

K1207

Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.

100

300

500

700

1000

1500

2000

2500

K1200 K1201 K1202 K1203

0.073 0.145 0.181 0.215

0.084 0.169 0.309 0.588

0.149 0.220 0.478 0.956

0.184 0.331 0.588 1.251

0.220 0.478 0.883 1.620

0.331 0.625 1.214 2.134

0.404 0.883 1.619 2.539

0.478 1.030 1.913 2.800

K1204 K1205 K1206 K1207

0.331 0.515 0.588 0.662

0.846 1.214 1.656 2.208

1.324 1.840 2.576 3.460

1.729 2.465 3.385 4.490

2.281 3.275 4.500 5.961

3.128 4.416 6.108 7.875

3.841 5.372

P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n

Performance: hardened: nitrided:

SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

21

2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:2.5

Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4

Ratio 1:2.5 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z Part No.

16 40

10 15

20 30

26.8 61.1

10.4 16.0

22.0 21.1

22.9 23.1

42 30

11.3 11.3

K1250

16 40

12 18

26 36

35.7 81.5

10.0 18.0

27.3 25.2

28.4 27.9

54 37

15.1 15.1

K1251

16 40

16 22

32 44

44.6 101.9

11.2 21.0

32.7 30.2

34.1 33.5

66 45

18.9 18.9

K1252

16 40

20 27

40 54

53.6 122.2

13.2 26.0

38.1 38.2

39.7 42.2

78 56

22.6 22.6

K1253

16 40

22 32

46 64

62.5 142.6

14.4 33.0

42.2 46.3

44.3 50.9

89 67

26.4 26.4

K1254

16 40

26 35

52 70

71.4 163.0

15.5 34.0

47.9 49.3

50.0 54.6

101 73

30.2 30.2

K1255

16 40

30 40

60 80

80.4 183.3

16.7 37.0

53.2 54.3

55.6 60.3

113 81

33.9 33.9

K1256

16 40

32 45

66 89

89.3 203.7

17.8 40.0

57.6 60.3

60.3 67.0

124 90

37.7 37.7

K1257

Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.

100

300

500

700

1000

1500

2000

2500

K1250 K1251 K1252 K1253

0.088 0.147 0.183 0.218

0.103 0.220 0.404 0.700

0.184 0.368 0.625 1.140

0.220 0.515 0.883 1.545

0.331 0.625 1.140 2.060

0.404 0.809 1.619 2.760

0.552 1.067 2.060 3.238

0.625 1.251 2.502

K1254 K1255 K1256 K1257

0.404 0.588 0.736 0.920

1.104 1.656 2.208 2.944

1.803 2.539 3.460 4.563

2.281 3.312 4.563 5.924

3.017 4.268 6.035 7.801

4.048 5.704 7.948

4.970

P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n

Performance: hardened: nitrided:

SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

22

2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:3 Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4

Ratio 1:3 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z Part No.

15 45

10 15

19 30

25.3 68.4

11.7 15.0

21.1 20.8

22.3 23.0

46 30

10.3 10.3

K1300

15 45

12 17

24 34

33.8 91.3

13.0 20.0

26.5 26.9

27.4 29.7

59 39

13.8 13.8

K1301

15 45

16 24

32 48

42.2 114.1

14.8 26.0

31.4 34.8

32.6 38.3

72 50

17.2 17.2

K1302

15 45

19 28

38 56

50.7 136.9

17.3 30.0

37.3 40.7

38.7 45.0

86 59

20.6 20.6

K1303

15 45

22 32

44 65

59.1 159.7

18.9 35.0

42.3 47.8

43.9 52.7

99 69

24.1 24.1

K1304

15 45

25 36

50 72

67.6 182.5

20.3 39.0

47.3 52.9

49.0 58.4

112 77

27.5 27.5

K1305

15 45

28 40

56 80

76.0 205.3

20.9 43.0

51.0 58.7

53.1 65.0

124 86

31.0 31.0

K1306

Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.

100

300

500

700

1000

1500

2000

2500

K1300 K1301 K1302 K1303

0.090 0.148 0.185 0.220

0.125 0.162 0.300 0.588

0.147 0.220 0.441 1.030

0.220 0.368 0.588 1.324

0.257 0.515 0.883 1.803

0.282 0.736 1.361 2.400

0.478 1.067 1.825 2.907

0.588 1.325 2.208

K1304 K1305 K1306

0.368 0.588 0.883

1.030 1.619 2.800

1.620 2.400 4.342

2.100 3.164 5.704

2.800 4.048 7.433

3.680 5.446 9.998

4.416

P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n

Performance: hardened: 2.5 x value indicated nitrided: 1.5 x value indicated SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

23


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:3.5

Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4

Ratio 1:3.5 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5

Bh7

N

D

16 56

10 16

20 32

26.9 84.8

16 56

14 21

28 42

16 56

17 26

16 56 16 56

H

L

F

A

Z

11.4 18.0

23.1 23.0

23.6 25.3

54 33

11.8 11.8

K1350

35.1 113.1

14.4 23.0

29.6 29.6

30.5 32.7

71 43

15.7 15.7

K1351

34 52

44.8 141.4

16.2 29.0

35.3 36.2

36.4 40.2

87 53

19.7 19.7

K1352

21 32

42 64

53.8 169.6

18.1 36.0

41.0 45.0

42.3 49.6

103 65

23.6 23.6

K1353

24 36

48 72

62.7 197.9

19.9 39.0

46.9 49.5

48.2 55.1

119 73

27.5 27.5

K1354

Part No.

Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.

100

300

500

700

1000

1500

2000

2500

K1350 K1351 K1352 K1353

0.092 0.117 0.176 0.300

0.128 0.184 0.368 0.588

0.165 0.309 0.566 1.037

0.182 0.419 0.846 1.324

0.291 0.552 1.067 1.840

0.355 0.846 1.472 2.576

0.448 1.030 1.840 3.164

0.552 1.251 2.281

K1354

1.008

1.582

2.060

2.760

3.900

P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n

Performance: hardened: nitrided:

SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

24

2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:4 Pressure Angle 20掳 Material: Steel 34 Cr 4

Ratio 1:4 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5

Bh7

N

D

15 60

10 16

20 32

25.4 90.7

15 60

12 21

24 42

15 60

15 25

15 60 15 60

H

L

F

A

Z

11.7 18.0

21.5 23.0

22.2 25.4

57 33

10.2 10.2

K1400

33.9 121.0

12.3 23.0

25.6 29.0

26.6 32.8

73 43

13.6 13.6

K1401

30 50

42.4 151.2

14.1 27.5

30.9 35.0

32.0 39.3

90 52

17.0 17.0

K1402

18 30

36 60

50.8 181.5

15.9 32.5

36.0 41.5

37.3 46.7

107 62

20.4 20.4

K1403

22 35

44 70

59.3 211.7

18.9 38.5

42.2 49.4

43.7 55.1

125 73

23.8 23.8

K1404

Part No.

Maximum capacity kW rpm (n) Part No.

100

300

500

700

1000

1500

2000

2500

K1400 K1401 K1402 K1403

0.095 0.150 0.220 0.300

0.147 0.184 0.404 0.625

0.170 0.331 0.662 1.000

0.184 0.412 0.920 1.361

0.294 0.588 1.251 1.876

0.404 0.846 1.730 2.576

0.515 1.067 2.060 3.091

0.588 1.288 2.245

K1404

0.404

1.067

1.700

2.248

2.980

4.011

P = (kW) TN (Nm) = P 路 9550 n

Performance: hardened: nitrided:

SF = 1.4 (safety factor for tooth root stress). SH = 1.0 (safety factor for hertzian stress) for continuous operation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

25

2.5 x value indicated 1.5 x value indicated


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:1, 1:2 Material: Plastic Hostaform C - Acetal copolymer (POM)

Ratio 1:1 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z

Weight g

Part No.

0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0

16 16 30 16 16

3 5 6 8 10

7.0 12.0 15.0 18.5 21.9

8.7 17.6 31.4 26.4 34.9

6.0 8.0 7.4 10.0 9.6

8.0 13.6 12.9 16.2 18.3

8.0 13.6 15.3 18.4 21.2

10.5 18.4 24.8 25.8 30.4

2.0 4.7 7.4 7.0 10.0

0.3 1.9 5.9 5.9 10.4

KH 0516-1:1 KH 1016-1:1 KH 1030-1:1 KH 1516-1:1 KH 2016-1:1

2.5 3.0 3.5

16 16 16

12 14 18

25.2 28.8 33.3

43.5 52.3 61.4

11.5 13.2 14.4

22.9 25.8 28.1

25.5 29.2 33.1

37.0 43.0 49.5

12.3 13.8 15.8

20.0 32.0 50.0

KH 2516-1:1 KH 3016-1:1 KH 3516-1:1

1g = 0.0352736oz.

Ratio 1:2 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z

Weight g

Part No.

1.0

15 30

5 8

12.2 18.0

16.8 31.1

10.6 9.1

17.0 14.8

17.0 16.2

26.4 20.9

6.6 6.6

2.4 6.3

KH 1015-1:2 KH 1030-1:2

1.5

15 30

8 10

17.0 23.4

25.4 46.4

11.5 9.6

22.8 17.5

22.8 19.5

35.8 26.2

10.5 10.5

7.5 17.0

KH 1515-1:2 KH 1530-1:2

2.0

15 30

10 12

22.5 30.2

33.6 62.2

11.8 11.8

26.0 22.6

27.0 24.2

44.2 32.6

14.6 14.6

13.3 41.0

KH 2015-1:2 KH 2030-1:2

2.5

15 30

12 16

26.5 36.1

42 77.3

13.0 15.0

29.6 27.5

31.2 29.5

53.3 40.5

17.3 17.3

23.6 69.0

KH 2515-1:2 KH 2530-1:2

3.0

15 30

14 18

31.2 45.0

50.3 93

14.8 19.0

35 34.2

36.3 37.0

63.3 49.5

20.5 20.5

38.0 129.0

KH 3015-1:2 KH 3030-1:2

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

1g = 0.0352736oz.

26


Metric Bevel Gears Ratio 1:3, 1:4, 1:5

Material: Plastic Hostaform C Acetal copolymer (POM)

Ratio 1:3 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z

Weight g

Part No.

1.0

15 45

5 10

12.3 23.4

16.6 46.1

11.0 9.6

20.4 16.5

20.4 18.2

34.3 22.7

9.2 9.2

2.7 16.0

KH 1015-1:3 KH 1045-1:3

1.5

15 45

8 12

17.2 30.4

25.1 68.8

12.5 11.5

26.8 21.5

26.8 23.0

47.9 29.4

14.0 14.0

8.5 49.0

KH 1515-1:3 KH 1545-1:3

2.0

10 30

6 12

16.6 30.3

24.0 61.7

12.0 11.5

25.0 20.2

25.0 22.5

43.7 28.0

12.5 12.5

6.1 38.0

KH 2010-1:3 KH 2030-1:3

2.5

10 30

8 18

18.8 36.1

29.7 77.2

13.0 15.5

28.8 25.2

28.8 29.0

52.4 35.7

15.7 15.7

10.2 68.0

KH 2510-1:3 KH 2530-1:3

1g = 0.0352736oz.

Ratio 1:4 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth

Bh7

N

D

H

L

F

A

Z

Weight g

Part No.

1.0

10 40

4 10

7.8 23.4

12.0 40.8

9.3 10.8

17.7 15.7

17.7 17.0

30.1 20.1

8.2 8.2

0.9 12.6

KH 1010-1:4 KH 1040-1:4

1.5

10 40

5 12

11.3 30.4

18.0 61.2

10.9 12.8

23.5 20.0

23.5 21.7

41.7 26.2

12.3 12.3

3.0 32.0

KH 1510-1:4 KH 1540-1:4

2.0

10 40

6 18

14.3 36.0

23.8 81.5

12.8 16.6

28.9 24.7

28.9 27.0

54.0 32.5

16.3 16.3

6.4 65.0

KH 2010-1:4 KH 2040-1:4

1g = 0.0352736oz.

Ratio 1:5 Dimensions in mm No. of Module Teeth 1.0

12 60

Bh7 4 10

N 9.5 20.5

D 13.7 60.4

H 10 11

L 20.3 15.5

F 20.3 17.4

A 40.5 21.0

Z 9.5 9.5

Weight g

Part No.

2.0 17.0

KH 1012-1:5 KH 1060-1:5

1g = 0.0352736oz. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

27


Selection of Metric Worm and Worm Gears The range of standard worms and worm gears is available in 7 module sizes and 8 standard ratios. The size is identical to the centerline distance.

Size Module Ratio and No. of starts

030 1.0 4.63:1 8

045 1.5 5.57:1 7

060 2.0 6.83:1 6

075 2.5 8.6:1 5

090 3.0 11.25:1 4

105 3.5 15.33:1 3

120 4.0 23.5:1 2

47:1 1

Every ratio option available for each module/size. The ratio 47:1 is just self locking. All other ratios are not. We suggest a tolerance of +/- 0.02mm on the centerline of the bores of the housing. Selection of worm and worm gear The nominal torque T2N (Nm) is valid for servo applications that run under normal shock free operations and at an ambient

Service coefficient Shocks at output shaft fB

none 1.0

moderate 1.2

Starting factor Starting frequency fA

<10/h 1.0

<60/h 1.1

<360/h 1.2

<1000/h 1.3

Temperature factor Ambient Temperature ft

<20째C 1.0

<30째C 1.3

<40째C 1.5

<50째C 1.9

Duty factor Duty cycle fED

<40% 1.0

<70% 1.2

heavy 1.5

<100% 1.4

T2 (Nm): required torque for driven machine All specifications subject to change without notice.

28


Metric Worm and Worm Gear Efficiency Tables -1

nI(min ) Input speed 6000 rpm Size Ratio

T2max.

PI

T2N

4500 rpm PI

T2N

3000 rpm PI

T2N

1500 rpm PI

T2N

1000 rpm PI

T2N

500rpm PI

T2N

030

4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00

20

1.16 0.95 0.82 0.73 0.61 0.50 0.42 0.27

6.57 6.37 6.54 6.86 7.23 7.33 7.46 7.51

0.77 0.76 0.73 0.69 0.66 0.60 0.48 0.37

0.99 0.81 0.70 0.62 0.52 0.41 0.33 0.20

7.64 7.37 7.53 7.88 8.28 8.39 8.52 8.57

0.78 0.77 0.74 0.70 0.67 0.63 0.52 0.42

0.76 0.63 0.54 0.47 0.39 0.31 0.25 0.15

9.12 8.74 8.88 9.25 9.69 9.80 9.94 9.99

0.81 0.79 0.76 0.72 0.69 0.65 0.54 0.44

0.46 0.37 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.18 0.14 0.09

11.33 10.74 10.82 11.21 11.68 11.77 11.91 11.96

0.83 0.81 0.79 0.76 0.71 0.66 0.55 0.45

0.34 0.27 0.23 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.10 0.06

12.33 11.63 11.68 12.06 12.55 12.62 12.76 12.80

0.83 0.81 0.79 0.76 0.72 0.66 0.56 0.46

0.19 0.15 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.03

13.51 12.67 12.67 13.05 13.54 13.60 13.74 13.77

0.82 0.80 0.78 0.75 0.71 0.64 0.55 0.45

045

4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.5 47.00

80

3.64 3.02 2.61 2.27 1.91 1.57 1.19 0.77

22.5 22.0 22.7 23.9 25.3 25.7 26.2 26.4

0.84 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.74 0.67 0.59 0.46

3.20 2.64 2.26 1.95 1.65 1.31 0.98 0.62

26.9 26.2 26.9 28.0 29.8 30.3 30.8 31.0

0.86 0.84 0.82 0.79 0.76 0.71 0.63 0.50

2.61 2.13 1.81 1.55 1.30 1.03 0.77 0.48

33.5 32.3 33.0 34.6 36.3 36.8 37.4 37.6

0.87 0.86 0.84 0.82 0.78 0.73 0.65 0.52

1.71 1.37 1.15 0.98 0.81 0.64 0.48 0.30

44.3 42.3 42.8 44.5 46.5 46.9 47.5 47.7

0.88 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.80 0.75 0.66 0.53

1.28 1.02 0.85 0.72 0.60 0.47 0.35 0.22

49.7 47.1 47.5 49.2 51.2 51.6 52.3 52.5

0.88 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.79 0.75 0.66 0.53

0.74 0.59 0.49 0.41 0.34 0.27 0.20 0.13

56.6 53.2 53.3 55.0 57.1 57.4 58.0 58.2

0.86 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.77 0.72 0.64 0.50

060

4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00

200

7.88 6.52 5.62 4.85 4.10 3.28 2.49 1.68

50 50 51 54 57 59 60 60

0.87 0.86 0.84 0.82 0.78 0.73 0.64 0.48

7.11 5.84 5.00 4.30 3.61 2.86 2.14 1.39

62 60 62 65 69 70 72 72

0.88 0.87 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.75 0.67 0.52

6.00 4.89 4.15 3.54 2.96 2.33 1.72 1.09

79 76 78 82 87 88 89 90

0.89 0.88 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.77 0.70 0.55

4.15 3.33 2.80 2.36 1.96 1.53 1.12 0.71

109 105 107 111 116 118 119 120

0.90 0.89 0.88 0.86 0.83 0.79 0.71 0.56

3.19 2.54 2.12 1.79 1.48 1.16 0.85 0.53

126 120 121 126 131 132 134 135

0.89 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.78 0.71 0.56

1.90 1.50 1.25 1.05 0.87 0.68 0.50 0.32

148 139 140 145 150 151 152 153

0.88 0.87 0.86 0.84 0.80 0.76 0.68 0.54

075

4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00

400

12.74 10.55 9.08 7.83 6.59 5.23 3.89 2.53

83 82 85 90 96 97 99 100

0.89 0.88 0.86 0.84 0.81 0.76 0.68 0.53

11.68 9.61 8.23 7.06 5.91 4.66 3.43 2.18

103 101 104 110 117 119 121 122

0.90 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.78 0.71 0.56

10.08 8.23 6.99 5.96 4.96 3.88 2.83 1.79

134 131 135 142 149 152 155 156

0.90 0.90 0.89 0.87 0.84 0.80 0.73 0.58

7.25 5.83 4.90 4.14 3.42 2.66 1.93 1.20

194 186 190 198 208 211 214 215

0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.74 0.60

5.68 4.53 3.79 3.19 2.63 2.04 1.48 0.92

227 217 220 22.9 240 242 245 246

0.91 0.90 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.81 0.74 0.59

3.48 2.75 2.29 1.92 1.58 1.23 0.90 0.56

275 260 262 271 282 284 287 288

0.90 0.89 0.88 0.86 0.83 0.79 0.71 0.58

090

4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00

800

20.3 16.7 14.3 12.2 10.2 8.0 5.8 3.6

182 179 185 196 208 212 216 218

0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.85 0.82 0.75 0.60

17.9 14.6 12.4 10.6 8.8 6.8 4.9 3.0

241 236 243 256 271 276 281 283

0.92 0.91 0.90 0.89 0.86 0.83 0.76 0.62

13.3 10.7 9.0 7.6 6.3 4.8 3.5 2.1

359 347 354 371 389 395 401 403

0.92 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.84 0.77 0.64

10.6 8.5 7.1 6.0 4.9 3.8 2.7 1.7

429 411 418 435 456 461 467 470

0.92 0.91 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.83 0.77 0.63

6.6 5.2 4.4 3.7 3.0 2.3 1.6 1.0

533 505 509 527 549 550 549 551

0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.85 0.82 0.75 0.61

105

4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00

1300

31.4 25.9 22.3 19.2 16.1 12.6 9.1 5.6

285 281 293 314 336 344 353 356

0.92 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.84 0.78 0.64

28.0 23.0 19.6 16.9 14.1 10.9 7.8 4.8

383 376 391 416 444 454 465 469

0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.79 0.66

21.4 17.3 14.6 12.4 10.3 8.0 5.7 3.4

585 567 584 617 656 667 681 686

0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.80 0.67

17.3 13.9 11.7 9.9 8.2 6.3 4.5 2.7

710 683 699 736 779 791 806 812

0.93 0.92 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.80 0.67

11.1 8.8 7.3 6.2 5.1 4.0 2.8 1.7

903 858 871 911 960 971 987 993

0.92 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.84 0.78 0.64

120

4.63 5.57 6.83 8.60 11.25 15.33 23.50 47.00

1900

44.6 36.8 31.5 26.9 22.4 17.4 12.4 7.5

406 402 418 443 470 480 491 495

0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.79 0.66

40.2 33.0 28.1 23.9 19.8 15.3 10.9 6.5

553 543 562 594 629 641 654 659

0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.80 0.68

31.3 25.4 21.4 18.1 14.8 11.4 8.1 4.8

863 837 859 901 949 963 980 987

0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.81 0.69

25.7 20.7 17.3 14.6 11.9 9.2 6.5 3.9

1061 1022 1042 1089 1143 1157 1175 1182

0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.81 0.68

16.8 13.3 11.1 9.3 7.6 5.8 4.1 2.4

1378 1311 1326 1376 1437 1443 1438 1445

0.93 0.92 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.79 0.66

nI T2max. T2N PI

(min -1) (Nm) (Nm) (kW)

: Input speed Max. output torque : Nominal output torque : Input power : Efficiency :

All specifications subject to change without notice.

29


Metric Worm and Worm Gears Material: Worm Gear: CuZn40A12 Worm: AISI 1146 DIN 17 210 Teeth: Pressure Angle 20ยบ - Right Hand - Precision cut

worm wheel

worm on shaft

Dimensions in mm

Center Distance = 30mm

Ratio

Module

No. of Starts

47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

No. of Teeth

Worm Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Part No.

47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37

S1001 S1002 S1003 S1004 S1005 S1006 S1007 S1008

R1001 R1002 R1003 R1004 R1005 R1006 R1007 R1008

worm wheel

Worm on shaft Dimensions in mm

Center Distance = 45mm

Ratio 47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1

Module

No. of Starts

No. of Teeth

Worm Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Part No.

1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37

S1501 S1502 S1503 S1504 S1505 S1506 S1507 S1508

R1501 R1502 R1503 R1504 R1505 R1506 R1507 R1508

All specifications subject to change without notice.

30


Metric Worm and Worm Gears Material: Worm Gear: CuZn40A12 Worm: AISI 1146 DIN 17 210 Teeth: Pressure Angle 20ยบ - Right Hand - Precision cut worm shaft

Dimensions in mm

worm wheel

worm wheel ring

hollow shaft

Center Distance = 60mm

Ratio

Module

No. of Starts

47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1

2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

No. of Teeth

Worm Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Part No.

Hollow Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Ring Part No.

47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37

S2001 S2002 S2003 S2004 S2005 S2006 S2007 S2008

R2001 R2002 R2003 R2004 R2005 R2006 R2007 R2008

B2001 B2002 B2003 B2004 B2005 B2006 B2007 B2008

K2001 K2002 K2003 K2004 K2005 K2006 K2007 K2008

worm shaft

Dimensions in mm

worm wheel

worm wheel ring

hollow shaft

Center Distance = 75mm

Ratio

Module

No. of Starts

47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1

2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

No. of Teeth

Worm Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Part No.

Hollow Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Ring Part No.

47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37

S2501 S2502 S2503 S2504 S2505 S2506 S2507 S2508

R2501 R2502 R2503 R2504 R2505 R2506 R2507 R2508

B2501 B2502 B2503 B2504 B2505 B2506 B2507 B2508

K2501 K2502 K2503 K2504 K2505 K2506 K2507 K2508

All specifications subject to change without notice.

31


Metric Worm and Worm Gears Material: Worm Gear: CuZn40A12 Worm: AISI 1146 DIN 17 210 Teeth: Pressure Angle 20ยบ - Right Hand - Precision cut worm shaft

Dimensions in mm

worm wheel

hollow shaft

worm wheel ring

Center Distance = 90mm

Ratio

Module

No. of Starts

47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

No. of Teeth

Worm Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Part No.

Hollow Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Ring Part No.

47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37

S3001 S3002 S3003 S3004 S3005 S3006 S3007 S3008

R3001 R3002 R3003 R3004 R3005 R3006 R3007 R3008

B3001 B3002 B3003 B3004 B3005 B3006 B3007 B3008

K3001 K3002 K3003 K3004 K3005 K3006 K3007 K3008

worm shaft

Dimensions in mm

worm wheel ring

worm wheel

hollow shaft

Center Distance = 105mm

Ratio

Module

No. of Starts

47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1

3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

No. of Teeth

Worm Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Part No.

Hollow Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Ring Part No.

47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37

S3501 S3502 S3503 S3504 S3505 S3506 S3507 S3508

R3501 R3502 R3503 R3504 R3505 R3506 R3507 R3508

B3501 B3502 B3503 B3504 B3505 B3506 B3507 B3508

K3501 K3502 K3503 K3504 K3505 K3506 K3507 K3508

All specifications subject to change without notice.

32


Metric Worm and Worm Gears Material: Worm Gear: CuZn40A12 Worm: AISI 1146 DIN 17 210 Teeth: Pressure Angle 20ยบ - Right Hand - Precision cut

worm shaft

Dimensions in mm

hollow shaft

worm wheel ring

worm wheel

Center Distance = 120mm

Ratio

Module

No. of Starts

47:1 23.5:1 15.33:1 11.25:1 8.6:1 6.83:1 5.57:1 4.63:1

4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

No. of Teeth

Worm Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Part No.

Hollow Shaft Part No.

Worm Wheel Ring Part No.

47 47 46 45 43 41 39 37

S4001 S4002 S4003 S4004 S4005 S4006 S4007 S4008

R4001 R4002 R4003 R4004 R4005 R4006 R4007 R4008

B4001 B4002 B4003 B4004 B4005 B4006 B4007 B4008

K4001 K4002 K4003 K4004 K4005 K4006 K4007 K4008

All specifications subject to change without notice.

33


Metric Trapezoidal Thread Spindle & Nuts Spindle Material: Steel C15+C (1.0401) lower carbon steel DIN En10277) Stainless Steel (1.4301- AS2837-1986-304, 1.4305- AS2837-1986-303)

Quality: 7e Lead accuracy 0.10mm per 300mm thread lengths (accumulating) Straightness tolerance 0.10mm per 300mm (accumulating) Right hand thread 10-40mm OD available from stock Left hand thread 16-30mm OD available from stock Larger and smaller thread dimensions available on request Standard stock length: 2mtr, cut in 500mm increments. Max. length 3mtrs. 5mm cutting wastage - please state exact length required Dimensions in mm

500mm

1000mm

2000mm

Ă&#x2DC; D

p

D3min.

Approx. Weight per mtr. Kg.

TR10x2x500 TR10x3x500 TR12x3x500 TR16x4x500 TR20x4x500 TR24x5x500 TR30x6x500 TR36x6x500 TR40x7x500

TR10x2x1000 TR10x3x1000 TR12x3x1000 TR16x4x1000 TR20x4x1000 TR24x5x1000 TR30x6x1000 TR36x6x1000 TR40x7x1000

TR10x2x2000 TR10x3x2000 TR12x3x2000 TR16x4x2000 TR20x4x2000 TR24x5x2000 TR30x6x2000 TR36x6x2000 TR40x7x2000

10 10 12 16 20 24 30 36 40

2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7

05.84 07.84 10.80 14.80 17.50 21.90 27.90 30.50

0.45 0.45 0.75 1.21 2.00 2.72 4.50 6.71 8.00

Part No.

p D d3 L Pitch tolerance > 0.3mm/300mm

Round Nuts

Material: Steel 9SMnPb28 (DIN 1.0718) (standard) Bronze RG7 GC-CuSn7ZnPb (DIN 2.1090) - manufactured to DIN 103 Stainless Steel 1.4305- AS2837-1986-303 Left hand and hexagonal nuts available on request Larger and smaller dimensions available on request

Steel Load* Part No. KN

d p

D

L

Approx. Weight kg.

Load** Max. Part No. KN r.p.m.

Approx. Weight kg.

dxp

Ă&#x2DC; D

L

SR10x2 0.04 BR10x2 0.06 10x2 22 15 SR10x3 0.4 0.04 BR10x3 1.2 1000 0.06 10x3 22 15 SR12x3 0.6 0.04 BR12x3 1.7 1000 0.06 12x3 22s18 SR16x4 1.05 0.16 BR16x4 2.6 1000 0.18 16x4 36 24 SR20x4 1.66 0.18 BR20x4 3.8 1000 0.20 20x4 36 30 SR24x5 2.50 0.44 BR24x5 5.5 1000 0.50 24x5 50 36 SR30x6 3.83 0.76 BR30x6 8.0 600 0.88 30x6 60 45 SR36x6 5.66 1.43 BR36x6 11.0 600 1.70 36x6 75 54 SR40x7 6.83 1.54 BR40x7 16.0 500 1.76 40x7 75 60 * Tensile strength load guideline only for steel nut using safety factor 6 in normal operation ** Maximum load guideline for bronze nuts for rotating spindle in normal operation s For bronze nut BR12x3 D=25mm 1kN =101.9716 kilogram force = 224.8089 pounds force (lbf)

Flanged Round Nuts Material: D2

Dimensions in mm

Bronze

Bronze RG7 GC-CuSn7ZnPb (DIN 2.1090)

D1

. L2

L1

Bronze Flanged Nuts with mounting holes

Note: Bronze flanged nuts with mounting holes are also available in the following sizes: 10x2, 16x4, 14x4, 18x4, 22x5, 26x5, 28x5, 32x6, 44x7, 50x8, 60x9.

All specifications are subject to change without

34


Metric Bushings & Spline Shafts Bushings manufactured to DIN ISO 14-A (DIN 5463-A) Material: Steel ST 52.3 - non alloy structured steel (standard) Bronze RG 7 (GC-Cu Sn 5/7 Zn Pb) Stainless Steel 1.4305

B

Flanged & Clamp style bushings in steel, bronze & stainless steel also available. Please request additional data sheets.

Standard

Part No. Steel

Bronze

Profile

Keys

00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 00006 00007

00009 00010 00011 00012 00013 00014 00015

A6x11x14 A6x13x16 A6x16x20 A6x21x25 A6x26x32 A8x32x38 A8x42x48

6 6 6 6 6 8 8

Dimensions in mm D1 D2 H7 H11 D3 11 13 16 21 26 32 42

14 16 20 25 32 38 48

20 28 32 40 52 60 65

B d9

Length

Approx. Weight kg.

3 3.5 4 5 6 6 8

40 45 45 55 60 60 70

0.07 0.17 0.20 0.27 0.70 0.88 0.93

Spline Shafts DIN ISO 14-B (DIN 5463) Material: Steel C45 AS 1443-1994-1045 - Cold drawn, unhardened (standard) Stainless Steel 1.4305 5mm cutting wastage - please state exact length required Other available lengths: 1500/2000/3000mm Other available profiles: 6 x 18 x 22 6 x 23 x 28 6 x 28 x 34 8 x 36 x 42

Dimensions in mm

Part No./Length 250mm

500mm

1000mm

2000mm

D1 Profile

30001/250 30002/250 30003/250 30004/250 30005/250 30006/250 30007/250

30001/500 30002/500 30003/500 30004/500 30005/500 30006/500 30007/500

30001/1000 30002/1000 30003/1000 30004/1000 30005/1000 30006/1000 30007/1000

30001/2000 30002/2000 30003/2000 30004/2000 30005/2000 30006/2000 30007/2000

B6x11x14 B6x13x16 B6x16x20 B6x21x25 B6x26x32 B8x32x38 B8x42x48

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

35

D2 Keys 6 6 6 6 6 8 8

Weight

B per mtr. 0-0.08-0.07-0.27 0-0.08 11 13 16 21 26 32 42

14 16 20 25 32 38 48

3.00 3.50 4.00 5.00 6.00 6.00 8.00

kg. 00.95 01.29 01.92 03.14 05.01 07.44 12.38


Low Cost Universal Joints with Friction Bearings - DIN 808 - Series "G" • Low cost economy range

• Round bore standard

• Unhardened, unpolished

• Max. angle

Single: 45º Double: 90º

• Greater backlash • Suitable for medium-low speed

• Most sizes in stock

with limited torsional requirements

• Plastic/Brass Universal Joints

• Max. speed 1000rpm

also available - www.tea.net.au

Single

Double

Part No.

Bore

O/D

Single Double

D1

D2

L1

L2

L3

L4

Length

Weight kg. Single Double

101L

121L

8

13

13

42

60

21

.024

.035

102L

122L

10

16

17

52

74

26

.047

.068

103L

123L

12

20

20

62

88

31

.089

.130

104L

124L

16

25

23

74

104

37

.160

.237

105L

125L

20

32

25

86

124

43

.310

.463

Leather Bellows to suit for Single Universal Joints (Fig. 1) Part No. 20246 20262 20247 20248 20249 20250

Size D1/D2 D3 13 16 16 20 25 32

30 32 32 35 40 55

Length L1 L2 12 15 15 20 20 20

42 40 52 62 74 86

for Double Universal Joints (Fig. 1)

No. of Folds

Part No.

Size D1/D2 D3

2 2 2 2 3 3

Length L1 L2

No. of Folds

60 12 20254 30 13 62 15 32 16 20267 74 15 32 16 20255 88 20 35 20 20256 20 104 40 25 20257 20 124 55 32 20258 Temperature range: from -196ºC to +90ºC see page 47 for full details & more sizes

D1/D2

D1/D2

D3

3 3 3 3 5 5

All dimensions in mm. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 43 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

36


Precision Single Universal Joints -

DIN 808 - Series "G"

• Wear resistant sliding bushes from

• Max. speed 1000 rpm

cemented & hardened steel

• Keyway optional

• Max. working angle 45º

• Most sizes ex stock • Temperature range: Approx -20o to +150o C (-4oF to + 302oF)

Single

keyway OPTIONAL

Part No.

Bore dh7

OD D

L2

Length L1

C

01G

6

16

34

17

8

keyway a 2

b

Weight kg.

7.0

0.05

(optional)

02G

8

16

40

20

11

2

9.0

0.05

03G

10

22

48

24

12

3

11.4

0.10

04G

12

25

56

28

13

4

13.8

0.16

05G

14

28

60

30

14

5

16.3

0.20

1G

16

32

68

34

16

5

18.3

0.30

2G

18

36

74

37

17

6

20.8

0.45

3G

20

42

82

41

18

6

22.8

0.60

47.5

22

6

24.8

0.95

54

26

8

28.3

1.20

4G

22

45

95

5G

25

50

108

Bellows to suit To fit Part No. OD “D” 01M 02M 03M 04M 05M 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6M

16 18 22 25/26 28/29 32 36/37 42 45/47 50/52 58

A

B

C

28 32 40 48 52 56 66 75 84 92 100

34 40 45 50 56 65 72 82 95 108 122

15 16.5 20.5 24.5 27.5 30.5 35.5 40 45 50 56

Special Neoprene rubber. Resistant to acids, oils, greases, dust & moisture. Filled with grease, they ensure constant lubrication.

D1/D2

D1/D2

D3

For Leather Bellows to suit please see page 47.

All dimensions in mm. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 44 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

37


Precision Double Universal Joints -

DIN 808 - Series "GD" • Max. working angle 90º

• Wear resistant sliding bushes from

• Max. speed 1000 rpm

cemented & hardened steel

• Keyway optional

• Strong precise & versatile; wide application field

• Temperature range: Approx -20o to +150o C (-4oF to + 302oF)

Double

OPTIONAL keyway

Bore dh7

OD D

L1

Length C L3

L4

Keyway a

(optional)

Part No.

b

Weight kg.

01GD

6

16

17

8

22

2

7.0

0.08

56

02GD

8

16

20

11

62

22

2

9.0

0.08

03GD

10

22

24

12

74

26

3

11.4

0.15

04GD

12

25

28

13

86

30

4

13.8

0.25

05GD

14

28

30

14

96

36

5

16.3

0.40

1GD

16

32

34

16

104

36

5

18.3

0.45

2GD

18

36

37

17

114

40

6

20.8

0.70

3GD

20

42

41

18

128

46

6

22.8

1.00

4GD

22

45

47.5

22

145

50

6

24.8

1.55

5GD

25

50

54

26

163

55

8

28.3

1.60

6GD

30

58

61

29

190

68

8

33.3

2.90

7GD

35

70

70

35

212

72

10

38.3

4.75

8GD

40

80

80

40

245

85

12

43.3

7.20

9GD

50

95

95

50

290

100

14

53.8

12.00

All dimensions in mm. Please see page 47 for folding bellows to suit. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 44 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

38


High Speed Precision Universal Joints with Needle Roller Bearings - Series "H" & "HD" • Roller bearings lubricated for life

• Max. angle - Single - 45º, Double - 90º

• No maintenance required

• Round bore standard

• Precise & versatile, silent & smooth running

• Keyway optional

• Suitable for a wide application field

• Telescopic type available on request

• Max. speed - 4000rpm

• Temperature range: Approx. -20oC to +125oC (-4oF to 257oF)

• Zinc Treatment or Nickel Plating available on request

• Many sizes from stock

Single

Double

keyway OPTIONAL

Bore

OD

Single

Double

dh7

D

L1

L2

03H

03HD

10

22

24

48

74

26

12

04H

04HD

12

25

28

56

86

30

13

05H

05HD

14

28

30

60

96

36

1H

1HD

16

32

34

68

104

36

2H

2HD

18

36

37

74

114

3H

3HD

20

42

41

82

4H

4HD

22

45

47.5

95

5H

5HD

25

50

54

6H

6HD

30

58

61

7H

7HD

35

70

8H

8HD

40

80

9H

9HD

50

95

Part No.

Length

Keyway a

Optional

Weight Kg.

b

Single

Double

3

11.4

0.10

0.15

4

13.8

0.16

0.25

13

5

16.3

0.20

0.40

16

5

18.3

0.30

0.45

40

17

6

20.8

0.45

0.70

128

46

18

6

22.8

0.60

1.00

145

50

22

6

24.8

0.95

1.55

108

163

55

26

8

28.3

1.20

1.60

122

190

68

29

8

33.3

1.85

2.90

70

140

212

72

35

10

38.3

3.15

4.75

80

160

245

85

40

12

43.3

4.60

7.20

95

190

290

100

50

14

53.8

7.60

12.00

L3

L4

C

All dimensions are in mm. Please see page 47 for full range of protective bellows to suit. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 45 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

39


Precision Telescopic Universal Joints

- DIN 808 - Series "G"

• Made of high grade steel

• Max. angle 90º • Max. speed 1000rpm

• Hardened and friction polished

• Round bore standard • Keyway and square hole optional

• Assembled almost back-lash free

• Up to 32mm OD generally ex stock

• Intermediate lengths also available

• Needle Roller Bearing - Series “W”- see data below

square

keyway OPTIONAL

Bore

L4 ±0.5

L min L5 -A

Tele scope

Length

H7

L max L5 ±1

Splined shaft profile

D1

D2

D3

L1 -1

411

8

13

13.0

13

21

130

40

170

412

10

16

19.5

10

20

150

50

413

12

20

19.5

13

24

190

60

414

16

25

26.5

23

37

230

415

20

32

31.5

25

43

416

25

40

39.5

32

54

417

32

50

51.5

41

418

40

63

59.5

47

419

40

75

59.5

4110

50

90

79.5

Part No.

Keyway

Square

Optional

Optional

B P9

T +0.2

square

2

9.0

200

6 x 11 x 14

3

250

6 x 11 x 14

4

70

300

6 x 13 x 16

270

80

350

400

100

500

66

500

150

83

550

200

43

80

570

52

95

700

A

DIN ISO 14

S

Weight Kg.

6

0.100

11.4

8

0.234

13.8

10

0.341

5

18.3

14

0.657

6 x 16 x 20

6

22.8

19

1.214

6 x 21 x 25

8

28.3

24

2.500

650

6 x 26 x 32

10

35.3

30

5.350

750

8 x 32 x 38

12

43.3

36

8.780

200

770

8 x 32 x 38

12

43.3

36

11.230

200

900

8 x 42 x 48

14

53.8

-

21.600

Precision Telescopic Universal Joints with Needle Bearings - DIN 808 - Series "W” Bore

Max. Speed 3000rpm Length

H7

L4 ±0.5

L min L5 -A

Tele scope

L max L5 ±1

Splined shaft profile

Part No.

D1

D2

D3

L1 -1

413W

10

20

19.5

13

24

190

60

250

414W

12

25

26.5

15

28

212

70

415W

16

32

31.5

19

34

252

80

416W

20

40

39.5

23

41

374

417W

25

50

51.5

29

52.5

418W

32

63

59.5

36

65

419W

40

75

59.5

44

4110W

50

90

79.5

54

Keyway

Square

Optional

Optional

Weight

B P9

T +0.2

6 x 11 x 14

3

11.4

8

0.341

282

6 x 13 x 16

4

13.8

10

0.630

332

6 x 16 x 20

5

18.3

14

1.110

100

474

6 x 21 x 25

6

22.8

19

2.300

473

150

623

6 x 26 x 32

8

28.3

24

5.150

514

200

714

8 x 32 x 38

10

35.3

30

8.650

80

570

200

770

8 x 32 x 38

12

43.3

36

11.230

95

700

200

900

8 x 42 x 48

14

53.8

-

21.600

A

DIN ISO 14

S

Kg.

These precision shaft joints are marked during assembly. When putting the shaft joint together again, make sure that the markings on both halves of the joint are opposite each other. It is suggested to use folding bellows filled with lubrication grease for use in difficult to access machinery. All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated. Please see page 47 for full range of protective bellows to suit. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 43 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

40


Stainless Steel Universal Joints - Series "X" •Transmissible torque 30% less than steel series “G”

Single

Double

keyway OPTIONAL

Single & Double Universal Joints - Series "X"

Stainless steel AISI 304 -not heat treated - max. angle 45° type X, 90° type XD - Max Speed 300rpm o o o Approximate temperature range: -180oC to +200 C (-292 F to +39 2F) Single

Double

Part No. Part No.

dH7

D

L2

L1

C

L4

L3

a

Max. Breaking Torque Nm.

Max. Dynamic Torque Nm.

Bore b

Weight Kg. X

XD

01X

01XD

6

16

34

17

8

22

56

2

7

8

30

0.05

0.08

02X

02XD

8

16

40

20

11

22

62

2

9

8

30

0.05

0.08

03X

03XD

10

22

48

24

12

26

74

3

11.4

25

150

0.10

0.15

04X

04XD

12

25

56

28

13

30

86

4

13.8

32

230

0.16

0.25

1X

1XD

16

32

68

34

16

36

104

5

18.3

65

390

0.30

0.45

3X

3XD

20

42

82

41

18

46

128

6

22.8

180

830

0.60

1.00

5X

5XD

25

50

108

54

26

55

163

8

28.3

300

1600

1.20

2.00

6X

6XD

30

58

122

61

29

68

190

8

33.3

400

2300

1.85

2.90

Q

square

keyway OPTIONAL

Precision Telescopic Universal Joints - Series "G" Stainless steel - 1.4305 DIN 808 - hardened & friction polished Size Part No.

Length

L min

Telescope

L max

D1 H7

D2

D3

L1 -1

L4 ±0.5

L5 -A

A

L5 ±1

411S

8

13

13.0

13

21

130

40

170

412S

10

16

19.5

10

20

150

50

413S

12

20

19.5

13

24

190

60

414S

16

25

26.5

23

37

230

415S

20

32

31.5

25

43

270

416S

25

40

39.5

32

54

417S

32

50

51.5

41

418S

40

63

59.5

47

419S

40

75

59.5

4110S

50

90

79.5

Splined shaft Profile DIN ISO 14

Keyway

DIN 6885

Optional

Square Optional

Weight

B P9

T +0.2

SQ

With square

2

9.0

6

0.100

200

6 x 11 x 14

3

11.4

8

0.234

250

6 x 11 x 14

4

13.8

10

0.341

70

300

6 x 13 x 16

5

18.3

14

0.657

80

350

6 x 16 x 20

6

22.8

19

1.214

400

100

500

6 x 21 x 25

8

28.3

24

2.500

66

500

150

650

6 x 26 x 32

10

35.3

30

5.350

83

550

200

750

8 x 32 x 38

12

43.3

36

8.780

43

80

570

200

770

8 x 32 x 38

12

43.3

36

11.230

52

95

700

200

900

8 x 42 x 48

14

53.8

-

21.600

Kg.

All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated. Please see page 47 for full range of protective bellows to suit. The Technical Appendix (pages 42, 43 & 46) describe how to calculate the dimensions of the joint and contain instructions for their application. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

41


Technical Appendix Installation Instructions These universal joints and telescopic shafts are now, and will be in the future, indispensable and versatile components for transmitting rotary motion. If two shafts, which are inclined towards each other at a given angle, are connected to each other via a universal joint, and if one of the shafts rotates with a constant regular speed, then the other shaft rotates with a variable angular velocity. This irregularity of motion - which is also called gimbal error - causes the rotating angle to advance and lag alternately, thus effecting the second shaft to rotate with sinusoidal fluctuations. The greater the deflection angle , the greater the non uniformity of the rotating motion. For this reason, single universal joints are only used when variable rotary motion is permissible. The non uniformity of motion can be compensated by using two single universal joints in sequence or by using a double universal joint. When properly installed, the second universal joint can compensate the irregular motion of the first one under the following conditions as enumerated by DIN 808. 1. Correct fork position: when using two single universal joints make sure that the two inside forks are in flat formation, as in the case of double universal joints.

right: forks in flat formation

wrong: fork plane turned by 90째

turned by 90째

2. The deflection angles at both ends must be equal.

right: the angle is equal everywhere

wrong: the angles not equal

and

are

3. The driving and driven shafts may only be shifted in directions parallel to the shafts. axis 1

axis 1

axis 2 axis 2 right: axis 1 is parallel to axis 2

wrong: axis 1 is not parallel to axis 2

4. The bearings of the shaft joint - or of the double universal joint - should be positioned as close as possible to the universal joints.

right: the bearings are as close as possible The shaft joints are delivered without pinholes and clamping studs. The length of the dowel pins is determined by the outer diameter of the universal joint; it must be flush when set.

wrong: the bearings are not close enough We recommend dowel pins DIN 1481. diam. of bore o diam.of o dowel pin

42

6

8

10

12

16

20

25

32

40

50

2

3

4

5

6

8

10

12

14

16


Technical Appendix Calculating the Dimensions of the Universal Joints - Type 808 - Series "G" Pages 36 & 40 The selection of a universal joint is not determined exclusively by the max. torque to be transmitted. There are also other operative conditions which must be taken into account, such as impact load, angular ratios, angular velocities, etc. The diagrams presented below give approximate preliminary values for calculating the dimensions of the universal joints and contain the corresponding standard values. Fig. 1 Fig. 2

shows the power and torque values transmitted by single precision universal joints during permanent operation with a deflection angle of = 10°. shows the adjustment value to be taken into consideration for greater deflection angles. For deflection angles less than 10°, e.g. between 0° to 5° you may increase the standard power value shown in fig. 1 by 25%.

Notes: There are no general standard values for precision universal joints with friction bearings, for which it is possible to specify the service life, the stress and strain to which the friction surfaces are exposed is determined by the regularity of the lubrication intervals. The loads to which double universal joints are exposed may only be about 90% of the corresponding values for single universal joints. This also applies to telescopic joints.

Figure 1: Adjustment value in relation to the deflection angle Example Given values: the power to be transmitted P = 1.5 kW speed n = 250 r.p.m. defection angle =22° 30' Calculation: adjustment value from figure 2 = 0.45 standard power P' =

Figure 1: Power diagram for precision universal joints with friction bearings in accordance with DIN 808-G

Figure 1 yields for n = 250 r.p.m. and 3.3 kW: shaft joint E 32 x 63 (or E 40 x 63) with the admissible torque value of M = 125 Nm.

43

P

=

1.5 =3.3 kW 0.45


Diagram for Joints - Series "G" & "GD" on pages 37 & 38

0.25

40º

0.30

35º

0.38

30º

0.45

25º

0.55

20º

0.65

15º

0.80

10º

1.00

1.25

CORRECTION FACTOR "F"

45º

WORKING ANGLE " "

Torque in Nm

Joint Size - Outside diameter "D"

kW

Speed (r.p.m.) Example • Power: 0.65 kW • R.P.M.: 230 • With working angle 10° Factor F=1 we get point P. Torque = 27 Nm corresponding to joint size "D" = 25/26 mm. = Type 04G • With working angle 30° Factor F = 0.45 (kW 0.65 : 0.45 = kW 1.44) we get point P1 Torque = 60 Nm corresponding to joint size "D" = 32 mm. = Type 1G

Consider that:

Torque in Nm. = 9550 x

Power (kW) Speed (r/min)

Power (hp) Torque in Nm. = 7020 x Speed (r/min) N° 1 kW = 1.35 hp - N° 1 hp = 0.736 kW N° 1 Kgm = 9.81 Nm - N° 1 Nm = 0.102 Kgm

44


Diagram for Joints - Series "H" & "HD" High Speed page 39

0.25

40º

0.30

35º

0.40

30º

0.50

25º

0.70

20º

0.80

15º

0.90

10º

1.00

1.25

CORRECTION FACTOR "F"

45º

WORKING ANGLE " "

Torque in Nm

Joint Size - Outside diameter "D"

kW

Speed (r.p.m.) Example • Power: 5.5 kW • R.P.M.: 2300 • With working angle 10° Factor F=1 we get point P. Torque = 23 Nm corresponding to joint size "D" = 28/29 mm. = Type 05H • With working angle 25° Factor F = 0.70 (kW 5.5 : 0.70 = 7.85 kW) we get point P1 Torque = 33 Nm corresponding to joint size "D" = 32 mm. = Type 1H

Consider that:

Torque in Nm. = 9550 x

Power (kW) Speed (r/min)

Power (hp) Torque in Nm. = 7020 x Speed (r/min) N° 1 kW = 1.35 hp - N° 1 hp = 0.736 kW N° 1 Kgm = 9.81 Nm - N° 1 Nm = 0.102 Kgm

45


Technical Appendix Maintenance & Lubrication for Universal Joints with Friction Bearings and Telescopic Universal Joints. Needle roller bearing universal joints are maintenance free due to their permanent lubrication, and are ideal for use in machine components that are difficult to access. Friction bearing universal joints, single, double and telescopic should be lubricated at regular intervals. Telescopic universal joints are ready for immediate use. They are lubricated with a lithium saponified extreme pressure lubricant on a mineral oil base. Temperature range: -30ยบC +125ยบC Peak temperature: Maximum 140ยบC Please use lubricants with the same specification when re-lubricating.

Lubricating Points: Lubrication is required at least once daily for permanent operation at the lubricating points marked with arrows. For friction bearings this means all the sliding parts on the cube, the fork piece and bearing pins (1) and (2) as well as, for telescopic joints, the sliding parts of the extendable splined profile (3). In harsh environments, the sliding parts should be protected against fibrous particles and steam by means of a folding bellow (See page 47). Permanent self-lubrication for an indefinite time is achieved by filling the folding bellow with the lubricating grease and clamping the ends tight. Note: Maintenance work should be carried out at regular intervals, preferably while carrying out maintenance work on other machine parts. At such times, we also recommend that noise and backlash tests be conducted, or if the working noise and/or backlash of the joint and profile parts deviate from the standard values.

46


Folding Bellows for Universal Joints and Shaft Joints

These folding bellows are made of high quality chrome tanned, black impregnated leather. They are resistant to oil, water and weather and serve as a protection for the joints against dust, humidity and acidic vapours. By filling the folding bellows with lubrication grease and then securing them with band clamp fittings, you achieve life-long lubrication. All dimensions in mm. For non-standard sizes & materials, see pages 48-51. for Single Universal Joints (Fig. 1) Size D1/D2 D3

Part No.

20246 30 13 32 16 20262 32 16 20247 35 20 20248 40 25 20249 55 32 20250 65 40 20251 75 50 20263 75 50 20252 95 63 20264 95 63 20253 75 105 20265 90 120 20266 Temp.: -196ºC to +90ºC

D2

D1

L2

D3

20491 20270 20271 20272 20273 20274 20275 20276 20277 20278 20279

30 32 32 35 40 55 65 75

12 15 15 20 20 20 25 25

60 62 74 88 104 124 156 188

3 3 3 3 5 5 6 6

20261

63

95

30

238

9

75 105 40 245 11 20268 90 120 40 290 11 20269 Higher temperatures & other designs upon request

L2

D3

D2

D1/D2 D3

L1/2

L3

32 35 40 45 50 55 65 70 75 80 90

12 12 12 12 12 15 15 20 20 20 25

34 40 48 56 60 68 74 82 95 105 122

2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4

Temperature range: from -196ºC to +90ºC (-320ºF to +194ºF)

Size

L

Fig. 2

D3

D1/D2

D3

L1/L2

20254 20280 20281 20282 20283 20259 20284 20285 20286 20269

13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90

30 32 35 40 55 65 75 95 105 120

12 15 20 20 20 25 25 30 40 40

L min L max 40 52 62 67 70 73 95 117 137 122

for Universal Joints Simrit (Fig. 3) No. of Folds

80 102 122 137 150 175 245 317 337 360

Higher temperatures & other designs upon request

47

Fig. 3

Simrit synthetic rubber

Length

Part No.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

D1

L11 L min contracted L max extended

for Telescopic Universal Joints (Fig. 2) No. of Folds

16 18 22 26 29 32 37 42 47 52 58

13 16 16 20 25 32 40 50

D1

Fig. 1

Length

No. of Folds

Length L1/2 L3

20254 20267 20255 20256 20257 20258 20259 20260

D2

for Universal Joints Single (Fig. 1) Size

Size D1/D2 D3

Part No.

2 42 12 2 40 15 2 52 15 2 62 20 3 74 20 3 86 20 3 25 108 3 25 105 4 25 132 4 30 130 5 30 166 5 40 160 6 40 190 (-320ºF to +194ºF)

L1 L3

Part No.

for Double Universal Joints (Fig. 1)

No. of Folds

Length L1/2 L3

3 4 6 7 6 6 9 11 11 11

Size

Length

Part No.

D1/D2

D3

L

20287 20288 20289 20290 20291 20292 20293 20294 20295 20296 20297

16 18 22 26 29 32 37 42 47 52 58

36 38 44 50 53 58 65 71 76 88 98

32 38 40 45 50 60 65 75 90 95 95

Temperature range: from -196ºC to +90ºC (-320ºF to +194ºF)


FB range of Protective Bellows

Material: Polyurethane coated polyester fabric type OZ-23, Temperature stability -15oC to +70oC, Includes 2 pieces galvanized hose clips.

Material: Molerit TH59 black Service temperature stability +70oC to max. + 85oC, cold-crack temperature -32oC Includes 2 pieces galvanized hose clips.

Part No.

A

Z-5-FB-500 Z-5-FB-800

10 10

D 29 29

ZD 100 120

AZ 600 920

500 800

38 38

68 68

0.19 0.30

Z-10-FB-700 Z-10-FB-1000

10 10

39 39

100 150

800 1150

700 1000

38 38

75 75

0.23 0.32

Z-25-FB-700 Z-25-FB-1000

15 15

46 46

100 120

800 1120

700 1000

37 63

75 105

0.32 0.43

Z-35/50-FB-600 Z-35/50-FB-1000 Z-35/50-FB-1200 Z-35/50-FB-1500

15 15 15 15

60 60 60 60

72 130 125 180

672 1130 1325 1680

600 1000 1200 1500

63 63 63 63

105 105 105 105

0.23 0.42 0.42 0.51

Z-100-FB-600 Z-100-FB-1000 Z-100-FB-1500

15 15 15

85 85 85

72 130 180

672 1130 1680

600 1000 1500

63 63 63

105 105 105

0.29 0.40 0.44

Z-150-FB-600 Z-150-FB-1000 Z-150-FB-1500

15 15 15

90 90 90

72 130 180

672 1130 1680

600 1000 1500

110 110 110

150 150 150

0.40 0.60 0.82

Z-250-FB-600 Z-250-FB-1000 Z-250-FB-1500

15 15 15

120 120 120

72 130 180

672 1130 1680

600 1000 1500

110 110 110

150 150 150

0.40 0.60 0.82

Z-350-FB-900 Z-350-FB-1500

15 15

145 145

108 1480

1008 1680

900 1500

150 150

200 200

0.70 1.10

Part No.

A

D

ZD

Z-5-FB-265 Z-10-FB-340 Z-25-FB-300 Z-35/50-FB-390

10 10 15 15

29 39 46 60

35 80 70 85

300 420 370 475

265 340 300 390

Z-100-FB-285 Z-150-FB-350 Z-250-FB-390 Z-350-FB-600

15 15 15 15

85 90 120 145

75 50 90 100

60 400 480 700

285 350 390 600

AZ

Stroke

Stroke

D1

D1

D2

Kg.

D2

Kg.

40 40 50 66

76 80 83 102

0.15 0.21 0.25 0.43

85 92 125 172

118 141 166 236

0.29 0.44 1.10 2.40

Notes: The bellows should not be compressed below the ZD dimension or extended beyond the AZ dimension.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications subject to change without notice.

48


Other types of Protective Bellows PVC Round Bellows Many possible dimensions. No tool costs for dipped bellows. Installation of steel flanges possible. Insertion of wire rings possible. Zippers can be sewn in. Standard or made to order options. For shaft sizes 15mm to 250mm.

Round Textile Bellows Reliable protection from contaminants. Suitable for external applications. Individual elements sewn together larger extension and greater compression. Optional external guides and expansion locks.

Special Fabric Round Bellows Abrasion proof. Stable up to 800째C radiating heat. Resistant to: acid, oil and weather. Pressure resistant through re-enforcement with wire rings or spirals. Many different material options are available, please contact us for more information.

Rubber Disk Bellows Absolutely leakproof - individual rubber disks are bonded together. High resistance to mechanical stress. Weather proof & resistant to UV radiation.

Leather Round/Conical/Square/ Pyramid Shaped Bellows Made to order sizes. Fulfills even extremely difficult requirements. Treated industrial grade leather. Protection against water, oil, welding sparks, cutting swarfs etc. Highly flexible and resistant to aging.

Steel Telescopic Sheet Bellows Hinged telescopic sheets. Reliable protection against large quantities of swarf. No glued connections. High linear speeds possible. Rust and acid resistant telescopic sheets. Individual telescopic sheets easy to replace. Also available with complete sealing against cooling emulsions if required.

Homogen Bellows Standard widths: 200-400mm. Lengths 33mm (min) to 200mm (max). Single layered material offering: easy mobility; holds it's shape; high linear speed; effective protection for guide ways.

Rigid Steel Telescopic Sheet Bellows Permanent pressure from the steel sheets. No glued connections - welded under tension. High linear speeds possible. Impervious to liquids. Rust and acid resistant telescopic sheets. Various shapes available. Also available with complete sealing against cooling emulsions if required.

Box Bellows Ideal for increased work safety as moving parts are covered and for greater dimensional stability.

Telescopic Steel Covers Tightly sealed against oil, coolant and swarf. Choice of shapes and dimensions. Minimum maintenance required. Individual guide variation. High linear speed. Walk-on versions available. Specifically developed wiper systems. Construction and development with CAD. Highest precision through laser and numerically controlled manufacturing. Guaranteed precision for repeat orders. Special damping and buffer systems for medium to high speeds.

Polygonal Bellows The standard polygonal are dimensioned hexagonally. Plastic coated material provides protection against oil, cooling emulsions, water and dust, as well as being fluid tight and providing resistance to welding sparks & radiant heat.

Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets and further information 49


Enquiry Form for Protective Bellows

Please photocopy this page, complete with as much information as possible, then fax or email to T.E.A. for a quotation. Fax: 07-4129 2437 Email: sales@tea.net.au Company:

Date: Contact Name: Ph:

Fax:

Email:

Type of protective bellow required: c Indoor use

Qty:

c Outdoor use

Material:

c Humidity

Inside diam. D1:

c Dryness

Inside diam. D2: c Heat

Minimum compressed length: (Excluding cuff lengths)

c Dust/sand c Welding splashes

Maximum extended length: (Excluding cuff lengths)

c Saltwater

Maximum diam. of convolutions D3:

Special Features available on request: Internal support c rings for horizontal application External tie straps c for vertical application c Binder on convolution joins, inside & outside c Longitudinal zipper, straight or spiral

c Rust action

Cuff length L1:

c Abrasive action

Cuff length L2:

c Magnetic

Shaft diam. passing through convolutions:

c Vacuum

Working environment:

c Chips large

Other details:

c Chips small

c Double stitch on cuff connections c Flange connections, one end / both ends c Single cuff c No cuff

c Coolant type c Oil type

Working Temperature: Min. =

L1 D1

L2

Max. = Average =

D2 D3

50


Angle Joints - Threaded Stem & Rivet Stud Style Ball socket - Steel with a minimum tensile strenth of Rm 500 N/mm2 Ball stud - Steel with a minimum tensile strength of Rm 600 N/mm2, ball hardened Also available (on request): Stainless steel 1.4305 and 1.4571, Ball socket hardened, Galvanised D4 Ball

A

D3

D2

1

H1

L2

D

Ba

ll

L3

Threaded Stem - Shape C

E

D6

L1

B1

D5

D7 18째

A

Rivet Stud - Shape B

D4 Ball

D3

D2

1

L2

L4

B2

H2

D

Ba

L3

ll

E

D5 18째

* Data available for other sizes, security clips and sealing rings. Please go to www.tea.net.au

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

51

D6


Rod End Male Type - Forged

B C1

d2

d1

d

L L1 L2

• • • •

Insertion type With grease nipple Male thread Material: Body: Zinc plated steel Ball: Bearing steel Insert: Outer race lined with bronze liner

d3

Ordering example: POS = metric size ARE = imperial size L = left hand thread add to P/N eg. POS-5-L Dimensions in mm Load Rating kN

Part No.

d

d3

d2

C1

B

d1

L

L1

L2 Min.

POS 5

5

M 5x0.8

16

6

8

7.70

41

33

20

13

3.25

5.70

.013

POS 6

6

M 6x1.0

18

6.75

9

8.96

45

36

22

13

4.30

7.20

.020

POS 8

8

M 8x1.25

22

9

12

10.4

53

42

25

14

7.20

11.6

.030

POS 10

10

M10x1.5

26

10.5

14

12.9

61

48

29

13

10.0

14.5

.055

POS 12

12

M12x1.75

30

12

16

15.4

69

54

33

13

13.4

17.0

.085

POS 14

14

M14x2.0

34

13.5

19

16.9

77

60

36

16

17.0

24.0

.14

POS 16

16

M16x2.0

40

15

21

19.4

86

66

40

15

21.6

28.5

.21

POS 18

18

M18x1.5

44

16.5

23

21.9

94

72

44

15

26.0

42.5

.28

POS 20

20

M20x1.5

50

18

25

24.4

103

78

47

14

31.5

52.5

.38

POS 22

22

M22x1.5

54

20

28

25.8

111

84

51

15

38.0

57.0

.48

POS 25

25

M24x2.0

60

22

31

29.6

124

94

57

15

47.5

68.0

.64

POS 30

30

M30x2.0

70

25

37

34.8

145

110

66

17

64.0

88.0

1.10

ARE 4

1/4"

UNF-28

19.05

7.14

9.525

8.4

49.2

39.67

25.4

12.7

2.6

4.5

.022

ARE 5

5/16"

UNF-24

22.23

8.74

11.1

11.4

58.72

47.63

31.75

15.88

4.2

8.3

.037

ARE 6

3/8"

UNF-24

25.4

10.31

12.7

13.1

61.93

49.23

31.75

19.05

6.2

13.1

.055

ARE 8

1/2"

UNF-20

33.32

12.7

15.875

17.7

78.59

61.93

38.1

22.23

7.8

16.2

.078

ARE 10

5/8"

UNF-18

38.1

14.27

19.05

21.3

85.73

66.68

41.28

28.58

12.7

24.2

.18

ARE 12

3/4"

UNF-16

44.45

17.45

22.225

24.8

95.25

73.03

44.45

34.93

18.5

33.9

.29

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

52

° »

Dynamic Static

Wt. (Kg.)


Rod End Female Type - Forged

B C1

d2

d1

d

L L1

d3

d4

L2

• • • •

Insertion type With grease nipple Female thread Material: Body: Zinc plated steel Ball: Bearing steel Insert: Outer race lined with bronze liner Ordering example: PHS = metric size AR = imperial size L = left hand thread add to P/N eg. PHS-5-L

L3 S

d5

(mm) Dimensions Load Rating kN

Part No.

d

PHS 5

5

PHS 6

Wt.

d2

C1

B

d1

L

L3

L1

L2 min.

S

d4

d5

M 5x0.8

16

6

8

7.7

35

4

27

10

9

8.5

11

13

3.25

5.70 .016

6

M 6x1.0

18

6.75

9

8.96

39

5

30

12

11

10.0

13

13

4.30

7.20 .022

PHS 8

8

M 8x1.25

22

9

12

10.4

47

5

36

16

14

12.5

16

14

7.20

11.6 .047

PHS 10

10

M10x1.5

26

10.5

14

12.9

56

6.5

43

20

17

15.0

19

13

10.0

14.5 .077

PHS 12

12

M12x1.75

30

12

16

15.4

65

6.5

50

22

19

17.5

22

13

13.4

17.0

.10

PHS 14

14

M14x2.0

34

13.5

19

16.9

74

8

57

25

22

20.0

25

16

17.0

24.0

.16

PHS 16

16

M16x2.0

40

15

21

19.4

84

8

64

28

24

22.0

27

15

21.6

28.5

.22

PHS 18

18

M18x1.5

44

16.5

23

21.9

93

10

71

32

27

25.0

31

15

26.0

42.5

.32

PHS 20

20

M20x1.5

50

18

25

24.4

102

10

77

33

30

27.5

34

14

31.5

42.5

.42

PHS 22

22

M22x1.5

54

20

28

25.8

111

12

84

37

32

30.0

38

15

38.0

57.0

.54

PHS 25

25

M24x2.0

60

22

31

29.6

124

12

94

42

36

33.5

42

15

47.5

68.0

.73

PHS 30

30

M30x2.0

70

25

37

34.8

145

15

110

51

41

40.0

50

17

64.0

88.0 1.10

AR 4

1/4"

UNF-28

19.05 7.14

9.53

8.4

42.85 4.75 33.32 19.05 9.53 9.15 11.91

12.7

2.65

4.5

.025

AR 5

5/16" UNF-24

22.23 8.74

11.1

11.4 46.04 4.75 34.93 19.05 11.1 10.3 12.7

15.88

4.2

8.3

.036

AR 6

3/8"

UNF-24

25.4 10.31 12.7

13.1 53.98 6.35 41.28 23.8

14.3 13.9 17.45 19.05

6.2

13.1 .061

AR 8

1/2"

UNF-20

33.32 12.7 15.88

17.7 70.64 6.35 53.98 30.15 19.1 18.7 22.23 22.23

7.8

16.2 .081

AR 10

5/8"

UNF-18

38.1 14.27 19.05

21.3 82.55 7.92

28.58

12.7

24.2 .190

AR 12

3/4"

UNF-16

44.45 17.45 2.23

24.8 95.25 7.92 73.03 44.45 25.4

28.58 34.93

18.5

33.9 .285

d3

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

53

63.5

38.1

22.2 21.8 25.4 25

° Dynamic Static (Kg) »


Stainless Steel Rod Ends - Forged Metric - Maintenance Free B C1

d2

B C1

d2

d

d

d2 L 1

L2

L1

L12

d3

d4

L22

L2 L3 d3

d5

Male - POS … SS

S

Female - PHS … SS

Part No.

Dimensions in mm Male

Load Ratings (kN)

Female

B

L

L1

L2 min.

L

L1

L2 min.

d4

d5

L3

S

° » Dynamic Static

6.75

9

46

36

21

40

30

12

10

13

5

11

13

7.20

7.65

24

9

12

54

42

25

48

36

16 12.5 16

5

14

14

11.6

12.9

28

10.5

14

62

48

28

57

43

20

19

6.5

17

13

14.5

18

POS 12 SS PHS 12 SS 12 M12x1.75 32

12

16

70

54

32

66

50

22 17.5 22

6.5

19

13

17

24

POS 16 SS PHS 16 SS 16 M16x2.0

42

15

21

87

66

37

85

64

28

27

8

22

15

28.5

39

POS 20 SS PHS 20 SS 20 M20x1.5

50

18

25

103

78

45

102

77

33 27.5 34

10

30

14

42.5

57

Male

Female

d

d3

POS 6 SS

PHS 6 SS

6

M6x1.0

20

POS 8 SS

PHS 8 SS

8

M8x1.25

POS 10 SS PHS 10 SS 10 M10x1.5

d2 C1 max. max.

Weight g. Size Male Female 6 20 22 8 38 47 10 55 77 12 85 100 16 210 200 20 380 420

15

22

Specifications: Body: Stainless steel SS304 Race: Stainless steel SS304C, PTFE Liners bonded to I.D. Ball: AISI 440C stainless steel, heat treated PTFE = poly tetra fluoro ethylene - self lubricating Left Hand Thread: Add “L” to prefix to indicate left hand thread eg. POS 6 L SS

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

54

1


Stainless Steel Rod Ends - Forged Inch sizes Male & Female - Right & Left Material: Housing: SS304 Ball: SS440C heat treated - bonded to housing by PTFE liner PTFE = poly tetra fluoro ethylene - self lubricating

2 2 2

Male Rod End - Right Hand Thread

Male Part No.

W

H

O

D

F2

G2

A2

E

PIM 3/16 SS .1900

.312

.250

.306

.625

1.250

1.563

.750

.4375

PIM 1/4 SS

.2500

.375

.281

.355

.750

1.562

1.937

1.000

.5156

PIM 5/16 SS .3125

.437

.344

.447

.875

1.875

2.312

1.250

.6250

PIM 3/8 SS

.3750

.500

.406

.517

1.000

1.938

2.438

1.250

.7187

PIM 7/16 SS .4375

.562

.437

.586

1.125

2.125

2.688

1.375

.8125

PIM 1/2 SS

.5000

.625

.500

.698

1.312

2.438

3.094

1.500

.937

PIM 5/8 SS

.6250

.750

.562

.839

1.500

2.625

3.375

1.625

1.125

PIM 3/4 SS

.7500

.875

.687

.978

1.750

2.875

3.750

1.750

1.312

B

Thread M .1900 UNF-32 .2500 UNF-28 3125 UNF-24 .3750 UNF-24 .4375 UNF-20 .5000 UNF-20 .6250 UNF-18 .7500 UNF-16

Maximum static Approx. load kN Wt g Radial Axial 3.0

2.11

14

4.44

2.67

23

7.56

4.0

37

12.45

5.78

55

15.79

7.34

78

20.02

10.44

123

24.02

12.45

186

33.91

17.79

295

1 1

1

Female Rod End - Right Hand Thread

Female Part No.

B

W

H

O

D

F1

G1

A1

K

X

J

L

E

PIF 3/16 SS .1900

.312 .250 .306

.625

1.062

1.375

.562

.406

.312

.312

.187

.4375

PIF 1/4 SS

.2500

.375 .281 .355

.750

1.312

1.687

.750

.468

.375

.375

.187

.5156

PIF 5/16 SS .3125

.437 .344 .447

.875

1.375

1.812

.750

.500

.437

.437

.187

.6250

PIF 3/8 SS

.3750

.500 .406 .517 1.000

1.625

2.125

.937

.687

.562

.500

.250

.7187

PIF 7/16 SS .4375

.562 .437 .586 1.125

1.812

2.375 1.062

.750

.625

.562

.250

.8125

PIF 1/2 SS

.5000

.625 .500 .698 1.312

2.125

2.781 1.187

.875

.750

.625

.250

.937

PIF 5/8 SS

.6250

.750 .562 .839 1.500

2.500

3.250 1.500

1.000

.875

.750

.312

1.125

PIF 3/4 SS

.7500

.875 .687 .978 1.750

2.875

3.750 1.750

1.125 1.000

.875

.312

1.312

For left hand thread add “L” to Part No. eg. PIF3/16 L SS All specifications are subject to change without notice.

55

Maximum static Approx. load kN Thread Wt M g. Radial Axial .1900 UNF-32 .2500 UNF-28 .3125 UNF-24 .3750 UNF-24 .4375 UNF-20 .5000 UNF-20 .6250 UNF-18 .7500 UNF-16

6.02

2.22

14

6.78

2.67

23

9.33

4.11

37

12.89

6.00

59

16.00

7.78

82

20.01

10.0

132

24.01

12.45

191

33.80

18.23

286


Right Angle Drives - Type PV - Maintenance Free • An extremely inexpensive bevel gear drive • Bevel gears: plastic • Ratio: 1:1 • Case: cast aluminium • Shafts: steel St 60 ground F

• Bearings: plastic • No axial load • All sizes generally in stock

Power in kW Part No.

Module

A

b

c

d

e

f-h6

PV 10

1.0

10

4

35

15

19.4

5

PV 15

1.5

15

5

50

20

28.4

PV 20

2.0

20

6

60

30

35

8 10

g

h

R

F

4.8

32

6

13

rpm 100

400

800

0.004

0.006

0.01

5.8

45

9

20

0.008

0.04

0.06

7

55

11

24

0.01

0.07

0.11

PV 25

2.5

25

7

70

35

41

12

9

65

12.5

26

0.03

0.12

0.22

PV 30

3.0

30

8

80

40

47.5

15

9

75

15

31

0.05

0.21

0.35

PV 35

3.5

35

9

90

45

54

18

11

85

16

35

0.08

0.35

0.65

Right Angle Drives - Type L High Precision 1:1 Bevel Gearbox with Stainless Steel Shafts • • • • • • • • •

Case: black anodized aluminium alloy Bevel Gears: steel BS 970 817 M40T Shafts: stainless steel Bearings: ball races sealed or shielded type Lubrication: Kennomax L2 Grease - packed for life Temperature Range: -20°C to +150°C Max. input speed: 3000rpm Max. backlash: 1° Torque & Speed Graph: available on request

Part No. Dimension:

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

56

L2

L3

A

40

60

80

B

40

60

80

C

20

30

40

D

10

15

20

F

25

40

55

H

12

20

30

J

4

5

5

K

15

20

25

L

4

8

12

M

M4

M5

M6

N Weight grms

L1

5

7

9

80

265

665


Right Angle Drive - Type LMA For general mechanical engineering

Type LMA available with 1or 2 output shaft • • • • •

Lightweight design Lubrication: Grease - for lifetime Ratio: 1:1 (Ratio 2:1 available for LMA60, LMA120 and LMA240) Max input speed: 1000rpm Housing: Aluminium alloy

Type Input Speed rpm 1000 800 600 400 200 100 80 60 40 20 10

LMA12 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 0.083 0.79 0.067 0.80 0.050 0.80 0.034 0.81 0.017 0.83 0.009 0.84 0.007 0.85 0.005 0.85 0.004 0.89 0.002 1.08 0.001 1.30

LMA24 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 0.204 1.95 0.164 1.96 0.124 1.98 0.084 2.00 0.043 2.03 0.022 2.07 0.017 2.08 0.013 2.10 0.009 2.25 0.007 3.13 0.005 4.34

LMA60 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 0.513 4.90 0.438 5.23 0.362 5.76 0.276 6.59 0.144 6.89 0.073 6.98 0.059 7.01 0.044 7.05 0.032 7.57 0.022 10.51 0.015 14.60

LMA120 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 1.026 9.80 0.842 10.05 0.723 11.51 0.552 13.17 0.297 14.18 0.150 14.34 0.120 14.38 0.091 14.45 0.064 15.36 0.043 20.39 0.028 27.08

LMA240 Power Output Input Torque kW Nm 2.084 19.90 1.795 21.43 1.422 22.63 0.964 23.02 0.496 23.69 0.255 24.39 0.206 24.62 0.157 24.91 0.112 26.74 0.075 35.96 0.047 45.00

Lifetime: 6000h Uniform load Continuous operation

Part No. LM A12-1 LM A12-1R LM A12-1D LM A24-1 LM A24-1R LM A24-1D LM A60-1 LM A60-1R LM A60-1D LM A120-1 LM A120-1R LM A120-1D LM A240-1 LM A240-1R LM A240-1D

i 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1

D1 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 15 15 15 17 17 17

D2 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.0 7.0 7.0 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5 10.5

H1 16 16 16 21 21 21 25 25 25 30 30 30 35 35 35

L1 20 20 20 29 29 29 35 35 35 42 42 42 50 50 50

Torque graphs available on request. All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

L2 25.0 25.0 25.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 43.5 43.5 43.5 53.0 53.0 53.0 64.0 64.0 64.0

L3 17.5 17.5 17.5 22.0 22.0 22.0 27.5 27.5 27.5 32.0 32.0 32.0 37.5 37.5 37.5

57

L4 20 20 20 17 17 17 21 21 21 29 29 29 31 31 31

L5 17 17 17 16 16 16 19 19 19 27 27 27 29 29 29

L6 16.0 16.0 16.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 27.5 27.5 27.5 32.5 32.5 32.5 40.0 40.0 40.0

L7 17 17 17 20 20 20 23 23 23 27 27 27 32 32 32

L8 23 23 23 28 28 28

L9 12 12 12 14 14 14 22 22 22 22 22 22

B 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5

Kg. 0.2 0.2 0.21 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.94 0.94 0.94 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.8 2.8 2.8


Spiral Bevel Right Angle Gearbox - Type DZ & ZP DZ and ZP right angle drives are designed for industrial applications where rotary power must be transferred between two shafts at right angles to each other.

Features: Housing - single piece aluminium alloy casting with mounting points and centering conditions. Gears - spiral bevel gears cut on GLEASON hobbing machines to ensure maximum load capacity. Nickel chrome steel gears with surface case hardened gear teeth; this ensures maximum service life while leaving the tooth core tough and flexible to resist mechanical shocks. Units are manufactured with backlash tolerances to ensure perfect gear engagement and silent operation. Shafts - manufactured in steel with 80kg/mm2 surface treatment for corrosion protection. Shaft coupling on the power take-off has ISO standard keyways (except for size 1). Bearings - large bearings in deep races. Oil Seals - oil seal rings are fitted to all models. Special seal rings for high and low temperatures are available on request. Lubrication - units are supplied already filled with lubricant. Size 1 units are filled with long-life grease, all other sizes are oil filled - use Shell Omala 100 or similar mineral oil. Table 1a shows the following information for each model: the shaft diameter, the transmission ratio, the input shaft A, the output shaft B or C, and the direction of the rotation. In accordance with accepted usage, shaft A is the input shaft, on models with a 2:1 ratio, shaft A is the fast shaft. Table 1a - Type DZ 1:1, 2:1 Size

1

2

3

4

5

Shaft O mm

Approx. Weight Kg.

Ratio

Input

Output

Part Number

8

1:1

A

B

DZ 10S 3FAB

0.28

8

2:1

A

B

DZ 12S 3FAB

0.28

8

1:1

A

B-C

DZ 11 3FABC

0.30

8

2:1

A

B-C

DZ 13 3FABC

0.30

15

1:1

A

B

DZ 20S 3FAB

1.1

15

2:1

A

B

DZ 22S 3FAB

1.1

15

1:1

A

B-C

DZ 21 3FABC

1.2

15

2:1

A

B-C

DZ 23 3FABC

1.2

20

1:1

A

B

DZ 30S 3FAB

3.4

20

2:1

A

B

DZ 32S 3FAB

3.4

20

1:1

A

B-C

DZ 31 3FABC

3.5

20

2:1

A

B-C

DZ 33 3FABC

3.5

25

1:1

A

B

DZ 40S 3FAB

5.5

25

2:1

A

B

DZ 42S 3FAB

5.5

25

1:1

A

B-C

DZ 41 3FABC

5.8

25

2:1

A

B-C

DZ 43 3FABC

5.8

35

1:1

A

B

DZ 50S 3FAB

8.1

35

2:1

A

B

DZ 52S 3FAB

8.1

35

1:1

A

B-C

DZ 51 3FABC

8.8

35

2:1

A

B-C

DZ 53 3FABC

8.8

14mm hollow input & output +5mm keyway

1:1

A

B-C

DZ505-60

0.7

25mm hollow input 25.35 splined output 6 keys

1:1

A

B-C

DZ 512-31

4.1

Special

Special

58


Table 1b shows the following information for each model: the shaft diameter, the transmission ratio, the input shaft A, the output shaft B or C, and the direction of the rotation. In accordance with accepted usage, shaft A is the input shaft, on models with a 2:1 and 3:1 ratio, shaft A is the fast shaft.

Table 1b - Type ZP 1:1, 2:1, 3:1 Size

2

Shaft O mm

Ratio

Input

Output

Part Number

Approx. Weight Kg.

14

3:1

A

B

ZP 24S 4PAB

2.0

14

3:1

A

B-C

ZP 25 4PABC

2.0

1:1

A

B-C

ZP 211-4P3V

1.9

2:1

A

B-C

ZP 213-4P3V

1.9

3:1

A

B-C

ZP 215-4P3V

1.9

19

3:1

A

B

ZP 34S 4PAB

4.5

19

3:1

A

B-C

ZP 35 4PABC

4.5

1:1

A

B-C

ZP 311-4P3V

4.4

2:1

A

B-C

ZP 313-4P3V

4.4

3:1

A

B-C

ZP 315-4P3V

4.4

24

3:1

A

B

ZP 44S 4PAB

4.6

24

3:1

A

B-C

ZP 45 4PABC

4.6

14 input & keyed hollow output

2

3

19 input & keyed hollow output

3

4

How to select the correct right angle spiral bevel gearbox for your application: Selecting the correct type of right angle spiral bevel gears is not simply a question of defining the power required in relation to rpm and the torque to be transmitted. It also involves defining the conditions under which the gear box will be used. Defining operating conditions involves taking into consideration a number of factors such as the type of operating cycles (intermittent/continuous), radial and axial loads on the shaft ends, maximum and minimum temperatures, ambient conditions (eg. dust/dirt levels), and the type of lubricant used.

To 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

select the correct sized right angle spiral bevel gear box proceed as follows: Use Table 2 to define the Service Factor for your application (Fs). Calculate the Rated Power (Pn); Pn=Pe (kW) x Fs. On Table 3 (required ratio) use the output speed and the rated power (Pn) to select the right angle gear size and transmission ratio required for your application. Check that the radial and axial load at the midpoint of the exposed shaft end does not exceed the values shown in Table 4. Check that the operating temperature does not exceed -20째C to + 80째C. If you require a 2:1 or 3:1 ratio do not use a speed multiplier with an input more than 750rpm and 500rpm respectively. If the unit is to be used in very dusty conditions, protect the oil seal against direct exposure to dust to prevent abrasive damage which might shorten the working life of the unit.

59


Table 2 Service Factor Hours of operation per day

3 0.7 0.9 1.3

Uniform Load Load with moderate shock Load with shock

8 0.9 1 1.6

12 1 1.3 1.8

24 1.3 1.8 2.3

Table 3a Torque & Power Rating for DZ & ZP 1:1 Ratio 1:1 Size Model

1 DZ 10 DZ 11

Output Torque

Nm

Output in rpm

50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000

DZ 20 DZ 21

Nm

4.7 3.9 3.3 2.8 2.3 2.0 1.8 1.7

kW

0.02 0.04 0.07 0.12 0.19 0.30 0.39 0.53

16.5 13.9 11.7 9.8 8.2 7.2 6.6 5.9

Nm kW

0.09 0.15 0.24 0.41 0.69 1.05 1.37 1.86

28.8 24.2 20.3 20.5 17.1 12.5 11.4 10.3

ZP 311

DZ 30 DZ 31

ZP 211

Nm kW

Input Power (Pn)

3

2

0.15 0.25 0.43 0.86 0.72 1.83 2.39 3.25

Nm kW

53.1 44.6 37.5 31.6 26.5 23.1 21.1 19.1

4 DZ 40 DZ 41 Nm

kW

0.28 0.47 0.79 1.32 2.22 3.38 4.42 5.99

75.7 63.7 53.5 45.0 37.9 32.9 30.1 27.2

0.40 0.67 1.12 1.89 3.17 4.82 6.30 8.54

5 DZ 50 DZ 51 Nm

kW

87.3 73.4 61.8 51.9 43.7 38.0 34.7 31.4

0.46 0.77 1.29 2.17 3.66 5.56 7.27 9.86

kW

119.5 100.5 84.5 71.0 59.7 51.9 47.5 42.9

0.63 1.05 1.77 2.98 5.00 7.61 9.95 13.48

Table 3b Torque & Power Rating for DZ & ZP 2:1 Ratio 2:1 Size Model

1 DZ 12 DZ 13

Output Torque

Nm

Output in rpm

50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000

DZ 22 DZ 23 Nm

4.0 3.4 2.8 2.4 2.0 1.7 1.6 1.4

ZP 213 Nm

kW

Input Power (Pn)

3

2

kW

0.02 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.17 0.26 0.33 0.45

14.6 12.3 10.3 8.7 7.3 6.3 5.8 5.2

0.08 0.13 0.22 0.36 0.61 0.93 1.21 1.65

DZ 32 DZ 33 Nm

kW

28.1 23.7 19.9 16.7 14.1 12.2 11.2 10.1

0.15 0.25 0.42 0.70 1.18 1.79 2.34 3.17

Nm kW

42.5 35.7 30.1 25.3 21.3 18.5 16.9 15.3

0.22 0.37 0.63 1.06 1.78 2.71 3.54 4.80

Table 3c Torque & Power Rating for ZP 3:1 Ratio 3:1 Size Model Output Torque

2

3&4

ZP 24, ZP 25, ZP 215

ZP 34, ZP 35, ZP 315, ZP44, ZP45

Nm

Output in rpm

50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000

Nm kW

Input Power (Pn) 27.5 23.1 19.4 16.3 13.7 12.0 10.9 9.9

0.14 0.24 0.41 0.68 1.15 1.75 2.29 3.10

kW 63.4 53.3 44.9 37.7 31.7 27.6 25.2 22.8

ZP 313

0.33 0.56 0.94 1.58 2.66 4.04 5.28 7.16

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

60

4 DZ 42 DZ 43 Nm

kW

71.3 59.9 50.4 42.4 35.6 31.0 28.3 25.6

0.37 0.63 1.06 1.77 2.98 4.54 5.93 8.04

Nm kW

82.3 69.2 58.2 48.9 41.1 35.8 32.7 29.6

5 DZ 52 DZ 53

0.43 0.72 1.22 2.05 3.44 5.24 6.85 9.28

kW

100.5 0.53 84.5 0.88 71.0 1.49 59.7 2.50 50.2 4.21 43.7 6.40 39.9 8.36 36.1 11.34


Table 4a Maximum Radial and Axial Loads in relation to rpm for DZ & ZP 1:1 Ratio 1:1 Size Model

Output in rpm

1 DZ 10 DZ 11 Radial Load (N) Radial Axial Axial Load (N) 50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000

139 117 98 83 70 60 55 50

94 79 66 56 47 41 37 34

3

2 DZ 20 DZ 21 Radial Axial

328 276 232 195 164 142 130 118

Axial

220 185 156 131 110 96 87 79

430 361 304 256 215 187 171 154

ZP 311 Radial

DZ 30 DZ 31 Radial

ZP 211 Radial

Axial

348 293 246 207 174 151 139 125

684 575 484 407 342 297 272 246

4 DZ 40 DZ 41 Radial

Axial

458 385 324 273 229 199 182 165

826 695 584 491 413 359 329 297

554 465 391 329 277 241 220 199

5 DZ 50 DZ 51 Radial

Axial

953 802 674 567 477 414 379 342

639 537 452 380 319 278 254 229

Axial

1102 927 779 655 551 479 438 396

736 619 520 438 368 320 293 264

Table 4b Maximum Radial and Axial Loads in relation to rpm for DZ & ZP 2:1 Ratio 2:1 Size Model

Output in rpm

1 DZ 12 DZ 13 Radial Load (N) Radial Axial Axial Load (N) 50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000

107 90 76 64 54 47 43 39

76 64 54 45 38 33 30 27

3

2 DZ 22 DZ 23 Radial Axial

276 232 195 164 138 120 110 99

168 141 119 100 84 73 67 60

DZ 32 DZ 33 Radial

ZP 213 Radial Axial

370 311 262 220 185 161 147 133

263 221 186 157 132 114 105 95

Axial

548 461 387 326 274 238 218 197

361 303 255 214 180 157 143 130

Table 4c Maximum Radial and Axial Loads in relation to rpm for ZP 3:1 Ratio 3:1 Size Model Radial Load (N)

2

3&4

ZP 24, ZP 25, ZP 215

ZP 34, ZP 35, ZP 315, ZP44, ZP45

Radial

Output in rpm

50 100 200 400 800 1400 2000 3000

Radial Axial

Axial Load (N)

357 301 253 213 179 155 142 128

199 167 141 118 99 86 79 71

ZP 313 Radial

Axial

619 521 438 368 310 269 246 222

346 291 245 206 173 151 138 124

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

61

4 DZ 42 DZ 43 Radial

Axial

696 585 492 414 348 303 277 250

422 355 299 251 211 184 168 152

5 DZ 52 DZ 53 Radial

Axial

803 675 568 478 402 349 319 289

483 406 341 287 241 210 192 173

Axial

927 779 655 551 463 403 369 333

562 473 397 334 281 244 223 202


Dimensions for Type DZ Size 1

Size 1

1

Ratio

Input

Output

Part Number

1:1

B

DZ10S 3FAB

2:1

B

DZ12S 3FAB

1:1

B&C

DZ11 3FABC

2:1

B&C

DZ13 3FABC

Output

Part Number

B

DZ20S 3FAB

B

DZ22S 3FAB

1:1

B&C

DZ21 3FABC

2:1

B&C

DZ23 3FABC

A

Size 2

Size 2

Ratio

Input

1:1 2:1

2

A

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

62


Dimensions for Type DZ Size 3

Size 3

Ratio

Input

Output

Part Number

B

DZ30S 3FAB

B

DZ32S 3FAB

1:1

B&C

DZ31 3FABC

2:1

B&C

DZ33 3FABC

Output

Part Number

B

DZ40S 3FAB

B

DZ42S 3FAB

1:1

B&C

DZ41 3FABC

2:1

B&C

DZ43 3FABC

1:1 2:1

3

A

Size 4

Size 4

Ratio

Input

1:1 2:1

4

A

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

63


Dimensions for Type DZ & DZ Specials Size 5

Size 5

Ratio

Input

Output

Part Number

B

DZ50S 3FAB

B

DZ52S 3FAB

1:1

B&C

DZ51 3FABC

2:1

B&C

DZ53 3FABC

1:1 2:1

5

A

DZ Special

Special

Ratio

Input

Output

Part Number

1:1

A

B&C

DZ505-60

Special All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

64


Dimensions for Type DZ Specials & Type ZP Special

Special

Ratio

Input

Output

Part Number

1:1

A

B&C

Ratio

Input

Output

Part Number

B

ZP 24S 4PAB

3:1

A B&C

ZP 25 4PABC

DZ512-31

Special

Size 2 Type ZP

Size 2

2 All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

65


Dimensions for Type ZP Size 2 Hollow Output

Size 2

Ratio

Input

Output

1:1 2:1

ZP 211 4P3V A

B&C

3:1

2

Part Number

ZP 213 4P3V ZP 215 4P3V

Size 3

Size 3

Ratio

Input

3:1

A

3

Output

Part Number

B

ZP 34S 4PAB

B&C

ZP 35 4PABC

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

66


Dimensions for Type ZP Size 3 Hollow Output

Size 3

Ratio

Input

Output

1:1 2:1

ZP 311 4P3V A

B&C

3:1

3

Part Number

ZP 313 4P3V ZP 315 4P3V

Size 4

Size 4

Ratio

Input

3:1

A

4 All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Output

Part Number

B

ZP 44S 4PAB

B&C

ZP 45 4PABC

67


Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Type BG

General Spiral bevel gearboxes BG incorporate the most modern advances in bevel gearbox design and construction. These gearboxes offer an extensive range of ratios together with an excellent power to size relationship as well as low noise levels even at high speed operation.

1. Construction Features - The gearbox, which is made in cast iron, is of cuboid design with all external faces machined and with threaded fixing positions on each face (useable depth of threaded hole = twice the diameter). - Input and output covers and housings are supplied with two location spigot diameters (h7) together with threaded fixing holes (except size BG75) for possible co-axial fixing. - The alloy steel spiral bevel gears are cut in the GLEASON system, case hardened, tempered and lapped to the exact mounting position. - Input and output shafts are manufactured in hardened and tempered steel with all surfaces ground. - Input and output shaft tolerance (j6). Hollow shaft tolerance (H7). - All shafts supplied with threaded end to UNI 3221 - DIN 332. - Keyways to UNI 6604 - DIN 6885. On request and dependent upon speed type BG spiral bevel gearboxes may be assembled with minimum backlash. Due to the quality of the gears and machining tolerances, an overall efficiency of between 94 & 97% can be expected. The modular construction of BG spiral bevel gearboxes permits up to six input/output shafts (except ratio 1:1).

2. Lubrication BG spiral bevel gearboxes are supplied grease lubricated for input speeds up to 1000rpm, for higher speeds or on request oil lubrication is available. In this case the gearboxes will be supplied with a filler/breather plug, level indicator and drain plug. Filler, level and drain positions are indicated as follows: Filler/breather plug Level indicator plug Drain plug Motorised spiral bevel gearboxes, reversing bevel gearboxes and disengaging bevel gearboxes are usually oil lubricated. For high speed and/or high ambient temperature conditions it may be necessary to apply external cooling. Please consult T.E.A.

68


3. Construction Types Execution

Description

Type

Page

Execution

Type

2 output shafts Reduction type 0

A

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

BS

78

98

4

BH

0

BHC

80

BHS

0

1 output shaft Reduction type

2 hollow output shafts -Keyway (BH) -Shrink Disks (BHC) - Splined (BHS) 2 fast shafts Counter rotating

100 102

0

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

See www.tea.net.au for BHS type

5

0

AS

1 slow shaft Single projection 2 fast shafts Counter rotating Reduction type Ratio1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

0

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

Page

0

1 output shaft Reduction type

AD

Description 0

0

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

82

- Hollow output with keyway (AH) - Shrink disks (AHC) - Splined hollow output (AHS)

84

C

1 slow shaft Single projection With bearing housing Reduction type 0

104

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1,

0

AH AHC

0

1 slow shaft Counter rotating 0

86

DR

0

AHS

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

88

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

0

AP

2 output shafts Reinforced (thick) Reduction type 0

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

106

0

90

DX

Speed Increaser (X type) 2 counter rotating output shafts

108

0

Ratio 1:1, 1:1.5, 1:2, 1:3, 1:4, 1:5

0

AX

Speed increaser (X type) 2 output shafts Input shaft larger

IEC Motor flange adaptor 0

M...

92

0

Ratio1:1.5, 1:2

Ratio 1:1, 1:2, 1:3, 1:4, 1:5

110

0

B

1 slow shaft Double projection 2 fast shafts Counter rotating Reduction Type

112

Spiral bevel gearboxes with multiple shafts 0

090째

94

I0 D0

0

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1

reversing gear type I0 and disengaging gear type D0

113

0

Ratio 1:1, 1:2

0

BD

1 slow shaft Single projection 2 fast shafts Counter rotating Reduction type

0

Co-axial reversing gear

96

IC

0

Ratio 1:1, 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1 The bottom shaft is the input shaft. Arrows indicate the direction of rotation relevant to the rotation of the input shaft.

69

0

Ratio 1:1

113


4. Selection The selection assumes the following conditions: (for other conditions please refer to page 71) - Life rating: 20000 hours - Prime mover: Electric motor - Duty factor: Uniform load - Rotation: Right and left hand - Service time: 8 hours a day - Duty factor: 1 start/hour - Ambient conditions: Temperature 20°C - altitude <1000m above sea level

Unit Size

BG12

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

Input rpm 2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10

Ratio 1:1 Power Torque input output kW Nm 4.00 2.99 2.44 1.76 1.52 1.22 0.87 0.23 0.13 0.026

13.1 13.8 14.9 16.2 17.4 18.7 20.0 21.8 23.6 24.9

Ratio 1:1.5 Power Torque input output kW Nm – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

Ratio 1:2 Power Torque input output kW Nm 2.09 1.55 1.22 0.88 0.77 0.61 0.44 0.12 0.07 0.01

13.7 14.1 14.9 16.2 17.4 18.7 20.0 21.7 23.6 24.9

Ratio 1:3 Power Torque input output kW Nm 0.77 0.60 0.49 0.35 0.30 0.25 0.17 0.04 0.03 0.01

7.5 8.1 8.9 9.7 10.5 11.1 11.5 11.2 12.7 13.1

Ratio 1:4 Power Torque input output kW Nm – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

Ratio 1:5 Power Torque input output kW Nm – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

2800

21.15

69.2

9.57

46.9

8.46

55.3

3.12

30.6

2.69

35.2

1.72

28

2000 1500 1000 800 600

15.52 11.92 8.13 6.59 5.01

71.1 72.9 74.6 75.5 76.4

6.99 5.36 3.65 2.95 2.25

48.1 49.0 50.1 50.7 51.4

6.15 4.68 3.20 2.59 1.96

56.4 57.2 58.6 59.4 59.9

2.28 1.74 1.18 0.95 0.72

31.2 31.8 32.3 32.6 33.0

1.5 1.13 0.77 0.62 0.47

27.5 27.6 28.3 28.5 28.8

1.25 0.94 0.64 0.51 0.39

28.4 28.7 29.2 29.3 29.6

400 100

3.41 0.90

78.0 81.7

1.51 0.39

52.0 53.9

1.33 0.35

60.7 63.4

0.48 0.13

33.5 34.3

0.32 0.08

29 29.7

0.26 0.07

29.7 30.4

50

0.46

82.8

0.20

54.6

0.17

64.0

0.07

34.5

0.04

29.9

0.04

30.6

10

0.09

83.9

0.04

55.2

0.04

64.6

0.01

34.8

0.01

30.2

0.01

30.9

2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10

23.24 17.39 13.48 9.35 7.62 5.86 4.00 1.07 0.55 0.12

76.1 79.6 82.4 85.8 87.3 89.5 91.7 97.8 100.1 103.3

15.82 11.54 8.83 6.05 4.88 3.72 2.52 0.65 0.33 0.07

77.7 79.4 80.8 83.0 83.8 85.4 86.7 89.8 91.0 92.4

10.60 7.79 5.92 4.02 3.25 2.46 1.66 0.42 0.21 0.04

69.4 71.3 72.4 73.5 74.3 75.1 76.1 76.5 76.8 77.3

4.58 3.35 2.55 1.73 1.40 1.07 0.72 0.18 0.09 0.01

44.9 46.0 46.8 47.5 48.3 48.6 49.4 50.5 50.7 50.9

5.07 3.69 2.81 1.91 1.53 1.17 0.78 0.20 0.10 0.03

66.4 67.6 68.6 69.9 70.3 71.1 71.8 72.9 74.1 74.8

3.47 2.61 1.99 1.35 1.09 0.85 0.57 0.14 0.08 0.01

56.8 59.9 60.8 61.7 62.4 64.2 64.8 66.8 67.3 68.6

2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10

53.04 39.52 30.68 21.19 17.29 13.26 9.10 2.47 1.17 0.26

173.4 180.9 187.2 194.7 198.3 203.4 208.3 222.1 227.1 234.6

30.55 22.88 17..81 12.22 10.14 7.80 5.33 1.30 0.65 0.13

149.7 157.3 162.8 168.4 174.0 177.8 183.4 187.2 190.9 194.7

20.15 14.95 11.44 7.80 6.37 4.81 3.25 0.78 0.39 0.13

132.3 137.2 139.7 142.2 144.8 147.2 149.7 154.7 159.7 162.2

9.53 7.49 5.72 3.87 3.16 2.41 1.64 0.42 0.21 0.04

93.6 102.9 104.7 106.7 108.5 110.5 112.3 116.0 117.9 119.8

7.05 5.38 4.08 2.76 2.24 1.69 1.14 0.30 0.16 0.03

92.3 98.5 99.8 101.1 102.3 103.6 104.7 109.8 112.3 114.7

4.58 3.43 2.61 1.77 1.44 1.11 0.74 0.20 0.09 0.03

74.8 78.6 79.8 81.1 82.4 84.2 85.5 87.3 88.6 89.8

2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10

113.36 83.33 64.22 43.94 35.88 27.43 18.85 4.94 2.47 0.52

371.2 382.2 392.6 403.0 411.4 419.9 430.3 453.7 462.1 477.1

75.01 53.3 40.82 27.82 22.62 17.29 11.70 3.12 1.56 0.26

355.5 366.6 374.4 381.9 390 396.5 404.3 423.1 432.1 442

38.87 28.60 21.97 15.08 12.22 9.23 6.24 1.69 0.78 0.17

254.8 261.3 267.8 275.6 279.15 283.4 288.6 300.3 304.2 310.7

19.6 14.3 10.9 7.49 6.06 4.62 3.12 0.81 0.40 0.08

192.4 197.6 200.2 205.4 208 211.2 214.5 221.6 223.6 227.5

15.99 11.70 8.84 5.98 4.81 3.64 2.47 0.65 0.33 0.07

209.3 213.2 217.1 221.0 222.3 225.5 229.4 236.6 238.5 241.8

12.87 9.36 7.15 4.81 3.90 2.99 1.95 0.52 0.26 0.05

210.6 215.1 219 222.3 224.9 227.5 229.4 236.6 239.2 241.8

70


Unit Size

Input rpm

Ratio 1:1 Power Torque input output kW Nm

2800 2000 1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50

133.3 98 75.5 51.7 42.2 32.3 22.1 5.85 2.99

BG42

BG55

BG75

Ratio 1:1.5 Power Torque input output kW Nm

437 450 461 474 484 494 507 534 546

81.2 59.8 45.8 31.5 25.6 19.5 13.3 3.5 1.8

399 412 421 434 441 447 459 481 489

Ratio 1:2 Power Torque input output kW Nm 45.7 33.5 25.7 17.6 14.3 10.9 7.4 1.9 0.9

Ratio 1:3 Power Torque input output kW Nm

299 308 316 324 329 334 339 354 361

23.1 16.9 12.8 8.8 7.1 5.4 3.6 0.9 0.48

228 231 235 242 244 248 252 261 264

Ratio 1:4 Power Torque input output kW Nm 17.8 13 9.8 6.7 5.4 4.1 2.8 0.7 0.33

234 238 243 248 251 254 257 265 268

Ratio 1:5 Power Torque input output kW Nm 12.8 9.3 7.1 4.8 3.9 2.9 1.9 0.5 0.26

211 216 219 222 225 228 230 237 239

10

0.65

562

0.4

498

0.2

365

0.09

268

0.07

272

0.05

242

1500 1000 800 600

162.5 111.8 91 68.9

992 1023 1040 1053

115.3 78.9 64.2 49

1057 1086 1105 1123

57.7 39.7 32.2 24.4

706 729 738 749

26 18 14.6 11

481 497 502 508

25.3 17.2 14 10.6

621 636 644 651

19.5 13.2 10.6 8.1

595 607 614 621

400 100

47.5 12.6

1092 1161

34 8.9

1161 1235

16.7 4.4

768 803

7.5 1.95

517 541

7.2 1.8

662 688

5.4 1.4

629 654

50

6.5

1186

4.5

1264

2.2

822

1.04

547

0.9

694

0.78

660

10

1.3

1223

0.9

1300

0.46

836

0.21

556

0.20

706

0.13

670

1500 1000 800 600 400 100 50 10

344 240 196 151 104 27 14 3

2109 2202 2264 2301 2371 2552 2612 2700

191 133 108 82 56 14 8 1.5

1754 1817 1847 1888 1937 2061 2102 2161

142 98 79 60 42 10 5 1.1

1723 1778 1808 1841 1884 1992 2028 2076

96 66 53 42 27 7.8 3.9 0.7

1772 1823 1850 1881 1918 2015 2046 2088

60 42 34 25 17 3.9 2.6 0.5

1466 1505 1525 1547 1576 1645 1667 1698

42 29 23 18 12 2.6 1.3 0.26

1278 1309 1323 1342 1364 1418 1435 1457

If the direction of rotation is bi-directional, reduce the performance data by 30%.

5. Selection Procedure When working conditions are different from those in the selection table, service factors must be considered. The service factors are as following: H : Service Time Hours / days

24

18

12

8

4

2

1

H

1.25

1.18

1.1

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

Theoric time

60,000

40,000

20,000

15,000

10,000

5,000

2,000

L

1.3

1.15

1

0.95

0.9

0.85

0.8

L : Life rating

C : Duty factor

No. of starts / hour irregular

1

5

20

60

120

Uniform

1

1

1.4

1.8

2.2

2.7

Moderate shock

1

1.4

1.8

2.2

2.7

3.2

Heavy shock

1.4

1.8

2.2

2.7

3.2

3.8

The required torque (M) will be multiplied with the above mentioned factors to obtain the value of calculation torque (MU) to use to select a spiral bevel gearboxes of the correct size. MU = M x (H x L x C) All specifications are subject to change without notice.

71


6. Thermal Ratings (PT) The thermal rating is that power that can be applied at the input of the bevel gearboxes, working continuously at an ambient temperature of 20째 C, such as to maintain the lubrication temperature under 100째 C. Size

BG12

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

BG42

BG55

BG75

Input Power PT (kW)

1.5

3

6

10

16

20

35

60

Input RPM

2800

2800

2800

2800

2000

2000

1500

1000

.

When conditions are different from those above, it will be necessary to consider the following factors. Ambient temperature factor : T Temperature 째C

-10

0

10

20

30

40

50

T

1.3

1.25

1.15

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

Duty Factor: ED % duty factor

100

80

60

40

20

ED

1

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

Thermal rating (PT) should e multiplied by the above factors to obtain the actual thermal rating (PTR): PTR = PT x (T x ED) When the continuous absorbed rating in the bevel gearbox is over the actual thermal rating (PTR), excess heat must be removed by artificial cooling.

7. Weight Weights are referred to units construction type A, ratio 1:1. Size Weight (kg)

BG12

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

BG42

BG55

BG75

2.5

6

12

22

37

57

87

255

8. Lubricants (Quantities) Lubricants are referred to units type A, ratio 1:1. Size

BG12

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

BG42

BG55

BG75

Grease (1)

0.15

0.22

0.35

0.9

1.7

3.5

5.5

14

Oil (1)

0.1

0.15

0.22

0.6

1.1

2.2

3.6

9

Al specifications are subject to change without notice.

72


9. Shaft Loads 9.1 Radial Loads (daN)

Ratio

Size

BG12

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

BG42

BG55

BG75

PR1

1:1, 1:2, 1:3

55

85

140

200

400

600

1000

2500

PR1

1:4, 1:5

-

60

85

140

200

400

600

1000

PR2

ALL

90

150

220

350

700

1000

1500

3500

9.2 Axial Loads

Ball bearing Ratio

Size

BG12

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

BG42

BG55

BG75

PR1

1:1, 1:2, 1:3

30

45

70

110

170

270

500

1000

PR1

1:4, 1:5

-

40

45

70

110

170

270

500

PR2

ALL

50

70

130

170

340

480

680

1500

Taper roller bearing Ratio

Size

BG12

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

BG42

BG55

BG75

PR1

1:1, 1:2, 1:3

30

65

100

150

240

400

780

1600

PR1

1:4, 1:5

-

45

65

100

150

240

400

780

PR2

ALL

-

100

180

250

500

700

1000

2200

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

73


10. Series Connection When spiral bevel gearboxes type A or AH are mounted in a series, the maximum through torque (Nm) mentioned below must not be exceeded.

For model A and AH Size

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

BG42

BG55

BG75

Max. through torque

60

120

300

500

700

1600

4000

If working conditions are greater than above, type AP gear boxes must be used which have larger shaft diameters. For model AP Size

BG19

BG24

BG32

BG38

BG42

BG55

BG75

Max. through torque

120

300

500

700

1000

3000

6500

11. Order Code 11.1 Spiral Bevel Gearboxes BG Series Size (12-19....55-75) Type (A - AS....AH 180- AH 270) Ratio (1/1-2/1......1/1.5-1/2) Mounting position (10-11....40-41) Lubrication (0=Oil - G=Grease)

11.2 Spiral Bevel Gearboxes with IEC Motor Flange Adapter BG

M___

Series Size (12-19....55-75) Type (A - AS....AH 180- AH 270) Ratio (1/1-2/1......1/1.5-1/2) Mounting position (10-11....40-41) Lubrication (0=Oil - G=Grease) Motor size (63....160)

12. Parts Lists Bevel Gearbox Type A, AD, AS, AH, AP & with IEC Motor Flange Adapter (M) Please visit our website - www.tea.net.au - to download Parts Lists or contact us directly. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

74


Installation & Maintenance Attention: please read following information carefully before mounting or executing maintenance: When mounting the bevel boxes in the machines where they are used it is needed to check very well the alignment of the gearshafts with the machine shafts. When alignment is not correct, the mechanical parts, especially the mounted bearings, will be overcharged and lifetime will be shortened. The bevel boxes have to be mounted on a flat and rigid surface to prevent movements, oscillations or vibrations and to , see page 72. To mount the bevel boxes with threaded holes in the cubic box, flanges and hubs should be used. Note: The threaded holes in the cubic box are interfering with each other therefore it is only advisable to use the mounting holes only on one surface, see figure at the side.

Before mounting the units, the mounting surfaces from the gear unit as well as from the machine are to be cleaned carefully to prevent incorrect mounting. When mounting a transmission element, for example an elastic coupling, sprocket etc. for which it is needed to heat up the female part, this temperature should not exceed 100째C. The bevel boxes are supplied lubricated with grease for use at an input speed up to and not exceeding over 900 1000rpm. In all other cases oil lubrication must be used. If units are to be used with oil lubrication it has to be mentioned at ordering and these units will be supplied with mounted filling and breather plug, oil level plug and with a drain plug. The reversing and disengaging units are normally supplied with oil lubrication to satisfy the presence of needle roller bearings. All units with oil lubrication are supplied without lubricant.

, see page 72. must be according to the diagram on page 76. Filling or draining has to be carried out at stationary units for obvious reasons of safety. Regarding filling instructions concerning quantities of lubricants refer to table on page 72. In every case the level of oil in the gearbox, must be according to the diagram on page 76. Attention, do not overfill or completely fill the units, this reduces the lifetime of a gearbox. Overfilling would cause overheating and overpressure which causes oil leakage, and the gears as well as the bearings may be damaged.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

75


Oil filled spiral bevel gears boxes should be checked regularly for the loss of lubricant through the flanges or through the oil seals. These units are supplied with oil level plugs and the oil level can be checked at the oil level sight glass. Checking and filling should only be carried out on stationary units. The oil changing intervals depend on the use of the gearbox, but normally the lubricant should be changed every 10,000 hours. Every unit assembled is checked with a quick test to confirm correct mounting, however it is advisable not to excessively overcharge the units for the first few working hours. These spiral bevel gearboxes reach their best efficiency after a running-in period of several hours. If full load is applied during these first few hours it will shorten, by a little, the total lifetime. During this running-in period a higher noise level and overheating can occur - these will decrease after 20-30 working hours. To obtain a longer shelf life, if these gearboxes are to be stored in corrosive or salty atmospheres, they should be adequately protected. The shafts should be turned regularly 180oC so the lubricant is maintained in the upper part of the gearbox as well to help prevent corrosion. Shafts and if necessary other surfaces should be covered with a thin oil to prevent rusting. If the gearbox is not to be used for a long period of time, it is recommended prior to using, the oil be drained and replaced with new oil to the correct level.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

76


Anti-corrosive Surface Treatment “Niploy” CHARACTERISTICS: The Niploy Process is a purely chemical nickel-plating system which has a high phosphorous content. It can provide treated surfaces with a uniform coating which is not porous and highly resistant to corrosion and wear. A uniform thickness will provide for: - Excellent adhesion - Complete protection of internal areas (hollows, holes, etc.) - Absolute respect for basic roughness - No need for a final machine work (grinding) The Niploy Process platings have good adhesion to the substrate. Unlike galvanic platings, such as chrome, they will not tend to “exfoliate”. If the coating is mechanically damaged or the basic material is characterised by macroporosity, the coating will prevent corrosion from spreading.

RESISTANCE: The plating produced by the Niploy Process treatment will provide for a high resistance to corrosion thanks to the structure of coating and the presence of phosphorus. It may be used in food and drug application sectors instead of stainless steel. The table below shows a comparison of chrome treatments and the resistance after 120 hours of exposure to salt spray.

Hard Chrome (n. pores) Niploy Process (n. pores)

Depth (micron) 25 50 250 16 6 1

10 Numerous 30

75 8 0

It’s wear resistance is equal to hard chrome. The Niploy Process treatment provides excellent resistance to high thermal shocks from + 200 °C to 192 °C without any cracking. Thermal treatments at high temperatures (280 °C, 350 °C) will harden the coating from 500 HV up to values similar to the hardness of chrome (1000 - 1050 HV).

FIELD OF APPLICATION: It is recommended to apply the Niploy process to increase surface hardness and improve wear resistance. It may also be used for brazing tin - lead alloys and as a base for coating precious metals. This will involve considerable economic advantages for the user, such as: longer life of pieces, weight decrease by replacing a heavier alloy with a lighter nickel-plated one, lower costs thanks to the utilisation of a nickel-plated material instead of a more expensive one (stainless steel).

Main industrial sectors that could use the Niploy Process treatment: - Food / Pharmaceutical - Automobile / Motorbikes - Electronics / Telecommunications - Petrochemistry - Textile - Oleodynamic / Pneumatic - Mechanical / Precision Engineering - Aircraft / Aerospace / Naval

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

77


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type A DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

78


Mounting Positions - A

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

79

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AD DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

80


Mounting Positions - AD

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

81

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AS DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

82


Mounting Position - AS

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

83

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AH DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

84


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AHC DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

86


Mounting Positions - AHC

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

87

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AHS DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

88


Mounting Positions - AHS

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

89

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AP DIMENSIONS

Use type 'AP' to transmit greater through torque that type 'A' (see page 78). The gear rating remains as type 'A'.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

90


Mounting Position - AP

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

91


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type AX DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

92


Mounting Positions - AX

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

93


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type B DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

94


Mounting Positions - B

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

95

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type BD DIMENSIONS

Note: This gearbox may be used as an inline gearbox by removing D2 shaft.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

96


Mounting Positions - BD

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

97

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type BS DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

98


Mounting Positions - BS

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug

* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

99


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type BH DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

100


Mounting Positions - BH

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

101

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type BHC DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

102


Mounting Positions - BHC

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

* Normally grease lubricated For special applications, please contact T.E.A.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

103

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type C DIMENSIONS

Type CR are for Type C bevel gearboxes that have ratios other than 1:1 Type CX are for Type C bevel gearboxes which have the blind cover mounted opposite the high speed shaft.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

104


Mounting Positions - BHC

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

105

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type DR DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

106


Mounting Positions - DR

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

107


Spiral Bevel Gearbox Type DX DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

108


Mounting Positions - DX

Upper diagrams : Side view Lower diagrams : Top view

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

109

Breather plug Level plug Drain plug


Spiral Bevel Gearbox with IEC Motor Flange Adaptor DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

110


The dimensions that are not indicated and the mounting positions can be taken from the tables of the standard types.

65

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

111


Multishaft Bevel Gearboxes Modular design permits supplementary gears and shafts for all ratio except 1:1

MULTI SHAFT TYPE

Multiple Shaft combinations for all other Spiral Bevel Gearbox types are also available, please go to our website www.tea.net.au to view or download data sheets, or contact us directly.

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

112


90 Degree Reversing Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Type I0 90 degree reversing spiral bevel gearboxes are available with ratio 1:1 and 2:1 only. By moving the control lever from fully engaged through neutral to fully engaged in the opposite direction the 90 degree shaft will change rotation. Operation of the lever is normally carried out by hand and should only be done when the unit is stationary. Engaging position is usually indifferent, and reversing spiral bevel gearbox is called FP (Full Position). On request these gearboxes can be supplied with the option SP (Single Position) which means a single engaging position on 360 degrees. Reversing bevel gearboxes are produced in sizes BG32, BG42 and BG55 only. Selection corresponds to input kW and output torque as shown on pages 70-71, reduced by 30%. Dimensions and mounting positions are the same as for Type A (Pages 78-79) and Type DR (pages 106-107)

90 Degree Reversing Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Type D0 Disengaging spiral bevel gearboxes are manufactured in ratios 1:1, 2:1, & 3:1 only. Operation of the lever disengages the 90 degree shaft. This is normally carried out by hand and should only be done when the unit is stationary. Disengaging spiral bevel gearboxes are produced in sizes BG32, BG42 and BG55 only. Selection corresponds to input kW and output torque as shown on pages 70-71, reduced by 15%. Dimensions and mounting positions are the same as for Type A (Pages 78-79) and Type DR (pages 106-107).

Co-Axial Reversing Spiral Bevel Gearboxes Type IC Co-axial spiral bevel gearboxes are manufactured in ratios 1:1 only. By moving the control lever from fully engaged through neutral to fully engaged in the opposite direction the co-axial shaft will change rotation. On request co-axial reversing spiral bevel gearboxes can be supplied with a third projection shaft at 90 degrees. Operation of the lever is normally carried out by hand and should only be done when the unit is stationary. Co-axial reversing bevel gearboxes are produced in sizes BG32, BG42 and BG55 only. Selection corresponds to input kW and output torque as shown on pages 70-71, reduced by 30%. Dimensions and mounting positions are the same as for Type A (Pages 78-79) and Type DR (pages 106-107). All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

113


Worm Gearmotors Type

rpm

Torque Nm

Service Factor SF

Ratio

Type

Gearbox Code

rpm

Torque Nm

Service Factor SF

Ratio

Gearbox Code

0.55kW Motor MTT 80A-4 code M3400055 u MTT 0.09kW Motor MTT 56B-4 code M3400009 u MTT 1370 r/min 1.58 Amps 1320 r/min 0.43 Amps FRT 28-56

14 18 20 25 28 35 50 70 93 140 200

26 22 19 18 17 15 11 9.1 7.1 5 3.6

0.3 0.5 0.6 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.8 1.8 2.5 >3 >3

100 80 70 56 49 40 28 20 15 10 7

VRT02810005** VRT02808005** VRT02807005** VRT02805605** VRT02804905** VRT02804005** VRT02802805** VRT02802005** VRT02801505** VRT02801005** VRT02800705**

FTA 85-80

5.5 8

525 394

1.0 1.3

252 176

VTA08525208** VTA08517608**

FTA 70-80

11

325

0.9

126

VTA07012608**

FRT 85-80

14

210

1.0

100

VRT08510008**

18 20 25 28

163 155 135 126

1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5

80 70 56 49

VRT07008008** VRT07007008** VRT07005608** VRT07004908**

25 28 35 50

125 114 99 75

1.0 1.1 1.4 1.9

56 49 40 28

VRT06005608** VRT06004908** VRT06004008** VRT06002808**

50 70 93 140 200

75 57 44 32 23

1.1 1.1 1.7 2.4 >3

28 20 15 10 7

VRT05002808** VRT05002008** VRT05001508** VRT05001008** VRT05000708**

FRT 70-80

FRT 60-80

0.018kW Motor MTT 63B-4 code M3400018 u MTT 1350 r/min 0.68 Amps FTA 50-63

8 11

118 98

1.2 1.2

176 126

VTA05017606** VTA05012606**

FRT 50-63

14 18 20

57 51 45

0.8 1.1 1.4

100 80 70

VRT05010006** VRT05008006** VRT05007006**

FRT 40-63

25 28 35 50 70 93 140 200

38 35 30 23 18 14 10 7.3

1.0 1.2 1.4 2.1 2.1 3.0 >3 >3

56 49 40 28 20 15 10 7

VRT04005606** VRT04004906** VRT04004006** VRT04002806** VRT04002006** VRT04001506** VRT04001006** VRT04000706**

50 70 93 140 200

23 18 14 10 7

0.9 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4

28 20 15 10 7

VRT02802806** VRT02802006** VRT02801506** VRT02801006** VRT02800706**

FRT 28-63

FRT 50-80

0.72kW Motor MTT 80B-4 code M3400075 u MTT 380 r/min 1.93Amps Amps 1380 r/min 1.93 FTA 85-80

8 11

537 449

0.9 1.1

176 126

VTA08517608** VTA08512608**

18 20

239 225

1.2 1.3

80 70

VRT08508008** VRT08507008**

FRT 70-80

25 28

180 171

1.0 1.1

56 49

VRT07005608** VRT07004908**

FRT 60-80

35 50 70

135 102 79

1.0 1.4 1.5

40 28 20

VRT06004008** VRT06002808** VRT06002008**

93 140 200

60 43 31

1.2 1.7 2.4

15 10 7

VRT05001508** VRT05001008** VRT05000708**

FRT 85-80

0.37kW Motor MTT 71B-4 code M3400037 u MTT FRT 50-80 1370 r/min 1.11 Amps FTA 70-71

5.5

346

0.9

252

VTA07025207**

FTA 60-71

8 11

251 215

1.0 1.1

176 126

VTA06017607** VTA06012607**

1.1kW

FRT 70-71

14 18

130 110

1.0 1.4

100 80

VRT07010007** VRT07008007**

FTA 85-90S

18 20 25

106 97 85

1.0 1.3 1.5

80 70 56

VRT06008007** VRT06007007** VRT06005607**

FRT 85-90S

FRT 50-71

28 35

76 65

1.0 1.1

49 40

VRT05004907** VRT05004007**

FRT 40-71

50 70 93 140 200

48 38 20 21 15

1.0 1.0 1.4 2.1 2.9

28 20 15 10 7

VRT04002807** VRT04002007** VRT04001507** VRT04001007** VRT04000707**

FRT 60-71

FRT 70-90S

FRT 60-90S

Motor SLA90S-4 code M3400110 u HLA 1425 r/min 2.6 Amps 15 22

505 404

1.0 1.3

95 63

VTA08509509** VTA08506309**

25 28

285 246

1.1 1.3

56 49

VRT08505609** VRT08504909**

35 50 70

212 158 122

1.1 1.4 1.6

40 28 20

VRT07004009** VRT07002809** VRT07002009**

70 93 140 200

116 91 63 45

1.1 1.4 2.1 2.5

20 15 10 7

VRT06002009** VRT06001509** VRT06001009** VRT06000709**

u = Motor Flange, 5 = B5, 7 = B14A ** = Refer product code specification

114


Worm Gearmotors Type

rpm

Torq ue Nm

Service Factor SF

Ratio

Gearbox Code

Mounting Mountingarrangements arrangements

Motor SLA90L-4 code M3400150 u HLA 1430 r/min 3.4 Amps

1.5kW FTA 85-90 L FRT 85-90 L

FRT 70-90 L

FRT 60-90 L

22

550

1.0

63

VTA08506309**

29 35

330 295

1.0 1.4

49 40

VRT08504909** VRT08504009**

50 70 93 140

215 166 128 88

1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0

28 20 15 10

VRT07002809** VRT07002009** VRT07001509** VRT07001009**

93 140 200

125 86 61

1.0 1.5 1.8

15 10 7

VRT06001509** VRT06001009** VRT06000709**

(S) Standard Multi-mount

2.2kW Motor SLA 100LA-4 code M3400220 u HLA 1455 r/min 4.7 Amps FRT 85-100 L

FRT 70-100 L

3.0kW

319 246

1.0 1.3

28 20

VRT08502810** VRT08502010**

93 140 200

187 129 92

1.0 1.4 1.8

15 10 7

VRT07001510** VRT07001010** VRT07000710**

Terminal Box Position

Motor SLA100LB-4 code M3400300 u HLA 1455 r/min 6.2 Amps

FRT 85-100 L FRT 70-100 L

4.0kW

50 70

70 93

335 255

1.0 1.1

20 15

VRT08502010** VRT08501510**

140 200

176 126

1.0 1.3

10 7

VRT07001010** VRT07000710**

Motor SLA112M-4 code M3400400 u HLA 1455 r/min 8.2 Amps

FRT 85-112 M

140 200

235 168

1.1 1.5

10 7

VRT08501011** VRT08500711**

F, V

u = Motor Flange, 5 = B5, 7 = B14A ** = Refer product code specification

Service Factors Where the required service factor is not known it can be calculated using the following formula and tables: Service factor SF = F1 x F2 x F3 F1 selection

F2 selection

F3 selection

Hours per day

Uniform load

Variable load

Shock load

Starts per hour

F2

Expected lifetime

F3

3 to 4

0.8

1.0

1.5

6.0

1.0

10 000

0.8

8 to 10

1.0

1.2

1.8

60.0

1.2

15 000

1.0

10 to 24

1.4

1.6

2.0

120.0

1.4

20 000

1.4

115

F1, V1


Worm Gearmotors Dimensional Drawings FRT

Gearbox Dimensions Type FRT 28 - 56 - 63 FRT 40 - 63 - 71 FRT 50 - 63 - 71 - 80 FRT 60 - 71 - 80 - 90S - 90L FRT 70 - 71 - 80 - 90S - 90L - 100L FRT 85 - 80 - 90S - 90L - 100L - 112M

A

A1

AA

AA1

B

B1

C

D 1)

F1

G1

H

H1

H2

I

K

M1

N1

P1

R1

S

S1

S2

V12)

Z2

80

54

97

71

53

44

30

14

7

55

40

57

13

28

58

16.3

5

77

65

27.5

6

2.5

M6x10 (4)

8

100

70

121.5

90

71

60

41

18

7

60

50

71.5

15

40

71

21.8

6

88

75

38.5

7

2.5

M6x10 (4)

9

120

80

144

104

85

70

49

25

9

70

60

84

20

50

83

27.3

8

100

85

46.5

8

2.5

M8x10 (4)

10

144

100

174

130

100

85

60

25

9

80

72

102

22

60

94

28.3

8

110

95

57

10

3

M8x15 (8)

12

172

120

205

153

108

90

60

28

11

95

86

119

26

70

117

31.3

8

132

115

57

12

3

M8x15 (8)

12

206

140

238

172

130

100

61

35

13

110

103

135

33

85

134

38.3

10

160

130

67

15

3

M10x20 (8)

14

Alternative shaft sizes available. Please contact T.E.A. FTA 28 to 50 have 4 holes at 45째 offset from top. FTA 60 to 85 have holes at 0째 offset from top.

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

116


Worm Gearmotors Dimensional Drawing FTA

Type AC

FRT 28 FRT 40 FRT 50

FRT 60

FRT 70

FRT 8

3)

- 56 - 63 - 63 - 71 - 63 - 71 - 80 - 71 - 80 - 90S - 90L - 71 - 80 - 90S - 90L -100L - 80 - 90S - 90L - 100L - 112M

Total Weight 3)

Motor Dimensions ØF

B5

ØF

B14

HB

LB

(kg)

120 130

120 140

80 90

100 110

172 189

3.3 4.3

130 145

140 160

90 105

110 117

189 210

4.3 6.2

130 145 165

140 160 200

90 105 120

110 117 137

189 210 250

4.3 6.2 10

145 165 180 180

160 200 200 200

105 120 140 140

117 137 157 157

210 250 271 297

6.2 10 17 18

145 165 180 180 203

160 200 200 200 250

105 120 140 140 160

117 137 157 157 170

210 250 271 297 340

6.2 10 17 18 24

165 180 180 203 221

200 200 200 250 250

120 140 140 160 160

137 157 157 170 192

250 271 297 340 388

23 17 18 24 31

Gear motor weight includes oil.

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

117

Type

FTA 50 - 63

FTA 60 - 71

FTA 70 - 71 - 80

FTA 85 - 80 - 90S - 90L

Total Weight

Gearbox dimensions

3)

l1

K1

Y1

Z3

(kg)

32

167

105

9

8.5

40

184

120

10

12.8

40 50

207 232

120 140

10 12

14.6 11

50

249

140

12

23


Worm Gearmotors Options and Extras Flange Mount

FRT

Type

Part Number

ØF

P

ØG

P2

U

ØR

V

Z

28 40 40 50 50

F F FL F FL

V530-203 V531-203 V531-203-001 V532-203 V532-203-001

80 110 110 125 125

50 60 60 70 70

53 69 99 93 123

23 28 58 44 74

68 87 87 90 90

4 4 4 5 5

7 9 9 9 9

(4) (4) (4) (4) (4)

7 6 8 10 10

50 60 60 70 85

FV F FL F F

V532-203-002 V539-203 V539-203-002\1 V533-203 V534-203

160 180 180 200 210

110 115 115 130 152

90.5 86 116 111 111

41.5 26 56 51 50

130 150 150 165 175

11 5 6.5 5 5

9 (4) 11 (4) 11 (4) 13 (4) 13 (4)

13 10 10 14 16

Torque Arms

Part Number

Dimensions

FRT Basic 28 40 50 60 70 85

V530-202-004 V531-202-004 V472-202-004 V539-202-004 V533-202-004 V474-202-004

Bushed V530-202-002 V531-202-002 V472-202-002 V539-202-002 V533-202-002 V474-202-002

A 138 168 185 235 295 313

118

B

C

D

E

F

F1

G

80 100 100 150 200 200

38 43 60 55 65 75

55 60 70 80 95 110

65 75 85 95 115 130

10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 20.5

10 10 10 10 10 20

7 7 9 9 9 12

l 4 4 4 6 6 6

l1 15 15 15 20 20 25


Worm Gearmotors Options and Extras Output Shafts

Part Number

Dimensions

FRT Single ended

Double ended

A

B

C

D

D1

E

L

M

28 40 40 (alt) 50 50 (alt)

V470-901-014 V471-901-018 V471-901-019 V472-901-025 V472-901-024

V470-902-014 V471-902-018 V471-902-019 V472-902-025 V472-902-024

58 80 80 95 95

1 10 10 10 10

30 40 40 45 45

14 18 19 25 24

M5 M8 M8 M8 M8

22 22 28 28

60 82 82 98 98

31 50 50 55 55

60 70 70 (alt) 85 85 (alt)

V479-901-025 V473-901-028 V473-901-030 V474-901-035 V474-901-032

V479-902-025 V473-902-028 V473-902-030 V474-902-035 V474-902-032

117 117 117 119 119

10 10 10 10 10

50 60 60 70 70

25 28 30 35 32

M8 M8 M8 M10 M10

30 34 34 38 38

120 120 120 122 122

60 70 70 80 80

Ordering Codes:

VRT 1-3

040

080

4-6

7-9

Positions 1 to 3 Series VRT = FRT wormbox VTA = FRT wormbox with FXA single stage helical box

063

S

10-12

13-14 Positions 13 and 14 Mounting arrangement S = Standard type F = Flange mount type F RHS F1 = Flange mount type F LHS V = Flange mount type FV RHS V1 = Flange mount type FV LHS

Positions 4 to 6 Gearbox size 028, 040, 050, 060, 070, and 085 Positions 7 to 9 Gearbox ratio Also available on request: FVS planetary variator (variable speed model) FVR mechanical variator (variable speed model) TLE & TLI torque limiting device (external fit & internal fit) SL travel limiting device (with limit switch)

Positions 10 to 12 Gearbox Input Size 056 = 56 B5 05A = 56 B14A 063 = 63 B5 06A = 63 B14A 071 = 71 B5 07A = 71 14A 080 = 80 B5 08A = 80 B14A

090 = 90 B5 09A = 90 B14A 100 = 100 B5 10A = 100 B14B 112 = 112 B5 11A = 112 B14A

For information regarding extra options listed above, installation and maintenance, and general characteristics, please contact T.E.A. All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

119


Worm Reduction Gearboxes - small precision, multi-shaft arrangement Metric Types M1, M2 & M3 • Ratios from 6:1 to 100:1, Torque 1 to 10 Nm • Drilled and tapped mounting holes on top and bottom Drawing Ref.

M1

M2

M3

A B C

38.89 31.75 19.05

52.37 44.45 25.40

77.77 63.50 34.92

D E F

29.36 15.87 19.05

41.3 22.22 25.40

60.32 31.75 44.45

G H J

6.35 11.10 3.96

9.52 15.87 4.75

9.52 25.40 4.75

KØ L MØ

3.00 19.05 4.00

4.00 22.22 6.00

7.00 25.40 9.00

N O

19.05 M3x5dp

14.27 M4x5dp

25.40 M5x6dp

• Flush fitting bearing caps easy to install • Input shafts mounted on precision ball bearings

Mounting holes "O" top-bottom faces Shaft arrangement "A" illustrated

Performance data: M1 Wormwheel

M2 AntiBacklash

Phosphor Bronze

Maximum input speed rpm Maximum friction torque at input g/cm (oz/in) Maximum continuous output torque Nm

Phosphor Bronze

AntiBacklash

Phosphor Bronze

AntiBacklash

10000

3000

10000

3000

10000

3000

5 (0.069)

60 (0.833)

12 (0.16)

250 (3.47)

20 (1.12)

1250 (17.3)

See graphs

0.009 (0.8333)

See graphs

0.17 (1.5)

See graphs

0.29 (2.6)

Backlash at outputs - minutes

30

Approx. weight kg. (oz.)

M3

30

0.08 (2.75)

0.08 (2.75)

30

0.2 (7)

0.2 (7)

0.6 (21)

0.6 (21)

Available Ratios Type

6

7.5

M1 M2 M3

X X

X

8

8.33 10 12 12.5 15 16 16.66 17 20

X

X

X

X X

X

X X X

X X

X

X

X

X

21.5 24 25

X X

X

30 32 36

48 50 60

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Shaft Arrangements (plan view)

Input shafts shown

40 42 45

Output shafts shown

These standard gearboxes are available in many shaft arrangements and ratios. For an application requiring minimum backlash, spring loaded wormwheels may be incorporated. The input shaft is mounted in precision ballraces, the output shaft in self-lubricating bearings and the final assembly packed with grease Duckhams Keenomax L2' (AFS 135) having a temperature range of 34° to + 150°C. When ordering please state worm reduction gearbox type, ratio, shaft arrangement and standard or anti-backlash version. Eg. Type 1, ratio 6:1, shaft arrangement "A", anti-backlash.

120

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

70 90 100

X

X

X

X

X


Angular Gear 200X

Small dimensions with maximum torque

- Angular gear for manifold applications - Aluminium housing, anodised - Ratio 1:1 - 7 sizes, side length from 32mm to 60mm - Steel bevel wheels, surface hardened - Maintenance-free - Permitted operating temp. 0 to +60°C - Backlash 3° + 1° - Lifetime under total load and input speed of 500rpm is 1000 hours with a duty cycle of 20% - Duty cycle 20% (at 5 min.) - Smooth running, silent - Simple screw mounting

o

Øm

Øm p

Ø r (2x)

a

Ø f (8x)

d

t

h

j

u

g

a

h

I

d

b

Ø s (4x)

c

n

a

q

t

i

j

Ø e (2x)

c

h

h

b

a d d

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

5


Mijno Precision Planetary Gearheads * * * * * *

Satellite gears are case hardened to 58-62 HRC and ground to class DIN 6 to 5 AGMA 12 to 13. All satellite gears feature Rotaxe® tooth profile modification. This reduces friction, increase lifetime and offers quiet operation. All bearings are oversized and purchased from the world’s most reliable suppliers. All gears rotate on full-complement needle bearings instead of caged needle bearings for longer life and greater load capacity. All backlashes are guaranteed for rated gearhead life. All torque ratings are conservative, calculated to provide the longest lifetime possible. Type MRP Max torque 290Nm Economical range dedicated to servo applications requiring precision & robustness with economy. Backlash - from 15 to 8 arc-mins. Can be mounted to any motor appropriate for its torque rating. Ratios 3:1 to 100:1 Maintenance every 15,000 hours.

Type MNT Heavy duty servo grade. Backlash - 8 to 1 arc-min. High radial and axial load capability. Quiet and reliable. Life rating: 15,000 hours. Ratios 3:1 to 100:1 Also available for low temperatures and wash down environments. Stainless Steel version (MSS) see below.

Type MRA Heavy duty servo grade right angle series servo gearbox. Backlash - 15, 10 or 3 arc-min. Easy 1 minute clamping to any motor shaft. Double output shafts, quad or hollow shafts also available. Ratios 3:1 to 100:1 Maintenance every 15,000 hours.

Type MSS the all Stainless Steel version • All stainless steel construction: flanges, housing, shafts etc. • Heavy duty servo grade for applications requiring precision and robustness. • Backlash 10 to 1 arc-mins. Backlash specification holds for rated life. • Food grade lubrication. Type BDB Unique gearhead family dedicated to servo applications requiring compactness and high torques. Backlash - 5 to 1 arc-min. Ratios 4:1 to 220:1 High torsional stiffness IP65 Maintenance every 15,000 hours.

• Suitable for wash-down applications. (IP 67 standard). • Available in sizes 080, 115 & 140. • In-line version - MSS (pictured above). • MSS dimensions same as MNT 080, 115 & 140. • Right angle version - MRS. • MRS dimensions are the same as MRA 080, 115 & 140. • Dedicated to the food, chemical and pharmaceutical industries.

Please contact T.E.A. Transmissions for additional information & data sheets or download them directly from our web site www.tea.net.au

126 2


Planetary Gearboxes type EP The EP Series planetary gearboxes are manufactured in particular for the following applications: • • • • • • • • •

Machine tools Machines for woodworking Transfer machines Printing machines Automatic machines for packaging Automation Mecanical hands Silk-screen process machines Linear guides

The EP series is available in 5 sizes (55, 75, 90, 120 and 155), with 1 or 2 reduction stages, with two types of output shaft (A and T) and three types of output flange (A, T and Q). Housing: made of special nitrided steel to assure strength, high reliability and long life. Flanges: input and output flanges made of aluminium and available in several versions.

Planetary gearbox

EP

Shafts: made of hardened tempered alloy steel.

Precision REP series also available Please contact T.E.A. Transmissions

and

Gears: made of case hardened and tempered alloy steel, with ground toothing. Bearings: high quality and suitably sized to assure long life and noiseless working.

Size

Steps

Coaxial

RatIo

Ouput shaft

Output flange

Input shaft

Input flange

55

2

C

100

A

A

AE..

P..

55 75 90 120 155

1 2

C

3 - 100

A T

A T

See tables

See tables

The selection of Planetary Gearbox EP series has to be made after the checking of service factor. For intermittent or continuous duty it is necessary to apply the following formulas: 1) Intermittent duty: Tm * i * RD * fc T2N cycle/h 1000/2000 1000 2) Continuos duty: Tm * i * RD * fc /0.65T2N

fc

1

2000/3000

1.2/1.5

where: Tm = nominal torque of motor (Nm) i = transmission ratio of gearbox RD = dynamic efficiency fc = cycle factor (see table)

For application with operation cycles based on frequent accelerations it is necessary to verify that max. acceleration torque is equal or inferior to the T2A value shown in the tables.

Backlash ( max.) Max. backlash measured on output shaft by torque equals to 2% of the nominal torque value with input shaft blocked.

127

1.5/2


Radial and axial load on output shaft The table of performances shows admissi ble axial and radial load values expressed in N for different speeds and for a bearing life of 20,000 hours.Radial load FR2 calculations have been based on loads applied to the center line of the output shaft extension. For a different distance it is possible to calculate the new maximum admissible load by using formula and coefficient shown in the table.

a b

EP 55 27 18

EP 75 46 32

Lubrication EP gearboxes are supplied filled with long-life lubricant and do not require any maintenance. When ordering it is important to specify the exact mounting position.

Symbols and unit of measure i n1 nom n1 max T2N T2A T2S LpA Rd Lh FR2 FA2

Nominal ratio Nominal input speed [min -1] Maximum input speed [min -1] Intermittent output torque [Nm] Maximum acceleration output torque [Nm] Maximum emergency output torque [Nm] Noise level dB(A) at 3000 min -1 Dynamic efficiency Bearing life [h] Output radial load [N] at 100 min -1 Output axial load [N] at 100 min -1

Rt

Torsional rigidity [ Nm/ arcmin] Standard backlash [arcmin] Min. moment of inertia [kg.cm2] Max. moment of inertia [kg.cm2]

max

J min J max

128

EP 90 56 39

EP 120 77 52

EP 155 95 64


1.5 Technical data

EP 55

See pages 130-131 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd

3 12 22 44

4 14 24 48

5 16 24 48

2 7 12 22 44

10 10 20 40

9 14 24 48

12 16 28 56

15 16 28 56

16 16 28 56

20 16 28 56

100 12 n1nom 22 n1max 44 LpA 0.0736 0.0626 0.0587 0.0553 0.0536 0.0734 0.0722 0.0718 0.0620 0.0617 0.0580 0.0552 0.0551 0.0536 0.0536 0.0535 0.0535 Lh 0.0909 0.0799 0.0759 0.0726 0.0709 0.0906 0.0894 0.0889 0.0791 0.0789 0.0751 0.0723 0.0722 0.0707 0.0707 0.0707 0.0706 FR2 1.0 0.9 1.0 0.9 FA2 0.96 0.93 max

EP 75

25 16 28 56

28 16 28 56

35 16 28 56

40 16 28 56

50 16 28 56

70 14 24 48

1

2 4000 5000 < 70 20000 300 450 15' 20'

See pages 132-133 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd

3 22 40 80

4 28 45 90

5 32 50 100

2 7 28 45 90

10 20 40 80

9 26 50 100

12 32 60 120

15 36 60 120

16 36 60 120

20 36 60 120

100 22 n1nom 45 n1max 90 LpA 0.1707 0.1163 0.1063 0.0927 0.0860 0.1597 0.1549 0.1538 0.1159 0.1153 0.1017 0.0927 0.0925 0.0860 0.0859 0.0857 0.0857 Lh 0.2166 0.1622 0.1522 0.1386 0.1319 0.2056 0.2008 0.1997 0.1618 0.1612 0.1476 0.1386 0.1384 0.1319 0.1318 0.1316 0.1316 FR2 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0 FA2 0.96 0.93 max

EP 90

25 36 60 120

28 36 60 120

35 36 60 120

40 36 60 120

50 36 60 120

70 30 50 100

1

2 4000 5000 < 70 20000 1800 1400 15' 20'

See pages 134-135 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd

3 50 80 160

4 55 90 180

5 60 100 200

2 7 55 90 180

10 50 80 160

9 65 100 200

12 70 110 220

15 75 120 240

16 75 120 240

20 75 120 240

100 55 n1nom 90 n1max 180 LpA 0.5159 0.3371 0.2742 0.2247 0.2008 0.5193 0.4995 0.4925 0.3272 0.3233 0.2651 0.2215 0.2202 0.1992 0.1985 0.1980 0.1978 Lh 0.7271 0.5483 0.4854 0.4359 0.4120 0.7305 0.7305 0.7036 0.5384 0.5345 0.4763 0.4326 0.4314 0.4103 0.4097 0.4092 0.4090 FR2 9.0 7.5 9.0 7.5 FA2 0.96 0.93 max

EP 120

25 75 120 240

28 75 120 240

35 75 120 240

40 75 120 240

50 75 120 240

70 65 100 200

1

2 4000 5000 < 70 20000 2600 2000 15' 20'

See pages 136-137 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd

3 120 190 400

4 150 240 500

5 180 290 600

2 7 150 220 460

10 100 180 380

9 150 240 500

12 180 290 600

15 220 350 700

16 220 350 700

20 220 350 700

100 110 n1nom 200 n1max 400 LpA 2.0027 1.1339 0.8557 0.6244 0.5047 1.9802 1.8962 1.8552 1.0736 1.0505 0.8023 0.6048 0.5977 0.4951 0.4918 0.4895 0.4883 Lh 4.1528 3.2840 3.0058 2.7745 2.6548 3.1885 3.1045 3.0636 2.2819 2.2589 2.0106 1.8132 1.8061 1.7035 1.7002 1.6979 1.6967 FR2 FA2 32 28 32 30 28 0.96 0.93 max

EP 155

25 220 350 700

28 220 350 700

35 220 350 700

40 220 350 700

50 220 350 700

70 170 270 540

1

2 3000 4000 < 70 20000 4500 4000 15' 20'

See pages 138-139 Steps

Steps

i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd

1

2

3 4 5 7 10 9 12 15 16 20 28 35 40 50 70 100 25 240 320 380 300 220 320 400 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 350 250 420 540 600 480 400 480 600 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 560 460 880 1140 1260 1000 850 1000 1250 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1120 920

1

n1nom n1max LpA 6.2232 3.6993 2.8162 2.1069 1.7391 6.0151 5.8025 5.7092 3.4671 3.4118 2.6324 2.0320 2.0135 1.7026 1.6934 1.6864 1.6827 Lh FR2 (AA) 13.9214 11.3975 10.5144 9.8051 9.4373 13.7133 13.5057 13.4074 11.1653 11.1100 10.3306 9.7302 9.7117 9.4008 9.3916 9.3846 9.3809 F R2 (TT) FA2 (AA) 60 50 60 50 FA2 (TT) 0.96

0.93

129

max

2 3000 4000 < 70 20000 6500 5300 3250 2650 15' 20'


EP55 Dimensions

AA

TT Output flange

18 14

1.5

6.5

Output flange

M4x8

18 14

1.5

M5x10

4x4

12 k6

12 k6

AE

AE

4x4

5.5

M4x10

M4x10 5.5

35 h7 44 55

S

C1 T

1 62.5 87

Steps

C1 T

2 81.5 106

4.5

32 h7

S

C1

40 55

T

1 63.5 87

Steps

AE= 6 - 6.35 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 9.52 - 11

C1 T

2 82.5 106

AE= 6 - 6.35 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 9.52 - 11

TQ

AQ

Output flange

Output flange

1.5

18 14

18 14

8

13

5.5

1.5

8

13

5.5

4x4 AE

12 k6

12 k6

AE

4x4

74

M4x10

74

M4x10 36 g6 55 65

12 C1

S

T

1 56 87

Steps

C1 T

2 75 106

36 g6 55 65

12 C1

S

T

1 56 87

Steps

AE= 6 - 6.35 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 9.52 - 11

C1 T

2 75 106

AE= 6 - 6.35 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 9.52 - 11

Technical data EP 55 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N

3 12

4 14

T2A

22

24

T2S Jmin Jmax

44

48

Rt Rd

5 16

2 7 12

10 10

9 14

12 16

15 16

24

22

48

44

16 16

20 16

20

24

28

40

48

56

28

28

28

56

56

56

25 16

28 16

35 16

28

28

28

56

56

56

40 16

50 16

70 14

100 12

28

28

24

22

n1nom n1max

1

56

56

48

44

LpA

0.0736

0.0626

0.0587

0.0553

0.0536

0.0734

0.0722

0.0718

0.0620

0.0617

0.0580

0.0552

0.0551

0.0536

0.0536

0.0535

0.0535

0.0909

0.0799

0.0759

0.0726

0.0709

0.0906

0.0894

0.0889

0.0791

0.0789

0.0751

0.0723

0.0722

0.0707

0.0707

0.0707

0.0706

Lh FR2

0.9

FA2

1.0

0.9

1.0

0.96

0.93

130

max

2 4000

5000 < 70 20000 300 450 15'

20'


EP55 Lmax

Input flange

H

O

AE H7

O

D

V

S1 S

R H7 I F

R H7 Q I

Input shaft Input flange

AE 6

R

6.35

7

8

9

9.52

11

F

Q

V

I

(H7)

O

S

S1

D

L max

H

L max

H

L max

H

L max

H

L max

H

L max

H

L max

P01*

60

=

=

43.82

22

4.5

10

3

22

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

P02*

=

60

80

66.67 38.1

5.5

10

3

32

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

P03*

=

60

80

63

40

5.5

10

3.5

32

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

P04

=

70

90

75

60

6.5 10.5 3.5

32

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

P05

105

=

=

85

70

6.5 10.5 3.5

7.5

P06

=

80

110 98.42 73.02

P07

=

95

120

P08

=

98

130

115

95

9

P09

=

116 160

130

110

9

P10 *

60

=

=

39

26

P11*

60

=

=

42

P12*

65

=

=

P13*

80

=

P14*

60

P15 P16*

H

32

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

3.5

35

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

4

32

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

11.5

4

32

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

31.5

8.5

12

4.5

32

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

4.5

10

3

26

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

32

4.5

10

3

32

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

46

32

4.5

10

3.5

32

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

=

65

50

5.5

10

3.5

32

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

=

=

39

20

4.5

10

2.5

20

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

=

75

100

90

60

5.8

12

3.5

32

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

60

=

=

45

30

3.5

14

7

30

34

11

34

11

34

11

34

11

34

11

34

11

100

80

6

11

6.5 11.5

9

34

11

P17

=

60

82

70

50

4.5 16.5

32

36.5

13.5

36.5

13.5

36.5

13.5

36.5

13.5

36.5

13.5

36.5

13.5

36.5

13.5

P18

=

60

80

60

50

M4 10.5 3.5

32

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

P19*

60

=

=

36

25

4.5

25

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

P20

=

60

82

70

50

5.5 10.5 3.5

32

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

30.5

7.5

P21*

60

=

=

46

30

4.5

10

3

30

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

P22

=

60

80

70.71

36

4.5

10

2

32

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

P23

=

62

85

70

50

5.5 15.5 3.5

32

35.5

12.5

35.5

12.5

35.5

12.5

35.5

12.5

35.5

12.5

35.5

12.5

35.5

12.5 9

10

8 3

P24

=

75

100

90

70

5.8

12

3.5

32

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

P25

=

70

95

85

55

5.8

12

3.5

32

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

P26*

=

60

80

65.5

34

5.5

10

3.5

33

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

30

7

95

50

6.5

12

3.5

32

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

M4

9

2.5

32

29

6

29

6

29

6

29

6

29

6

29

6

29

6

M3

11

4

32

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

P27

=

80

110

P28

=

60

80

P29

60

=

=

66.67 38.1 45

30

P30

=

70

95

85

60

5.8

12

3.5

32

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

32

9

P31

=

62

85

70

50

M4

11

3.5

32

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

31

8

To mount motorititis is necessary necessary totoremove * To *mount thethe motor remove the gearbox flangePlease (see assembly drawing 2 the gearbox flange. go to www.tea.net.au on page 141). for assembly drawings.

131


EP75 AA

TT Output flange

28 25

1.5

8

Output flange

M5x10

28 25

1.5

M5x10

5x5

16 k6

14 k6

AE

AE

5x5

6.5

M5x12

M5x12 5.5 T

1 78.5 114.5

Steps

C1 T

2 101 137

4

52 h7 62 72

S

C1

T

1 80 114.5

Steps

AE= 6-6.35-7-8-9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14

C1 T

2 102.5 137

AQ 1.5

28 25

AE= 6-6.35-7-8-9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14

TQ Output flange

10

18

40 h7 52 72

S

C1

5.5

28 25

1.5

Output flange

10

18

5.5

5x5 AE

14 k6

16 k6

AE

5x5

97

M5x12

97

M5x12 52 g6 72 85

16 C1

S

T

1 68.5 114.5

Steps

C1 T

2 91 137

52 g6 72 85

16 C1

S

T

1 68.5 114.5

Steps

AE= 6-6.35-7-8-9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14

C1 T

2 91 137

AE= 6-6.35-7-8-9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14

Technical data EP 75 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd

2

3 22

4 28

5 32

7 28

10 20

9 26

12 32

15 36

16 36

20 36

25 36

28 36

35 36

40 36

50 36

70 30

100 22

n1nom

4000

40 80

45 90

50 100

45 90

40 80

50 100

60 120

60 120

60 120

60 120

60 120

60 120

60 120

60 120

60 120

50 100

45 90

n1max LpA

0.1707

0.1163

0.1063

0.0927

0.0860

0.1597

0.1549

0.1538

0.1159

0.1153

0.1017

0.0927

0.0925

0.0860

0.0859

0.0857

0.0857

0.2166

0.1622

0.1522

0.1386

0.1319

0.2056

0.2008

0.1997

0.1618

0.1612

0.1476

0.1386

0.1384

0.1319

0.1318

0.1316

0.1316

Lh FR2

5000 < 70 20000 1800

3.0

FA2

3.5

3.0

3.5

0.96

0.93

132

1

max

2

1400 15'

20'


EP75 Input flange

Lmax H

O

AE H7

O

D

V

S1 S

R H7 I F

R H7 Q I

Input shaft AE

Input flange 6 R

6.35

7

8

9

9.52

11

12

12.7

14

L L L L L L L L L L max H max H max H max H max H max H max H max H max H max H

F

Q

V

I

(H7)

S1

D

P01*

60

=

=

43.82

22

4.5 10

3

22

35 4.5

35

4.5

35 4.5

26

6.5

26 6.5

35

6.5

26 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

P02*

=

60

80 66.67 38.1 5.5 10

3

32

35 4.5

35

4.5

35 4.5

26

6.5

26 6.5

35

6.5

26 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

O

S

P03*

=

60

80

63

40

5.5 10 3.5

32

35

4.5

P04

=

70

90

75

60

6.5 10.5 3.5

32

35.5 5

35.5

5

P05

105

=

=

85

70

6.5 10.5 3.5

32

35.5

35.5

5 35.5

P06 P07

=

80 110 98.42 73.02

35

36 5.5

=

95 120 100

80

6.5 11.5 4

32

36.5

6 36.5

P08

=

98 130 115

95

9 11.5 4

32

36.5

6

116 160 130

110

9

32

37 6.5

37

6.5

37 6.5

28

8.5

28 8.5

37

37 8.5

37

26

35 4.5

35

4.5

35 4.5

26

6.5 26

6.5

35 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

4.5

6.5 26

6

11 3.5

35 4.5

5

36

5.5

35 4.5 35.5 5 5

36 5.5

26

6.5

26.5

7

26.5

7 26.5

27

6

36.5

6 27.5

36.5 6

36.5

6

7.5

26 6.5 26.5 7 7

27 7.5

35

6.5

35.5

7

35.5

7 26.5

36

8

27.5

8 36.5

27.5 8

27.5

8

7.5

26 6.5 26.5 7 7

27 7.5

35

6.5

35.5

7 35.5

7

35.5

7

35.5

7 35.5

7

35.5

7

36

7.5

36

8

27.5

8 36.5

36.5 8

27.5

8

7.5

36 7.5

8

36.5

8 36.5

8

36.5 8

36.5

8 36.5

8

P09

=

P10*

60

=

=

39

26

4.5 10

3

P11*

60

=

=

42

32

4.5 10

3

32

35 4.5

35

35 4.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

P12*

65

=

=

46

32

4.5 10 3.5

32

35

4.5

35 4.5

35

4.5

26 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

P13*

80

=

=

65

50

5.5 10 3.5

32

35

4.5

35 4.5

35

4.5

26 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

P14*

60

=

=

39

20

4.5 10 2.5

20

35

4.5

35 4.5

35

4.5

26 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

P15

=

75 100

90

60

5.8 12 3.5

32

37

6.5

37 6.5

37

6.5

28 8.5

28

8.5

37 8.5

28

8.5

37 8.5

37

8.5

37 8.5

P16*

60

=

=

45

30

3.5 14

7

30

39 8.5

39

39 8.5

12 4.5

8.5

28 8.5

37

8.5

8.5

8.5

30 10.5 30 10.5 39 10.5 30 10.5 39 10.5 39 10.5 39 10.5

P17

=

60

82

70

50

4.5 16.5 8

32

41.5 11 41.5 11 41.5 11 32.5 13 32.5 13 41.5 13 32.5 13 41.5 13 41.5 13 41.5 13

P18

=

60

80

60

50

M4 10.5 3.5

32

35.5

P19*

60

=

=

36

25

4.5 10

25

P20

=

60

82

70

50

5.5 10.5 3.5

32

P21*

60

=

=

46

30

4.5 10

3

30

2

3

5 35.5

35 4.5 35.5 5

35

5 4.5

35.5

5

35 4.5

35

4.5

35

35 4.5

35.5

5 26.5

35 4.5 35.5 5

26 26.5

7

26.5

6.5 26 7

35 4.5

26

35

26 6.5

7 35.5 6.5

26.5 7

6.5 26

7

35 6.5 35.5

7

26.5 26

7 35.5 6.5

26.5 7

7

35 6.5 35.5

35.5 35

7 35.5

7 35.5 6.5 7

7

35 6.5 35.5

7

6.5

35 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

6.5

35 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

P22

=

60

80 70.71

36

4.5 10

P23

=

62

85

50

5.5 15.5 3.5

P24

=

75 100

90

70

5.8 12 3.5

32

37

37 6.5

37

28 8.5

28

37 8.5

28

37 8.5

37

P25

=

70

95

85

55

5.8 12 3.5

32

37 6.5

37

37 6.5

28

28 8.5

37

28 8.5

37

37 8.5

37

P26*

=

60

80

65.5

34

5.5 10 3.5

33

35

4.5

35 4.5

35

4.5

26 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

26

6.5

35 6.5

35

6.5

35 6.5

P27

=

80 110

95

50

6.5 12 3.5

37 8.5

P28

=

60

80 66.67 38.1 M4 9

P29

60

=

=

45

30

M3 11

P30

=

70

95

85

60

P31

=

62

85

70

50

70

32 32

4.5

4.5

26

40.5 10 40.5 10 40.5 10 31.5 12 31.5 12 40.5 12 31.5 12 40.5 12 40.5 12 40.5 12 6.5

6.5

6.5

8.5

8.5

8.5

8.5

8.5

8.5

37 8.5 8.5

32

37

6.5

37 6.5

37

6.5

28 8.5

28

8.5

37 8.5

28

8.5

37 8.5

37

8.5

2.5

32

34

3.5

34 3.5

34

3.5

25 5.5

25

5.5

34 5.5

25

5.5

34 5.5

34

5.5

4

32

36 5.5

36

5.5

36 5.5

27

7.5

27 7.5

36

7.5

27 7.5

36

7.5

36 7.5

36

5.8 12 3.5

32

37 6.5

37

6.5

37 6.5

28

8.5

28 8.5

37

8.5

28 8.5

37

8.5

37 8.5

37

8.5

M4 11 3.5

32

36 5.5

36

5.5

36 5.5

27

7.5

27 7.5

36

7.5

27 7.5

36

7.5

36 7.5

36

7.5

To mount motorititis is necessary necessary totoremove * To *mount thethe motor remove the gearbox flangePlease (see assembly drawing 2 the gearbox flange. go to www.tea.net.au on page 141) . for assembly drawings.

133

34 5.5 7.5


EP90 AA

TT Output flange

36 30

3

10

Output flange

M6x12

36 30

3

M6x12

6x6

22 k6

19 k6

AE

AE

6x6

7

M8x16

M6x16 7.5 T

1 98 144

Steps

C1 T

2 127 173

4.5

68 h7 80 90

S

C1

50 h7 65 90

S

C1 T

1 101 144

Steps

AE= 9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14-15.87-16-19

C1 T

2 130 173

AQ

AE= 9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14-15.87-16-19

TQ Output flange

Output flange

3

36 30

36 30

12

20

7

3

12

20

7

6x6

22 k6

19 k6

AE

AE

6x6

120

M8x16

65 g6 90 105

18 C1

S

T

1 88 144

Steps

C1 T

2 117 173

120

M6x16

65 g6 90 105

18 C1

S

T

1 88 144

Steps

AE= 9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14-15.87-16-19

C1 T

2 117 173

AE= 9-9.52-11-12-12.7-14-15.87-16-19

Technical data EP 90 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd

3 50 80 160

4 55 90 180

5 60 100 200

2 7 55 90 180

10 50 80 160

9 65 100 200

12 70 110 220

15 75 120 240

16 75 120 240

0.5159

0.3371

0.2742

0.2247

0.2008

0.5193

0.4995

0.4925

0.3272

0.7271

0.5483

0.4854

0.4359

0.4120

0.7305

0.7305

0.7036

0.5384

9.0

7.5

20 75 120 240

25 75 120 240

100 55 n1nom 90 n1max 180 LpA 0.3233 0.2651 0.2215 0.2202 0.1992 0.1985 0.1980 0.1978 Lh 0.5345 0.4763 0.4326 0.4314 0.4103 0.4097 0.4092 0.4090 FR2 FA2 9.0 7.5

0.96

28 75 120 240

0.93

134

35 75 120 240

40 75 120 240

50 75 120 240

70 65 100 200

max

1

2

4000 5000 < 70 20000 2600 2000 15'

20'


EP90 Lmax

Input flange

H

O

AE H7

O

D

V

S1 S

R H7 I F

R H7 Q I

Input shaft Input flange

AE 9

I

R

F

Q

V

P01*

80

=

=

P02

= 106.5 140 125.72 55.52

P03*

=

80

90

75

60

5.5 12 3.5

45

P04*

105

=

=

85

70

6.5 12 3.5

P05

=

P06

=

90

120 100

80

6.5 13

P07

=

100 135 115

95

8.5 13 4.5

P08

=

116 160 130

110

P09*

80

=

=

39

26

4.5 12

P10*

80

=

=

65

50

5.5 12 3.5

(H7)

=

150 182 166

115

=

80

105

90

70

P14

105

=

=

90

70

P15 *

80

=

=

70

142 190 165

= 80

7

11

82.5 110 98.425 73.02 6.5 12

P11

P16

S

66.67 38.1 5.5 12

P12*

P17*

O

=

=

9

9

L max

12 L max

12.7 L max

14 L max

15.87 L max

16 L max

19 L max

D

3

38.1

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

3

45

43

5.5

43

8

28

8

43

8

43

8

43

8

43

8

43

8

43

8

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

45

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

3

45

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

4

45

45

7.5

45

10

30

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

4

11

6.5 12 3.5 6

L max

11

S1

13 4.5

32

L max

9.525 H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

45

45

7.5

45

10

30

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

45

7.5

45

10

30

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

26

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

45

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

64 26.5 64

50x14 32

44

6.5

29

49

29

64

29

64

29

64

29

64

29

64

29

64

29

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

19

9

32

51 13.5 51

16

36

16

51

16

51

16

51

16

51

50

4.5 17

8

45

49 11.5 49

14

34

14

49

14

49

14

49

14

49

14

49

14

49

14

130

11 13 4.5

45

45

7.5

45

10

30

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

45

10

63

40

5.5 12 3.5

40

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

32

63 25.5 63

28

48

28

63

28

63

28

63

28

63

28

63

28

63

28

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

P18

=

130 170 145

110

M8 31

P19*

=

80

105

90

60

6.5 12 3.5

32

7

6.5

44

16

51

16

51

16

P20*

=

80

105

85

55

5.5 12 3.5

36

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

P21

=

80

110

95

50

M6 12 3.5

45

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

P22

80

=

=

70

50

M4

45

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

P23

=

80

90

75

60

M5 12 3.5

45

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

P24

80

=

=

46

30

M4

30

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

P25

80

=

=

99

60

M6 12 3.5

45

44

6.5

44

9

29

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

44

9

12

12

4

4

To mount motorititis is necessary necessary totoremove * To *mount thethe motor remove the gearbox flangePlease (see assembly drawing 2 the gearbox flange. go to www.tea.net.au on page 141). for assembly drawings.

135


EP120 AA

TT

4

115

Output flange

58 50

12

Output flange

M8x16

50 45

2.5

M8x16

8x7

32 k6

25 k6

AE

AE

10x8

7

M12x24

M10x22 6 T

1 115.8 185.8 134.8 204.8

Steps

C1 T C1 T

5

90 h7 108 125

S

C1

2 148.4 218.4 167.4 237.4

T

1 120.8 177.8 139.8 196.8

Steps

C1 T C1 T

AE= 12.7-14-15.87-16-19 AE= 22-24-28

2 153.4 210.4 172.4 229.4

AQ 4

50 45

15

25

AE= 12.7-14-15.87-16-19 AE= 22-24-28

TQ Output flange

58 50

70 h7 85 115

S

C1

9

2.5

Output flange

15

25

9

8x7

32 k6

25 k6

AE

AE

10x8

155

M12x24

90 g6 115 135

20 C1

S

T

1 102.8 185.8 121.8 204.8

Steps

C1 T C1 T

2 135.4 218.4 154.4 237.4

155

M10x22

90 g6 115 135

20 C1

S

T

1 102.8 177.8 121.8 196.8

Steps

C1 T C1 T

AE= 12.7-14-15.87-16-19 AE= 22-24-28

2 135.4 210.4 154.4 229.4

AE= 12.7-14-15.87-16-19 AE= 22-24-28

Technical data EP 120 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N T2A T2S Jmin Jmax Rt Rd

3

4

5

2 7

10

9

12

15

16

20

25 220 350

28

35

40

50

70

100

1

n1nom n1max 400 500 600 460 380 500 600 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 540 400 LpA 2.0027 1.1339 0.8557 0.6244 0.5047 1.9802 1.8962 1.8552 1.0736 1.0505 0.8023 0.6048 0.5977 0.4951 0.4918 0.4895 0.4883 Lh 4.1528 3.2840 3.0058 2.7745 2.6548 3.1885 3.1045 3.0636 2.2819 2.2589 2.0106 1.8132 1.8061 1.7035 1.7002 1.6979 1.6967 FR2 FA2 32 28 32 30 28 120 190

150 240

180 290

150 220

100 180

150 240

180 290

220 350

220 350

220 350

0.96

220 350

0.93

136

220 350

220 350

220 350

170 270

110 200

max

2

3000 4000 < 70 20000 4500 4000 15'

20'


EP120 Lmax

Input flange

H

O

AE H7

O

D

V

S1 S

R H7 I

R H7 Q I

F

Input shaft AE

Input flange 12.7 F

Q

V

I

R

O

S

115 140 125.72 55.52 6.5

P01*

=

P02*

115

=

=

P03*

115

=

=

P04*

115

=

=

P05*

120

=

=

P06*

=

P07

(H7)

S1

D

L max

H

14 L max

15.87 H

L max

H

16 L max

19 H

L max

22 H

L max

24 H

L max

28 H

L max

H

13

3

55.52

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

75

60

5.5

13

3.5

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

85

70

6.5

13

3.5

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

98.42 73.02 6.5

13

3

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

100

80

6.5

13

4

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

115 140

115

95

9

13

4.5

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

=

115 160

130

110

8.5

13

4.5

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6 6

P08

=

142 190

165

130

11

13

4.5

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

P09

=

192 250

215

180

13

14

4.5

60

44

7

36

7

44

7

44

7

44

7

63

7

63

7

63

7

P10*

115

65

50

6.5

13

3.5

50

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

P11

=

130 170

145

110

M8

31

7

60

61

24

53

24

61

24

61

24

61

24

80

24

80

24

80

24

P12

=

130 170

145

110

M8

17

7

60

47

10

39

10

47

10

47

10

47

10

66

10

66

10

66

10

P13

=

115 160

130

110

M8

13

4.5

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

P14*

115

=

=

70

50

6.5

13

3.5

50

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

P15

115

=

=

90

70

M5

11

3.5

60

41

4

33

4

41

4

41

4

41

4

60

4

60

4

60

4

P17*

115

=

=

90

70

6.5

13

3.5

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

=

=

P18

=

130

95

8.5

13

4.5

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

P19*

115

=

=

95

50

6.5

13

3.5

50

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

P20

115

=

=

99

60

M6

13

4

60

43

6

35

6

43

6

43

6

43

6

62

6

62

6

62

6

115 155

To mount motorititis is necessary necessary totoremove * To *mount thethe motor remove the gearbox flangePlease (see assembly drawing 2 the gearbox flange. go to www.tea.net.au on page 141). for assembly drawings.

137


EP155 AA

TT

5

140

Output flange

80 70

15

Output flange

M10x20

55 50

2.5

M12x20

10x8

40 k6

32 k6

AE

AE

12x8

15

M16x36

M12x28 8 T

1 156 251 181 276

Steps

C1 T C1 T

8

120 h7 140 160

S

C1

2 197.5 292.5 222.5 317.5

80 h7 110 140

S

C1 T

1 156 226 181 251

Steps

C1 T C1 T

AE= 15.87-16-19-22-24 AE= 28-32-35-38

2 197.5 267.5 222.5 292.5

AE= 15.87-16-19-22-24 AE= 28-32-35-38

AQ Output flange

80 70

6

23.5

30

11

40 k6

AE

12x8

188

M16x36

105 g6 140 165

23 C1

S

T

1 141 251 166 276

Steps

C1 T C1 T

2 182.5 292.5 207.5 317.5

AE= 15.87-16-19-22-24 AE= 28-32-35-38

Technical data EP 155 Steps

1

Steps

i T2N T2A

2

3

4

5

7

10

9

12

15

16

20

35

40

50

70

100

320

380

300

220

320

400

500

500

500

25 500

28

240

500

500

500

500

350

250

n1nom

3000

600

480

600

750

750

750

750

750

750

750

750

n1max LpA Lh FR2 (AA) FR2 (TT)

4000 < 70 20000 6500 5300

FA2 (AA) FA2 (TT)

3250 2650

420

540

480

400

560

460

T2S Jmin

880

1140 1260 1000

850

1000 1250 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1120

920

6.2232

3.6993

1.7391

6.0151

Jmax

13.9214 11.3975 10.5144 9.8051

Rt

60

Rd

2.8162

2.1069

2.0320

2.0135

1.7026

1.6934

1.6864

1.6827

9.4373 13.7133 13.5057 13.4074 11.1653 11.1100 10.3306 9.7302

9.7117

9.4008

9.3916

9.3846

9.3809

50

5.8025

5.7092

3.4671

3.4118

2.6324

60

0.96

50 0.93

138

1

max

2

15'

20'


EP155 Lmax

Input flange

H

O

AE H7

O

D

V

S1 S

R H7 I

R H7 Q I

F

Input shaft AE

Input flange 15.87 F

Q

V

P01* 140

=

= 125.72 55.52 6.5

P02* 140

=

=

100

=

=

P03* 140

I

R (H7)

O

S

S1

D

L max

H

16 L max

19 H

L max

22 H

L max

24 H

L max

28 H

L max

32 H

L max

35 H

L max

38 H

L max

H

15

4

55.52

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

80

6.5

15

4

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

115

95

8.5

15

4.5

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

P04*

=

140 160

130

110

8.5

15

4.5

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

P05

=

142 190

165

130

11

15

4.5

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

P06

=

190 250

215

180

13

15

4.5

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

P07

=

250 300

265

230

13

15

4.5

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

P08

=

130 165

145

P09

=

180 230

200

P10

=

115 150

130

95

P11

=

180 230

198

155 13.5 22

P12

=

220 270

235

200 13.5 15

5

70

P13

=

190 250

215

130

13

15

4.5

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

P14

=

142 190

165

110

11

15

4.5

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

90

70

6.5

15

4

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

P15* 150

=

=

M 8 18

7

70

60.8 9.8 60.8 9.8 45.8 9.8 60.8 9.8 60.8 9.8 85.8 10.3 85.8 10.3 85.8 10.3 85.8 10.3

114.3 13.5 22

110

11

70

64.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 49.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3

70

57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

M 8 15

4.5 7

120x11 64.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 49.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 64.8 13.8 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 89.8 14.3 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 42.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 57.8 6.8 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3 82.8 7.3

* To mount the motor it is necessary to remove the gearbox flange. Please go to www.tea.net.au for assembly drawings.

139


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

6W

with digital readout

List of Motor Characteristics

Part No. of Motor

Output Voltage Frequency

Allowable Torque

Poles

RPM

Duty Motor

Hz

p

1200r/min

Starting Torque

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

Motor with gear box

W

V

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

2IK6RA-A

2IK6RGN-A

6

1ph110

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.05

0.50

0.03

0.29

0.03

0.33

3.0/250

2IK6RA-C

2IK6RGN-C

6

1ph220

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.05

0.50

0.03

0.29

0.03

0.33

0.8/450

2RK6RA-A

2RK6RGN-A

6

1ph110

50

4

30Min

90~1350

0.06

0.55

0.03

0.32

0.04

0.38

3.5/250

2RK6RA-C

2RK6RGN-C

6

1ph220

50

4

30Min

90~1350

0.06

0.55

0.03

0.32

0.04

0.38

1.0/450

ì F/VAC

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-2:60mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 6:6W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat type; GN: Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio

2GN3K-GN18K Gearbox 2GN20K-GN50K 2GN60K-GN200K Motor

L(mm)

(kg)

32

0.24 0.30 0.33 0.75

42

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 2:60mm; Gear Type GN:Helical Gear: Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1; Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 2GNK - Ratios 3 to 18 & 60 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. Frequency

3

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed r/min

50Hz

Output Shaft Speed

5

500 417 300

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

250 200 166 150 120 100

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

N.m

0.13 0.15 0.21 0.26 0.31 0.38 0.42 0.53 0.63 0.76 0.76 0.95 1.14 1.36 1.52 1.72 2.06 2.57 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94

kgf.cm

1.3

r/min

600 500 360

N.m

0.10 0.13 0.17 0.21 0.26 0.30 0.34 0.43 0.51 0.62 0.62 0.76 0.92 1.11 1.24 1.39 1.67 2.09 2.50 2.78 2.94 2.94

Allowable Torque

60Hz

3.6

continued below

Allowable Torque kgf.cm

1.0

1.5

2.1

1.3 1.7

2.6

3.2

3.9

4.3

5.4

6.4

7.7

7.7

300 240 200 180 144 120 100

2.1

2.6

3.1

3.5

4.4

5.2

6.3

90

6.3

9.7 11.6 13.9 15.5 17.5 21.0 26.2 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 72

7.8

60

9.4

50

45

36

30

24

20

18

15

12

11.3 12.6 14.2 17.0 21.3 25.5 28.4 30.0 30.0

Gearbox type 2GNK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed r/min

ì

Voltage

W±1

H ±1

Capacity ±5% Allowable Deviation±5%

0.8 1.0 3.0 3.5

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

50Hz

V

mm

mm

mm

37 37 47 47

14 14 22 22

28 28 34 34

7.5

2.94 2.94

kgf.cm 30.0 Output Shaft Speed r/min

Down-lead

200

8

Allowable Torque

Type

450 450 250 250

N.m

180

60Hz

N.m Allowable Torque

10

30.0 9

2.94 2.94

kgf.cm 30.0

30.0

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

140


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

15W

with digital readout

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor

Output Voltage

Motor

Motor with gear box

W

3IK15RA-A

3IK15RGN-A

15

Frequency

V

Allowable Torque

Poles

Hz

P

1ph110

50

4

Duty CONT

1200r/min

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

0.12

1.20

0.04

0.35

90~1350

CONT

Starting Torque

RPM

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

N.m

kgf.cm

ì F/VAC

0.06

0.55

5.0/250

kgf.cm

3IK15RA-C

3IK15RGN-C

15

1ph220

50

4

90~1350

0.12

1.20

0.04

0.35

0.06

0.55

1.2/450

3RK15RA-A

3RK15RGN-A

15

1ph110

50

4

30Min

90~1350

0.13

1.30

0.04

0.40

0.07

0.65

6.0/250

3RK15RA-C

3RK15RGN-C

15

1ph220

50

4

30Min

90~1350

0.13

1.30

0.04

0.40

0.07

0.65

1.5/450

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-3:70mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 15:15W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A Flat Type; GN:Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight

Reduction Ratio 4GN3K-GN18K 3GN20K-GN50K 3GN60K-GN200K

Gearbox

L(mm) 32

(kg) 0.38 0.47 0.52 1.20

42

Motor

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 3:70mm; Gear Type GN:Helical Gear: Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1; Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Gearbox output shaft Key dimensions Dimensions are in mm.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 3GNK Ratios 3 to 18 & 60 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

60Hz

Allowable Torque

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

continued below

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

r/min

500 417 300

N.m

0.31 0.38 0.53 0.64 0.79 0.95 1.06 1.32 1.59 1.90 1.90 2.37 2.85 3.42 3.81 4.28 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90

kgf.cm

3.2

3.9

r/min

600

500 360

5.4

250 200 166 150 120 100

6.5

8.1

9.7

10.8 13.5 6.2 19.4 19.4 24.2 29.1 34.9 38.8 43.6 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0

300 240 200 180 144

120 100

90

72

60

50

45

36

30

24

20

18

15

12

N.m

0.29 0.35 0.50 0.60 0.75 0.89 0.99 1.25 1.49 1.79 1.79 2.24 2.68 3.22 3.58 4.02 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90 4.90

kgf.cm

3.0

3.6

5.1

6.1

7.6

9.1 10.1 12.7 15.2 18.2 18.2 22.8 27.3 32.8 36.5 41.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0

Gearbox type 3GNK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F Allowable Deviation ± 5%

1.2 1.5 5.0 6.0

50Hz

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

V

mm

mm

mm

450 450 250 250

37 37 47 47

14 14 22 26

28 28 34 38

Type

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

r/min

180

200

8

7.5

N.m

4.90 4.90

kgf.cm

50.0 50.0

r/min

10

9

N.m

4.90 4.90

kgf.cm

50.0 50.0

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

141


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

25W

with digital readout

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor

Output Voltage

Frequency

Allowable Torque

Poles

Motor

Motor with gear box

W

V

Hz

P

4IK25RA-A

4IK25RGN-A

25

1ph110

50

4

4IK25RA-C

4IK25RGN-C

25

1ph220

50

4RK25RA-A

4RK25RGN-A

25

1ph110

50

4RK25RA-C

4RK25RGN-C

25

1ph220

50

RPM

Duty

1200r/min

Starting Torque

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

N.m

kgf.cm

ì F/VAC

0.45

0.13

0.45

7.0/250

0.05

0.45

0.13

0.45

1.8/450

0.05

0.50

0.15

0.50

8.0/250

0.50

0.18

0.50

2.2/450

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

CONT

90~1350

0.19

1.90

0.05

4

CONT

90~1350

0.19

1.90

4

30Min

90~1350

0.20

0.20

4

30Min

90~1350

0.20

0.20

0.05

kgf.cm

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-4:80mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 25:25W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A:Flat Type; GN:Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Description Individual Reduction Reduction Ratio Gearbox 4GN3K-GN18K Model 4:80mm Gearbox 4GN20K-GN50K Gear Type GN:Helical Gear 4GN60K-GN200K Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Intermediate 4GN10K Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing Gearbox

43.5

0.43

32

1.65

Motor

Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.

Key dimensions

(kg) 0.43 0.57 0.61

L(mm) 32

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 4GNK Ratios 3 to 18 & 60 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque

3

60Hz

Allowable Torque

5

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

r/min

500 417 300

N.m

0.52 0.63 0.87 1.05 1.31 1.57 1.74 2.19 2.62 3.15 3.15 3.94 4.72 5.66 6.29 7.12 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84

kgf.cm

Output Shaft Speed

3.6

continued below

r/min

5.3

6.4 8.9

600 500 360

250 200 166 150 120 100

10.7 13.4 16.0 17.8 22.3 26.7 32.1 32.1 40.2 48.2 57.8 64.2 72.6 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 300 240 200 180 144 120 100

90

72

60

50

45

36

30

24

20

18

15

12

N.m

0.43 0.51 0.72 0.85 1.07 1.28 1.43 1.78 2.15 2.57 2.58 3.22 3.86 4.64 5.16 5.82 6.99 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84 7.84

kgf.cm

4.4

5.2 7.3

8.7 10.9 13.1 14.6 18.2 21.9 26.2 26.3 32.9 39.4 47.3 52.6 59.4 71.3 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0

Gearbox type 4GNK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F Allowable Deviation ± 5%

1.8 2.2 7.0 8.0

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

50Hz

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

V

mm

mm

mm

450 450 250 250

38 38 47 47

18 18 26 26

28 28 38 38

Type

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

r/min

180

200

8

7.5

N.m

7.84 7.84

kgf.cm

80.0 80.0

r/min

10

N.m

7.84 7.84

9

kgf.cm

80.0 80.0

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

142


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

40W

with digital readout

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor

Output Voltage

Frequency

Allowable Torque

Poles

Motor

Motor with gear box

W

V

Hz

P

5IK40RA-A

5IK40RGN-A

40

1ph110

50

4

5IK40RA-C

5IK40RGN-C

40

1ph220

50

5RK40RA-A

5RK40RGN-A

40

1ph110

50

5RK40RA-C

5RK40RGN-C

40

1ph220

50

RPM

Duty

1200r/min

Starting Torque

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

N.m

kgf.cm

ì F/VAC

0.60

0.19

1.90

10.0/250

0.06

0.60

0.19

1.90

2.5/450

0.07

0.65

0.21

2.10

12.0/250

0.65

0.21

2.10

3.0/450

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

CONT

90~1350

0.30

3.00

0.06

4

CONT

90~1350

0.30

3.00

4

30Min

90~1350

0.32

3.20

4

30Min

90~1350

0.32

3.20

0.07

kgf.cm

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 40:40W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A:Flat Type; GN:Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio

L(mm)

5GN3K-GN18K Gearbox 5GN20K-GN36K 5GN40K-GN200K Motor

(kg) 0.73 1.03 1.13 2.50

42 60

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Gearbox output shaft Key dimensions Dimensions are in mm.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GNK Ratios 3 to 18 & 60 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

60Hz

Allowable Torque

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

continued below

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

r/min

500 417 300

N.m

0.68 0.82 1.14 1.37 1.72 2.06 2.29 2.86 3.43 4.13 4.59 5.16 6.20 7.44 8.26 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80

kgf.cm

6.94 8.37 11.6 14.0 17.6 21.0 23.4 29.2 35.0 42.1 46.8 52.6 63.3 75.9 84.3 100 100 100 100 100 100

100

r/min

600 500 360

12

250 200 166 150 120 100

300 240 200 180 144 120 100

90

72

60

50

45

36

30

24

20

18

15

N.m

0.58 0.70 0.97 1.16 1.45 1.74 1.93 2.41 2.90 3.48 3.87 4.36 5.23 6.28 6.97 8.72 9.46 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80

kgf.cm

5.92 7.14 9.90 11.8 10.8 17.7 19.7 24.6 29.6 35.5 39.5 44.5 53.4 64.1 71.1 89.0 96.5 100 100 100 100

100

Gearbox type 5GNK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F

50Hz

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

Allowable Deviation ± 5%

V

mm

mm

mm

2.5 3.0 10.0 12.0

450 450 250 250

37 47 57 57

18 22 26 32

28 34 38 36

Type

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

r/min

180

200

8

7.5

N.m

9.80 9.80

kgf.cm

100 100

r/min

10

N.m

9.80 9.80

9

kgf.cm

100

100

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

143


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

60W

with digital readout

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor Motor

Output Voltage

Motor with gear box

W

Frequency

V

Allowable Torque

Poles

Hz

P

RPM

Duty

1200r/min

Starting Torque

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

ì F/VAC

5IK60RA-AF

5IK60RGN-AF

60

1ph110

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.50

5.00

0.14

1.40

0.31

3.10

15.0/250

5IK60RA-CF

5IK60RGN-CF

60

1ph220

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.50

5.00

0.14

1.40

0.33

3.30

4.0/450

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 60:60W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GN: Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P: Other Accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio

L(mm)

5GN3K-GN18K Gearbox 5GN20K-GN36K 5GN40K-GN200K Motor

60

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Gearbox output shaft Key dimensions Dimensions are in mm.

R8

(kg) 0.73 1.03 1.13 2.70

42

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GNK Ratios 3 to 18 & 40 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

60Hz

Allowable Torque

3 r/min N.m

3.6

5

6

500 417 300

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

250 200 166 150 120 100

1.03 1.24 1.72

continued below

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

2.6 2.58 3.10 3.10 3.88 4.65 5.38 5.60 7.01 8.41 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80

kgf.cm

10.5 12.7 17.6 21.0 26.3 31.6 31.6 39.6 47.4 54.9 57.1 71.6 85.8 100 100

100 100

100 100 100

100 100

r/min

600 500 360

36

24

15

300 240 200 180 144 120 100

90

72

60

50

45

N.m

0.9

kgf.cm

9.18 11.0 15.3 18.4 23.0 27.6 27.6 34.5 41.3 49.5 49.5 62.2 74.7 90.0 100

30

20

18

12

1.08 1.50 1.80 2.23 2.70 2.70 3.38 4.05 4.88 4.88 6.10 7.33 8.97 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 9.80 100 100

100 100 100

100 100

Gearbox type 5GNK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

V

mm

mm

mm

450 250

47 57

50Hz

Type

Allowable Deviation ± 5%

4.0 15.0

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

22 32

34 46

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

r/min

180

200

8

7.5

N.m

9.80 9.80

kgf.cm

100

100

r/min

10

9

N.m

9.80 9.80

kgf.cm

100

100

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

144


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

60W

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor Motor

Motor with gear box

Output Voltage W

V

Frequency

Allowable Torque

Poles

Hz

P

Duty

RPM

1200r/min

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

Starting Torque

90r/min N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

Capacitor/Ve ì F/VAC

5IK60RA-AF

5IK60RGU-AF

60

1ph110

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.50

5.00

0.14

1.40

0.31

3.10

15.0/250

5IK60RA-CF

5IK60RGU-CF

60

1ph220

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.50

5.00

0.14

1.40

0.33

3.30

4.0/450

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, R:Reversible Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 60:60W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GU: Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P: Other Accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 5GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 5GU10K-GU18K 5GU20K-GU75K 5GU90K-GU200K Motor

Key dimensions

(kg) 1.21 1.30 1.40 1.45 2.70

L(mm) 65

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GUK Ratios 3 to 18 & 40 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

60Hz

Allowable Torque

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

continued below

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

r/min

500 417 300

250 200 166 150 120 100

N.m

1.03 1.24 1.72

2.6 2.58 3.10 3.10 3.88 4.65 5.38 5.60 7.01 8.41 10.1 11.2 14.0 16.8 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

10.5 12.7 17.6 21.0 26.3 31.6 31.6 39.6 47.4 54.9 57.1 71.6 85.8 103 114

r/min

600 500 360

300 240 200 180 144 120 100

90

72

60

50

45

1430 171 36

30

200 200 200

200 200

24

15

20

18

12

N.m

0.9 1.08 1.50 1.80 2.23 2.70 2.70 3.38 4.05 4.88 4.88 6.10 7.33 8.79 9.76 12.2 14.6 18.3 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

9.18 11.0 15.3 18.4 23.0 27.6 27.6 34.5 41.3 49.5 49.5 62.2 74.7 90.0 99.8

124 149

187 200 200

200 200

Gearbox type 5GUK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

V

mm

mm

mm

450 250

47 57

50Hz

Type

Allowable Deviation ± 5%

4.0 15.0

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

145

22 32

34 46

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

180

200

r/min

8

7.5

N.m

19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

200 200

r/min

10

9

N.m

19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

200

200


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

90W

with digital readout

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor Motor

Motor with gear box

Output Voltage

Frequency

Allowable Torque

Poles

W

V

Hz

P

RPM

Duty

1200r/min

Starting Torque

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

ì F/VAC

5IK90RA-AF

5IK90RGU-AF

90

1ph110

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.71

7.10

0.23

2.30

0.48

4.80

20.0/250

5IK90RA-CF

5IK90RGU-CF

90

1ph220

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.71

7.10

0.23

2.30

0.45

4.50

5.0/450

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 90:90W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GU Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P; Other accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 5GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 5GU10K-GU18K 5GU20K-GU75K 5GU90K-GU200K Motor

Key dimensions

(kg) 1.21 1.30 1.40 1.45 3.20

L(mm) 65

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm. Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GUK Ratios 3 to 9 & 20 to 75 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

60Hz

Allowable Torque

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

continued below

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

r/min

500 417 300

N.m

1.55 1.86 2.58 3.10 3.87 4.64 4.65 5.81 6.98 8.37 8.40 10.5 12.6 15.1 16.8 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6

250 200 166 150 120 100

kgf.cm

15.8 19.0 29.2 31.6 39.6 47.2 47.4 59.3 71.2 85.4 85.7 107 129

154 171

200 200

r/min

600 500 360

50

36

N.m

1.35 1.62 2.25 2.70 3.37 4.04 4.05 5.06 6.07 7.29 7.32 9.15 11.0 13.2 14.6 18.3 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

13.8 16.5 23.0 27.6 34.4 41.2 41.3 51.6 61.9 74.4 74.7 93.4 112

300 240 200 180 144 120 100

90

72

60

45

135 149

200 200 200

30

187 200

24

20

18

200 200 200

200 200 15

12

200 200

Gearbox type 5GUK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

V

mm

mm

mm

450 250

47 68

50Hz

Type

Allowable Deviation ± 5%

5.0 20.0

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

22 32

34 56

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

180

200

r/min

8

7.5

N.m

19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

200 200

r/min

10

9

N.m

19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

200

200

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

146


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

120W

with digital readout

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor

Output Voltage

Motor

Motor with gear box

W

5IK120A-AF

5IK120RGU-AF

120

5IK120A-CF

5IK120RGU-CF

120

Frequency

V

Allowable Torque

Poles

RPM

Duty

1200r/min

Starting Torque

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

Hz

P

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

ì F/VAC

1ph110

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.75

7.50

0.40

4.00

0.55

5.50

25.0/250

1ph220

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.75

7.50

0.40

4.00

0.65

6.50

7.0/450

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-5:90mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor; Motor Series :K; Output Power 120:120W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Yype; GU Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P; Other accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 5GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 5GU10K-GU18K 5GU20K-GU75K 5GU90K-GU200K Motor

Key dimensions

(kg) 1.21 1.30 1.40 1.45 3.20

L(mm) 65

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 5:90mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GUK Ratios 3 to 9 & 20 to 75 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

60Hz

Allowable Torque

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

continued below

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

r/min

500 417 300

N.m

2.14 2.57 3.57 4.29 5.38 6.43 6.43 8.05 9.66 11.6 11.6 14.6 17.5 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6

250 200 166 150 120 100

kgf.cm

21.8 26.2 36.4 43.8 54.7 65.6 65.6 82.1 98.6 118 118 149 196

200 200

200 200

r/min

600 500 360

50

36

N.m

1.80 2.16 3.00 3.60 4.49 5.39 5.39 6.75 8.10 9.72 9.72 12.2 14.6 17.6 19.5 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

18.4 22.0 30.6 36.7 45.8 55.0 55.0 68.9 82.7 99.2 99.2 124 149

300 240 200 180 144 120 100

90

72

60

45

180 199

200 200 200

30

200 200

24

20

18

200 200 200

200 200 15

12

200 200

Gearbox type 5GUK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

V

mm

mm

mm

450 250

47 68

50Hz

Type

Allowable Deviation ± 5%

7.0 25.0

26 32

38 56

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

180

200

r/min

8

7.5

N.m

19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

200 200

r/min

10

9

N.m

19.6 19.6

kgf.cm

200

200

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

147


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

120W

with digital readout

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor Motor

Output

Motor with gear box

Allowable Torque

Voltage Frequency Poles

W

V

Hz

P

Duty

RPM

1200r/min

Starting Torque

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

ì F/VAC

6IK120RA-AF

6IK120RGU-AF

120

1ph110

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.75

7.50

0.40

4.00

0.51

5.10

25.0/250

6IK120RA-CF

6IK120RGU-CF

120

1ph220

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.75

7.50

0.40

4.00

0.65

6.50

8.0/450

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-6:100mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, Motor Series :K; Output Power 120:120W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GU:Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P; Other Accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 6GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 6GU10K-GU18K 6GU20K-GU200K Motor

(kg)

L(mm)

1.87 2.10 2.75 4.85

72

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 6:100mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Key dimensions Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 6GUK Ratios 3 to 9 & 20 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

60Hz

Allowable Torque

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

continued below

60

75

90

100

120

150

25

20

16

15

12

10

r/min

500 417 300

N.m

2.06 2.48 3.44 4.13 5.16 6.19 6.19 7.75 9.30 11.2 11.2 14.0 16.8 20.0 22.4 28.0

33.6 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2

kgf.cm

21.0 25.3 35.1 42.1 52.6 63.2 63.2 79.1 94.9 114

171 206 228 286

343 400

r/min

600 500 360

60

30

250 200 166 150 120 100

300 240 200 180 144 120 100

114 143 90

72

50

45

36

24

400 400 400 400 20

18

15

12

N.m

1.74 2.09 2.90 3.48 4.35 5.22 5.22 6.54 7.85 9.42 9.42 11.8 14.2 17.0 18.9 23.6

28.4 35.5 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2

kgf.cm

17.8 21.3 29.6 35.5 44.4 53.3 53.3 69.7 80.0 96.1 96.1 121

289 362

146 174 193 241

400 400 400 400

Gearbox type 6GUK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

V

mm

mm

mm

450 250

47 68

50Hz

Type

Allowable Deviation ± 5%

8.0 25.0

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

26 32

38 56

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

180

200

r/min

8

7.5

N.m

39.2 39.2

kgf.cm

400 400

r/min

10

N.m

39.2 39.2

9

kgf.cm

400

400

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

148


AC Speed Adjustable Motors with or without Gearboxes

The measurements in brackets refer to the geared shaft which goes into the gearbox. Dimensions are mm.

140W

with digital readout

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor Motor

Output

Motor with gear box

Allowable Torque

Voltage Frequency Poles

W

V

Hz

P

Duty

RPM

1200r/min

Starting Torque

90r/min

Capacitor/Ve

r/min

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

N.m

kgf.cm

ì F/VAC

61K140RA-AF

6IK140RGU-AF

140

1ph110

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.85

8.50

0.45

4.50

0.62

6.20

30.0/250

6IK140RA-CF

6IK140RGU-CF

140

1ph220

50

4

CONT

90~1350

0.85

8.50

0.45

4.50

0.68

6.80

10.0/450

Description of Motor & Gearbox Part Number: Model & Description-6:100mm; Motor Type I:Induction Motor, Motor Series :K; Output Power 140:140W; R:Speed Adjustable; Shape of Motor Shaft-A: Flat Type; GU:Reinforced Helical Gear; Supply & Poles - A:Single Phase 100-110V50Hz4P C:Single Phase 220 - 230V50Hz4P; Other Accessories F:with Fan •Different voltages have different capacitance. The correct capacitor must be chosen. The wrong capacitor will cause problems. To order please specify the following: Motor with or without gearbox; Ratio of gearbox; Controller with or without digital readout.

Overall Dimension of Gearbox Weight Reduction Ratio 6GU3K-GU9K Gearbox 6GU10K-GU18K 6GU20K-GU200K Motor

(kg)

L(mm)

1.87 2.10 2.75 5.05

72

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model 6:100mm Gear Type GU:Reinforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type K:Ball Bearing

Key dimensions Gearbox output shaft Dimensions are in mm.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 6GUK Ratios 3 to 9 & 20 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite.

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

50Hz

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

60Hz

Allowable Torque

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

10

12.5

15

continued below

18

20

25

30

36

40

50

60

75

90

100

120

150

83

75

60

50

41

37

30

25

20

16

15

12

10

r/min

500 417 300

N.m

2.36 2.83 3.93 4.71 5.89 7.07 7.07 8.85 10.6 12.7 12.7 16.0 19.2 23.0 25.6 32.0 38.4 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2

kgf.cm

24.1 28.8 40.1 48.1 60.1 72.1 72.1 90.3 108 130

r/min

600 500 360

N.m

2.03 2.44 3.39 4.06 5.08 6.09 6.09 7.60 9.15 11.0 11.0 13.8 16.6 19.9 22.1 27.6 33.1 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2 39.2

kgf.cm

20.7 24.9 34.6 41.2 51.8 62.1 62.1 77.6 93.4 112

250 200 166 150 120 100

300 240 200 180 144 120 100

130 163 196 90

72

60

112 141 169

235 261 50

45

203 226

327 392 36

30

282 338

400 400 400 24

20

18

400 400 400

400 400 15

12

400 400

Gearbox type 6GUK

Capacitor

Frequency

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

ì

capacity ì F

Voltage

L± 1

W ±1

H ±1

V

mm

mm

mm

450 250

47 68

50Hz

Type

Allowable Deviation ± 5%

10. 30.0

26 32

38 56

Allowable Torque Output Shaft Speed

Down-lead

60Hz

Allowable Torque

180

200

r/min

8

7.5

N.m

39.2 39.2

kgf.cm

400 400

r/min

10

N.m

39.2 39.2

9

kgf.cm

400

400

Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for General Specifications of Induction Motors and Description of Allowable Torque for Gearbox.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

149


DC Motors

6-10W

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor Voltage

No Load Parameters Speed Current

Power

Load Parameters Speed Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight

V

W

RPM

A

RPM

mN.m

A

H

kg.

12 12 24 24 90 90

6 6 6 6 6 6

3200 3200 3200 3200 3000 3000

0.6 Max. 0.6 Max. 0.3 Max. 0.3 Max. 0.2 Max. 0.2 Max.

2950 2950 2950 2950 2800 2800

19 19 19 19 20 20

0.8 0.8 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.3

2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

Z2D10-12 Z2DW10-12 Z2D10-24 Z2DW10-24 Z2D10-90

12 12 24 24 90

10 10 10 10 10

3200 3200 3300 3300 3200

1.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.5 Max. 0.5 Max. 0.3 Max.

2800 2800 3000 3000 2800

34 34 32 32 34

2.0 2.0 0.9 0.9 0.6

2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

Z2DW10-90

90

10

3200

0.3 Max.

2800

34

0.6

2000

0.7

Z2D06-12 Z2DW06-12 Z2D06-24 Z2DW06-24 Z2D06-90 Z2DW06-90

Description of Motor Part Number: Model & Dimensions-Z2:60mm; DC Motor Type: D: internal brush DW: external brush Output Power: 06:6W; 10:10W Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V Shape of Motor Shaft: GN: For connection to gearbox, or A: Round shaft, A1: with keyway Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage is the same as the rated voltage of motor.

a

Reduction Gearbox

Gearbox

2GN3K-GN18K

32

2GN25K -GN200K

41

How to order Motor: Z2-D(DW)-06(10)-12(24/90)-GN(A)-(M) Gearbox: 2GN-Ratio-K

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 2:60mm Gear Type: GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: K:Ball Bearing

L(mm)

Reduction Ratio

Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.

Gearbox type 2GN...K

Z2D06-24

3

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

r/min N.m

Allowable Torque

Z2D10-24

Reduction Ratio

5

6

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

25

36

50

60

75

90

81

59

49

39

32

100 120 150 180 200 29

24

19

16

14

a

0.04 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.14 0.19 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.42 0.51 0.70 0.76 0.96 1.15 1.28 1.53 1.92 2.30 2.56 0.48 0.57 0.80 0.96 1.20 1.45 2.00 2.40 2.89 3.61 4.34 5.21 7.23 7.85 9.81 11.7 13.1 15.6 19.6 23.5 26.1 30

36

50

60

75

90 100 120 150 180 200

1000 833 600 500 400 333 240 200 166 120 100

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

25

83

60

50

40

33

a

Output Shaft Speed

r/min N.m

Allowable Torque

30

25

20

16

15

a

0.07 0.09 0.12 0.15 0.19 0.23 0.32 0.38 0.46 0.58 0.69 0.83 1.16 1.26 1.57 1.89 2.10 2.52 3.0

3.0 3.0

a

kgf.cm

0.78 0.94 1.31 1.57 1.97 2.96 3.29 3.94 4.73 5.92 7.11 8.53 11.8 12.8 16.1 12.2 21.4 25.7 30 75

L

Ø60

Ø60

75

3.6

a

kgf.cm

Model Type

30

983 819 590 491 393 327 236 196 163 118 98

a

30

30

L

60

Model Type

60

63

24

Ø60

Wiring Diagram of Motor

Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10 Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type 60

All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.

150


DC Motors

15W

List of Motor Characteristics No Load Parameters Model of Motor Voltage

Load Parameters

Power

Speed

Current

V

W

RPM

A

RPM

Z2D15-12 Z2DW15-12 Z2D15-24 Z2DW15-24 Z2D15-90

12 12 24 24 90

15 15 15 15 15

3200 3200 3300 3300 3200

0.8 Max. 0.8 Max. 0.4 Max. 0.4 Max. 0.2 Max.

2950 2950 3000 3000 3000

Z2DW15-90

90

15

3200

0.2 Max.

3000

L(mm)

Reduction Ratio 2GN3K-GN18K

32

2GN25K -GN200K

41

Speed

How to order Motor: Z2-D(DW)-15-12(24/90)-GN(A)-(M) Gearbox: 2GN-Ratio-K

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 2:60mm Gear Type: GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: K:Ball Bearing

Reduction Gearbox

Gearbox

Description of Motor Part Number: Model & Dimensions-Z2:60mm; Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight DC Motor Type: D: internal brush mN.m A H kg. DW: external brush Output Power: 15:15W 48 2.0 2000 0.9 48 2.0 2000 0.9 Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V 48 1.0 2000 0.9 Shape of Motor Shaft: 48 1.0 2000 0.9 GN: For connection to gearbox, or 48 0.4 2000 0.9 A: Round shaft, A1: with keyway 48 0.4 2000 0.9 Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage is the same as the rated voltage of motor.

Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.

Gearbox type 2GN...K

Z2D15-24

Reduction Ratio

3

Output Shaft Speed

r/min N.m

Allowable Torque

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

25

36

50

60

75

90 100 120 150 180 200

83

60

50

40

33

30

25

20

16

15

a

0.11 0.13 0.19 0.23 0.29 0.34 0.48 0.58 0.69 0.87 1.04 1.25 1.74 1.89 2.36 2.83 3.0

3.0 3.0

3.0 3.0

30

30

a

kgf.cm

1.18 1.42 1.97 2.36 2.96 3.55 4.93 5.92 7.10 8.89 10.6 12.8 17.7 19.2 24.1 28.9 30

89

L

Ø60

Ø60

89

30

1000 833 600 500 400 333 240 200 166 120 100

a

60

30

30

L

60

Model Type

63

Ø60

24

Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type

Wiring Diagram of Motor

60

Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10

All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.

151


DC Motors

25W

List of Motor Characteristics

Model of Motor Voltage

Z3D25-12 Z3DW25-12 Z3D25-24 Z3DW25-24 Z3D25-90 Z3DW25-90

No Load Parameters Speed Current

Power

Load Description of Motor Part Number: Parameters Speed Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight Model & Dimensions-Z3:70mm; Z4: 80mm

V

W

RPM

A

RPM

mN.m

A

H

kg.

12 12 24 24 90 90

25 25 25 25 25 25

3300 3300 3200 3200 3100 3100

1.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.5 Max. 0.5 Max. 0.3 Max. 0.3 Max.

3000 3000 2800 2800 2700 2700

80 80 85 85 88 88

3.5 3.5 1.6 1.6 0.8 0.8

2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

12 24 90

25 25 25

3200 3000 3200

1.4 Max. 0.7 Max. 0.2 Max.

3100 2850 3000

77 84 80

3.6 1.7 0.5

2000 2000 2000

1.7 1.7 1.7

DC Motor Type: D: internal brush DW: external brush Output Power: 25:25W Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V Shape of Motor Shaft: GN: For connection to gearbox, or A: Round shaft, A1: with keyway Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage is the same as the rated voltage of motor.

a

Z4D25-12 Z4D25-24 Z4D25-90

Reduction Ratio

L(mm)

3GN3K-GN18K Gearbox for Z3D25 3GN25K -GN200K

42

4GN3K-GN18K Gearbox for Z4D25 4GN25K -GN200K

42.5

How to order Motor: Z3(4)-D(DW)-25-12(24/90)-GN(A)-(M) Gearbox: 3(4)GN-Ratio-K

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 3:70mm 4:80mm Gear Type: GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: K:Ball Bearing

Reduction Gearbox 32

32

Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.

Gearbox type 3GN...K

Model Type Z3D25-24GN

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed Allowable Torque

3 r/min

Z4D25-24GN

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

25

30

36

50

60

75

90

933 777 560 466 373 311 224 186 155 112 93

77

56

46

37

31

100 120 150 180 200

0.20 0.24 0.34 0.41 0.51 0.62 0.86 1.03 1.12 1.55 1.86 2.24 3.11 3.37 4.22 5.0

23

18

15

14

5.0 5.0

28

5.0

5.0

5.0

2.11 2.53 3.52 4.22 5.28 6.34 8.80 10.5 11.4 15.8 19.0 22.8 31.7 34.4 43.1 50

50

50

50

50

50

Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.

Reduction Ratio

Allowable Torque

6

a

Gearbox type 4GN...K

Output Shaft Speed

5

a

N.m kgf.cm

Model Type

3.6

a

3

25

30

36

50

60

75

90 100 120 150 180 200

791 570 475 380 316 228 190 158 114

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

95

79

57

47

38

31

a

r/min

950

28

23

19

15

14

a

N.m

0.20 0.24 0.33 0.41 0.50 0.61 0.84 1.01 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.20 3.05 3.31 4.14 4.97 5.52 6.63 8.0

8.0 8.0

a

kgf.cm

2.07 2.49 3.46 4.15 5.19 6.23 8.65 10.3 12.4 15.6 18.7 22.4 31.2 33.8 42.3 50.7 56.4 67.7 80

80

80

Dimensions for Z3D25 (in mm) - For dimensions of Z4D25 please contact TEA or go to www.tea.net.au 96

Ø60

L

Ø70

33

Ø60

L

Ø60

101

73

70

Wiring Diagram of Motor

Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10 Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.

152


DC Motors

40W

List of Motor Characteristics No Load Parameters Model of Motor Voltage

Z4D40-12 Z4D40-24 Z4D40-90

Load Parameters

Power

Speed

Current

V

W

RPM

A

RPM

12 24 90

40 40 40

3100 3100 3200

2.0 Max. 0.8 Max. 0.3 Max.

2800 2800 3000

12 24 90

40 40 40

3100 3000 3200

2.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.2 Max.

2800 2800 3000

Description of Motor Part Number: Model & Dimensions-Z4:80mm; Z5:90mm Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight DC Motor Type: D: internal brush mN.m A H kg. Output Power: 40:40W Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V 136 5.2 2000 1.8 127 2.1 2000 1.8 Shape of Motor Shaft: 127 0.7 2000 1.8 GN: For connection to gearbox, or A: Round shaft, A1: with keyway 136 5.2 2000 1.9 Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage 136 2.2 2000 1.9 is the same as the rated voltage of motor. 127 0.7 2000 1.9

Speed

a

Z5D40-12 Z5D40-24 Z5D40-90

Reduction Gearbox Gearbox for Z4D40 Gearbox for Z5D40

Approx.(kg)

Reduction Ratio

L(mm)

4GN3K-GN18K

32

4GN25K -GN200K

42.5

1.00

5GN3K-GN18K

42

1.35

5GN25K -GN200K

60

1.68

How to order Motor: Z4(5)-D-40-12(24/90)-GN(A)-(M) Gearbox: 4(5)GN-Ratio-K

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 4:80mm 5:90mm Gear Type: GN:Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: K:Ball Bearing

0.80

Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 4GN...K

Model Type Z4D40-24

Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed Allowable Torque

3 r/min N.m

Model Type Z5D40-24

Allowable Torque

6

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

25

36

50

60

75

90 100 120 150 180 200

83

60

50

40

33

30

25

20

16

15

a

0.30 .032 0.51 0.61 0.77 0.92 1.28 1.54 1.85 2.32 2.78 3.34 4.64 5.04 6.30 7.56 7.84 8.0 8.0 3.15 3.78 5.26 6.31 7.89 9.47 13.1 15.7 18.9 23.7 28.4 34.1 47.4 51.4 64.3 77.1 80

80

80

8.0 8.0 80

80

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

25

30

36

50

60

75

90 100 120 150 180 200

933 777 560 466 373 311 224 186 155 112

93

77

56

46

37

31

a

r/min N.m

28

23

18

15

14

a

0.33 0.39 0.55 0.66 0.82 0.99 1.38 1.65 1.98 2.48 2.98 3.58 4.50 5.40 6.75 8.10 9.00 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 a

kgf.cm

3.37 4.05 5.63 6.76 8.45 10.1 14.1 16.9 20.2 25.4 30.4 36.5 45.9 55.1 68.9 82.6 91.8 100 100 100 100

Dimensions for Z5D40

L

L

Ø80

Ø80

Dimensions for Z4D40

5

Ratios 3 to 18 & 50 to 200 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

3.6

a

kgf.cm

Gearbox type 5GN...K

30

1000 833 600 500 400 333 240 200 166 120 100

a

80

Ø80

90

Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type

Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type

90

Wiring Diagram of Motor

80

All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10

153


DC Motors

60-90W

List of Motor Characteristics No Load Parameters Model of Motor Voltage

Z5D60-12 Z5D60-24 Z5D60-90

Load Parameters

Power

Speed

Current

V

W

RPM

A

RPM

12 24 90

60 60 60

3000 3100 3100

2.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.3 Max.

2600 2800 2900

12 24 90

90 90 90

3100 3300 3000

2.0 Max. 1.0 Max. 0.3 Max.

2600 2800 2900

Description of Motor Part Number: Model & Dimensions-Z5:90mm Torque Current Brush Life Motor Weight DC Motor Type: D: internal brush mN.m A H kg. Output Power: 60:60W; 90:90W Voltage: 12:12V, 24:24V, 90:90V 220 9.0 2000 2.2 205 3.5 2000 2.2 Shape of Motor Shaft: 198 1.0 2000 2.2 GU: Re-inforced helical gear. Shaft suitable for connection to gearbox, or 330 12.0 2000 2.2 A: Round shaft, A1 with keyway 307 5.0 2000 2.2 Options: M = Brake - the brake voltage 307 1.4 2000 2.2 is the same as the rated voltage of motor.

Speed

a

Z5D90-12 Z5D90-24 Z5D90-90

Reduction Gearbox

Gearbox

Reduction Ratio

L(mm)

5GU3K -GU200K

65.5

How to order Motor: Z5-D-60(90)-12(24/90)-GU(A)-(M) Gearbox: 5GU-Ratio-KB

Description Individual Reduction Gearbox Model: 5:90mm Gear Type: GU:Re-inforced Helical Gear Reduction Ratio: 3:1 to 200:1 Bearing Type: KB:Ball Bearing

Description of Allowable Torque on Gearbox The speed reducer is fully sealed and immersion lubricated so the grease will not easily dry out. A reliable state-of-the-art integrated speed reducer is used which integrates bearing case and reducer case into one and full ball bearings are used.

Allowable Torque on Gearbox Gearbox type 5GU...K

Model Type Z5D60-24GU

Ratios 3 to 9 & 25 to 75 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed Allowable Torque

3 r/min

Model Type Z5D90-24GU

Allowable Torque

6

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

25

30

36

50

60

75

90 100 120 150 180 200

933 777 560 466 373 311 224 186 155 112

93

77

56

46

37

31

28

23

18

15

14

0.49 0.59 0.82 0.99 1.24 1.49 1.86 2.24 2.68 3.37 4.05 4.86 6.75 8.10 10.1 10.8 12.0 14.4 18.1 20.0 20.0 a

5.07 6.08 8.45 10.1 12.6 15.2 19.0 22.8 27.4 34.3 41.3 49.6 68.9 82.6 103 110 123 147 184 200 200

Ratios 3 to 9 & 25 to 75 - rotation direction of output shaft same as motor, all other ratios are opposite. The output shaft speed excludes the motor speed slip. The actual speed will be 2-20% lower than the stated values depending upon the load.

Reduction Ratio Output Shaft Speed

5

a

N.m kgf.cm

Gearbox type 5GU...K

3.6

a

25

30

36

50

60

75

90 100 120 150 180 200

933 777 560 466 373 311 224 186 155 112

3

3.6

5

6

7.5

9

12.5 15

18

93

77

56

46

37

31

a

r/min

28

23

18

15

14

a

N.m

0.74 0.89 1.24 1.49 1.86 2.23 2.80 3.36 4.03 5.06 6.07 7.29 10.1 12.1 15.1 16.2 18.1 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 a

7.61 9.13 12.6 15.2 19.1 22.8 28.5 34.2 41.1 51.6 62.0 74.4 103 124 155 166 184 200 200 200 200

kgf.cm

Dimensions for Z5D60 & Z5D90 L

65.5

130

Ø36

Ø80

Ø36

143

90 37

Ø80

Wiring Diagram of Motor

Shaft section of Round Shaft (A) type

Standard length of lead wire: 300mm±10 90

All dimensions in mm (unless otherwise stated). All specifications are subject to change without notice.

DC Motors are also available in 120W & 250W Please contact TEA or visit our website www.tea.net.au for details.

154


ZIMM – Screw Jack Building Block System Complete Solutions

We lift, lower, push and pull loads from 2.5kN to 1,000kN • Efficient construction due to our Screw Jack Building Block System – all components compatible • All components from one supplier saves purchase costs • Delivery of pre-mounted units and assembly groups, motors included • Short delivery times • Capable of bearing tension and compression loads • Attractive design • Stainless spindles and components on request • Custom components for specialist applications on request

Standard Version with Standing Spindle S Cast iron housing version S Aluminium housing version S

Standing spindle S The worm wheel has an internal thread and Safety nut SIFA for fail safe wear control transforms rotary motion into linear movement as long as the spindle is prevented from rotating either Ball Screws with optional by connection to the customer's fabrication or by pitches - version KGT incorporating the protection against rotation VS option. Anti Backlash AB with adjustable thread play

Standard Version with Rotating Spindle R Cast iron housing - version R

Aluminium housing version R

Rotating spindle R A flange nut moves up and down on a rotating screw.

Safety nut SIFA for fail safe wear control Ball Screws with optional pitches - version KGT

155


System Overview - Screw Jacks S System Components, Standing Spindle S

Fixing flange BF

Pivot bearing head SLK Spiral spring SF Rod end KGK

Motor

Bellow FB Tr left handed thread

Forked head GK Coupling KUZ

Tr INOX (stainless) Locking nut

Tr double pitch KGT Ball Screw

Rotary pulse encoder DIG

Tr Standard

Motor flange MF Handwheel HR

Spring brake FDB

Lubrication strip SL

Protective cap SK Assembly group limit switches ESSET

Fixing strips BFL

Hinged bearing plate KAR

Protection against rotation VS

Escape protection AS

Linear measuring system WMS

Contact T.E.A. for specifications on system components.

156

Connecting Shaft VWZ


System Overview - Screw Jacks R System Components, Rotating Spindle R

KGT Driving flange KGMFL

Opposed bearing plate GLP

KGT Pivot adapter KGKAR Spiral spring SF

KGT-F KGT Flange nut

Tr Driving flange TRMFL

Greaseless nut FFDM Self-aligning nut PM

Bellow FB

Duplex nut DM

Flange nut FM

Motor

Safety nut SIFA Spindle types: Standard Tr INOX (stainless) Double pitch Left handed thread Larger diameter spindle Ball screw KGT

Coupling KUZ

Rotary pulse encoder DIG Motor flange MF

Handwheel HR

Spring brake FDB

Protective cap SK

Fixing strips BFL

Hinged bearing plate KAR

Contact T.E.A. for specifications on system components.

157

Connecting shaft VWZ


Overview Sizes / types Z Series

GSZ Series

Screw Versions: increased / double pitch / left-handed / stainless steel 158


When should I use a Z series screw jack? Z series screw jacks are the preferred range with the largest number of types. The Z series feature through holes for top mounting and integral pivot bearings, features not available on the GSZ series.

When should I use a GSZ series screw jack? GSZ series screw jacks are designed for applications where smooth surfaces are required. These screw jacks are easier to clean and therefore ideal for applications in the food processing industry.

The development of ZIMM screw jack system

Note: SHZ and MSZ series units made from cast iron and aluminium are available as spare parts on request. ZIMM offers advice on conversion to the new Z and GSZ types.

159


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Construction Advice Design & Specification The customer, based on the application criteria, can determine the selection and dimensioning of the system from the information contained in this catalogue. On request we can provide design advice and calculations to determine the correct components and compile a full quotation based on your application criteria. ZIMM guarantee the quality of all of the components shown in the catalogue. The screw jacks are designed for industrial use and for loads & operational duty as stated in the catalogue. For further information please contact T.E.A. Lifting Speed Normal version N:

Slow version L:

1 mm stroke per movement of drive shaft (MSZ-150 and bigger sizes - higher speed acc. to table) at 1500 min-1: 1.5 m/min 0,25 mm stroke per movement of drive (MSZ-150 and bigger sizes - higher speed acc. to table) at 1500 min-1: 0.375 m/min

In order to increase the speed of the system the following options can be considered: - Double pitch screw (Attention: max. input torque, system is not self-locking, system brake required) - Larger diameter spindle with R version (spindle of the next larger size): depending on the screw jack size faster pitch, higher torque requirement - Ball screw: various pitch options - Rotary pulse encoder: Enables an increase in motor speed of more than 1500. This system is only designed for light loads and low duty operation. To reduce system speed - Use a motor with more poles / lower speed (6, 8, 10 or 12 poles) - Rotary pulse encoder (for slower speed operation below 25 Hz an adequate method of cooling the motor is required) - Geared motor (Attention to max input torque is required) - Bevel gearbox with gear reduction (only for certain applications)

Temperature and Operating time Screw jacks are generally not designed for continuous operation. Max operational time is stated as ED (see pages 174197*). These values are for reference only and must be checked against the individual application criteria. In borderline cases the next biggest gearbox may require selection or contact our technical dept. Operating temperatures should not exceed 80 degrees celsius. *Visit our website www.tea.net.au Parallelism and Angularity Care must be exercised to ensure that the systems are parallel to each other as well as level and aligned with the mounting surfaces. Connecting shafts, pillow blocks etc. must be axially aligned with each other. Guidance The guide bushes incorporated in the screw jack gearbox can only tolerate a play of between 0.2 & 0.6mm are not designed to take high side forces on the system. For most applications a suitable additional guidance system should be designed into the application to counteract any side forces. Protection Against Rotation With the standing screw version S the spindle is free running within the gearbox (worm wheel). It is therefore necessary to protect the spindle from rotating due to the friction in the worm wheel. This can be achieved by incorporating an additional external guidance system or by using the protection against rotation (mounted internally within the protective tube).

160


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Construction Advice Design & Specification

Self-locking / Overrun Screw jacks with a single pitch trapezoid thread have a limited self-locking capability. Where shock or vibration is evident a brake should be incorporated into the system. The potential overrun after having stopped the motor differs from application to application. In order to minimise the overrun to a minimum we recommend to use a brake motor or a spring pressure brake FDB. A braked motor is essential where a double pitch trapezoid screw or ballscrew is used as they are not self locking.

A flat-machined surface is necessary. The four attachment bolts are designed for the rated static loads of the gearbox in tension and compression. Additional impact loads and vibration must be taken into account (Grey cast iron housing GG25). The length of the mounting screws must be observed. Tension loads on the mounting bolts should be avoided. With unknown factors like shock and vibration we recommend additional protection of the screw jack by using guide rails and threaded rods. This will ensure loads in tension and compression are secured.

Drive In order to achieve soft start for acceleration and deceleration we recommend the use of a frequency inverter. The lifetime of the system will be increased and the noise of the system will be reduced.

Safety Distances Safety distances must be observed between moving and stationary components otherwise there is the risk of damage to the system.

Trial Run A trial run under normal operating conditions including load, is necessary to ensure correct operation. On-site trial runs are necessary to ensure precise alignment of the system and make any necessary adjustments.

Accuracy The repeat accuracy of the gearbox can be up to 0.05mm if the load is constant and in the same direction. This also requires suitable control of the drive system e.g. using a rotary voltage braked motor in connection with a frequency converter, a rotary pulse encoder or a servo motor with encoder, etc. The pitch precision of the trapezoid screw is 0.2mm per 300mm of spindle length. With ballscrews it is 0.05mm per 300mm of spindle length. Under alternating load, tension & compression the axial play can be up to 0.4mm with the trapezoid spindle and 0.08mm with the ballscrew. For systems which require zero clearance we recommend the use of the gearbox version incorporating AntiBacklash AB with adjustment. Contact T.E.A. for more details.

Spare Parts It is recommended that a range of spare parts gearboxes, spindles etc. are held by your customer. This is especially relevant where high duty applications are involved. Stage Engineering ZIMM systems are specified to meet the regulation of the Stage Lifting industry. Vehicles for Land, Air or Water For applications, which are mobile either on land, sea or air are generally excluded from our normal warranty terms. Special conditions will apply. Please contact T.E.A.

Direction of Rotation and Movement Check the direction of the required rotation and detail this in your design drawing or select one of the standard system layouts (see pages 167 & 168). With T bevel gearbox the direction of rotation can be changed by rotating the gearbox around.

Environmental Conditions For special applications outside of normal environmental conditions please contact T.E.A.

161


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Construction Advice The mounting surfaces for the nuts should also be at right angles. The option of the self aligning nut should be considered for certain applications.

Lubrication Sufficient lubrication is essential for the lifetime of the system. The spindle, gearbox & protection against rotation must be suitably lubricated. The red lubrication strip for the protection against rotation can be mounted in optional positions to meet your requirements. Please also see the automatic lubrication system and maintenance instructions. Mounting, Operation and Maintenance Instruction The installation instructions must be adhered to.

Alternatively the use of the hinged bearing plate KAR could be considered.

Construction Advice for Plant Engineers: Where machined surfaces are used few assembly problems should be encountered. However geometric errors can occur in welded frames despite accurate assembly and it is therefore important to consider the following: Parallelism / Angularity: Screws and linear guides must be parallel otherwise the whole system could seize up during operation. All mounting surfaces for the gearboxes must be at right angles to the linear guides otherwise wear or damage to the components could occur.

For additional data please go to www.tea.net.au

162


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 1 - Parameters Company:

Date:

Address:

Phone:

Contact:

Fax:

Department:

Number of pages: An application sketch and the completed checklist will enable us to submit our quotation more speedily.

1 Max. lifting force in kN - per gearbox kN per system kN - in tension kN in compression kN - load: static kN dynamic kN - installation position: vertical / horizontal / pivot - idle / impact / load / vibration 2 Lift / Travel

mm

effective working stroke

3 Lifting speed Type N = 25mm/s (1.5 m/min.)

mm

Type L = 6.25mm/s (0.375 m/min.)

4 Duty factor, work cycle, description of cycle strokes per day strokes per hour hours per day: 8 16 24 ! For high duty factors or long strokes, please provide an exact detailed description 5 Type:

S standing spindle

R rotating spindle

Z Screw Jack

6 Standard arrangement no. Dimension X1 X2 see standard arrangements, checklist 5 and 6 (for multi-jack systems) 7 Motor:

Three-phase AC motor

8 Operating conditions: Dry Ambient operating temperature: min.

with brake Humid 째C

9 Quantity:

Required

Series

10 Schedule:

Quotation

Delivery

163

manual release Dusty max.

Chips 째C

GSZ Screw Jack X3

Y


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 2 - Operating Times Only required for extended operating times and high duty cycles. Operating cycle for permanent operations / operation times Diagrams with times in seconds or minutes, resulting operating period in percent %, with calculation 8 16 or 24 hours - operation / day

still 5 sec. down 5 sec.

down 5 sec.

up 10 sec.

still 5 sec.

operation time

sec

Example:

still 60 sec.

1 cycle 90 sec.

Idle time in

sec.

min.

hours

Formula for calculating the relative operating period ED: ED =

ED =

te x 100 ED in % (te+tp)

ED= operating period te = operating time (in sec.) tp = idle time (in sec.)

10 sec. + 5 sec. + 5 sec. (10 sec. + 5 sec. + 5 sec. + 5 sec. + 5 sec. + 60 sec.)

164

x 100 = 22.2% per hour when operated 8hr/day


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 3 - Accessories S also see overview page 156 Type:

SN (Translating screw, normal speed) SL (Translating screw, low speed Variant: TR screw SIFA safety nut with SIFA monitoring KGT Ball screw

Stroke

Tension load [kn] static Tension load [kn] dynamic Compression load [kn] static Compression load [kn] dynamic Standard screw end Fixing flange BF Pivot bearing end SLK

base line

Forked end GK Rod end KGK Bellows FB Spiral spring SF Handwheel HR Motor with brake Motor without brake Coupling KUZ Rotary pulse encoder DIG Motor flange MF Pivot mounts LB Pivot bearing plate KAR Lubricator Z-LUB Spring pressure brake FDB Protective cap SK Lubrication strip SL 2 x Limit switch ES Rotation protection VS Escape protection AS Protective tube SRO

165


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 4 - Accessories R also see overview page 157 Type: RN (Rotating screw, normal speed) RL (Rotating screw, low speed) Variant: TR screw SIFA safety nut with SIFA Monitoring KGT Ballscrew

Tension load [kN] static Tension load [kN] dynamic Compression load [kN] static Compression load [kN] dynamic Opposed bearing plate GLP Bellows FB Spiral spring cover SF

Lubricator Z-LUB

Cardan adaptor DMA Duplex nut DM Tr flange nut FM KGT flange nut KGT-F Self-aligning nut PM Greaseless nut FFDM Driving flange TRMFL Safety nut SIFA Wear monitoring SIFA control Handwheel HR Motor with brake Motor without brake Rotary pulse encoder DIG Motor flange MF Coupling KUZ Pivot mounts LB Pivot bearing plate KAR Spring pressure brake FDB Protective cap SK

166


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 5 - Standard Arrangements

167


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Checklist - 5 - Standard Arrangements continued.

11

12

14

13

16 15

17

168


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Critical Buckling Force of the Lifting Screws fk = 0,25

fk = 2

fk = 4

Version S guided lifting motion with hinged plate

Version S non guided lifting motion, gear firmly mounted

Version S guided lifting motion, gear firmly mounted

Version R for a small L1 there applies: fk = 2 guided lifting motion

Critical buckling force Fk in kN

fk = 1

There is a buckling risk especially with gearboxes with long, thin spindles in combination with compression load. With the following calculation you can find the max. allowed axial load acc. to Euler.

Maximum allowed axial load Fall = 0.8 x Fk x fk Fall maximum allowable axial load (kN) Fk theoretical critical buckling force (kN) acc. to diagram fk correction value (considers kind of bearing support, respectively guidance of lifting load) see pictograms above free length L in mm

If the maximum calculated load is lower than required, a larger spindle diameter could be selected. The calculations must then be reworked. With the rotating screw version a larger diameter screw can be selected (from the next bigger gearbox size). Any increase in pitch/ lifting speed must be taken into account. The safety factors for the type of system specified must be used, as shown above, to calculate the max allowable axial load for the system.

169


Selection, Calculation, Checklists

theoretical spindle whirling speed nkr [min-1]

Critical Whirling Speed of Spindle - R Version with opposed bearing plate

fkr = 1

without opposed bearing plate

fkr = 0.5

Maximum allowable spindle speed nall = 0.8 x nkr x fkr

.

.

. .

spindle speed =

.

unsupported screw lengths [m]

For R version gearboxes (with rotating spindle) with long, thin spindles it is necessary to calculate the maximum allowable spindle speed. Please take the theoretical critical speed nkr from the diagram. Also consider the additional lengths for spindle covers, etc. when calculating the unsupported screw lengths . Together with the correction factor for the bearing layout the max. allowable spindle speed can be calculated.

If the calculated maximum spindle speed is lower than that required, a larger spindle should be selected. The calculations must then be reworked. If a larger diameter spindle is used in the R version the potential for higher drive torque's must be considered. The safety factors for the type of system specified must be used, as shown above, to calculate the maximum allowable axial load for the system.

170

input speed igearbox


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Determining the Drive Torque [MG] of a Lifting Gear With the formula shown below it is possible to calculate the necessary drive torque. In order to facilitate the calculation of the drive torque we have determined multiplication factors out of this formula and have stated them in the technical data for the single gearbox version.

MG F Gearbox Spindle

P i ML PM

Required drive torque [Nm] of a lifting gear Lifting load (dynamic) [kN] Efficiency of the lifting gear (without spindle) Efficiency of the spindle Spindle pitch [mm] Transmission of the lifting gear Idling torque [Nm] Power of motor

Formula1): Drive torque: MG =

Example: F [kN] · P [mm] 2·

·

Power of motor: PM[kW] =

Gearbox

·

i Spindle ·

+ ML [Nm]

MG [Nm] · n [min-1] 9550

Safety factor (start torque) = calculated drive torque x 1.3 to 1.5 (for smaller systems use up to x 2).

MSZ-25-SN F = 12 kN (lifting load dynamic) Gearbox = 0.87 Spindle = 0.375 P=6 i=6 MG =

!

PM =

12 kN · 6mm + 0.36 Nm = 6.21 Nm · 0,87 · 0,375 · 6

6.21 Nm · 1500 min-1 = 0.975 kW 9550

Example: 0.975 kW · 1.4 = 1.365 kW

motor 1.5 kW

1)

For gearboxes with one-pitch trapezoidal spindles it is also possible to multiply the factor which is stated on the corresponding gearbox page with the load. Tr spindle Spindle Efficiency single pitch Tr 12 18 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140

P lubricated 0.427 3 0.399 4 0.375 4 0.375 6 0.344 7 0.314 8 0.368 12 0.368 16 0.314 16 0.273 16 0.288 20

Tr spindle Spindle Efficiency double pitch Tr 12 18 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140

P lubricated 0.592 6 0.565 8 0.540 8 0.540 12 0.509 14 0.474 16 0.532 24 0.532 32 0.474 32 0.426 32 0.444 40

The efficiency of a trapezoid screw is substantially lower than that of ball screws due to friction. However, the trapezoid screw is technically more simple and more favourable. A safety device (e.g. a brake) is rarely required for trapezoid Efficiency of gearboxes

Gearbox

screws due to their selflocking capability. With a ballscrew system an efficiency factor of =0.9 can be used. It is essential to incorporate a break into a ballscrew system.

(without spindle) at n = 1.500

5 2 10 25 50 100 150 250 350 500 650 MSZ N 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.87 0.89 0.85 0.84 0.86 0.87 0.84 0.85 0.77 0.62 0.69 0.69 0.74 0.65 0.67 0.72 0.70 0.62 0.65 L

Idling torques ML of gearboxes [Nm] 5 50 100 150 250 350 500 650 25 10 2 MSZ N 0.06 0.10 0.26 0.36 0.76 1.68 1.90 2.64 3.24 3.96 5.60 0.04 0.08 0.16 0.26 0.54 1.02 1.20 1.94 2.20 2.84 3.40 L

With ball screws you basically can calculate with an efficiency factor of

171

=0.9


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Drive Torque for Gearboxes

MR = MG x 2.25

Calculation The required drive torque of a lifting gear results from the sum of the moments of the individual lifting units. This is increased due to frictional losses of transmission components like couplings,

MR = MG x 2.1

MR = MG x 3.1

MR = MG x 3.35

MR = MG x 4.6

MR = MG x 6.8

MR = MG x 4.4

MR = MG x 3.34

MR = MG x 3.27

connecting shafts, bevel gears, etc. To simplify the calculation, some factors for determining the drive torque in the most common applications are provided below.

MR - Total drive torque for the whole system MG - Input torque of a single gearbox MA - Starting torque max. 1.5 x MR

Example (example from previous page, 12 kN per gearbox)

MR = MG x 4.6 = 6.21 Nm x 4.6 = 28.57 Nm x safety factor 1.3 = 37.14Nm

172

Attention: It is recommended to multiply the calculated value with a safety factor of 1.3 to 1.5 (for smaller systems factor up to 2). The indicated values are applicable in cases of uniform distribution of the lifting gear load onto all gears!


Selection, Calculation, Checklists Maximum Power / Moments

F

Load definitions

lifting screw

FS

F - Lifting load tension and/or compression FS - Side forces on the spindle vH - Lifting speed of the spindle (or nut of the R version) FA - Axial load of the input shaft FR - Radial load of the input shaft MR - Drive torque nR - Drive speed

VH

FR

MR

Please examine the information on the following pages before making your choice of the lifting gear suited for your application. Various influences and assumptions can only be estimated on the basis of information gained by experience. In case of doubt please contact T.E.A.

Maximum side force FS [N] (static)

Max. drive torque The stated values of the table on the right should not be exceeded. If gearboxes are arranged in tandem or in larger arrangements the maximum drive torque may be higher. If there are more than 5 gearboxes in an arrangement please contact T.E.A.

Maximum drive torque MR [Nm]

Radial load on the input shaft The radial forces of the table on the right should not be exceeded if you use chain drives or belt drives.

Maximum radial load acting on the input shaft FR [N]

100 360 600 900 3000 5000 5500 9000 15000 29000 34800 46000

200 160 280 470 2000 4000 5000 9000 13000 29000 34800 46000

Type

min-1

MR SN/RN MR SN/RN MR SL/RL MR SL/RL

1500 500 1500 500

300 100 180 300 1300 3000 3900 6500 12000 29000 34800 39000

SHZ02 0.7 1.0 0.5 0.7

extended screw length in mm

900 800 700 1000 1200 1500 2000 2500 500 400 600 – 12 28 32 38 18 25 55 20 70 45 15 20 50 60 70 30 47 100 40 130 80 35 45 100 110 130 60 90 180 70 240 150 130 160 380 420 500 230 330 700 280 900 600 350 400 1100 1300 600 850 950 1800 700 2300 1500 400 500 750 850 2800 2300 1800 1500 1300 1200 1000 760 900 4900 3800 3000 2500 2200 2000 1900 1450 1250 10000 8800 7000 6000 5500 4800 4300 3500 3000 2000 1600 29000 29000 24000 20000 17000 15000 14000 12000 9000 7000 5600 34800 34800 28800 24000 20400 18000 16800 14400 10800 8400 6720 36000 32000 30000 25000 29000 25000 23500 20000 17000 12000 10000

MSZ5 6.4 10.4 2.6 4.3

MSZ10 12.6 20.5 5.3 8.4

MSZ25 21.7 34.2 7.8 12.5

MSZ50 44.7 70.3 15.5 24.5

MSZ100 72.0 114.9 17.0 27.8

MSZ150 67.3 107.0 17.3 27.7

MSZ250 118.4 185.1 23.5 36.6

MSZ350 187.0 295.7 40.2 63.9

MSZ500 204.3 325.6 42.8 71.2

MSZ650 268.3 427.9 62.8 102.6

MSZ750 415.0 663.0 83.0 132.0

- Consider that the starting torque is factor 1.5 of the operation torque - Limit values are mechanical - consider thermical factors depending on operating time

FR max.

SHZ02 18

MSZ5 110

MSZ10 215

173

MSZ25 300

FA

input shaft = worm shaft

Side forces on the spindle Please refer to the adjoining table for the maximum permissible side force. Side forces should be supported by a guidance system whenever possible. The bronze bushings in the gearbox are a secondary support only and should not be relied upon as adequate guidance. The maximum side force at a given screw extension must not exceed that stated in the adjoining table. Attention: only statically allowed!

MSZ 5 10 25 50 100 150 250 350 500 650 750

nR

MSZ50 520

MSZ100 800

MSZ150 810

MSZ250 1420

MSZ350 2100

MSZ500 3780

MSZ650 4536

3000 – – 30 100 250 350 660 1400 4900 5880 8000


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-5-S - Translating Screw 5 kN

deep

base line deep

deep

Basic Versions Tr

1)

Standard types S Basic model S Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Aluminium housing

Version

Type

Speed

Z-5-SN Z-5-SL Z-5-RN Z-5-RL

Standing Screw Rotating Screw

Normal Low Normal Low

Standard Screw2) Tr 18x4 Tr 18x4

i

Stroke per revolution5) 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types R Ball screw KGT

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

KGT 16 x 5 KGT 16 x 10

Aluminium housing

174

Safety nut SIFA

Ball Screw KGT

Wear control of the nut

KGT 16 x 5 KGT 16 x 10


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-5-R - Rotating Screw R 5 kN

deep

base line

deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 5 mm

deep

System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159 - 173

Technical data S and R

Duty cycle thermal limit, for S and R These curves are for guidance under industrial conditions, (ambient temp. etc) and correct maintenance (lubrication etc.). The max. input drive torques for optimum service life are at www.tea.net.au

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 5 kN (0,5 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 3000 rpm (depending on the load and duty cycle) Screw dimension - Tr 18x42) Gear reduction - 4:1 (N) / 16:1 (L) Material of box - Aluminium, corrosion resistant Worm shaft - Steel, case-hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid grease Screw lubrication - grease lubrication Weight of screw jack body - 1.20 kg Weight of spindle/m - 1.58 kg Drive through torque - max. 39 Nm Operating temperature - max. 60 º C, higher on request Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au - Tr18x4 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr20x4 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 4mm

Trapezoidal screw Tr 18x4

2)

175

% duty cycle/10 min at 20 ° C


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-10-S - Standing Screw 10 kN

deep

base line deep

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

Speed

MSZ-10-SN Standing Screw MSZ-10-SL MSZ-10-RN Rotating Screw MSZ-10-RL 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Normal Low Normal Low

Tr 20x4 Tr 20x4

i

Stroke per revolution5) 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types S Basic model S

Standard Screw2)

Standard types R Safety nut SIFA

Rotation control and Aluminium housing wear control of the nut

Ball screw KGT

Anti-Backlash AB

KGT 25 x 5 KGT 25 x 10 Adjustable KGT 25 x 25 anti-backlash KGT 25 x 50

176

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Ball Screw KGT

KGT 25 x 5 Wear control KGT 25 x 10 Aluminium housing KGT 25 x 25 of the nut KGT 25 x 50


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-10-R - Rotating Screw 10 kN

deep

base line

deep deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 8 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

Technical data S and R

Duty cycle thermal limit, for S and R

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 10 kN (1 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 3000 rpm (depending on the load and duty cycle) Screw dimension - Tr 20x42) Gear reduction - 4:1 (N) / 16:1 (L) Material of box - Aluminium, corrosion resistant Worm shaft - Steel, case hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid, grease Spindle lubrication - Grease lubrication Weight of screw jack body - 1.20 kg Weight of spindle/m - 2 kg Drive through torque - max. 57 Nm Operating temperature - max. 60 ° C, higher on request Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr20x4 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr30x6 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 4mm

Trapezoidal screw Tr 20x4

177

% duty cycle/10 min at 20 ° C

These curves are for guidance under standard industrial conditions (ambient temperature etc.) and correct maintenance (lubrication etc.). The max. input drive torques for optimum service life are at www.tea.net.au


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-25-S - Standing Screw 25 kN

deep

base line deep

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

Speed

MSZ-25-SN Standing Screw MSZ-25-SL MSZ-25-RN Rotating Screw MSZ-25-RL 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Tr 30x6 Tr 30x6

i

Stroke per revolution5) 6:1 1.00 mm 24:1 0.25 mm 6:1 1.00 mm 24:1 0.25 mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types R

Standard types S Basic model S

Normal Low Normal Low

Standard Screw2)

Safety nut SIFA

Rotation control and Aluminium housing wear control of the nut

Ball screw KGT

Anti-Backlash AB

KGT 32 x 5 KGT 32 x 10 KGT 32 x 20 KGT 32 x 40

Adjustable anti-backlash

178

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Ball Screw KGT

KGT 32 x 5 Wear control KGT 32 x 10 Aluminium housing KGT 32 x 20 of the nut KGT 32 x 40


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-25-R - Rotating Screw 25 kN

deep

base line

deep deep

x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 5 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 25 kN (2.5 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 3000 rpm (depending on the load and duty cycle) Screw dimension - Tr 30x62) Gear reduction - 6:1 (N) / 24:1 (L) Material of screw jack body - Aluminium, corrosion resistant Worm Shaft - Steel, case hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid, grease Spindle lubrication - Grease lubrication Weight of lifting gear - 6.5 kg Weight of spindle/m - 4.5 kg Drive through torque - max. 57 Nm Operating temperature - max. 60 °C, higher on request Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr30x6 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr40x7 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 6mm

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R

static dynamic

Technical data S and R

Trapezoidal screw Tr 30x6

basis: 20°C

179

% duty cycle/10 min at 20 °C operating time in % per 10 ‘

These curves are for guidance under standard industrial conditions (ambient temperature etc.) and correct maintenance (lubrication etc.). The max. input drive torques for optimum service life are available at www.tea.net.au


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-50-S - Standing Screw 50 kN

4 deep M10/12 deep

base line ± 0,00

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

MSZ-50-SN Standing Screw MSZ-50-SL MSZ-50-RN Rotating Screw MSZ-50-RL 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Standard Screw2)

Normal Low Normal Low

Tr 40x7 Tr 40x7

i

Stroke per revolution5) 7:1 1.00 mm 28:1 0.25 mm 7:1 1.00 mm 28:1 0.25 mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types S Basic model S

Speed

Standard types R Safety nut SIFA

Ball screw KGT

Anti-Backlash AB

Rotation control and wear control of the nut

KGT 40 x 5 KGT 40 x 10 KGT 40 x 20 KGT 40 x 40

Adjustable anti-backlash

180

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Ball Screw KGT

KGT 40 x 5 Wear control KGT 40 x 10 KGT 40 x 20 of the nut KGT 40 x 40


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-50-R - Rotating Screw 50 kN

deep deep

base line

deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 6 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

These curves are

N = Normal speed used for L = Low speed

[kN] load

guidance under

50

Thisstandard diagram industrial indicates the conditions maximum capacity (ambient (under optimal temperature conditions). Where load etc.)duty andorcorrect are maintenance near upper limits we recommend (lubrication the etc.). selection of a bigger The max. input gearbox. drive torques for

40 L/1 00 N/ 0 m in -1 10 L/1 00 m 50 in -1 N/ 0 m in -1 15 00 mi n -1

30 20 10

static

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 25 kN (2.5 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 1800 rpm 2) Screw dimension - TR 40x7 Gear reduction - 7:1 (N) / 28:1 (L) Material of screw jack body - GGG-50, corrosion resistant Worm shaft - Steel, case hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid, grease Spindle lubrication - Grease lubrication Weight of screw jack body - 17 Kg Weight of spindle/m - 8 Kg Drive through torque - 260 Nm Operating temperature - Max 60 °C, higher on request

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R

0

Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr40x7 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr50x8 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 7mm

dynamic

Technical data S and R

0%

2

5

Trapezoidal basis: 20°C Tr 40x7

181

optimum service

10

screw

The maximum duty life are available cycle is affected by % time dutyincycle/10 operating % per 10 ‘ min at at 20 °Cmany factors: e.g.: www.tea.net.au lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.

15

20

25

30

35


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-100-S - Standing Screw 100 kN

deep deep

base line

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

Speed

MSZ-100-SN Standing Normal Screw MSZ-100-SL Low MSZ-100-RN Rotating Normal Screw MSZ-100-RL Low 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Tr 50x8 Tr 50x8

i

8:1 32:1 8:1 32:1

Stroke per revolution5)

1.00 0.25 1.00 0.25

mm mm mm mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types R

Standard types S Basic model S

Standard Screw2)

Safety nut SIFA

Rotation control and wear control of the nut

Ball screw KGT

Anti-Backlash AB

Adjustable KGT 50 x 10 KGT 50 x 20 anti-backlash

182

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Ball Screw KGT

Wear control KGT 50 x 10 of the nut KGT 50 x 20


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-100-R - Rotating Screw 100 kN

deep deep

base line

deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 10 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 10mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

Technical data S and R

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 100 kN (10 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 1800 rpm

- TR 55x92) - 9:1 (N) / 36: (L) - GGG-50, corrosion resistant - Steel, case hardened, ground - Synthetic fluid grease - Grease lubrication - 29 Kg - 15.7 Kg - 540 Nm - max. 60 °C

[kN] load 100 80

40

static

20

Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr50x8 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr60x12 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 8mm

L/1 00 0m N/ in -1 50 0 N/ m 10 in -1 L/1 00 m in 50 0m 1 in -1 N/ 15 00 mi n -1

60

0

dynamic

Screw dimension Gear reduction Material of the screw jack body Worm shaft Gearbox lubrication Spindle lubrication Weight of the screw jack body Weight of spindle/m Drive through torque Operating temperature

Trapezoidal 5 0% 2 55x9 basis:Tr20°C

183

screw 10

15

20% duty 25

These curves are N = Normal speed for guidance L = Low speed under standard industrial This diagram conditions indicates the (ambient maximum capacity temperature (under optimal etc.) and correct conditions). maintenance Where duty or load (lubrication etc.). are near upper limits The max. input we recommend the drive of torques for selection a bigger optimum service gearbox. life are available The at maximum duty cyclewww.tea.net.au is affected by

cycle/10 30 35 min °Cmany factors: e.g.:

operating time in % per at 10 20 ‘

lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-150-S - Standing Screw 150 kN

M42x2 deep deep

base line

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

Speed

Standard Screw2)

MSZ-150-SN Standing Normal Tr 60x12 Screw MSZ-150-SL Low MSZ-150-RN Rotating Normal Tr 60x12 Screw MSZ-150-RL Low 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

9:1 36:1 9:1 36:1

Stroke per revolution5)

1.33 0.33 1.33 0.33

mm mm mm mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types R

Standard types S Basic model S

i

Safety nut SIFA

Rotation control and wear control of the nut

Ball screw KGT

Anti-Backlash AB

KGT 63 x 10

Adjustable anti-backlash

184

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Ball Screw KGT

Wear control KGT 63 x 10 of the nut KGT 63 x 20


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-150-R - Rotating Screw 150 kN

deep deep

base line

deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 8 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

These curves are N= speed forNormal guidance under L =standard Low speed industrial

[kN] load 150 120 90 L/5

00

60

L/1

min

-1

N/5 00

min

-1

000

30 0

dynamic

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 150kN (15 t) Max. drive shaft speed - 1800 rpm 2) Screw dimension - Tr 60x9 Gear reduction - 9:1 (N) / 36:1 (L) Material of the screw jack body - GGG-50, corrosion resistant Worm shaft - steel, case hardened, ground Gearbox lubrication - Synthetic fluid, grease Spindle lubrication - Grease lubrication Weight of the screw jack body - 42 Kg Weight of spindle/m - 19 Kg Drive through torque - Max. 540 Nm Operating temperature - Max. 60 °C Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see chapter 4 2) - Tr60x12 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr80x16 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 12mm

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R

static

Technical data S and R

5 0%Trapezoidal 2

60x9 basis: Tr 20°C

185

min -1 N /10 00 L/1 min N/1 500 min -1 500 m in -1

-1

conditions This(operating diagram indicates the etc.) temperature maximum capacity and correct (under optimal maintenance conditions). (lubrication etc.). Where duty or load The max. input are near upper limits drive torques for we recommend the optimum life are selection of a bigger available at gearbox. www.tea.net.au The maximum duty

min cycle is affected by at 20 °C many factors: e.g.: operating time in % per 10 ‘

screw 10 15

20% duty 25 cycle/10 30 35

lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-250-S - Standing Screw 250 kN

M56x2 deep deep

base line

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

Speed

Standard Screw2)

MSZ-250-SN Standing Normal Tr 80x16 Screw MSZ-250-SL Low MSZ-250-RN Rotating Normal Tr 80x16 Screw MSZ-250-RL Low 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

10:1 40:1 10:1 40:1

Stroke per revolution5)

1.60 0.40 1.60 0.40

mm mm mm mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types S Basic model S

i

Standard types R Safety nut SIFA

Anti-Backlash AB

Rotation control and wear control of the nut

Adjustable anti-backlash

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Ball Screw KGT

Wear control KGT 80 x 10 of the nut KGT 80 x 20

186


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-250-R - Rotating Screw 250 kN

deep deep

base line

deep

x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 10 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

These curves are N =for Normal speed guidance L = under Low speed standard

[kN] load 250 200

N/1 00 m

in -1

150 100 50 0

L/ L/1 500 m L/1 000 m in 500 i -1 min -1n

dynamic

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 250kN (25 t) Max.drive pressure/tensile (25 t) Max. shaft speed force static -- 250 1800kN rpm Max. dimension drive shaft speed -- 1800 min2) -1(higher on request) Screw Tr 80x16 Screw dimension - Tr 80x16 2) Gear reduction - 10.66:1 (N) / 32:1 (L) Gear reduction - 10:1 (N) / 40:1 (L) Material corrosion resistant Materialofofthe boxscrew jack body -- GGG-50, GG grey cast Worm shaft steel, case hardened, ground Lubrication -- grease Gearbox fluid, grease Weight oflubrication lifting gear -- Synthetic 57 kg Weight lubrication of spindle/m -- Grease 42 kg lubrication Spindle 3)5) Drive torque [Nm] -- F59[kN] Weight of the M screw jack body Kg x 1.05 3)5)+ ML(N-Normal) G F [kN] x 0.31 + ML(L-Low) Weight of spindle/m - 32 Kg Starting torque - drive torque MG x 1.5 Drive through torque - Max. 770 Nm 4) Idle torque ML [Nm] - 2.64 (N-Normal) Operating temperature 60 °C -- Max. 1.94 (L-Low) Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr80x16 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr100x16 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 16mm

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R

static

Technical data S and R

0%

2

basis: 20°C

187

5

10

15

N/ 5 N/ 00 m 10 in -1 N/ 00 m 10 00 in -1 N/ m 150 0 m in 1 in -1

-1

20

25

30

35

operating time in % per 10 ‘

industrial Thisconditions diagram indicates the (ambient maximum capacity temperature etc.) (under andoptimal correct conditions). maintenance Where duty or load (lubrication etc.). are The nearmax. upper limits input we recommend drive torquesthe for selection of aservice bigger optimum gearbox. life are available at The www.tea.net.au maximum duty cycle is affected by many factors: e.g.: lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-350-S - Standing Screw 350 kN

deep deep

base line

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

Speed

Standard Screw2)

i

MSZ-350-SN Standing Normal Tr 100x16 Screw MSZ-350-SL Low MSZ-350-RN Rotating Normal Tr 100x16 Screw MSZ-350-RL Low 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

1.60 0.40 1.60 0.40

mm mm mm mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types S Basic model S

10:1 40:1 10:1 40:1

Stroke per revolution5)

Standard types R Safety nut SIFA

Anti-Backlash AB

Rotation control and wear control of the nut

Adjustable anti-backlash

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Wear control of the nut

188


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z -350-R - Rotating Screw 350 kN

deep deep

base line

deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 7 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 350kN (35 t) Max.drive pressure/tensile 350 kN (35 t) Max. shaft speed force static -- 1200 rpm Max. dimension drive shaft speed -- Tr 1800 min 2)-1(higher on request) Screw 100x16 2) Screwreduction dimension -- 10.66:1 Tr 100x16 Gear (N) / 32:1 (L) Gear reduction - 10:1 (N) / 40:1 (L) Material corrosion resistant Materialofofthe boxscrew jack body -- GGG-50, GG grey cast Worm shaft case hardened, ground Lubrication -- steel, grease Gearbox Weight oflubrication lifting gear -- Synthetic 87 kg fluid, grease Spindle Weightlubrication of spindle/m - Grease 66 kg lubrication 3)5) Drive torque MG[Nm] -- 112 F [kN] Weight of the screw jack body Kgx 1.213)5)+ ML(N-Normal) F [kN] x 0.38 + ML(L-Low) Weight of spindle/m - 52 Kg Starting torque -- Max. drive 1800 torqueNm MG x 1.5 Drive through 4) torque Idle torque ML [Nm] - 3.24 (N-Normal) Operating temperature - Max. 60 °C - 2.20 (L-Low) Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr100x16 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr120x16 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 16mm

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R These curves are N =for Normal speed guidance L = under Low speed standard

[kN] load 350 300

N/

10

250

0m in

200 150 N/1

100 50 0

L/1

static

Technical data S and R

L/1

500

0m

min

Trapezoidal screw

5 0% Tr 100x16 2 basis: 20°C

189

00

10

500 min -1 N/1 0 500 00 mi -1 min -1 n

N/1

-1

industrial Thisconditions diagram indicates the (ambient maximum capacity temperature etc.) (under andoptimal correct conditions). maintenance Where duty or load (lubrication etc.). are The nearmax. upperinput limits we recommend drive torquesthe for selection of a service bigger optimum gearbox. life are available

at The www.tea.net.au maximum duty % duty cycle/10 mincycle is affected by 15 20 25 30 at 3520 °Cmany factors: e.g.: lubrication, operating time in % per 10 ‘ environment temperature, bellows, etc. in

-1

-1


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-500-S - Standing Screw 500 kN

deep

base line

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

Speed

Standard Screw2)

MSZ-500-SN Standing Normal Tr 120x16 Screw MSZ-500-SL Low MSZ-500-RN Rotating Normal Tr 120x16 Screw MSZ-500-RL Low 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

14:1 56:1 14:1 56:1

Stroke per revolution5)

1.143 0.286 1.143 0.286

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types S Basic model S

i

Standard types R Safety nut SIFA

Anti-Backlash AB

Rotation control and wear control of the nut

Adjustable anti-backlash

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Wear control of the nut

190

mm mm mm mm


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-500-R - Rotating Screw 500 kN

deep

base line

deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 8 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 500kN (50 t) Max. shaft speedforce static - - 500 1000kNrpm Max.drive pressure/tensile (50 t) Max. drive shaft speed - - 1800 min -12)(higher on request) Screw dimension Tr 120x16 2) Screwreduction dimension - - Tr 120x16(N) Gear 10.66:1 / 32:1 (L) Gear reduction (N) / 56:1 (L) resistant Material of the screw jack body - - 14:1 GGG-50, corrosion Material of box - GG grey cast Worm shaft steel, case hardened, ground Lubrication - grease Gearbox Synthetic Weight oflubrication lifting gear -- 165 kg fluid, grease Spindle Grease Weight lubrication of spindle/m - - 78 kg lubrication 3)5) Drive torque [Nm] - - F168 [kN]Kg x 1.03 3)5)+ ML(N-Normal) Weight of the M screw jack body G - - F77[kN] Weight of spindle/m Kg x 0.35 + ML(L-Low) Starting torquetorque - - drive MG x 1.5 Drive through Max. torque 1940 Nm 4) Idle torquetemperature ML [Nm] - - 3.96 Operating Max. (N-Normal) 60 °C - 2.84 (L-Low) Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr120x16 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr140x20 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 16mm

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R

[kN] load

N = Normal speed These curves are L = for Lowguidance speed

under standard Thisindustrial diagram indicates the conditions maximum capacity 400 (ambient (under optimal etc.) temperature conditions). and correct 300 Where duty or load maintenance are (lubrication near upper etc.). limits N/ 1 200 00 we recommend the The max. input mi N/ n 1 50 drive torques for selection of a bigger 0m in -1 optimum service gearbox. N/ 100 L/1 N/ L/5 L/1 1 0 1 0 50 0m 00 00 life are available 0 m 500 in -1 mi - min -1 in -1 min -1 n 1 The at maximum duty 0 duty 30 cycle/10 Trapezoidal www.tea.net.au is affected by 5 screw 0% 2 10 20 %25 35 mincycle at 20 °Cmany factors: e.g.: Tr 120x16 basis: 20°C operating time in % per 10 ‘ lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc. 500

static

Technical data S and R

191


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-650-S - Standing Screw 650 kN

base line

deep

Basic Versions Tr Version

Type

Speed

Standard Screw2)

MSZ-650-SN Standing Normal Tr 140x20 Screw MSZ-650-SL Low MSZ-650-RN Rotating Normal Tr 140x20 Screw MSZ-650-RL Low 1)

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

14:1 56:1 14:1 56:1

Stroke per revolution5)

1.429 0.357 1.429 0.357

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types S Basic model S

i

Standard types R Safety nut SIFA

Anti-Backlash AB

Rotation control and wear control of the nut

Adjustable anti-backlash

Basic model R Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Safety nut SIFA

Wear control of the nut

192

mm mm mm mm


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-650-R - Rotating Screw 650 kN

base line

deep x = calculated spindle length, (see www.tea.net.au) + 3 mm System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R - 750kN (75 t) 1000kNrpm - - 650 (65 t) - -1800 min -12)(higher on request) Tr 140x20 2) - - Tr13.33:1 140x20(N) / 40:1 (L) - - 14:1 (N) / 56:1 (L) resistant GGG-50, corrosion - - GG cast steel,grey case hardened, ground - grease Synthetic - - 202 kg fluid, grease Grease - - 105 kg lubrication 3)5) - - F262 [kN]Kg x 1.21 + ML(N-Normal) 3)5) - - F104 [kN]Kg x 0.39 + ML(L-Low) - - drive MG x 1.5 Max.torque 4570 Nm - - 5.60 Max. (N-Normal) 60 °C - 3.40 (L-Low)

Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see www.tea.net.au 2) - Tr140x20 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr160x20 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 20mm

N = Normal speedare These curves L = Low speed for guidance under standard This diagram 650 industrial indicates the 600 conditions maximum capacity (ambient 500 (undertemperature optimal conditions). etc.) and correct 400 N/ Wheremaintenance duty or load 10 0m are near upper limits (lubrication in -1 300 we recommend the etc.). selection a bigger The of max. input L/1 200 N/1 00 000 min -1 gearbox. drive torques for N/ L/5 min -1N/1 10 100 50 00 optimum service 00 0 min -1 min -1 min -1 The maximum duty life are available 0 cycle at is affected by 5 screw 0%Trapezoidal 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 % duty cycle/10 min manywww.tea.net.au factors: e.g.: basis:Tr20°C operating time in % per 10 at ‘ 20 °C 140x20 lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc. [kN] load

193

dynamic

Max. pressure/tensile force static Max. drive shaft speedforce static pressure/tensile Max. drive shaft speed Screw dimension Screwreduction dimension Gear Gear reduction Material of the screw jack body Material of box Worm shaft Lubrication Gearbox Weight oflubrication lifting gear Spindle lubrication Weight of spindle/m Weight of theMscrew Drive torque [Nm]jack body G Weight of spindle/m Starting torquetorque Drive through Idle torque4)temperature ML [Nm] Operating

static

Technical data S and R


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-750-S - Standing Screw 750 kN

base line

Basic Versions Tr Version deep

Type

Speed

Standard Screw2)

MSZ-750-SN Standing Normal Tr 140x20 Screw MSZ-750-SL Low MSZ-750-RN Rotating Normal Tr 140x20 Screw MSZ-750-RL Low 1)

i

14:1 56:1 14:1 56:1

Stroke per revolution5)

1.429 0.357 1.429 0.357

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

Standard types S

Standard types R

Basic model S

Basic model R

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

Heavy duty screw jack grey cast housing

194

mm mm mm mm


Heavy Duty Screw Jacks ‘Z’ Series Z-750-R - Rotating Screw 750 kN

base line

x = on request. System components are presented on website www.tea.net.au A minimum of 16mm safety clearance is required between the nut + gearbox / nut + end mounting to prevent damage due to possible overrun. deep

These curves are N= speed forNormal guidance L =under Low speed standard

[kN] load 750 700 600 500 N/1 00 m

400

in

-1

300 200 100

dynamic

Max. pressure/tensile force static - 1000kN (100 t) Max.drive pressure/tensile (75 t) Max. shaft speedforce static - - 750 1000kNrpm Max. drive shaft speed - - 1800 min -12)(higher on request) Screw dimension Tr 160x20 2) Screwreduction dimension - - Tr 140x20(N) Gear 13.33:1 / 40:1 (L) Gear reduction - 14:1 (N) / 56:1 (L) Material of the screw jack body GGG-50, corrosion resistant Material of box - steel Worm shaft steel, case hardened, ground Lubrication - - grease Gearbox Synthetic Weight oflubrication lifting gear - - 270 kg fluid, grease Spindle Grease Weight lubrication of spindle/m - - 105 kg lubrication 3)5) Drive torque [Nm] - - F408 [kN]Kgx 1.173)5)+ ML(N-Normal) Weight of the M screw jack body G F [kN] x 0.35 + ML(L-Low) Weight of spindle/m - 139 Kg Starting torquetorque - - drive MG x 1.5 Drive through Max. torque 4570 Nm 4) Idle torque ML [Nm] - 7.28 (N-Normal) Operating temperature Max.(L-Low) 60 °C - - 4.42 Important notes 1) - For bellows or spiral spring extensions: see chapter 4 2) - Tr140x20 is standard, also available: 2-pitch, INOX, left-handed, larger diameter spindle Tr160x20 (only for R version) 3) - Factor includes efficiency, ratio and 30% safety 4) - May be higher in new condition 5) - At spindle pitch of 20mm

Capacity diagram stat./dyn. S and R

static

Technical data S and R

Selection, calculation & checklists see pages 159-173

L/1 00 N/1 min -1 000 min -1 N /50 L/5 L/1 0m 00 000 in -1 min -1 min -1

Trapezoidal screw 0 5 0% 2 10 Tr 160x20 basis: 20°C

195

industrial This diagram conditions indicates the (ambient maximum capacity temperature etc.) (under and optimal correct conditions). maintenance Where duty or etc.). load (lubrication areThe near upper limits max. input wedrive recommend torques the for selection of aservice bigger optimum gearbox. life are available

at Thewww.tea.net.au maximum duty % duty cycle/10 mincycle is affected by 15 20 25 30 at35 20 °Cmany factors: e.g.: operating time in % per 10 ‘ lubrication, environment temperature, bellows, etc.


Z Series - Features

Variant: Trapezoidal Screw Tr

Sealed Gearbox

Variant: Safety nut SIFA

Variant: Ball screw KGT

Corrosion resistant Four mounting options

High performance hardened and ground gears

Integrated pivot bearing

Standard flange, simple and costeffective

Fluid grease in the gearbox permits high performance

Basic Versions Tr Version

Direct screw lubrication

Type

MSZ-5-A-SN Standing Screw MSZ-5-A-SL MSZ-5-A-RN Rotating Screw MSZ-5-A-RL 1)

Speed Normal Low Normal Low

Standard Screw2) Tr 18x4 Tr 18x4

i

Side marking Stroke per revolution5) 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm 4:1 1.00 mm 16:1 0.25 mm

- with bellows or spiral spring extension: see www.tea.net.au

196


GSZ Series - Features

Variant: Trapezoidal screw Tr

Optional stainless

Sealed gearbox

Variant: Safety nut SIFA

Variant: Ball screw KGT

Corrosion resistant

Smooth, easy to clean surface Top or bottom mounting

High performance hardened and ground gears

Fluid grease in the gearbox permits high

Standard flange, simple and

Direct screw lubrication

197


Miniature Screw Jack GSZ Series GSZ-2-S and GSZ-2-R

Miniature Screw Jack Building Block System. Whether complete system or single gear, whether driven by hand or by motor; now available the ZIMM Miniature Screw Jack with a plug-type building block system. Max. pressure Max. drive shaft speed Screw dimension Gear reduction Integrated pivot bearing Material of the box pivot rangetime at 250N Operating Lubrication Weight of lifting gear Weight of screw/m

- 260kN - 3000 min-1 - TR 12x3, TR 12x6P3 - 7.5:1 / 12:1 - Aluminium, black anodised - 20% in 10 min; 10% in 1 hr - Grease - 0.49kg - 0.75kg

High-performance toothing: hardened and ground

Please contact T.E.A for additional information or refer www.tea.net.au

199


Linear Actuator Range - overview Pages

Powerful Miniature Actuators Standar

d

Optiona

l

12/24V Max. Load 120kg. (50:1), 40kg. (12:1) Max. Stroke 925mm - Open spindle type Max. Stroke 300mm - Protected spindle type Most sizes in stock

202-203

CX.LAT Series 12/24V Max. Load 400kg. 12 orStroke 24V 500mm Max. Ballscrew or Acme Max. Stroke 400mm Max. Thrust 400kg. - Ball screw Max. Thrust 300kg. - Acme Max. Speed at full load 16mm/s IP54 Options: IP65 / Gearbox housing turned 90ยบ - 36VDC

LAM1-1 & LAM1-2

204-205

204-205

LAM 3 12 or 24 V Max. Stroke 400mm Max. Thrust 600kg. Max. Speed at full load 11.5mm/s IP66 Options: IP66 - Safety nut - Back fixture turned 90ยบ

206-207

LAI1 12 or 24 V Max. Stroke 300mm Max. Thrust 400kg. Max. Speed at full load 6mm/s IP20 Options: IP66 - Hall Sensor

208-209

LAS1-1 & LAS1-2 12/24V Max. Stroke 250mm, Max. Thrust 120kg. Max. Speed at full load 16mm/s - IP54 Options: IP65, 36V, Rod end with flat connector, External reed switches, Gearbox housing turned 90ยบ.

210-211

LAS 3 As above with following options: IP65, Position Feedback or Optical Sensor, 36V, Gearbox housing turned 90ยบ

212-213

LAS 4 In-line Actuator, Max. stroke 300mm, Max. Thrust 80kg. Max. speed at full load 30mm/s, 12/24V, IP54 Options: IP65, Hall Sensor

200

214-215


Linear Actuator Range - overview LAN 1 12/24V Max. Stroke 300mm Max. Thrust 600kg. Max. Speed under full load 12mm/s IP54 Options: IP66 - 24V Quick Motor - Position feedback Safety nut - Mechanical spline (push only) - Back fixture turned 90° - Mechanical quick release - motor cable outlet - 36V

Pages

216-217

LAN3 24V Max. Stroke 500, Max. Thrust 1000kg. Max. Speed under full load 9.5mm/s IP54 Options: IP66 - Potentiometer - Safety nut - Spline (push only) -Mechanical quick release - Back fixture turned 90º - 36V - External reed switches

218-219

LAN4 12/24V Max. Stroke 400, Max. Thrust 350kg. Max. Speed under full load 11mm/s IP54 Options: IP66 - Safety nut - Mechanical Spline (push only) -Mechanical quick release - Back fixture turned 90º - 36V - External reed switches 220-221

LAN5 24V Max. Stroke 300mm Max. Thrust 800kg. Max. Speed under full load 9.5mm/s IP54 Options: IP66 - 24V Quick Motor - Hall Sensor Safety nut - Mechanical Spline (push only) - Back fixture turned 0º, 45º, 90º or 135º - Back fixture and rod eye hole Ø12.1mm

222-223

LAC3 24V Max. Stroke 500mm Max. Thrust 200kg. Max. Speed under full load 8.4mm/s IP54 Option: Position Feedback

Keypads, Controllers & other accessories 201

224-225

226-227


Powerful Miniature Actuators • Compact - only 126.5mm long • Strong - can lift up to 1200N (120 kg) • Lightweight - see below • 12 to 24V DC • Stroke Speed - 5-20mm per sec. • Max. stroke length - 925mm

le

pind ted S rotec

P

d

chine

d pplie e - su

unma ends e l d spin d and e l b m e unass

l Spind Open

Material:

Spur gear mechanism Spindle nut Spindle

Standard Clevis Head

Zinc diecast Hostaform double roller bearing Free cutting steel

Maximum stroke

925mm (observe buckling risk)

Voltage . Current consumption

0-24V D.C

Required input

10-48 VA

Stroke Speed

5-20mm/sec

Duty cycle

Intermittent or short time (30-80%)

Weight

Protected spindle 300mm stroke .94 kg Open spindle 300mm stroke .60kg

Spindle

TR 10x3 (length = stroke +75mm) Note: Spindle ends unmachined

Stroke per rpm

0.25mm

Open spindle type supplied with:

Standard clevis head (machine end of spindle to fit 6mm, secure with supplied split pins) 4 x split pins for securing parts to spindle 2 x threaded pins to mount the unit 1 x end block

0-2 Amp.

Optional clevis head for open spindle To attach - spindle must be machined to suit M6 Grease

Unigear LA 02

All specfications are subject to change without notice.

202

Optional Clevis Head


Powerful Miniature Actuators

Optional Clevis Head P/N MHG-GK-6

Load/Speed/Voltage Graph Ratio 12:1 Max. load - 400N (40 kg)

Load/Speed/Voltage Graph Ratio 50:1 Max. load - 1200N (120 kg)

Ratio

Type

Stroke Length

Y mm

Part Number

12:1

Open

Max. 925mm

9908900 + stroke length

50:1

Open

Max. 925mm

9908904 + stroke length

12:1

Protected

50mm 100mm 120mm 200mm 250mm 300mm

115 165 215 265 315 365

9908580 9908581 9908582 9908583 9908584 9908585

50:1

Protected

50mm 100mm 120mm 200mm 250mm 300mm

115 165 215 265 315 365

9908550 9908551 9908552 9908553 9908554 9908555

a

a

All dimensions in mm All specifications are subject to change without notice.

203


Linear Actuators - LAM Series LAM Series (1) LAM1-1 & LAM1-2

Screw type

Ball screw / ACME

Weight*

2.31 kg

Protection

IP 54

Compatible Controller

LAK2, LAK2LR, LAK2D, LAK2BN, LAK2J, LAK6B

Working temperature

+5°C ~ 40°C

* Stroke length 100 mm Options:

(1) IP65 (2) Gear box material : Steel (standard Zn(85%) AL(15%)) (3) Gear box housing turned 90° (4) 36VDC Motor (5) UL version only 24VDC motor specifications

Ø12.2±0.1

Ø12.2±0.1

(6) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

27

(Only 24VDC certified by UL) 29

RL

(150) (123)

Ø63.5

27

14 21

Ø50

19

78

MOTOR CABLE MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1M

13 Ø33

(19.3)

_ 400mm LAM1-1/-2 RL = S + 153mm Stroke< RL = S + 203mm Stroke >400mm _ 400mm LAM1-1A RL = S + 162mm Stroke< RL = S + 212mm Stroke >400mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

204


LAM -1 & 2 Specifications P/N

Screw

Thrust

Pulling

Holding force

Type

max.

max.

max.

(mm/s)

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=Max./Load=0

4000

3000

4000

8/11

LAM-1 Ballscrew

Speed

Duty Standard stroke (mm) : S 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

Max. current

cycle

(A)

%

12VDC 24VDC

10

12

6

LAM-2 Ballscrew

2000

2000

1200

16/21

100 150 200 250 300 350 400

10

12

6

LAM-1A ACME

3000

3000

3000

8/11

100 150 200 250 300 350 400

10

12

6

LAM-1/ -2 / -1A

24(12)VDC Motor 25

Speed (mm/s)

20 LAM-1 15

LAM-2 LAM-1A

10 5 0 0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

Load (N)

LAM-1/ -2 / -1A

24 VDC Motor 0

6

Current (Amp)

5 LAM-1

4

LAM-2 3

LAM-1A

2 1 0 0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.

LAM-1/ -2 / -1A

12 VDC Motor 12

Current (Amp)

10 LAM-1

8

LAM-2

6

LAM-1A

4 2 0 0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.

Ordering Information

LAM - 1 - 0 - 200 - 24 E

Model number (Ballscrew: 1 / 2, ACME 1A)

Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

0: Basic model (without magnet) 1: Complete with external limit switches Stroke length

Voltage

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

205


Linear Actuators - LAM Series LAM3

Screw type

ACME

Weight*

2.95 kg

Protection

IP 54

Compatible Controller

Compatible with all controllers Notice type of connector: Audio/DIN 4pin

Working temperature

+5°C ~ 40°C

* Stroke length 200 mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Safety Nut (RL = S+183mm) (3) Back fixture turned 90° (4) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

Ø25.4

6.2

Ø25

Ø10 +0.2 -0

RL 154

13

14

98 81 66.5 32.7

15

141.5 83

52 39.7

11

(20.5)

28 83

21.5

+0.2

10 - 0

Ø25.9

MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1000mm

_ RL = S + 171mm Stroke <300mm < RL = S + 221mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

206


LAM - 3 Specifications P/N LAM3-1

Thrust max.

Pulling max.

Holding force max.

Speed (mm/s)

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=Max./Load=0

6000

5000

5000

4/5.5

Duty cycle

Standard stroke (mm) : S

% 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

Max. current (A) 12VDC

10

12

24VDC

6

LAM3-2

4000

4000

4000

5.5/7.5

100 150 200 250 300 350 400

10

10

5

LAM3-3

3000

3000

3000

7/9

100 150 200 250 300 350 400

10

8

4

LAM3-4

2000

2000

1500

11.5/14.5

100 150 200 250 300 350 400

10

8

4

LAM3-1/2/3/4

24 (12) VDC Motor

Speed (mm/s)

25 20 LAM3-1 15

LAM3-2 LAM3-3

10

LAM3-4

5 0 0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

Load (N)

6

LAM3-1/2/3/4

24VDC Motor

Current (Amp)

5 4 LAM3-1 3

LAM3-2 LAM3-3

2

LAM3-4

1 0 0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply. 12

LAM3-1/2/3/4

12VDC Motor

Current (Amp)

10 8 LAM3-1

6

LAM3-2 LAM3-3

4

LAM3-4 2 0 0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.

Ordering Information

LAM3 - 1 - 1 - 300 - 24 - G - E

Model number

Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

0: without internal limit switches 1: Basic model complete with internal limit switches

Color B : Black G : Grey

Stroke length

Voltage

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

207


Linear Actuators - LAI Series LAI Series (1) LAI1

Screw type

Ball screw / ACME

Weight*

2.4 kg

Protection

IP 20

Compatible Controller

LAK2, LAK2LR, LAK2D, LAK2BN, LAK2J, LAK6B

Working temp

+5째C ~ 40째C

* Stroke length 200 mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Hall Sensor (3) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

LAI1-1A _ 300mm RL = S + 190mm Stroke < RL = S + 240mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke LAI1- 1A

15

LAI1-1

_ 300mm RL = S + 170mm Stroke < RL = S + 220mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke LAI 1

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

208


LAI1 - Specifications P/N

Screw type

Thrust max.

Pulling Holding max. max.

Speed (mm/s)

Duty cycle

Standard stroke (mm) : S

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=Max./Load=0

Max. current (A)

%

12VDC

24VDC

LAI-1

Ballscrew

4000

4000

1200

6/9

100 150 200 250 300

10

8

4

LAI-1A

ACME

4000

4000

3000

6/9

100 150 200 250 300

10

10

5

LAI-1 / -1A

24(12) VDC Motor 12

Speed (mm/s)

10 8 6

LAI1-1 LAI1-1A

4 2 2000

1000

0 0

3000

1000

2000

5000 3000

4000

Load (N)

LAI-1 / -1A

24VDC Motor

Current (Amp)

5 4

LAI1-1

3 LAI1-1A 2 1 0 0

1000

2000

3000

4000

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.

LAI1-1/ -1A

12VDC Motor

1

Current (Amp)

9 7

LAI1-1

5

LAI1-1A

3 1 0 0

2000

1000

3000

4000

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.

Ordering Information LAI1

1

0

200

Model number (Ballscrew: 1) (Acme: 1A) 0: Basic model (without magnet) 1: Complete with external limit switches

24 E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required) Voltage

Stroke length

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

209


Linear Actuators - LAS Series (1) LAS1-1/2

Screw type

ACME

Weight*

1.04 kg

Protection**

IP 54

Compatible Controller

Compatible with all controllers Notice type of connector: Audio/DIN 4pin)

Working temp

+5°C ~ 40°C

* Stroke length 200 mm ** Option: (1) IP65 (2) Gearbox housing turned 90° (3) Rod end with flat connector (RL=S+110mm) (4) 36VDC motor (5) External reed switches (6) Plastic gear (max. Load: 800N)

Flat connector

(7) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

40 5

Ø19 Ø18

Ø18.8

2-Ø8.1 ±0.1

9.5

19.5

73.5

83

Ø38

(100)

MOTOR CABLE MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1M

8 10

20

(RL-55) RL

(25) 9.4

27

_ RL = S + 119mm Stroke <250mm < RL = S + 169mm Stroke >250mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

210


LAS1 - Specifications P/N

Thrust max.

Pulling Holding force max. max.

Speed (mm/s)

Duty cycle

Standard stroke (mm) : S

%

Max. current (A) 12VDC 24VDC

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=Max./Load=0

LAS1-1

1200

1200

800

8/12

50 100 150 200 250

10

6

2.5

LAS1-2

600

600

300

16/25

50 100 150 200 250

10

6

3

LAS1-1/ -2 24(12) VDC Motor 30

Speed (mm/s)

25 20 LAS1-1

15

LAS1-2

10 5 0 0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

Load (N)

LAS1-1/ -2

24 VDC Motor 3.0

Current (Amp)

2.5 2.0 LAS1-1

1.5

LAS1-2

1.0 0.5 0 0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.

LAS1-1/ -2

12 VDC Motor 6

Current (Amp)

5 4 LAS1-1

3

LAS1-2

2 1 0 0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.

Ordering Information

LAS - 1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

Model number a

0: Without internal limit switches 1: Basic model - Complete with internal limit switches

Colour B: Black G: Grey (standard)

a

Stroke length

Voltage All specifications are subject to change without notice.

211


Linear Actuators - LAS Series LAS - 3

Screw type

ACME

Position feedback specifications (Optical Sensor)

Weight*

1.27 kg

Protection

IP 54

Supply Voltage

a

Compatible Controller Compatible with all controllers Notice type of connector:

24VDC

12VDC

5VDC

High level 24VDC Low level 0.2V/40mA PNP PS. Open collector

High level 12VDC Low level 0.2V/40mA PNP PS. Open collector

TTL

a

Output

Audio/DIN 4pin Working temp

+5°C ~ 40°C

* Stroke length 200 mm Options: (1) IP65 (2) Position feedback 1: Potentiometer 10k ohm (RL=S+154mm) 2: Optical sensor: PNP (standard), NPN. TTL (3) 36VDC motor (4) Back fixture turned 90°

±0.1

_ RL = S + 146mm Stroke 250mm < RL = S + 196mm Stroke >250mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

212


LAS - 3 Specifications Thrust Pulling Holding force

Speed

Duty

Max.current

Resolution

Resolution

(mm/pulse)

(Ohm/mm)

Optical Sensor Potentiometer

max.

max.

max.

(mm/s)

Standard stroke

cycle

(A)

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=Max./Load=0

(mm) : S

%

12VDC 24VDC

LAS3-1 1200

1200

800

8/12

50 100 150 200 250

10

6

2.5

0.3175

21

LAS3-2 600

600

300

16/25

50 100 150 200 250

10

6

3

0.635

10.5

P/N

LAS3-1/ -2

24(12) VDC Motor 30

Speed (mm/s)

25 20 LAS3-1

15

LAS3-2

10 5 0 0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

Load (N)

LAS3-1/ -2

24 VDC Motor 3.0

Current (Amp)

2.5 2.0 LAS3-1

1.5

LAS3-2

1.0 0.5 0 0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.

LAS3-1/ -2

12 VDC Motor 6

Current (Amp)

5 4 LAS3-1

3

LAS3-2

2 1 0 0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.

Ordering Information

LAS 3 - 1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

Model number 1/ 2 a

0: Without internal limit switches 1: Basic model - Complete with internal limit switches

Colour B: Black G: Grey (standard)

a

Stroke length a

Voltage All specifications are subject to change without notice.

213


Linear Actuators - LAS Series (4) LAS 4

Screw type

ACME

Position feedback specifications (Hall Sensor)

Weight*

1.36 kg

Protection

IP 54

Supply Voltage 24VDC

a

Compatible Controller Compatible with all controllers

Working temp

12VDC

5VDC

High level 12VDC

TTL

a

Output High level 24VDC

Notice type of connector:

Low level 0.2v/10mA sink

Low level 0.2v/10mA sink

Audio/DIN 4pin

(NPN)

(NPN)

+5°C ~ 40°C

* Stroke length 200 mm Options: (1) IP65 (2) Hall sensor (RL=S+226mm)

5

(3) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

MOTOR CABLE MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1M MOTOR CABLE DIAMETER=Ø5

29.5

8.8

Ø1

15.5

45

2-Ø6 ±0.1

8.5

4 15

7

5

(27.5) RL

9.4

45

_ 300mm RL = S + 222.5mm Stroke < RL = S + 272.5mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

214


LAS4 - Specifications Thrust Pulling Holding force P/N

Duty

Max.current

Hall Sensor

max.

max.

max.

(mm/s)

Speed Standard stroke

cycle

(A)

Resolution

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=Max./Load=0

(mm) : S

%

12VDC 24VDC

(mm/pulse)

LAS4-1 800

800

600

10/15

100 150 200 250 300

10

5

2.3

0.0085

LAS4-2 300

300

200

30/46

100 150 200 250 300

10

6

3.6

0.02

LAS4-1/ -2

24(12) VDC Motor 50

Speed (mm/s)

40 30

LAS4-1 LAS4-2

20 10 0 200

0

400

600

800

Load (N)

LAS4-1/ -2

24 VDC Motor 4

Current (Amp)

3.5 3 2.5 LAS4-1

2

LAS4-2

1.5 1 0.5 0 0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.

6

LAS4-1/ -2

12 VDC Motor

Current (Amp)

5 4 LAS4-1

3

LAS4-2

2 1 0 0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply.

Ordering Information

LAS4 - 1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

Model number 1 / 2 0: Without internal limit switches 1: Basic model - Complete with internal limit switches

Colour B: Black G: Grey (standard)

Stroke length

Voltage

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

215


Linear Actuators - LAN Series (1) LAN1

Screw type

ACME

Position feedback specifications (Hall Sensor)

Weight*

2.6 kg

Supply

Protection

IP 54

Voltage 24VDC

Compatible with all controllers Output High level 24VDC Low level 0.2v/10mA sink Compatible Controller Notice type of connector: (NPN) Audio/DIN 4pin Working temp

12VDC

5VDC

High level 12VDC

TTL

Low level 0.2v/10mA sink (NPN)

+5°C ~ 40°C

* Stroke length 200mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Position feedback (3) Safety nut (RL=S+185mm (4) Mechanical Spline (push only) (RL=S+223mm) (5) Back fixture turned 90°

(6) Mechanical quick release (RL=S+230mm), only for LAN1-4 (7) Motor cable outlet: (A) Standard (B) Front (C) Back (8) 36VDC motor (9) UL Version (10) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

RL 82.6

(25) 11 Ø21.9

6.2

7.5

Ø26

33

-0 Ø10+0.2

11

33.5

54.8

50.8

57.8

158 170

-0 Ø10+0.2

(C)

71

24.9

24.6

173.5 166

(B)

(A) 78 MOTOR CABLE MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1000mm MOTOR CABLE DIAMETER=Ø5.5mm

_ 300mm RL = S + 173mm Stroke < RL = S + 223mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

216


LAN1 Specifications Standard Motor P/N

Thrust max. (N)

Pulling max. (N)

Holding max. (N)

LAN1-1

6000

5000

5000

2.7/5

100 150 200 250 300

10

4

0.3

LAN1-2

4000

4000

4000

5/7

100 150 200 250 300

10

4

0.5

Speed (mm/s)

Duty Max.current Hall Sensor cycle (A) Resolution % 24VDC (mm/pulse)

Standard stroke (mm) : S

Load=Max/Load=0

LAN1-1/ -2

24 VDC Motor

16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

Current (Amp)

Speed (mm/s)

Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply and holding motor short-circuited.

LAN1-1 LAN1-2

1000

0

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

LAN1-1/ -2

24 VDC Motor

4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0

LAN1-1 LAN1-2

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

Load (N)

Load (N)

24VDC Motor - Quick Motor P/N

Thrust max. (N)

Pulling max. (N)

Holding Duty Max.current Speed (mm/s) Standard stroke max. cycle (A) (mm) : S (N) % 24VDC Load=Max/Load=0 5000 5/7 100 150 200 250 300 10 6

LAN1-1

6000

5000

LAN1-2

4000

4000

4000

7/9

100 150 200 250 300

10

6

0.4

LAN1-3

3000

3000

3000

9/11.5

100 150 200 250 300

10

6

0.5

LAN1-4

2000

2000

2000

12/17

100 150 200 250 300

10

5.5

0.8

Hall Sensor Resolution (mm/pulse) 0.3

24 VDC Motor(24Q)

18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

LAN-1/ -2 / -3 LAN1-1/2/3/4 6

Current (Amp)

Speed (mm/s)

Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply and holding by motor short-circuited.

LAN1-1 LAN1-2 LAN1-3 LAN1-4

LAN1-1/2/3/4 LAN-1/ -2 / -3

24 VDC Motor

5 4 3

LAN1-1 LAN1-2

2

LAN1-3 LAN1-4

1 0

0

1000

2000

3000 Load (N)

4000

5000

0

6000

1000

2000

3000 Load (N)

4000

5000

6000

12VDC Motor P/N

Thrust max. (N)

Pulling max. (N)

Holding Speed (mm/s) max. Load=Max/Load=0 (N)

Duty Max.current Hall Sensor cycle (A) Resolution % 12VDC (mm/pulse)

Standard stroke (mm) : S

LAN1-1

5000

5000

5000

3/6

100 150 200 250 300

10

11

0.3

LAN1-2

4000

4000

4000

4/8

100 150 200 250 300

10

11

0.4

LAN1-3

3000

3000

3000

5/10

100 150 200 250 300

10

10

0.5

Note: The test results are obtained by using 12VDC power supply. LAN1-1/ -2 / -3

12 VDC Motor

12 VDC Motor 8 6

LAN1-1 LAN1-2

4

LAN1-3

2 0 0

1000

2000

Load (N)

3000

4000

5000

Current (Amp)

Speed (mm/s)

10

12.0 10.5 9.5 7.5 6.0 4.5 3.0 1.5 0 0

LAN1-1/ -2 / -3

LAN1-1 LAN1-2 LAN1-3

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

Load (N)

Ordering Information Model number 1 / 2

LAN1 - 1

1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E

Force direction 1: Standard 2: Suspending install, pull

Color B : Black G : Grey

0: Without internal limit switches 1: Basic model complete with internal limit switches Stroke length

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

217

Voltage 24 : Standard 24Q : 24VDC (Quick) 12 : 12VDC Standard


Linear Actuators - LAN Series LAN3

Screw type

ACME

Weight*

5.31 kg

Protection

IP 54

Compatible Controller

LAK6B/LAK2J

Working temp

+5°C ~ 40°C

* Stroke length 200mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Potentiometer 10K ohm (RL=S+221mm, S<200mm / RL=S+271mm, S:200~500mm) The maximum stroke lengths with potentiometer: LAN3-1 max. 250mm, LAN3-2 max. 330mm, LAN3-3 max. 420mm (3) Mechanical spline (RL=S+252, S<200mm / RL=S+302, S:200~500mm) (4) Safety nut (RL=S+222, S<200mm / RL=S+272, S:200~500mm) Safety nut + mechanical spline (RL=S+259, S<200mm / RL=S+309, S:200~500mm) (5) Mechanical quick release (6) Back fixture turned 90º (7) Fast motor 24Q (8) 36VDC motor (9) External reed switches (RL=S+290mm, S<200mm/RL=S+340mm, S=200~500mm) (10) MR Sensor feedback (11) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

+0.1 -0.05

RL=S+210mm Stroke <200mm RL=S+260mm Stroke 200mm~500mm

RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

218


LAN3 Specifications P/N

Thrust max.

Pull max.

Hold max.

(N)

(N)

(N)

LAN3-1 10000 LAN3-2 7000 LAN3-3 5000

Speed

Duty Max Potentiometer cycle current Resolution (A) % 24VDC (Ohm/mm)

Standard stroke Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)

mm : S

5/8 7/9 9.5/12.5

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

6000 10000 6000 7000 5000 5000

10 10 10

8.3 8 7

37.5 28 22.5

Stroke over 200mm(included), RL=S+260mm (Longer tube required for extra strength against buckling) * The max. stroke lengths with potentiometer : LAN3-1 max. 250mm, LAN3-2 max. 330mm, LAN3-3 max. 420mm

LAN3-1/ -2 / -3

LAN3-1/ -2 / -3

24 VDC Motor 9

24 VDC Motor

8

15

LAN3-1 LAN3-2 LAN3-3

5

Current (Amp)

Speed (mm/s)

7

10

6 5

LAN3-1

4

LAN3-2

3

LAN3-3

2 1

0

0

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

0

10000

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

Load (N)

Load (N)

Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply and holding by motor short-circuited.

24 VDC Fast motor (24Q) P/N

Thrust max.

Pull max.

Hold max.

(N)

(N)

(N)

LAN3-1 10000 LAN3-2 7000 LAN3-3 5000

Speed Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)

mm : S

8/11 9/13 13/18

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

6000 10000 6000 7000 5000 5000 LAN3-1/2/3

10 10 10

12 11 11

37.5 28 22.5

LAN3-1/2/3 12

20

10

15 LAN3-1 LAN3-2

10

LAN3-3

5 0

Current (Amp)

Speed (mm/s)

Duty Max Potentiometer cycle current Resolution (A) % 24VDC (Ohm/mm)

Standard stroke

8

LAN3-1

6

LAN3-2 LAN3-3

4 2 0

0

1000

2000

3000

4000 5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

0

10000

1000

2000

3000

4000 5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

Load (N)

Load (N)

Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply and holding by motor short-circuited.

Ordering Information

LAN3 - 1

1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

Model number Force direction 1: Standard 2: Pull

Color B : Black G : Grey

1: Basic model complete with internal limit switches

Voltage 24 : Standard 24Q : 24VDC (Quick)

Stroke length

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

219


Linear Actuators - LAN Series (4) LAN4

Screw type

ACME

Weight*

2.33 kg

Protection

IP 54

Compatible Controller

LAK2, LAK2LR, LAK2D, LAK2BN, LAK2J, LAK6B

Working temp

+5°C ~ 40°C

* Stroke length 200mm Options: (1) IP66 (2) Safety nut RL=S+174mm, S<400 / RL=S+224, S>400 (3) Mono jack-plug (Standard is stereo) (4) Mechanical spline (push only) RL=S+200mm, S<400 / RL=S+250, S>400 (5) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

RL

22

Ø21.9 24.9

(22) 11

6-0

+0.2 -0

Ø30

94

Ø10

+0.2

185

+0.2

+0

Ø25.9-0.2 87

Ø10- 0

18.6

+0.2 6.1- 0

11 24 MOTOR CABLE LENGTH=1000MM

_ 200mm RL = S + 160mm Stroke < RL = S + 210mm Stroke >400mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions in mm All specifications are subject to change without notice.

220


LAN4 Specifications P/N LAN4-1 LAN4-2 LAN4-3 LAN4-4

Thrust max.

Pull max.

Hold max.

Speed

Duty cycle

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)

mm : S

%

3500 3000 2000 1500

3500 3000 2000 1500

3500 3000 2000 1500

3.5/7 4.2/9 7/13 11/20

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

10 10 10 10

Standard stroke

Max current (A) 12VDC 24VDC 5 5 5 5

12 12 12 12

LAN4-1/2/3/4 24 (12) VDC Motor 25

Speed (mm/s)

20 LAN4-1 15

LAN4-2 LAN4-3

10

LAN4-4

5 0 0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

Load (N)

LAN4-1/2/3/4 24 VDC Motor 6.0

Current (Amp)

5.0 LAN4-1

4.0

LAN4-2 3.0

LAN4-3

2.0

LAN4-4

1.0 0 0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

Load (N)

LAN4-1/2/3/4 12 VDC Motor

Current (Amp)

12.0 10.0 LAN4-1

8.0

LAN4-2 6.0

LAN4-3 LAN4-4

4.0 2.0 0 0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

Load (N)

Note: Test results obtained using 12VDC power supply

Ordering Information LAN4

1

0

300

24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

Model number

Color B : Black G : Grey

Thrust 0 : Basic model *1 : Over-Current protection

Voltage

Stroke length

* Note: Complete with internal over-current protection circuitry to ensure that the actuator stops if obstacles or stroke limits are reached.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

221


Linear Actuators - LAN Series (5) LAN5

Screw type

ACME

Weight*

1.96 kg

Protection

IP 54

Compatible Controller

Compatible with all controllers (Notice type of connector - Audio/DIN4 PIN)

Working temp

+5°C ~ 40°C

a

* Stroke length 200mm Options: (1) Hall Sensor (2) Safety nut (3) Mechanical Spline (push only) (4) Back fixture turned 0°, 45°, 90°, 135° (5) IP65; IP66 (6) Back fixture and rodeye hole Ø12.1mm

(7) Quick release (For LAN5-3, LAN5-4 only) (8) UL version (9) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

_ 300mm RL = S + 163mm Stroke < RL = S + 213mm Stroke >300mm RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

222


LAN5 (24V) Specifications P/N

LAN5-1 LAN5-2 LAN5-3 LAN5-4

Thrust max.

Pull max.

Hold max.

Speed

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)

mm : S

8000 6000 4000 3000

4000 4000 3000 2000

6000 5000 4000 1500

2/3.5 3/4.5 4/5.5 6/9

100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300

9 8 7

Speed (mm/s)

10 10 10 10

Hall Sensor Resolution (mm/pulse)

5 4 4 4

0.08 0.10 0.14 0.22

When the stroke of LAN5-1 is between 250mm and 300mm,please refer to the diagram below right of maximum load.

LAN5-1/ -2/ -3/ -4

10

Duty Max cycle current (A) % 24VDC

Standard stroke

LAN5-1

6

LAN5-2

5

LAN5-3

4

LAN5-4

3 2 1 0

0

1000

3000

2000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

Load (N)

LAN5-1/ -2/ -3/ -4

5.0

LAN5-1(24/24Q)

4.5 4.0 LAN5-1

3.0

LAN5-2

2.5

LAN5-3

2.0

8000

Load (N)

Current (Amp)

3.5

LAN5-1-250

6000

LAN5-1-300

5000 4000

LAN5-4

1.5

7000

1.00 0.5 0

0 0

1000

3000

2000

5000

4000

6000

7000

0

8000

100

200

150

250

300

400

450

S (mm)

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.

LAN5 (24Q) Specifications P/N

LAN5-1 LAN5-2 LAN5-3 LAN5-4

Thrust max.

Pull max.

Hold max.

Speed

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=max./Load=0 (mm/s)

mm : S

8000 6000 4000 3000

4000 4000 3000 2000

6000 5000 4000 1500

5/7 7/9 9/11 15/19

100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300 100 150 200 250 300

LAN5-1/ -2/ -3/ -4

20 18 16 14

Speed (mm/s)

Duty Max cycle current (A) % 24VDC

Standard stroke

LAN5-1

12

10 10 10 10

Hall Sensor Resolution (mm/pulse)

7.5 6.5 6 6

0.08 0.10 0.14 0.22

When the stroke of LAN5-1 is between 250mm and 300mm,please refer to the diagram below right of maximum load.

LAN5-2

10

LAN5-3

8

LAN5-4

6 4 2 0

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

Load (N)

LAN5-1(24/24Q)

LAN5-1/ -2/ -3/ -4 7.5 5.5

LAN5-1

4.5

LAN5-2

3.5

LAN5-3

2.5

LAN5-4

1.5

8000

Load (N)

Current (Amp)

6.5

7000

LAN5-1-250

6000

LAN5-1-300

5000 4000

0.5 0 0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

0

8000

0

Load (N)

100

150

200

250

300

400

450

S (mm)

Ordering Information LAN5 - 1 1 - 1 - 200 - 24 G E Special models according to Customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

Model number Thrust 1: Push 2: Pull

Color B : Black G : Grey

Basic model complete with internal limit switches

Voltage 24 : Standard 24Q : 24VDC (Quick)

Stroke length

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

223


Linear Actuators - LAC Series LAC3

Screw type

ACME

Weight*

8.1 kg

Protection

IP 54

Compatible Controller

Compatible with all controllers (Notice type of connector - Audio/DIN 4 pin

Working temp

+5째C ~ 40째C

a

* Stroke length 400mm Options: (1) Position feedback: Potentiometer (2) Plug: DIN 4PIN plug / Stereo plug / Mono plug

0

RL = 171mm + S/2 RL : Retracted length S : Stroke

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

224


LAC3 Specifications Duty

Max.current

Potentiometer

max.

max.

max.

(mm/s)

Standard stroke

cycle

(A)

Resolution

(N)

(N)

(N)

Load=Max./Load=0

(mm) : S

%

24VDC

(ohm/mm)

500

2000

8.4/12

300 400 500

10

5

6.42

Thrust Pulling Holding force P/N

LAC3-1 2000

Speed

LAC3

Speed (mm/s)

24 VDC Motor 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0

500

1000

1500

2000

1500

2000

Load (N)

5

LAC3

24 VDC Motor

Current (Amp)

4 3 2 1 0 0

500

1000

Load (N) Note: The test results are obtained by using 24VDC power supply.

Ordering Information LAC3

1

1

400

24 G E Special models according to customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirement (Ignore if not required)

Model number 1: Basic model complete with internal limit switches

Color G : Grey

Stroke length

Voltage

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

225


Linear Actuators - Accessories Controllers: LAK-2LR

LAK-2

LAK-2BN

- Control 1 actuator with external limit switches IP 54 - Over load protection - Electronic protection for relays - 4 mtr cable Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Option: IP66 - Control 1 or 2 linear actuators IP 54 - Over load protection - Electronic protection of relays - 4 mtr cable AC - 1 mtr cable DC Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Input 24VDC / output 24 VDC Input 12VDC / output 12 VDC Option: IP66 - Control 1 or 2 linear actuators IP 54 - Over load protection - Soft start/stop - 4 mtr cable Rechargeable battery - Low battery indicator Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Can have synchronous program when used with actuators with feedback. Option: IP66

LAK-2D

- Control 1 or 2 linear actuators IP54 - Over load protection - 4 mtr cable - insert 2 x 9V alkaline batteries to lower actutators during emergency power loss Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Option: IP66

LAK-2J

- Control 1 or 2 Linear Actuators IP54 - Optional IP65 & Customised program - portable design (operated by battery - Emergency stop button - Emergency operation via front panel - Over load protection - soft start/stop - battery rechargeable via LAKCH charger - Automatic alarm when battery is low - Automatic energy saving mode - LED for power indication.

LAK-4

- Control 1 to 3 Linear Actuators IP54 - Standard 4 mtr cable - can be mounted directly on LAN1. Optional IP66

LAK-4D

- Control 1 to 4 Linear Actuators IP54 - - Standard 4 mtr cable - Detachable cable retainer for protections against accidental unplugging - removable AC power cable External ground and LED power display - can be mounted directly on the LAN5 (must have RL greater than 300mm). Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Option: IP66

Please contact T.E.A. or visit our web site: www.tea.net.au for further information, Installation Instructions, and Safe Operating Regulations.

226


Linear Actuators - Accessories Controllers: LAK4N - Control 1 to 4 linear actuators Standard Features: IP 54 - 4 mtr cable - detachable cable retainer for accidental unplugging protection - LED power indicator - External DC input (LAKB1/2) - Re-configurable simultaneous movement - Microprocessor (Software version) can receive the signal of hall sensor, optical sensor or potentiometer - over load protection - removable AC power cable - soft start/stop - external battery input - can be mounted directly to LAN. Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Options: IP66 - Customised program - Two axes move simultaneously - Two axes move synchronously (actuators must have feedback)

LAK6B - Control 1 to 6 linear actuators Standard Features: IP 54 - over load protection - Soft start - 4 mtr cable - Rechargeable battery Low battery indicator (alarm) - Automatic energy saving - Main fuse replaceable by external plug - Spare fuse inside the fuse plug - External ground connection - LED power indication. Input 230VAC / output 24 VDC Options: IP66 - Customised program Note: Simultaneous movement not available for LAN3-1/2/3(24Q)

Keypads: LAP 1, 2 & 3, LAP3N - Keypads for control up to 2 linear actuators IP 66 - Ergonomic design, LAP2 smaller size Cable length 600mm coiled, 1100mm total

LAP 4 - Keypads for control up to 4 linear actuators IP 66 - Ergonomic design, LAP2 smaller size Optional cable length up to 2250mm

LAP5 - Control up to 5 linear actuators IP66 - Ergonomic design - compatible with LAK6B & LAK2J Cable length 600mm coiled, 1100mm total

LAFS1 - Foot Operated Control for 1 Linear Actuator Compatible with all controllers - Easily portable with attached magnet - standard cable length 1100mm

Please contact T.E.A. or visit our web site: www.tea.net.au for further information.

227


Enquiry Form for HIWIN Linear Actuators Please photocopy this page, complete with as much information as possible, then fax or e-mail to T.E.A. for a quotation. Fax: 07-4129 2437. Email: sales@tea.net.au Date:

Application:

Company:

Phone:

Contact Person:

Fax:

ACTUATOR

CONTROLLER

Voltage: VDC (V)

Input voltage (V)

Max. current: (A)

Control axis no.

Max thrust force (N)

Battery

Max. pulling force (N)

Power cord type US

Max. holding force (N)

Overload protection

Stroke length (mm)

IP class

Speed (mm/s)

- No load

Output power (VA)

- Full load

Power cord length

AC (V) or DC (V)

Yes EU

UK

No Other

Yes

No

Yes

No

Load (N)

Removable power cord

IP class

Duty cycle

No-Load current (A)

Operation temp. (째C)

Duty cycle

Outdoor use

Yes

No

Operation temp. (째C)

With HIWIN actuator

Yes

No

Custom program

Yes

No

Housing colour

Black

Grey

Outdoor use Direction

Yes Horizontal

No Vertical

Bending moment

Yes

No

With HIWIN limit switch

Yes

No

With HIWIN controller

Yes

No

Control axis. no

With customers limit switch

Yes

No

Custom mask

Yes

No

Over current

Yes

No

Lock function

Yes

No

Position feedback

Yes

No

With HIWIN controller

Yes

No

Special install requirement (Fixture, space etc)

Quantity (year/month)

KEYPAD

Housing colour

Black

Grey

Key mode

Membrane

Rubber

228


Timing Belts & Pulleys Ideally suited for large quantity orders

Timing Belts: Material: Nylon covered, fibreglass reinforced Neoprene Temperature Range: -18째C to +85째C 3mm pitch - 6mm & 9mm widths Breaking strength: 122 N/mm belt width 5mm pitch - 6, 9 & 15mm widths Breaking strength: 255 N/mm belt width For full specification data sheets please visit our web site www.tea.net.au or contact us directly.

Timing Belt Pulleys: Material: Aluminium - clear anodized or, Polycarbonate, fibreglass reinforced with aluminium inserts (Also steel, cast iron, plastic) Sizes to suit our range of Timing Belts 6mm, 9mm and 15mm belts 3mm and 5mm pitch Options: No flange - Single flange - Double flange For full specification data sheets please visit our web site www.tea.net.au or contact us directly.

Ordering Information: Timing Pulley - Teeth (number) - Pitch - Width - Flange type (single / double / no flange) - Bore size - Material type

Timing Belt - Length (or number of grooves) - Pitch - Width - Material type

229


Chambrelan Telescopic Slides Heavy Duty Slides from the market leader More than 30 types of slides are available - Load capacity from a few kilos to more than 1000 kgs. for automatic doors, vehicle equipment, machine tools etc.

• Partial extension Easy to install • Total extension

3 types of slide materials: steel, aluminium and stainless steel for all standard applications, corrosive environment and specific applications.

• Over extension

Partial, total or over extension 2, 3 or 4 beams, some of which are compatible with double extension (two way movement).

On page 233 you will find a load table to help you select the right telescopic slide. If you would like a quotation please contact us. If you need assistance with selection please photocopy this page, then complete the form below and fax or email it to us for selection help, price and delivery. You may also like to visit the Chambrelan website to download CAD drawings and technical data www.chambrelan.com Their website can also be accessed via our website www.tea.net.au

T.E.A. Transmissions Pty Ltd Fax: 07-4129 2437 Email: sales@tea.net.au

Your Name: Company: Phone/Fax/Email: 1. 2.

3.

Closed length (dimension 1): Extension (dimension 2): Partial Total Specific: Load (dimension 3):

mm

Double extension (two way movement) Yes No

7.

mm Over

N.B. Double extension is not compatible with any locking mechanism

8. 9.

mm

kg/pair

Manual Frequency:

Load position if different: 4. 5. 6.

Slides mounted: on the major axis Material: Zinc plated steel

Required options: Conditions of use: Mechanical/Automatic per/hr.

Speed:

on the minor axis

Environment:

Anodised aluminium Stainless steel 10.

Open position Locking mechanism: Closed position Open & closed position

230

mtr/sec. Heat

Dust Application Notes:

Damp Sand


5

231

7

150

55 130

60 135 310

65 130 320

65

65 300

70 310

290

290

125

50

85

30

40

400

300

90

33

95

90

35

37

85

45

350

39

50

300

25

250

15

200

55 83

80

335

340

330

140

75

120

450

330

140

75

85

50

35

75

50

400

RA414 - STEEL RA654 - STEEL RA554 - STEEL E1904 - STEEL E1014 - STEEL E1024 - STEEL ST658 - STAINLESS STEEL

Closed length L (mm)

150

200

47

47

250

45

42

42 90

45

60

350

85

300

40

95

40

56

400

OVER EXTENSION TELESCOPIC SLIDES — 4 beams

78 145

80 150

83 140

460

125

455

340 130

135

145 335

150

78

80

53 90

55

38

77

53

350

95

43

52

80 40

75

49

55

300

57

250

60

62

D444 - ALUMINIUM D500 - ALUMINIUM D1422 - ALUMINIUM RA31 - STEEL RA41 - STEEL RA44 - STEEL RA5R - STEEL RA7R - STEEL RA9 -- STEEL E1400 - STEEL E1700 - STEEL E1902 - STEEL E1012 - STEEL E1020 - STEEL ST448 - STAINLESS STEEL ST508 - STAINLESS STEEL St708 - STAINLESS STEEL E1708 - STAINLESS STEEL E1908 - STAINLESS STEEL E1018 - STAINLESS STEEL

200

150

Closed length L (mm)

37

90

37

53

450

325

135

73

115

445

325

135

73

80

48

33

73

48

450

280

60

280

120

48

80

28

32

450

TOTAL EXTENSION TELESCOPIC SLIDES — 3 beams

D402 - ALUMINIUM R20 - STEEL R26 - STEEL R28 - STEEL R53 - STEEL R71 - STEEL R82 - STEEL R102 - STEEL ST48 - STAINLESS STEEL ST78 - STAINLESS STEEL

Closed length L (mm)

PARTIAL EXTENSION TELESCOPIC SLIDES — 2 beams

900

925

900

32

210

220

35

80

32

46

85

35

50

550

555

550

500

305

125

305

130

65

555 925

550

70

105

435

305

125

65

70

43

28

65

43

550

260

55

260

110

43

70

23

18

110

440

305

130

70

75

45

30

70

45

500

270

60

270

115

45

75

25

25

550

30

200

75

30

43

600

950

565

300

120

60

950

565

100

430

300

120

60

65

40

25

60

40

600

250

195

70

27

40

650

925

550

295

115

55

925

550

95

425

295

115

55

60

38

20

55

38

650

240

50

495

510 55

240

100

38

60

17

650

250

105

40

65

20

15

600

190

65

25

36

700

900

535

290

110

50

900

535

90

410

290

110

50

55

35

55

35

700

230

180

60

22

33

750

875

518

280

105

45

875

518

85

400

280

105

45

50

32

50

30

750

220

45

950

850 50

470

220

90

33

50

13

750

485

230

95

35

55

15

700

1250

475 710

500 750

50 165

170

55

20

30

850

950

800

825

850

485

265

95

1000

500

270

100

35

950 1200

1000 40

825

485

75

375

265

95

35

40

28

35

850

200

1000

445

200

80

28

40

850

850

500

80

385

270

100

40

45

30

40

25

800

210

45

1050

460

210

85

30

45

10

800

670

450

160

45

900

900

800

465

250

90

30

1150

900

800

465

70

360

250

90

30

35

25

30

900

190

950

435

190

75

25

35

900

800

700

395

210

70

1050

800

700

395

300

210

70

15

10

1100

150

800

385

150

55

1100

45

750

650

360

190

60

1000

750

650

360

275

190

60

1200

130

750

360

130

700

600

325

170

50

950

700

600

325

245

170

50

1300

110

700

335

110

35

1300

600

550

290

150

40

900

600

550

290

220

150

40

1400

90

600

310

90

25

1400

550

500

225

130

30

850

550

500

225

175

130

30

1500

70

550

285

70

1500

500

450

220

110

20

800

500

450

220

155

110

20

1600

50

500

260

50

1600

450

400

90

750

450

400

185

135

90

1700

30

450

235

30

1700

400

350

70

700

400

350

150

110

70

1800

400

210

1800

350

300

50

650

350

300

115

85

50

1900

350

185

1900

300

250

30

600

300

250

80

60

30

2000

300

160

2000

(standard types are highlighted)

1200

25

550

375

135

15

510

350

120

105 480

325

90 430

300

80 390

275

70 350

250

60 315

225

50 280

200

40 250

175

30 220

150

Technical specifications are given for your guidance, and can be modified without notice.

590

400

150

35

1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000

850

750

430

230

80

20

1100

850

750

430

50

340

230

80

20

25

20

20

1000

170

850

410

170

65

1000

Load table in KGs per pair of slides 500


Permanent Magnet Coupling This two piece rare-earth permanent magnet coupling is for contact-free torque transmission through any non-ferrous wall, with the benefit of slipping when the maximum torque is exceeded, protecting mechanical components in the drive line from damage. Ideally suited to: ? Marine applications removing the need for shaft seals

? Laboratory mixers and vessel agitators ? Driving submerged pumps or compressors ? Driving across vessels where contents must be isolated ? Food processing ? Pharmaceutical industry ? Where a safety slip mechanism is required ? Solar / low power applications requiring extremely efficient torque transmissions ? Rotary indication through barriers

How Disc Couplings Work Disc couplings consist of opposing discs with powerful rare earth magnets. The torque applied to one disc is transferred through an air gap to the other disc. Because of the simple flat design, you can have angular misalignment of up to 3o or a parallel misalignment of up to 6mm and still transmit nearly full rotational torque. Easily isolate drive side components from clean or contained processes. This is our simplest and most versatile coupling.

Angular Misalignment 3o Max.

Parallel Misalignment 1/4â&#x20AC;? Max.

Advantages of Disc type Couplings: ? No wearing parts - wear free transmission of torque ? Synchronous design ? No slip at any speed - protecting mechanical components in the drive-line from damage ? No physical contact between driving and driven parts ? Simplifies containment barrier ? Custom designs available ? Overload protection up to 110% ? Electrical, mechanical and chemical isolation

Technical Data: Material - 400 Series stainless steel Magnet (Nickel-Plasted) NdFeB* Operating temperature - 140oC *Also available with SmCo magnets rated up to 280oC

Note: Couplings are delivered with an integrated stainless steel cover to protect magnets and allow for clean operation and easy maintenance. The above images show exposed magnets for illustration only.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

232


Permanent Magnet Coupling

P/N

Max *Weight Torque Speed per hub Normal Kg. Nm

HP @ 1750 rpm

KW @ 1750 rpm

0.03

0.02

42500

0.05

0.08

0.06

26000

0.10

Torque Peak Nm

A mm

B mm

0.11

0.16

28.0

20.6

0.45

0.56

43.7

20.6

C Max mm

D mm 16.0

16.0

3.5

N/A

see

15.0

15.0

4.9

N/A

E mm

G mm

H mm

a a

PMK20 a

PMK40 a

PMK50

0.17

0.13

23000

0.15

0.68

0.90

50.3

28.5

chart

15.0

15.0

4.9

N/A

0.25

0.19

19000

0.26

1.02

1.36

60.0

38.1

below

19.1

19.0

4.9

N/A

25.4

25.4

4.9

N/A

35.0

25.4

25.4

4.9

N/A

a

PMK60 a

PMK70

0.45

0.34

15500

0.58

1.69

2.26

72.7

50.8

1.2

0.90

11000

1.10

4.97

5.42

97.6

69.9

2

1.49

10500

1.16

8.13

9.04

106.7

69.9

35.0

25.4

25.4

6.4

N/A

3

2.24

9000

1.99

12.20

13.56

129.6

76.2

42.0

38.1

31.8

6.4

52.4

5

3.73

9200

2.17

20.34

22.60

125.0

69.9

42.0

38.1

31.8

6.4

52.4

a

PMK91 a

PMK110 a

PMK130 a

PMK150 a

PMK170

7.5

5.59

9200

3.14

30.51

33.90

125.0

108.0

55.0

47.5

41.4

6.4

68.4

10

7.46

7800

4.07

40.67

45.19

147.1

108.0

65.0

52.6

46.0

6.4

77.8

13

9.69

7800

3.23

53.10

61.01

147.1

60.2

38.0

41.7

31.8

6.4

47.8

a

PMK190 a

PMK200

Notes: *Weight per hub includes magnets. Hubs sold separately. Please refer to recommended bore sizes in the table below, see Notes and then How to Order. Bore Code

0000 0125 0188 0197 0236 0250 0313 0315 0375 0394 0433 0472 0500 0551 0625 0709 0748 0750 08751000

a

Bore Size

Solid 1/8” 3/16” 5mm 6mm 1/4” 5/16” 8mm 3/8” 10mm 11mm 12mm ½” 14mm 5/8” 18mm 19mm 3/4” 7/8” 1”

a

P/N a

PMK20

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

a

PMK40

X

a

PMK50

X

X

X

X

a

PMK60

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

a

PMK70

X

X

X

a

Notes: PMK20 has one set screw (grub screw), PMK40 and PMK50 have two set screws. PMK60 and PMK70 have one set screw and keyway (for bores 11mm and larger.) Keyways start with bores 11mm and larger. All larger sizes of Permanent Magnet Couplings are supplied as solid bores, with additional costing for boring & keyway machining. PMK150-PMK200 are manufactured to order. Minimum order quantity 2 hubs (different bores accepted).

How to Order: P/N for 1 hub + bore code + P/N for the other hub + bore code EG: 1 off PMK20-0000(solid) + 1 off PMK20-0236 (6mm bore)

CAD files available via our website: www.tea.net.au

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

233


TRASCO速 Couplings TRASCO速flexible coupling allows safe power transmission by absorbing peak loads and torsional vibrations. The elastic and radial misalignments and also absorbs small shaft length variation. The involute profile of the gear ring teeth prevents high stress concentration on reduced surfaces and the crowned profile avoids the transmissions of axial stress. The high duty factor is due to the fact that the elastic element works under compression and never under flexion. Suitable for working in both horizontal and vertical positions and easily support any load variation or reversal motion. The two coupling halves are electrically insulated from each other.

For AL & BL executions contact T.E.A. * Sintered steel.

TRASCO速 Coupling (2 hubs plus spider) Material: Die cast aluminium Cast Iron GG25 On Request: Steel, Cast Iron GGG40

How to Order: Hub GRMP: Standard Trasco Hub GRMALU: Trasco Aluminium Hub Size A: execution A B: execution B AL: long execution A BL: long execution B F: Diameter of the bore

GRMP 48/60 AL F50

Spider Trasco Spider Size 92 Sh A (yellow if not indicated) R: 98 Sh A (red) V: 64 Sh D (green)

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

234

AR 48/60 R


Double Loop Couplings Good resistance to: petrol, oil, Benzol, Toluol, aromatic and non aromatic coal hydrogen, alcohol, Glycole solvents and many other chemicals. DKPS 2928

DIN 916 M3x4 (4x)

* Other bores on request.

a

DKPS 3835 DIN 916 M4x6 (4x)

b

c Material: Hub: 9SMnPb28 Zinc Plated Steel Spring Element: Polyurethane

d

e

DKPS 4848 DIN916 M4x6 (4x)

How to Order: DKPS 2928 04/06 Part Number Size Bores

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

235


Helix Couplings Technical Data

WKAK 1928

WKAK 2532

Max. speed

min -1

6000

6000

Max. torque

Ncm

80

120

Max. radial offset

mm

±0.25

±0.35

Max. axial offset

mm

±0.4

±0.5

Max. angular offset

degree

±4

±4

Torsion spring stiffness

Nm/rad

8

16

Radial spring stiffness

N/mm

36

45

Moment of inertia

gcm2

8.7

29

Max. clamping torque

Ncm

80

100

Weight approx.

g

16

34

Material

Aluminium chromised

d1 mm 4

d2 mm 4

WKAK 1928 04/04

4

6

WKAK 1928 04/06

5

5

WKAK 1928 05/05

5

6

WKAK 1928 05/06

6

6

WKAK 1928 06/06

d1 mm 6

d2 mm 6

WKAK 2532 06/06

6

8

WKAK 2532 06/08

6

10

WKAK 2532 06/10

8

8

WKAK 2532 08/08

8

10

WKAK 2532 08/10

10

10

WKAK 2532 10/10

10

12

WKAK 2532 10/12

Part Number

Part Number

Bore Reducers - for adapting a coupler to a variety of shaft dimensions. Adapters can also prevent screws from scoring the shafts and permits repeated re-positioning and easy removal of the coupler. (See also notes on page 253).

237

Outside Diam. (mm)

Reducing to (mm)

Part Number

10

5

REAN 1007 05

10

6

REAN 1007 06

10

6.35 (1/4")

REAN 1007 63

10

7

REAN 1007 07

10

8

REAN 1007 08

12

6

REAN 1208 06

12

6.35 (1/4")

REAN 1208 63

12

7

REAN 1208 07

12

8

REAN 1208 08

12

9.53 (3/8")

REAN 1208 95

12

10

REAN 1208 10


Couplers Bellows Couplings Stainless Steel with Aluminium Flange Technical Data

BKXS 1520

BSK3502

BKXS 1525

BKXS 2035

BSK 3504

Max. speed

min-1

10000

8000

10000

10000

8000

Max. torque

Ncm

40

20

40

80

80

Max. radial offset

mm

±0.2

±0.2

±0.3

±0.3

±0.3

Max. axial offset

mm

±0.4

±0.4

±0.5

±0.5

±0.5

Max. angular offset

degree

±3

±2

±4

±4

±4

Torsion spring stiffness

Nm/rad

90

160

70

140

230

Radial spring stiffness

n/mm

40

-

15

10

-

Moment of inertia

gcm2

2.0

4.8

2.3

9

22

Max. clamping torque

Ncm

70

70

70

150

150

Weight approx.

g

6

14

7

16

34

Flange material

Anodised Alu.

CuZn39Pb3

Anodised Alu.

Anodised Alu.

CuZn39Pb3

Bellows material

Stainless steel

CuSn6

Stainless steel

Stainless steel

CuZn20

Surface finish

-

Nickel plated

-

-

Nickel plated

238

d1 mm 3

d2 mm 3

BKXS 1520 03/03

3

5

BKXS 1520 03/05

3

6

BKXS 1520 03/06

4

4

BKXS 1520 04/04

4

5

BKXS 1520 04/05

4

6

BKXS 1520 04/06

5

5

BKXS 1520 05/05

Part Number

6

6

BKXS 1520 06/06

1/4"

1/4"

BSK 35 02 60

d1 mm 3

d2 mm 3

BKXS 1525 03/03

3

5

BKXS 1525 03/05

3

6

BKXS 1525 03/06

4

4

BKXS 1525 04/04

4

5

BKXS 1525 04/05

4

6

BKXS 1525 04/06

5

5

BKXS 1525 05/05

6

6

BKXS 1525 06/06

d1 mm 4

d2 mm 4

BKXS 2035 04/04

4

6

BKXS 2035 04/06

6

6

BKXS 2035 06/06

6

10

BKXS 2035 06/10

8

8

BKXS 2035 08/08

10

10

BKXS 2035 10/10

10

12

BKXS 2035 10/12

Part Number

Part Number

12

12

BKXS 2035 12/12

3/8"

3/8"

BSK 35 04 30

1/4"

1/4"

BSK 35 04 14


Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers

239


Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers

240

blind hubs & standard discs specify 2 hubs + 1 disc per coupler


Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers

Contact T.E.A. for further details.

241

thro' hubs (X-Y series) & standard discs specify 2 hubs + 1 disc per coupler


Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers

blank hubs

performance with standard (black) acetal discs

Page 244 takes you through the installation procedure.

242


Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers

243

performance with standard (black) acetal discs


Oldham Lateral Displacement Couplers

installation & servicing with standard (black) acetal discs

244


UNI-LAT速 Universal / Lateral Displacement Couplers

245


UNI-LATÂŽ Universal / Lateral Displacement Couplers

set screw styles 2 screws per hub spaced at 90Âş

Ref. 203 Long hub, large bore versions

Ref. 201 Short hub, small bore versions

page 249 for availability.

246


UNI-LAT速 Universal / Lateral Displacement Couplers

clamp styles

Ref. 205 & 206 are manufactured with integral leaf clamps

Ref. 207 is manufactured with collet hubs and ring clamps

247


UNI-LAT速 Universal / Lateral Displacement Couplers

performance

offset

torsional deflection

248


Bore Adaptors

249


Multi - Beam Couplers • Torsionally rigid design • Zero backlash • No moving part • 3 - Beam single stage compatible with industry standard types • 6 - Beam two stage for increased radial compliance Multi-Beam coupler will readily accommodate any combination of axial motion, angular and parallel misalignment. The 3 start helical-cut design provides higher torque capability and greatly reduce wind-up compared with single beam couplers. Available in three standard materials: stainless steel, aluminium and acetal, for shaft diameters 1mm to 38mm.

The Huco Multi-Beam coupler utilises the well-established beam flexure principle, which in its simplest form comprises a single helical slot cut into a cylindrical section. In the Multi-Beam version, flexure is achieved through 3 start beams, which offer the same amount of misalignment compensation as single beam couplers but with the benefits of higher torsional stiffness and lower radial loads. Two types are available, 6-beam and 3-beam The 6-beam version comprises two sets of helical-cut slots, providing higher radial misalignment capability than the 3 beam version. The 3-beam version is shorter in length to fit in confined spaces and to allow for easy retrofits in existing equipment. When to Choose Multi-Beam In applications where there is a need to compensate for misalignment, maintain constant velocity, and provide axial compliance … Multi-Beam offers a one-piece integrated solution. Multi-Beam couplers are ideal for light duty power transmission applications such as stepper motors and servo motors in motion control systems. The performance benefits inherent in Multi-Beam couplers are vital to the accuracy, repeatability and reliability of demanding servo system applications. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS Speed, Torque and Misalignment Multi-Beam couplers are suitable for the majority of applications involving speeds up to 5000 rpm. Torque and misalignment ratings are mutually exclusive and should not be exceeded. Due account should be taken of the service factors given.

Multi-Beam couplers also suit light duty, precision applications, those involving components such as encoders and tachogenerators for example. The small bearings on these components make low radial forces essential to longevity and continued high performance. Material options include aluminium, stainless steel and acetal. Available in sizes up to 64mm diameter, the Multi-Beam coupler is also suitable for a wide variety of power transmission applications.

Relief Under the Beams Most Multi-Beam couplers can be supplied with or without relief under the beams as shown in the diagrams opposite. When the drive or driven shafts extend under the beams relief is essential to ensure that the coupler remains flexible. Where non-relieved versions are used, shafts must not be allowed to penetrate under the beamed section of the coupler. Unless otherwise specified, relieved versions will be supplied.

250


Multi - Beam Couplers Set screw hubs

Clamp hubs

Relieved

3-Beam Couplers: Dimensions & Order Codes

If either shaft extends beneath the beams, the area shown in orange must be relieved to provide clearance under the flexure.

Bore Sizes

251


Multi - Beam Couplers

Non-Relieved

6-Beam Couplers: Dimensions & Order Codes

Relieved

If either shaft extends beneath the beams, the area shown in orange must be relieved to provide clearance under the flexure.

Bore Sizes

252


Slip Clutch The safety slip clutch is a structurally simple device designed to give many years of reliable protection for motors, transmissions and other connected equipment against overload. The torque can be adjusted after installation by means of a knurled nut (3) from very sensitive â&#x20AC;&#x153;0â&#x20AC;? to a maximum value. At the moment of overload the friction disk (4) slips. The friction disk is clamped with the knurled nut (3) and the disk springs (6) between the hub collar (2) and the lock washer (5). By turning the knurled nut (3) the disk springs (6) adjusts the tension as required. Longer slipping time is not heating or damaging the friction disk.

Safety Slip Clutch RK1

Safety Slip Clutch RK 2 C

1. Housing hub 2. Hub collar 3. Knurled nut 4. Friction disk 5. Lock washer 6. Disk Springs

253


Slip Clutch Applications: Adjustable transformer Motor potentiometers Cam controls Exact/precise mechanisms General mechanisms

Part No. RK 1

Ød1 6

Ød2 6

Part No. for Friction Disk RK1-RB

Options: d1 max. 8h7 d2 max 10h7 Keyway to DIN 6885 BI1

Part No. RK 2C

Ød1 8

Ød2 8

RK 1

Part No. for Friction Disk RK2-RB

Options: d1 max. 10h7 d2 max 15h7 Keyway to DIN 6885 BL 1

RK 2 C

Specifications Max. speed (approx.) Max. torque Max. angular misalignment Max. axial misalignment Weight Material Clutch body Friction disk Disk springs

min-1 Nm Degree mm g

500 500 0.7 2.5 ±1º ±1º 0.5 0.5 15 256 Delrin Chrome Plated Steel Material free of asbestos Spring steel Spring steel

254


Stainless Steel Machine Feet Material:

Foot: 304 Stainless steel Thread: 303 Stainless steel Damper: Perbunan, 70° Shore A Includes: 2 hex. Nuts DIN 934 Most sizes are usual stock items Exceptionally well priced

Part No.

Thread

MF 8.40 SS

M8 x 1.25

D 37

Load

Approx.

D1

h

Hd

L

m

m1

SW

N

Weight kg.

40

12

76

60

6.5

4

13

2000

0.08

MF10.60 SS

M10 x 1.5

57

60

15

88

70

8

5

17

3000

0.18

MF12.60 SS

M12 x 1.75

57

60

15

99

79

10

6

19

4000

0.22

MF14.80 SS

M14 x 2

75

80

17

121

98

11

9

22

10000

0.42

MF16.80 SS

M16 x 2

75

80

18

146

120

13

9

24

15000

0.52

MF20.100SS

M20 x 2.5

MF24.100SS

M24 x 3

95 95

100

22

184

153

16

15

30

20000

0.94

100

22

210

178

18

15

36

25000

1.28

All dimensions in mm All specifications subject to change without notice

Other types of machine feet and components available: Machine feet manufactured in special glass fibre reinforced black technopolymer base with matte finish, and zinc plated steel or stainless steel thread. M8 - M24 15 ° Articulation

Plastic base, galvanized thread. Very inexpensive versions - ideal for large quantity orders.

Ground Mounting machine feet of the same material choices. M20 - M30 2° / 8° / 15° Articulations

Square End Caps to fit square shaped legs for maximum static load of 5000N. M10 - M20

Individual components i.e. bases, threads & nuts. M8 - M24

Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets and further information.

255


Knobs & Handles Spherical Knobs Made of bakelite, black or red with threaded socket without insert

OD Thread P/N P/N Ø black red 12 M 4 1001 16 M 4 1002 1087 18 M 5 1003 1088 20 M 5 1004 22 M 6 1005 1089 25 M 6 1006 28 M 8 1007 1090 30 M 8 1008 1091 36 M 6 1009 36 M10 1010 1092 40 M10 1011 1093 45 M10 1012 45 M12 1013 1094 50 M12 1014 56 M12 1015

Made of bakelite, black or red with threaded socket with insert

Made of thermoplastic, to fit with hammer-stroke

Made of bakelite, black or red with threaded stud

OD Thread P/N P/N Ø black red 16 M 4 1016 18 M 5 1017 20 M 5 1018 22 M 6 1019 1095 25 M 6 1020 28 M 8 1021 1096 30 M 8 1022 36 M10 1023 1097 40 M10 1024 45 M10 1025 45 M12 1026 1098 50 M12 1027 56 M12 1028

OD Ø 16 18 22 28 30 36 40 45 45 56

Thread x length M 4x 8 M 5x 9 M 6x10 M 8x14 M 8x14 M10x18 M10x18 M10x18 M12x25 M12x25

P/N black 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038

OD Ø 22 28 30 30 40 40 45

Hole Ø 8 10 10 12 12 14 16

P/N black 1039 1040 1041 1042 1044 1045 1046

Also see pages 270-273 for other types of available knobs, such as:

Mushroom-shaped Knobs Made of bakelite, black with threaded socket without insert

OD Ø 17 21 25 29 33

Thread

P/N

M4 M5 M6 M6 M8

1101 1102 1103 1104 1105

Made of bakelite, black with threaded socket without insert

Ø 32 45 52

Thread M 8 M10 M12

P/N 3101 3102 3103

Made of bakelite, black with insert

Made of bakelite, black with threaded stud

Stainless steel on request

Stainless steel on request

OD Ø 17 17 21 21 25 29 33 45

Thread

P/N

M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M6

1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113

Made of bakelite, black with through hole

Ø 32

Hole Ø 5.5

“Soft touch”

with transparent cap for self adhesive label OD Ø 17 21 21 25 33

Thread x length M4x 8 M5x 9 M6x10 M6x10 M8x14

P/N 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118

Made of bakelite, black with blind hole

P/N 3104

Ø 52

All dimensions are in mm All dimensions are subject to change without notice

256

Hole Ø 10

P/N 3105

Choice of colour caps

Made of bakelite, black without insert

Ø 37.5

Thread M10

P/N 4601


Bow-type Handles

Made of bakelite, black with threaded sockets without inserts

Made of Polyamide 6, black Made of reinforced polyamide 6

Distance between Thread Length holes Ø P/N 112 85 M6 1204 148 125 M6 1205 186 160 M6 1206

Distance between Thread Length holes Ø P/N 130 110 M6 1213

with threaded inserts

MadeMade of ABS of aluminium profile Acrylonitrile Butadien Styrene, black, with threaded inserts Distance between Thread Length holes Ø P/N 146 130 M5 1214

Stirrup Handles

Made of thermoplastic, black with through threaded holes

Made of thermoplastic, black with threaded inserts

Distance between Length holes 120 94 145 117 163 132 213 180

Distance between Thread Length holes Ø P/N 120 94 M6 1230 145 117 M8 1231 163 132 M8 1232 213 180 M8 1233

Thread Ø 6.5mm 8.5mm 8.5mm 8.5mm

P/N 1220 1221 1222 1223

Made of PA.6, anthracite grey Type a - with threaded socket Type b - with continuous bore holes

Length 123.5 162.2 201.0

Distance between holes 106.5 145.2 184.0

Type a bore Ø P/N M6 6301 M6 6302 M8 6303

Type bore Ø 6.4mm 6.4mm 6.4mm

b P/N 6304 6305 6306

See also pages 270 & 272 for other industrial handles, such as:

Suspended Handles

Crank Handles

a) Made of thermoplastic, black, with threaded stud b) Made of thermoplastic, grey

Made of thermoplastic, black with galvanized steel hub with rotatable machine handle

304 fine ground stainless steel

with a choice of colour caps

a b

Type a Type b

Width

Height

110 110

88 106

Thread x length M6x7

Aluminium tube with epoxy resin based coating

P/N 9701 9702

Length 103 103 103 124 124 124

All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

Height 100 100 100 101 101 101

257

Hole Ø 10 12 14 10 12 14

P/N 4004 4005 4006 4001 4002 4003

Choice of 7 colours Clean room


Handles Made of PVC, black with blind hole

Made of thermoplastic, black with threaded bolt

Extended Operating Handles

Gearshift Knobs Made of bakelite, black without insert

Made of bakelite, black with threaded socket without insert

Length

Hole Ø

P/N

Length

117

27

1421

147

Thread x length M12x20

OD Ø 20 20 25 25 30 30 35 35 35

P/N Length 50 60 75 90 100

1422

Thread M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M14

P/N 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405

thread

P/N

M 5 M 6 M 6 M 8 M 8 M10 M 8 M10 M12

9301 9302 9303 9304 9305 9306 9307 9308 9309

Machine Handles Made of bakelite, black rotatable type with threaded stud

Made of bakelite, black fixed type with threaded stud

See also page 273 for other handles & crank handles, such as: High impact strength technopolymer Chrome plated steel arm

Length 68 64 81 81

Thread x length M 8x12 M 8x13 M10x20 M12x25

P/N

Length

2201 2210 2203 2204

46 58 68 86 86

Thread x length M 6x14 M 8x16 M10x20 M10x25 M12x25

P/N 2305 2301 2302 2303 2304

Fold-away handles

Tapered Handles Made of bakelite, black fixed type with threaded stud

Made of bakelite, black with threaded socket without insert

Made of bakelite, black rotatable type with threaded stud

See pgs 270-3 for:

“Clean Room” knobs

Length 38 38 50 60 70 80 80 90

Thread x length M4x 8 M5x 8 M6x 9 M5x 8 M6x 9 M6x 9 M8x12 M8x12

P/N

f

c

1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413

Length 73 89 120 120

Thread x length M 8x16 M10x20 M10x25 M12x25

P/N 1414 1415 1425 1426

All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

258

b

D

d

“soft Touch”

L

L 58 70 81

D b d c f P/N 25 8 M 6 29 14 4301 30 10 M 8 35 17 4302 35 12 M10 41 22 4303

Counterweight balanced crank handles


Clamping Levers

Length

Made of thermoplastic, black, with ratchet mechanism, with gal. threaded stud (see righthand table), or with insert (see below). Available as: a) Black - most sizes standard stock items b) Orange c) Anthracite grey (new style)

Type A or B with threaded stud

Type C New Style with threaded stud/insert

Type A or B with threaded insert Length Threaded insert 45 45 45

M 4 M 5 M 6

a black P/N 9466 9467 9468

b orange P/N 9530 9531 9532

c new P/N 6966 6967 6968

60 60 60

M 4 M 5 M 6

9429 9430 9441

9550 9551 9552

6929 6930 6941

80 80

M 6 M 8

9404 9405

9553 9554

6904 6905

100 100

M10 M12

9406 9407

9555 9556

6906 6907

Clamping Levers

Made of die cast aluminium with ratchet mechanism with threaded stud

Thread

P/N

47 47 70 70 94 94 112

M 4 M 5 M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M14

9408 9409 9410 9411 9412 9413 9414

a black P/N 9510 9511 9512 9513 9514 9515 9516 9518 9519 9520 9521 9522 9523

b orange P/N 9533 9534 9535 9536 9537 9538 9539 9541 9542 9543 9544 9545 9546

c new P/N 6910 6911 6912 6913 6914 6915 6916 6918 6919 6920 6921 6922 6923

60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M

4x10 4x15 4x20 5x12 5x15 5x20 5x25 6x10 6x12 6x16 6x20 6x25 6x32 6x40 6x50

9442 9431 9433 9443 9432 9434 9445 9446 9447 9448 9440 9449 9484 9485 9486

9557 9558 9559 9560 9561 9562 9563 9564 9565 9566 9567 9568 9569 9570 9571

6942 6931 6933 6943 6932 6934 6945 6946 6947 6948 6940 6949 6984 6985 6986

74 74

M 8x40 M 8x63

9612 9613

80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

M M M M M M M M M M M

6x20 6x25 8x10 8x12 8x16 8x20 8x25 8x30 8x40 8x50 8x63

9424 9435 9487 9488 9489 9425 9436 9426 9491 9492 9493

9572 9573 9574 9575 9576 9577 9578 9579 9580 9581 9582

6924 6935 6987 6988 6989 6925 6936 6926 6991 6992 6993

M10x16 M10x20 M10x25 M10x30 M10x40 M10x50 M10x63 M12x20 M12x25 M12x30 M12x40 M12x50 M12x60

9494 9495 9427 9437 9497 9438 9498 9453 9454 9428 9439 9456 9457

9583 9584 9585 9586 9587 9588 9590 9591 9592 9593 9594 9595 9596

6994 6995 6927 6937 6997 6938 6998 6953 6954 6928 6939 6956 6957

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

Made of die cast aluminium with ratchet mechanism with threaded insert

Length

45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45

Thread x length M 4x10 M 4x15 M 4x20 M 5x12 M 5x16 M 5x20 M 5x25 M 6x12 M 6x16 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x32 M 6x40

Made of blackend steel with ratchet mechanism with threaded insert Length 60 60 60 80

Thread x length M 6x20 M 8x20 M 8x30 M10x20

P/N

Length

Thread

P/N

9415 9416 9417 9418

60 70 77 108 108

M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M14

9419 9420 9421 9422 9423

All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

259


Knurled Screws Knurled Nuts Made of bakelite, black with gal. threaded stud Stainless steel on request

OD Ø 18 18 20 20 20 24 24 24 30 30 30 30 30 35 35 35

Thread x length M 4x15 M 4x20 M 5x10 M 5x18 M 5x25 M 5x10 M 6x20 M 6x28 M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x28 M 8x25 M 8x32 M 8x12 M 8x25 M10x30

P/N 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716

OD Thread Ø 18 M 4 20 M 5 24 M 5 24 M 6 30 M 6 30 M 8 35 M 7 35 M 8 35 M10

Made of bakelite, black or reinforced material with threaded brass insert Stainless steel on request

P/N

M 6 M 8 M 8 M10 M12

1500 1501 1502 1503 1504

P/N 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612

See page 269 for all stainless steel knurled screw & nuts

Star Grips

Thread

Lock Nuts

Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded stud Stainless steel on request

Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded socket

OD Ø 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 35 35 35

OD Ø 30 30 30

Threaded through hole, with brass nickle plated insert Stainless steel on request

See page 272 for “Clean Room” knurled knobs

OD Ø 40 40 50 60 60

Grooved Screws

All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

Thread x length M 4x15 M 4x20 M 5x10 M 5x18 M 5x25 M 5x10 M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x28 M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x28 M 8x25 M 8x32 M 8x12 M 8x25 M10x30

Made of bakelite, black or reinforced material with galvanized threaded stud Stainless steel on request

OD Ø 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60

Thread x length M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x32 M 8x14 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x14 M 8x25 M 8x35 M10x18 M10x30 M10x40 M12x25 M12x30 M12x40

260

P/N 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6610 6611 6612 6613 6620 6621 6622 6624 6625 6630 6631 6632

Thread

P/N

M5 M6 M8

6505.02 6506.02 6508.02

Grooved Nuts

Made of PA 6 anthracite grey With threaded socket OD Ø 20 20 25 25 30 30 30 35 35

Thread

P/N

M 4 M 5 M 5 M 6 M 5 M 6 M 8 M 8 M10

6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509

Made of bakelite, black or reinforced material with blind hole

P/N 1555 1556 1557 1505 1559 1560 1506 1561 1562 1507 1563 1564 1508 1565 1566

OD Ø 40 50 60

Hole Ø 10 10 12

P/N 1509 1510 1511


Star Grips Made of bakelite or reinforced material, black with “D” shaped hole and screw

Made of bakelite, black with insert and clean cut hole

Made of thermoplastic, black a) with insert b) with threaded stud Stainless steel on request

Made of thermoplastic, black a) with blind hole b) with insert and clean cut hole Stainless steel on request

a

b

OD Ø

Hole

P/N

OD Ø

Hole

P/N

OD Ø

a Thread

40 50 60

10 10 12

1512 1513 1514

40 50 60

5 5 6

1515 1516 1517

50 50

M8

Made of bakelite, black square hole a) with insert b) without insert

Made of thermoplastic, black a) with brass threaded insert b) with threaded stud Stainless steel on request

b Thread x length M8x14

P/N

OD Ø

Hole Ø

P/N

1519 1520

a) 50 b) 50

10 10

1518 1521

Made of bakelite, black a) with threaded insert b) with threaded stud Stainless steel on request

See pages 268 & 271 for other versions of star grips, such as:

a a OD Ø 50 63 80 100

Square hole with insert 6x6 7x7 8x8 9x9

a

Polished aluminium

P/N 3410 3411 3412 3413

OD Ø 40 40

Thread

P/N

M6 M8

4501 4502

OD Ø 40 50 60 75

Thread M 8 M 8 M10 M12

P/N 4701 4702 4703 4704 “Clean Room”

b OD Square hole Ø without insert 50 6x6 50 7x7 63 6x6 63 7x7 80 8x8 80 9x9

P/N

b

3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425

OD Ø 40 40 40 40

b Thread x length M6x16 M8x20 M8x25 M8x35

P/N 4503 4504 4505 4506

OD Ø 40 50 60 75

All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

261

Thread x length M 8x14 M 8x14 M10x18 M12x25

P/N 4705 4706 4707 4708

Certified Self Extinguishing or “Soft Touch” elastomer


Star Handles

Star Grips Made of thermoplastic, black through hole with threaded insert Stainless steel on request

Ø

Thread

P/N

40 40 40 40

M4 M5 M6 M8

3601 3610 3602 3603

Scallop Handwheels Made of PA.6, black with threaded insert

Ø

Thread

P/N

28 40 50 60

M 5 M 6 M 8 M10

5501 5502 5503 5504

Made of thermoplastic, black with threaded stud Stainless steel on request

Ø 40 40 40 40 40 40

Thread x length M5x18 M6x12 M6x20 M8x16 M8x20 M8x25

P/N

Ø

Thread

P/N

3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609

32 40 50 63 80

M 6 M 8 M10 M12 M16

4801 4802 4803 4804 4805

Made of PA.6, black through hole with threaded insert

Ø

Thread

P/N

28 40 50 60

M 5 M 6 M 8 M10

5519 5520 5521 5522

Made of PA.6, black with threaded stud

Star Handwheels Made of PA.6, black with threaded insert Ø

Ø

Thread

P/N

28 40 50 60

M 5 M 6 M 8 M10

5601 5602 5603 5604

28 28 28 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60

Thread x length M 5x10 M 5x15 M 5x20 M 6x15 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x35 M 8x20 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x40 M10x20 M10x30 M10x40

All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

262

According to DIN 6335 Made of bakelite, black with gal. steel threaded insert Stainless steel on request

P/N 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618

Made of PA.6, black with threaded stud

Ø 28 28 28 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60

Thread x length M 5x10 M 5x15 M 5x20 M 6x15 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x35 M 8x20 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x40 M10x20 M10x30 M10x40

P/N 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 5510 5511 5512 5513 5514 5515 5516 5517 5518

Made of PA.6, black through hole with threaded insert

Ø

Thread

P/N

28 40 50 60

M 5 M 6 M 8 M10

5619 5620 5621 5622


Wing Nuts

Wing Screws

Wing Nuts

Wing Screws

Made of PA.6, black a) with threaded insert b) through hole with threaded insert

Made of PA.6 , black with threaded stud

Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded socket

Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded stud Stainless steel on request

a

b

OD Ø 28 40 50 60

Thread M 5 M 6 M 8 M10

a P/N 5301 5302 5303 5304

b P/N 5319 5320 5321 5322

OD Ø 28 28 28 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60

Thread x length M 5x10 M 5x15 M 5x20 M 6x15 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x35 M 8x20 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x40 M10x20 M10x30 M10x40

P/N 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318

Tristar Handwheels Made of PA.6, black a) with threaded insert b) through hole with threaded insert

OD Ø 35 35 50 50 50 70 70

Thread

P/N

M 4 M 5 M 5 M 6 M 8 M 8 M10

7000 7001 7010 7011 7012 7020 7021

OD Ø 35 35 35 35 35 35 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

Thread x length M 4x15 M 5x18 M 4x10 M 4x20 M 5x10 M 5x25 M 5x18 M 6x10 M 8x14 M 5x10 M 5x25 M 6x20 M 6x32 M 8x20 M 8x30 M 8x40 M 8x14 M10x18 M 8x20 M 8x30 M 8x40 M10x25 M10x40

P/N 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7030 7031 7032 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7029

Star-shaped Handles Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded socket

Made of PA.6, black with threaded stud

Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with threaded stud

a

b OD Ø 28 40 50 60

Thread M 5 M 6 M 8 M10

a P/N 5401 5402 5403 5404

b P/N 5419 5420 5421 5422

OD Ø 28 28 28 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60

Thread x length M 5x10 M 5x15 M 5x20 M 6x15 M 6x20 M 6x25 M 6x35 M 8x20 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x40 M10x20 M10x30 M10x40

OD Ø 40 40 50 50 60 60

P/N 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 5416 5417 5418

All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

263

Thread

P/N

M 6 M 8 M 8 M10 M10 M12

6401 6402 6405 6406 6409 6410

OD Ø 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60

Thread x length M 6x10 M 6x20 M 6x32 M 8x14 M 8x25 M 8x35 M 8x14 M 8x25 M 8x30 M 8x40 M10x18 M10x30 M10x40 M10x18 M10x30 M10x40 M12x25 M12x30 M12x40

P/N 6403 6413 6414 6404 6415 6416 6407 6417 6418 6419 6408 6420 6421 6411 6422 6423 6412 6424 6425


Star-shaped Wheels Made of bakelite or reinforced material, black with gal. steel hub without handle

Crown Wheels Made of PA.6, anthracite grey with galvanized steel hub & clean cut hole

Made of bakelite or reinforced material, black with gal. steel hub, with rotatable handle type a) or b)

b OD Ø

Hole Ø

P/N

80 80 80 100 100 100 125 125 125

10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14

1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609

OD Ø 80 80 80 100 100 100 125 125 125 160 160 160 160 160

a

Spoke Wheels

OD Ø

Hole Ø

a P/N

b P/N

80 80 80 100 100 100 125 125 125

10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14

1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809

2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809

Made of bakelite black with gal. steel hub a) without handle b) with rotatable machine handle

a

Hole Ø. 10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14 12 14 16 18 20

P/N 6801 6802 6803 6804 6805 6806 6807 6808 6809 6810 6811 6812 6813 6814

Disk Wheels Made of bakelite black with gal. steel hub a) without handle or b) with rotatable handle

b

a OD Ø

Hole Ø

a P/N

b P/N

100 100 100 125 125 125 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 200 200 200 250 250 250 315 315 315

10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 16 18 20 18 20 25 25 28 32

1901 1902 1903 1904 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922

2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122

OD Ø 80 80 80 100 100 100 125 125 125 160 160 160 160 160 200 200 200 250 250

Hole Ø 10 12 14 10 12 14 10 12 14 12 14 16 18 20 16 18 20 20 25

b

a P/N 9817 9818 9819 9801 9802 9803 9804 9805 9806 9807 9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814 9815 9816

b P/N 9917 9918 9919 9901 9902 9903 9904 9905 9906 9907 9908 9909 9910 9911 9912 9913 9914 9915 9916

See page 266 for aluminium Spoke & Disk wheels. See page 270 - 271 for other types of hand wheels including safety foldaway handle type.

All dimensions are in mm. All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

264


Vibration Dampers Zinc Plated - Types A/B/C/D/E Material: Natural rubber NR with steel hardware Not resistant to mineral oils and grease Temperature range: -30o to +80oC steel Part No. Type A

Type B

Type C

Type D

Type E

D mm

H mm

F Nm

M mm

I mm

S m

S1 mm

F cm2

Shore

15.15A 20.15A 25.20A 25.30A 30.20A 30.30A 40.30A 40.40A 50.30A 50.40A 70.45A 75.40A 75.50A 100.40A 100.60A 100.75A 150.55A 150.75A

15.15B 20.15B 25.20B 25.30B 30.20B 30.30B 40.30B 40.40B 50.30B 50.40B 70.45B 75.40B 75.50B 100.40B 100.60B 100.75B 150.55B 150.75B

15.15C 20.15C 25.20C 25.30C 30.20C 30.30C 40.30C 40.40C 50.30C 50.40C 70.45C 75.40C 75.50C 100.40C 100.60C 100.75C 150.55C 150.75C

15.15D 20.15D 25.20D 25.30D 30.20D 30.30D 40.30D 40.40D 50.30D 50.40D 70.45D 75.40D 75.50D 100.40D 100.60D 100.75D 150.55D 150.75D

15.15E 20.15E 25.20E 25.30E 30.20E 30.30E 40.30E 40.40E 50.30E 50.40E 70.45E 75.40E 75.50E 100.40E 100.60E 100.75E 150.55E 150.75E

15 20 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 50 70 75 75 100 100 100 150 150

15 15 20 30 20 30 30 40 30 40 45 40 50 40 60 75 55 75

0.040 0.090 0.150 0.150 0.210 0.210 0.300 0.300 0.600 0.600 1.000 1.200 1.200 2.000 2.000 2.000 6.000 6.000

M4 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M12 M12 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16

12 19 15 15 20 20 20 20 25 25 37 37 37 42 42 42 42 42

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 16.5 16.5 16.5 16.5 16.5

2.36 3.14 4.91 4.91 7.07 7.07 12.57 12.57 19.64 19.64 38.47 44.18 44.18 78.54 78.54 78.54 176.62 176.62

55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55

Type A (zinc) Type 50 (ss)

Type B (zinc) Type 51 (ss)

Type C (zinc) Type 52 (ss)

Type D (zinc) Type 53 (ss)

Type E (zinc) Type 54 (ss)

with bolt on both sides.

bolt on one side & threaded insert other side.

Threaded insert on both sides.

with bolt on one side only.

with threaded insert on one side only.

Stainless Steel - Types 50/51/52/53/54 Material: Nitrile rubber NBR with stainless steel (1.403) hardware (standard). Temperature range: -30oC to +120oC Optional material: Natural Rubber NR with stainless steel (1.403) hardware (Please add NR to end of Part No.) Temperature range: -30oC to +80oC Oil resistant Part No. Type 50 5050.02015 5050.03020 5050.04025 5050.05030 5050.07535 5050.10040 5050.15045

Type 51

Type 52

Type 53

5051.02015 5051.03020 5051.04025 5051.05030 5051.07535 5051.10040 5051.15045

5052.02015 5052.03020 5052.04025 5052.05030 5052.07535 5052.10040 5052.15045

5053.02015 5053.03020 5053.04025 5053.05030 5053.07535 5053.10040 5053.15045

Type 54

D mm

5054.02015 20 5054.03020 30 5054.04025 40 5054.05030 50 5054.07535 75 5054.10040 100 5054.15045 150

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

265

H mm 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

F N

M mm

I mm

S mm

90 210 300 600 1200 2000 6000

M6 M8 M8 M10 M12 M16 M16

15 18 23 28 37 41 41

2 2 3 3 3 3 4

S1 mm 5 6 7 8 10 13 14

F cm2 3.14 7.07 12.57 19.64 44.16 78.50 176.60

Shore 55 55 55 55 55 55 55


Polished Aluminium Two-Spoke Hand Wheels Type ZPK Part No.

D

d

I1

I2

A

ZPK 80 ZPK 100 ZPK 125 ZPK 140 ZPK 160 ZPK 180 ZPK 200 ZPK 250 ZPK 320

80 100 125 140 160 180 200 250 320

26 30 35 35 40 42 45 50 51

16 17 18 19 20 22 24 28 33

14 15 16 17 17 19 21 22 28

14 15 16 17 18 19 21 24 30

Supplied pilot bored: ZPK80-100: 5 mm, 125-200: 6mm, 250-320: 8mm

Polished Aluminium Spoke Wheels Type DIN 950 Part No. DIN950.80 DIN950.100 DIN950.125 DIN950.140 DIN950.160 DIN950.180 DIN950.200 DIN950.225 DIN950.250 DIN950.280 DIN950.315 DIN950.360 DIN950.400 DIN950.500 DIN950.560

D

d

I1

I2

A

80 100 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 360 400 500 560

24 26 28 30 32 40 38 42 45 50 53 61 65 78 90

16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 33 35 38 45 50

13 16 18 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 25 27 32

14 15 16 17 18 20 22 24 26 26 28 30 32 34 36

Keyways and operating handles are not standard. P/N DIN950.80 to 200 have three spokes, 225 to 560 have five spokes. Supplied pilot bored: 80-100: 5 mm, 125-225: 6mm, 250-320: 8mm

Polished Aluminium Disk Wheels Type SGF-GH Part No. SGF-GH 80 SGF-GH 100 SGF-GH 125 SGF-GH 140 SGF-GH 160 SGF-GH 180 SGF-GH 200 SGF-GH 225 SGF-GH 250 SGF-GH 280 SGF-GH 315

D

d

I1

I2

A

80 100 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 280 315

25 28 30 32 40 42 50 50 50 55 55

16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 33

13 16 18 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23

16 18 20 22 23 25 26 28 30 32 33

Note: Operating handle is not standard and must be ordered separately, then attached.

Supplied pilot bored: SGF-GH80-100: 5 mm, 125-225: 6mm, 250-320: 8mm Operating handles not standard. All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

266


Unpolished Aluminium Spoke Wheels Type HR-RI - suitable for valves etc. Part No.

D

d

s

I1

HR-RI. 60 HR-RI.100 HR-RI.125 HR-RI.140 HR-RI.160 HR-RI.180 HR-RI.200 HR-RI.225 HR-RI.250 HR-RI.315 HR-RI.400 HR-RI.500

60 100 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 315 400 500

18 26 40 40 40 40 45 55 55 60 70 80

9 11 11 12 14 14 17 17 19 24 27

12 17 18 19 20 22 22 26 26 30 34 38

Supplied pilot bored. Square hole not standard.

Polished Aluminium Fixed Machine Handles Type GF - made of light alloy - with threaded stem and internal steel pin Part No.

d1

d2

d3

L1

L2

GF-E16 GF-E20 GF-E25 GF-E32

16 20 25 32

M6 M8 M10 M12

10 13 16 20

50 64 80 100

11 13 14 16

The threaded stem has a hexagonal bore and can easily be fastened into a handwheel using a hexagonal key.

Polished Aluminium Rotatable Handles Type DIN 98 - in accordance with DIN 98 - made of light alloy - with threaded stem Part No.

d1

d2

d3

L1

L2

DIN98E16 DIN98E20 DIN98E25 DIN98E32

16 20 25 32

M6 M8 M10 M12

10 13 16 20

54 67 83 105

11 13 14 16

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

267


Polished Aluminium Star Handles Type STG - in accordance with DIN 6336 Part No.

d1

d2

h2

t1

STG6336-40 STG6336-50 STG6336-63 STG6336-80

40 50 63 80

14 18 20 25

25 32 40 50

18 21 25 32

Most sizes are usual stock items. Supplied pilot bored. With minimum orders of 50 pieces, handles can be ordered with steel inserts for threads or through holes.

Polished Aluminium Star Handles Type KG - in accordance with DIN 6335 - made of light alloy Part No.

d1

d2

h2

t1

KG-DIN6335-40 KG-DIN6335-50 KG-DIN6335-63 KG-DIN6335-80

40 50 63 80

14 18 20 25

25 32 40 50

18 21 25 32

Most sizes are usual stock items. Supplied pilot bored. With minimum orders of 50 pieces, handles can be ordered with steel inserts for threads or through holes.

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

268


Stainless Steel Knurled Screws & Nuts Material: stainless steel 1.4305

Most sizes are stock items.

Part No.

A

B

C

D

E

F

Weight g

8100-16-M4-10 8100-16-M4-15 8100-20-M5-10 8100-20-M5-15 8100-24-M6-15 8100-24-M6-20 8100-30-M8-20 8100-30-M8-30

16 16 20 20 24 24 30 30

M4 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8

10 15 10 15 15 20 20 30

3.5 3.5 4 4 5 5 6 6

9.5 9.5 11.5 11.5 15 15 18 18

8 8 10 10 12 12 16 16

16 17 27 28 50 51 84 85

Part No.

A

B

C

D

E

Weight g

8120-16-M4 8120-20-M5 8120-24-M6 8120-30-M8

16 20 24 30

M4 M5 M6 M8

3.5 4 5 6

9.5 11.5 15 18

8 10 12 16

3 13 24 46

Part No.

A

B

C

D

E

Weight g

8140-16-M4 8140-20-M5 8140-24-M6 8140-30-M8 8140-36-M10 8140-40-M12

16 20 24 30 36 40

M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12

6 8 10 12 14 16

10 12 14 17 20 24

8 14 16 20 28 32

13 17 29 52 85 125

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

269


Knobs and Handles

The Ergostyle® colours:

• BLACK RAL 7021 • ORANGE RAL 2004 • GREY RAL 7035 • YELLOW RAL 1021 • LIGHT BLUE RAL 5024 • RED RAL 3000 ETW. Two-spoke handwheels with boss cap, in one of the Ergostyle colours, with or without side handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Diameters: 125 - 160 - 200 mm

EWN.p Wing nuts with centre cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black, matte finish. Zinc-plated or AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped hole or threaded stud. Sizes: 48 - 55 - 70 mm

ETW+IR

ERX.

Two-spoke handwheels with boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours, with fold-away handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Diameters: 125 - 160 - 200 mm

Adjustable handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer lever, grey-black, matte finish. Glossy finish push button in one of the Ergostyle colours. Glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer locking element with brass insert with tapped blind hole or zinc-plated threaded stud. Available also with AISI 303 stainless steel inserts and studs steel. Sizes: 44 - 63 - 78 - 95 mm

ESW+I Solid handwheels with boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours, with side handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Diameters: 125 - 150 - 175 mm

ERZ. Adjustable handles. Material: lever in special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black with matte finish. Clamping element in black oxide or AISI 303 stainless steel insert with threaded bushing or threaded stud. Toothed element in zinc alloy and AISI 303 stainless steel retaining spring. Sizes: 44 - 63 - 78 - 95 mm

EKH. Crank handles with hub cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel hub with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Sizes: 100 - 125 mm

ERF. Lever handles. Special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black with matte finish. Brass insert with tapped blind hole, cylindrical blind and plain hole with brass reinforcement or square hole with transversal set screw (ERF.N) or zinc-plated steel threaded stud (ERF.p). Sizes: 44 - 63 - 78 - 95

ELC. Control levers with boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Sizes: 67 - 85 - 110 - 140 mm

EKK. Knurled knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer in one of the Ergostyle colours, matte finish. Brass insert with tapped blind hole or zinc-plated steel threaded stud. Diameters: 16 - 18 - 21 - 25 - 31 mm

EGK. Grip knob with boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer covered with soft touch elastomer, grey-black matte finish. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Diameter: 50 - 63 mm

EPR-PF Flush pull handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black with matte finish. Snap-in mounting. Size: 120 mm

EBK-SOFT Special high impact strength technopolymer covered with soft touch elastomer (Shore A hardness 70), grey-black matte finish. Brass tapped insert or zinc-plated threaded steel stud. Dimension: 64 mm

EPR/F-SH Flush pull handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black colour with matte finish. Screw cover in one of the Ergostyle colour with glossy finish. Technopolymer flap and stainless steel return spring. Size: 120 mm

EGH-SOFT Special soft touch elastomer technopolymer (Shore A hardness 90), grey-black matte finish. Push-fit on plain shaft made from standard drawn stock bars. Dimension: 85 mm

ETH. Tubular handles. Aluminium tube with epoxy resin based coating. Handle shanks in glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer assembled to the tube through a special expansion system to prevent from rotation during operation. Side caps in one of the Ergostyle colours with glossy finish. Fitting centre distance: 300 - 500 - 700 - 1000 mm

ELK. Lobe knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Plain or bored (type ELK.FP) boss cap in one of the Ergostyle colours, ultrasonically welded to the knob body. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance plain or tapped hole or threaded stud. Diameters: 45 - 56 - 70 mm

EBP. EBP.B Bridge pull handles with caps in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Mounting by means of passing through holes in the plastic material or brass inserts with tapped blind holes. Fitting center distance: 95.3 - 117 - 150 mm

ESN. Single wing nuts with centre cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black with matte finish. Brass insert with tapped hole. Sizes: 55 - 70 mm

ESP. Guard safety handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Safety cover in one of the Ergostyle colours to protect operator fingers against accidents, snap mounting, glossy finish. Mounting by means of two cylindrical head (CH) or countersunk screws (SH). Fitting center distance: 93.5 mm

EWN. Wing nuts with or without center cap in one of the Ergostyle colours. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Brass insert with blind or passing through tapped hole (EWN.FP), available also with AISI 303 stainless steel insert. Sizes: 48 - 55 - 70 mm

ECH+x Two-volume revolving handles. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, grey-black matte finish. Zinc-plated steel shank with hexagonal socket in the threaded end. Sizes: 65 - 73 - 86 - 95 mm

270

Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets


Operating Elements

Clamping And Control Elements

VRTP.

VB.639

Two-spoke handwheels with or without side handle or with fold-away handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance hole. Matte anodised aluminium central plate. Diameters: 80 - 100 - 125 - 160 - 200 - 250 - 300 - 375 mm

Three-arm knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. AISI 303 stainless steel or brass insert with plain or tapped blind hole. Brass insert with tapped through hole (type FP). Zinc-plated steel stud (type p). Diameters: 63 - 80 - 100 - 130 mm

VR.FP

VCT. VCT. AE-V0

Three-spoke handwheels with or without side handle or with fold-away handle. Material: high strength reinforced Duroplast. Black oxide steel hub not drilled. Diameters: 100 - 125 - 140 - 160 - 180 - 200 - 250 - 300 - 375 mm

Lobe knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer or special technopolymer certified self-extinguish (VCT. AE-V0). Steel or brass insert with plain or tapped hole. Brass insert with tapped through hole (type FP). Zinc-plated steel stud (type p). Diameters: 25 - 32 - 40 - 50 - 63 - 74 mm

VDS.

VCT-SOFT

Solid handwheels with boss cap, with or without side handle, with fold-away handle or safety fold-away handle. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance hole. Diameters: 80 - 100 - 125 - 150 - 175 - 200 - 250 - 300 mm

Lobe knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, covered with soft touch elastomer. Brass insert with tapped blind hole. Zinc-plated steel stud (type p). Diameters: 43 - 53 mm

VDT.

VC.692

Solid handwheels with boss cap, with or without side handle or with fold-away handle. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Matte anodised aluminium ring (ELESA original design). Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance hole. Diameters: 100 - 125 - 160 - 200 mm

Lobe knobs Material: special glass fibre reinforced technopolymer. AISI 303 stainlees steel or brass insert with tapped blind hole. Zinc-plated steel stud (type p) or AISI 303 stainless steel stud (type S-p-INOX). Diameters: 32 - 40 - 50 - 60 mm

VD.FP

VC.692-CLEAN

Solid handwheels with or without side handle. Material: high strength reinforced Duroplast. Black oxide steel hub not drilled or with standard H7 tolerance hole. Matte anodised aluminium ring (ELESA original design). Diameters: 50 - 63 - 80 - 100 - 125 - 140 - 150 - 175 - 200 - 225 250 - 300 - 350 mm

Lobe knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, white colour similar to RAL 9002 with matte finish. AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped blind hole Diameters: 32 - 40 - 50 - 60 mm

VDO.FP

VC.192

Solid handwheels with or without side handle, with fold-away handle or with safety fold-away handle. Rim with front and rear finger grips. Material: high strength reinforced Duroplast. Black oxide steel hub not drilled. Matte anodised aluminium ring (ELESA original design). Diameters: 125 - 150 - 175 - 200 - 225 - 250 mm

Lobe knobs. Material: Duroplast AISI 303 stainless steel or brass insert with plain or tapped blind hole. AISI 303 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel threaded stud. Diameters: 25 - 30 - 40 - 50 - 60 - 70 - 85 - 100 mm

LBR.

VCRT.

Control levers. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer lever body. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance hole. Matte chrome-plated steel arm with handle type I.280. Matte anodised aluminium central plate. Sizes: 85 - 110 - 130 - 170 mm

Lobe knobs with square hole. Material: glass reinforced technopolymer, black with matte finish. Square through hole with brass reinforcement. Coloured centre caps for closing the mounting hole. Diameters: 40 - 50 - 63 - 74 mm

VBR.2 VBR.4

VL.640

Two or four-arm handwheels. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer centre body. Black oxide steel insert with through hole. Matte chrome-plated steel arms with handle type I.222. Diameters: 200 - 280 - 320 - 370 mm

Lobe knobs. Material: glass reinforced technopolymer, black with glossy finish. Uncovered front end hub available in different executions: not drilled, plain through hole, tapped through hole. Diameters: 50 - 60 - 70 - 80 mm

ME.

VC.308 VC.309

Balanced handles with incorporated counterweight. Material: reinforced Duroplast, or special high strength technopolymer (ME.95). Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance blind hole. Matte anodised aluminium front plate (ELESA original design). Sizes: 65 - 80 - 95 - 110 - 140 mm

Latch-type knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. Tropicalized zinc-plated steel latch. Knob opens both to the right and left. Nickel-plated brass key for lock numbered with different numbers or same numbering, master key, etc. Knobs diameter: 40 mm

MT

VCK. VCK. INOX

Crank handles with revolving or fold-away handle. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Black oxide steel hub with standard H7 tolerance reamed through hole, pilot blind hole or square hole. Sizes: 50 - 64 - 80 - 100 - 130 - 160 - 210 mm

Latch-type knobs. Material: knob in Duroplast. Zinc-plated or AISI 303 stainless steel stud. Sintered and oxidised or sintered AISI 316 L stainless steel helical latch with partly machined hole. Compensating latch spring for door thickness. Knob opens both to the right and left. Knobs diameters: 50 - 60 - 70 mm

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets

271


Industrial Handles CT.476

M.843

Swing knobs. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Brass insert with blind or through tapped hole (type FP). Zinc-plated steel stud (type p) or AISI 303 stainless steel stud (type S-p-INOX). Sizes: 20 - 25 - 30 - 40 mm

Handles. Material: polyamide based technopolymer with glossy finish. Brass inserts with tapped blind hole. Available in six standard colours. Fitting centre distances: 117 - 179 mm

BT.

M.843 CLEAN

Fluted grip knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. AISI 303 stainless steel or brass insert with blind or tapped through hole (type FP). Zinc-plated steel or AISI 303 stainless steel stud (type p). Diameters: 16 - 20 - 25 - 32 - 40 - 50 mm

Handles. Material: polyamide based technopolymer, in white colour similar to RAL 9002 with glossy finish. AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped blind hole. Fitting centre distances: 117 - 179 mm

B.193

M.643

Knurled grip knobs. Black Duroplast with glossy finish. AISI 303 stainless steel studs (type p), or brass insert with tapped blind hole or through hole (type FP) Diameters: 15 - 18 - 20 - 25 - 30 - 35 - 40 - 50 mm

Handles. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, matte finish. Brass die-cast zinc alloy or brass inserts with tapped blind hole.

M.643 HT Suitable for working temperature up to 200°C. Fitting centre distances: 86 - 117 - 120 - 130 - 150 - 179 - 300 mm

B.259-CLEAN

M.443 CH

Knurled knobs. Material painted Duroplast, in white colour similar to RAL 9002 with glossy finish. AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped blind hole. Diameters: 20 - 25 - 30 mm

Handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, RAL colours: black, orange, red, grey. Fitting by means of cylindrical head screws.

M.443 AE-V0 Material: special black technopolymer certified self-extinguish, Fitting by means of cylindrical head screws. Fitting centre distances: 93.5 - 117 - 132 - 179 - 235 mm

MBT-SOFT

GR.

Fluted grip knobs. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer, rim covered with soft touch elastomer. Zinc-plated threaded steel stud (type p) or brass insert with tapped blind hole. Diameters: 45 - 55 mm

Bent tubular handle. Tube and lateral caps in AISI 304 fine grounded stainless steel. Diameter 30x1.5 mm Lateral handle shanks in aluminium with black epoxy resin coating. Back mounting by means of two threaded blind holes. Fitting centre distances: 500 - 600 mm

IZP.

M.1043

Knurled grip knobs with or without triangular index or graduation. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Laser precision engraved triangular index or graduation with standard 0 - 9 numbering (20 marks) or special numbering on request. Diameters: 25 - 30 - 35 - 40 mm

Tubular handles. Material: aluminium tube Ă&#x2DC; 30 mm with a polyurethane coat on an epoxy base, special reinforced technopolymer handle shanks. Fitting by means of cylindrical socket head screws. Fitting centre distances: 300 - 350 - 400 - 500 - 600 - 700 mm

IZN.380

M.1066-CLEAN Aluminium tube with high resistance epoxy resin based coating. White colour similar to RAL 9002 with glossy finish. Handle shanks and side caps in glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer, matte finish. Mounting by means of zinc-plated steel special screws and brass nuts. Fitting centre distances: 200 - 250 - 300 - 400 - 500 - 600 mm

Knurled grip knobs with boss cap. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Model IZN.380+K with pointer flange. Model IZN.380+FGS with calibrated flange. Diameters: 32 - 36 - 40 - 45 - 50 - 56 - 63 - 80 mm

F.N F.K F.GS

PL. PS. S.N

Flanges for IZN. knurled grip knobs. Material: matte anodised aluminium. Executions: plain (type N), with black index (type K), with marks and numbers standard from 0 to 9 (type GS). Diameters: 32 - 36 - 40 - 45 - 50 - 56 - 63 mm

Plain spherical knobs. Material: Duroplast. Tapped blind hole or special technopolymer self-locking bushing, push-fit mounting, brass insert with tapped blind hole (type PL.B). Diameters: 20 - 25 - 30 - 35 - 40 - 45 - 50 - 60 mm

MBT+I

I.622 I.622 N

Diamond cut knurled knobs with side handle. Material: special high impact strenght technopolymer, black with matte finish. Brass insert with plain blind hole and socket set screw for fitting to shaft. Diameters: 40 - 50 - 60 mm

Handles. Material: high-impact strength technopolymer with glossy finish. Tapped blind hole (I.622) available in black standard colour or plain blind hole (I.622 N) in black or red similar to RAL 3000. Sizes: 25 - 30 - 40 - 55 mm

MR.

I.622 N-CLEAN

Adjustable handles. If necessary the lever can be disassembled. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. AISI 302 stainless steel return spring. Black oxide steel or brass insert with plain or tapped blind hole. Black oxide steel stud (type p). RAL colours: black, orange, grey. Sizes: 40 - 63 - 80 - 100 mm

Handles. Material: high impact strength technopolymer in white colour similar to RAL 9002 with glossy finish. Plain blind hole, push-fit mounting. Sizes: 25 - 30 - 40 - 55 mm

MRX. MRX. S-INOX Adjustable handles. Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Technopolymer push button. AISI 302 stainless steel return spring. Brass or AISI 303 stainless steel insert with tapped blind hole (type MRX.S-INOX). Zinc-plated steel stud (type MRX.p) or AISI 303 stainless steel stud (type MRX.S-p-INOX). Sizes: 40 - 63 - 80 - 100 mm

Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets

272


IEL.

SFV.

Push-fit fixed or revolving handles. Material: matte finish elastomer technopolymer. Zinc-plated steel shank (type IEL.+x). Transparent cap for self-adhesive labels with marks and symbols (type IEL.N-H). Size: 65 mm

Valve breather caps. Material: special polyamide based technopolymer, orange colour cover with “valve” Symbol. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Valve setting 0.010 bar or 0.100 bar. Threads: BSP 1/4 - 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1; metric (pitch 1.5) 16 - 18 - 20 - 22

I.168-SOFT

SFW.

Knurled handles. Black matte finish, thermoplastic elastomer technopolymer, coated with soft touch elastomer (Shore A hardness 90). Brass insert with plain hole. Complete with socket set screw for fitting to shaft. Size: 60 mm

Pressure filler breather caps. Material: special polyamide based technopolymer, orange colour cover with “valve” Symbol. Safety valve setting: 0.350 bar, suction valve setting: 0.030 bar. Air filter, filtration 40µ. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Bayonet mounting or BSP threads: 3/4 - 11/4

BL.366 BL.368 BL.668

FRF+C FRB+C

Lever arms. Matte chrome-plated steel arm with Duroplast black handle with glossy finish (BL.366 - BL. 368) or zinc-plated steel arm (BL.668) with black technopolymer handle with glossy finish. Dimensions: 8 - 10 - 12 - 14 -16 mm

Threaded or bayonet flanges with basket (filtration 30 mesh). Material: flange in special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer or in zinc-plated steel. Flat cork MGS rubber impregnated gasket. Mounting by means of six zinc-plated steel self tapping screws. Threaded or bayonet type breather cap fitting.

I.601+x I.601+x-INOX

PLRF+C PLRB+C

Revolving handles. Material: special high impact strength technopolymer. Zinc-plated or AISI 303 stainless steel shank.

Threaded or bayonet style side mount flanges with basket (filtration 30 mesh). Material: mount in special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer. Flange in special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer or in zinc-plated steel. Flat cork MGS rubber impregnated gasket. Mounting by means of seven M6 screws and relative washers. Threaded or bayonet type breather cap fitting.

I.301+x Material: Duroplast. Sizes: 28 - 40 - 50 - 56 - 65 - 80 - 90 - 100 - 115 mm

I.621+x

HGFT.

Two-volume revolving handles. Material: special technopolymer, black with matte finish. Zinc-plated shank with hexagonal socket at threaded end. Sizes: 45 - 60 - 65 - 80 - 90 mm

Oil level indicators. Material: case in special black polyamide based technopolymer. Special transparent polyamide window. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Matte anodised aluminium contrast screen. Model HGFT.HT-PR: prismathyque window. Maximum working temperature: 140°C. Threads BSP: 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 11/4 - 2

IR.302 IR.407 IR.612

HFTX.

Fold-away handles. Material: Duroplast or technopolymer handle with sintered and oxidised or AISI 303 stainless steel base. Double-guided stud and coaxial bushes to make the handle pivoting freely during operations. Sizes: 56 - 65 - 80 - 90 mm

Oil level indicators. Material: special polyamide based transparent technopolymer. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Matte anodised aluminium contrast screen. Threads: BSP 1/4 - 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 11/4; metric (pitch 1.5) 16 - 20 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 30 - 35 - 40

IR.620

HCFE/C

Two-volume fold-away handles. Material: special technopolymer, black colour with matte finish. Black oxide steel stud and sintered and oxidised steel flat base. Sizes: 45 - 60 - 65 - 80 - 90 mm

Dome-shaped level indicators. Material: special transparent technopolymer. NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Threads BSP: 1/2 - 3/4 - 1

IRS.802

HCX. HCX. INOX

Fold-away - "Fold-O-Matic" handles. Material: technopolymer handle with sintered and oxidised or AISI 303 stainless steel base. Black oxide or treated steel double guide stud. Fold-O-matic special return system: the handle returns automatically back to its retracted position as soon as the operator lets it go. Sizes: 65 - 80 - 90 mm

Vertical column level indicators, 180° readability. Material: special polyamide based transparent technopolymer. Zinc-plated steel set screws and nuts with OR type NBR synthetic rubber packing rings. White laquered aluminium contrast screen. Incorporated thermometer (execution HCX/T). Execution HCX.INOX with bolts and nuts in AISI 303 stainless steel and OR type Viton® packing rings.

HCX. INOX-BW

Accessories For Hydraulic Systems

Column level indicators for boiling water.

HCZ. Vertical column level indicators with reduced width. Fitting centre distances: 76 - 127 - 254 mm

TCD. TSD. TN. Oil plugs plain (TN.) or with DIN graphic symbols “fill” (TCD.) or “drain” (TSD.). Material: special glass-fibre reinforced technopolymer in black (TCD. TN) or red (TSD.) with matte finish. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring. Flat phosphatised steel dipstick (type TCD+a). Threads BSP: 1/8 - 1/4 - 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 11/4 - 11/2

Viton® is a registered trademark of Dupont Dow Elastomers.

HCX/E Electric vertical column level indicators, 180° readability. Material: special polyamide based transparent technopolymer. Zinc-plated steel set screws and nuts with OR type NBR synthetic rubber packing rings. Black polyamide expanded technopolymer float. Black polyamide technopolymer watertight sensor bracket. White laquered aluminium contrast screen. Electric device to generate a signal when the oil level drops to a minimum. Fitting centre distance: 127 mm

T.440 Caps. Material: special technopolymer. Flat NBR synthetic rubber packing ring Flat phosphatised steel dipstick (type T.440+a). Threads BSP: 1/4 - 3/8 - 1/2 - 3/4 - 1 - 11/4 - 11/2

Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets

273


Direct drive indicators

DD52R

new narrower design

ELESA original design

Narrow Digital position indicators direct drive • Use mounted on passing-through control spindles in any position, for giving actual reading of the positioning of a machine component. They are designed also for motor driven applications. • Lowered height of the case. Compact roller counter. Ergonomically designed digits for rapid reading. The readability of the counter is increased by the magnifying window. • Polyamide-based (PA) technopolymer case, ultrasonically welded to its support to prevent accidental tampering and dust penetration. Standard colour RAL 2004 orange and RAL 7035 grey. Glossy finish. Resistant to solvents, oils, grease and other chemical agents. • Five figure digital counter (4 black units and 1 red decimal or 3 black units and 2 red decimal places). An additional graduated scale next to the last digit offers further accuracy of reading. The display indicates the distance covered by the mechanism controlled by the spindle from the start position. The counter wheels are compact with ergonomically designed numbers for rapid reading. The magnifying window (lens effect) improves the readability. The snap connection with light interference between window and case prevent dust penetration. • Black oxide steel insert with standard Ø 20 mm H7 tolerance reamed hole, fitting to shaft by means of a grub screw with hexagon socket and cup end (according to UNI 5929-85). • Rear polyurethan gasket (standard accessory). • Location rear torque pin for positioning. • Weight 90 grams. 37

Accessories to be ordered separately: Steel reduction sleeves RB52 (AISI 303 stainless steel available on request and for sufficiently large quantities) technopolymer reduction sleeves RBT.52, front powdertight NBR synthetic rubber gasket DG.52 (code CE.87910).

6

Reduction Sleeve

Reduction Sleeve

Code

Description

d H7

Code

Description

d H9

CE.87940 CE.87950 CE.87955 CE.87960

RB52-12 RB52-14 RB52-15 RB52-16

12 14 15 16

CE.87940 CE.87950 CE.87955 CE.87960

RB52-12 RB52-14 RB52-15 RB52-16

12 14 15 16

INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

23

40

43.5

Installation instructions: • Drill a Ø 6 mm by 10 mm deep hole in the body of the machine with centre distance of 30 mm from the spindle, to fit the rear referencing pin. • Zero set the spindle. • Re-fit the zeroed roller counter onto the spindle and make sure the rear pin locates into the hole. • Tighten the socket head grub screw.

66.5

30

AN

D

S

Clockwise rotation to increase

Anti-clockwise rotation to increase

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

274

AR

FN

FR


Table of the possible combinations Pitch

Type

0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.58 1.607 1.75 2.0 2.5 2.54 3.0 3.15 3.175 3.5 4.0 5.0 5.08 5.294 6.0 6.25 6.35 7.5 8.0 9.0 10.0 10.5 12.0 13.0 15.0 20.0

Reading Position

0000.5 AN inclined upper

AR inclined lower

DD52

FN front upper

FR front lower

Speed Direction of Colour (rpm) rotation

Reading after one revolution

0001.0 0001.2(5) 0001.5 0001.5(8) 0001.6(07) 0001.7(5) 0002.0 0002.5 0002.5(4) 0003.0 0003.1(5) 0003.1(75) 0003.5 0004.0 0005.0 0005.0(8) 0005.2(94) 0006.0 0006.2(5) 0006.3(5) 0007.5 0008.0 0009.0 0010.0 0010.5 0012.0 0013.0 0015.0 0020.0

000.50 000.05 001.00 000.10 000.12(5) 000.15 000.15(8) 000.16(07) 000.17(5) 000.20 000.25 000.25(4) 000.30 000.31(5) 000.31(75) 000.35 000.40 000.50 000.50(8) 000.52(94) 000.60 000.62(5) 000.63(5) 000.75 000.80 000.90 001.00 001.05 001.20 001.30 001.50 0020.0

00050 00005 00100 00010 00012(5) 00015 00015(8) 00016(07) 00017(5) 00020 00025 00025(4) 00030 00031(5) 00031(75) 00035 00040 00050 00050(8) 00052(94) 00060 00062(5) 00063(5) 00075 00080 00090 00100 00105 00120 00130 00150 00200

AR orange

D clockwise

GR grey

S anti-clockwise NR anthracite

500 1500 250 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1420 1250 1000 980 830 790 780 710 625 500 490 470 415 400 390 330 315 270 250 235 200 190 160 125

Inches reading

Speed (rpm)

00.019(6875) 00.019(6875) 00.039(375) 00.039(375)

1270 1270 630 630

00.078(75)

310

00.118(125)

210

000.15(75) 000.19(6875)

1500 1270

000.39(375)

630

The maximum rotational speed of the indicator corresponds to a maximum rotational speed of 25000 digits per minute of the right hand side wheel. Rotational speed tests have been performed in our laboratory under standard operating conditions. The internal mechanism counts also the figures between brackets, even if they do not appear on the display.

CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF STANDARD COMBINATIONS DD52R - AN Code

DD52R - AR

DD52R - FN

Code

Code

DD52R - FR Code

Grey

Orange

Description

Grey

Orange

Description

Grey

Orange

Description

Grey

Orange

Description

CE.82101 CE.82102 CE.82131 CE.82132 CE.82151 CE.82152 CE.82181 CE.82182 CE.82197 CE.82198 CE.82211 CE.82212 CE.82231 CE.82232 CE.82251 CE.82252 CE.82263 CE.82264 CE.82291 CE.82292

CE.82103 CE.82104 CE.82133 CE.82134 CE.82153 CE.82154 CE.82183 CE.82184 CE.82199 CE.82200 CE.82213 CE.82214 CE.82233 CE.82234 CE.82253 CE.82254 CE.82265 CE.82266 CE.82293 CE.82294

DD52R-AN-0005.0-D DD52R-AN-0005.0-S DD52R-AN-001.00-D DD52R-AN-001.00-S DD52R-AN-0001.0-D DD52R-AN-0001.0-S DD52R-AN-0002.0-D DD52R-AN-0002.0-S DD52R-AN-0002.5-D DD52R-AN-0002.5-S DD52R-AN-0003.0-D DD52R-AN-0003.0-S DD52R-AN-0004.0-D DD52R-AN-0004.0-S DD52R-AN-0005.0-D DD52R-AN-0005.0-S DD52R-AN-0006.0-D DD52R-AN-0006.0-S DD52R-AN-0010.0-D DD52R-AN-0010.0-S

CE.82601 CE.82602 CE.82631 CE.82632 CE.82651 CE.82652 CE.82681 CE.82682 CE.82697 CE.82698 CE.82711 CE.82712 CE.82731 CE.82732 CE.82751 CE.82752 CE.82763 CE.82764 CE.82791 CE.82792

CE.82603 CE.82604 CE.82633 CE.82634 CE.82653 CE.82654 CE.82683 CE.82684 CE.82699 CE.82700 CE.82713 CE.82714 CE.82733 CE.82734 CE.82753 CE.82754 CE.82765 CE.82766 CE.82793 CE.82794

DD52R-AR-000.50-D DD52R-AR-000.50-S DD52R-AR-001.00-D DD52R-AR-001.00-S DD52R-AR-0001.0-D DD52R-AR-0001.0-S DD52R-AR-0002.0-D DD52R-AR-0002.0-S DD52R-AR-0002.5-D DD52R-AR-0002.5-S DD52R-AR-0003.0-D DD52R-AR-0003.0-S DD52R-AR-0004.0-D DD52R-AR-0004.0-S DD52R-AR-0005.0-D DD52R-AR-0005.0-S DD52R-AR-0006.0-D DD52R-AR-0006.0-S DD52R-AR-0010.0-D DD52R-AR-0010.0-S

CE.83101 CE.83102 CE.83131 CE.83132 CE.83151 CE.83152 CE.83181 CE.83182 CE.83197 CE.83198 CE.83211 CE.83212 CE.83231 CE.83232 CE.83251 CE.83252 CE.83263 CE.83264 CE.83291 CE.83292

CE.83103 CE.83104 CE.83133 CE.83134 CE.83153 CE.83154 CE.83183 CE.83184 CE.83199 CE.83200 CE.83213 CE.83214 CE.83233 CE.83234 CE.83253 CE.83254 CE.83265 CE.83266 CE.83293 CE.83294

DD52R-FN-000.50-D DD52R-FN-000.50-S DD52R-FN-001.00-D DD52R-FN-001.00-S DD52R-FN-0001.0-D DD52R-FN-0001.0-S DD52R-FN-0002.0-D DD52R-FN-0002.0-S DD52R-FN-0002.5-D DD52R-FN-0002.5-S DD52R-FN-0003.0-D DD52R-FN-0003.0-S DD52R-FN-0004.0-D DD52R-FN-0004.0-S DD52R-FN-0005.0-D DD52R-FN-0005.0-S DD52R-FN-0006.0-D DD52R-FN-0006.0-S DD52R-FN-0010.0-D DD52R-FN-0010.0-S

CE.83601 CE.83602 CE.83631 CE.83632 CE.83651 CE.83652 CE.83681 CE.83682 CE.83697 CE.83698 CE.83711 CE.83712 CE.83731 CE.83732 CE.83751 CE.83752 CE.83763 CE.83764 CE.83791 CE.83792

CE.83603 CE.83604 CE.83633 CE.83634 CE.83653 CE.83654 CE.83683 CE.83684 CE.83699 CE.83700 CE.83713 CE.83714 CE.83733 CE.83734 CE.83753 CE.83754 CE.83765 CE.83766 CE.83793 CE.83794

DD52R-FR-000.50-D DD52R-FR-000.50-S DD52R-FR-001.00-D DD52R-FR-001.00-S DD52R-FR-0001.0-D DD52R-FR-0001.0-S DD52R-FR-0002.0-D DD52R-FR-0002.0-S DD52R-FR-0002.5-D DD52R-FR-0002.5-S DD52R-FR-0003.0-D DD52R-FR-0003.0-S DD52R-FR-0004.0-D DD52R-FR-0004.0-S DD52R-FR-0005.0-D DD52R-FR-0005.0-S DD52R-FR-0006.0-D DD52R-FR-0006.0-S DD52R-FR-0010.0-D DD52R-FR-0010.0-S

Complete the description of the standard item needed specifying one of the colours reported in the table: GR (Grey) or AR (Orange).

Special options on request Special readings after one revolution (for use with spindles having their pitch in mm or inches), stainless steel insert, special reduction sleeves.

275


Rotary Indicators GA01 GA02 GA05 Gravity controlled analogue indicators, for use on control spindles with positions ranging from horizontal up to 60° inclined. Zinc-plated mild steel case and polished AISI 303 stainless steel bezel. Clear glass window, matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations. Counterweight fitted with a sensitive ballrace bearing for improved reading accuracy.

GA11 GA12 Gravity controlled analogue indicators, for use on control spindles with positions ranging from horizontal up to 60° inclined. Case and bezel in special technopolymer with transparent polyamide window ultrasonically welded and completely sealed to protection class IP67 according to IEC 529. Matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations.

MBT.50/GA11 MBT.70/GA12 Gravity controlled analogue indicators integral with hand knobs, for use on control spindles, with positions ranging from horizontal up to 60° inclined. Case and bezel in special black technopolymer with transparent, polyamide window ultrasonically welded and completely sealed to protection class IP67 according to IEC 529 . The outside rim has been designed with a truncated diamond knurl that provides a comfortable grip and aids adjustment of the knob during rotation.

GW12 Gravity controlled digital-analogue indicators, for use on control spindles with positions ranging from horizontal up to 60° inclined. Case and bezel in special black technopolymer with transparent polyamide window ultrasonically welded and completely sealed to protection class IP67 according to IEC 529. Matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations. Five figures digital counter with 1 decimal place on red wheel.

DD52R Direct drive digital position indicators to be mounted on passing through control spindles in any position. Special technopolymer case ultrasonically welded to its support. Standard colours grey and orange. Four or five figures digital counter with 1 or 2 decimal places on red wheel. The magnifying window (lens effect) improves the readability. Digit height 6 mm. Black oxide steel or stainless steel insert with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Rotational speed: the indicator is designed also for use in motor driven applications.

PA01 PA02 PA05 Positive drive controlled analogue indicators, for use on control spindles in any position. Zinc-plated mild steel case and polished AISI 303 stainless steel bezel. Clear glass window, matte silver anodized aluminium dial with black graduations.

Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: GA01 Ø = 50 mm: 12/1 - 20/1 GA02 Ø = 68 mm: 6/1 - 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 GA05 Ø = 113 mm: 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 - 60/1 100/1 (other ratios on request).

Counterweight fitted with a sensitive ballrace bearing for improved reading accuracy. Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: GA11 Ø = 50 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 40/1 GA12 Ø = 68 mm: 6/1 - 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 (other ratios on request). Matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations. Counterweight fitted with a sensitive ballrace bearing for improved reading accuracy. Black oxide steel insert with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: MBT.50/GA11 Ø = 51 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 40/1 MBT.70/GA12 Ø = 70 mm: 6/1 - 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 36/1 (other ratios on request). Digit height 6 mm. Counterweight fitted with a sensitive ballrace bearing for improved reading accuracy. Standard readings after one revolution of the indicator with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: GW12 Ø = 68 mm: 0000.2 - 0000.5 - 0001.0 - 0002.0 - 0002.5 0004.0 - 0005.0 (other readings on request). Standard readings after one revolution of the indicator with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: DD51 H = 47 mm: 00.50 - 01.00 - 001.0 - 001.2/5 - 001.5 002.0 - 002.5 - 003.0 - 004.0 - 005.0 - 006.0 - 008.0 - 010.0 DD52 H = 66 mm: 000.50 - 001.00 - 0001.0 - 0002.0 - 0002.5 0003.0 - 0004.0 0005.0 - 0006.0 - 0010.0 (other readings on request). Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: PA01 Ø = 50 mm: 12/1-20/1, PA02 Ø = 68 mm: 6/1 - 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 24/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 PA05 Ø = 113 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 30/1 - 36/1 - 60/1 - 100/1 (other ratios on request).

PA11 PA12 Positive drive controlled analogue indicators, for use on control spindles in any Position. Case and bezel in special black technopolymer with transparent polyamide window ultrasonically welded and completely sealed to protection class IP65 according to IEC 529. Matte silver anodised aluminium dial with black graduations.

Standard ratios with clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation: PA11 Ø = 50 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 30/1 PA12 Ø = 68 mm: 10/1 - 12/1 - 20/1 - 30/1 (other ratios on request).

MBT. Diamond cut knurled knobs for use with indicators having gravity (G type) or positive drive (P type) movements. Material: special black technopolymer with outside rim having a truncated diamond knurl that provides a comfortable grip and aids adjustment of the knob during rotation. Black oxide steel insert with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole and socket head grub screw with cup end.

Aluminium black gloss epoxy finish hand knob model VAK. also available. Technopolymer knurled grip hand knob model IZN. also available. Diameters: 60 - 80 mm

VHT. VHT. INOX Lobe hand knobs for use with indicators having gravity (G type) or positive drive (P type) movements. Material: special black technopolymer. The special type of design of the rim (lobes, blended radius and well proportioned rim height) allows the operator to have a firm grip and apply a high torque.

VDC. VDC+I Solid handwheels for use with indicators having gravity (G type) or positive drive (P type) movements. Material: black reinforced Duroplast, rim with rear finger grips (diameters from 125 to 200 mm). Duroplast revolving handle for rapid movements (type VDC+I). Black oxide steel hub, not drilled (G type), with standard H7 tolerance blind hole (P type).

Black oxide steel or AISI 303 stainless steel insert with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Aluminium black gloss epoxy finish hand knob model VAL. also available. Diameters: 85 - 110 mm

Diameters: type G and type P: Ø = 80 - 100 mm type G: Ø = 125 - 140 - 160 - 180 - 200 mm Aluminium black matte epoxy finish handwheel model VAD. also available. type G with screw mounted indicator housing: Ø = 225 - 250 - 300 - 350 mm

VRTP. VRTP+I Two-spoke handwheels for use with gravity indicators. Material: special black technopolymer with indicator housing installed. Technopolymer revolving handle for rapid movements (type VRTP+I).

276

Black oxide steel boss with standard H7 tolerance reamed hole. Black Duroplast three-spoke handwheel model VR., VR+I also available. Diameters: 160 - 200 - 250 mm Please contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheets


Titanium Round Bar Titanium CP Grade 2 (ASTM B 348) - Titanium commerical pure UNS R 50400, WS 3.7035

Typical Chemical Analysis Grade

C

O

N

Fe

max

max

max

max

0.08

0.25

0.03

0.3

Al

U

Pd

Mo

Ni

H Max

Ti

0.15

Balance

a

Gr2

Typical Mechanical Properties Grade

Tensile

Yield

% Elongation

KSI Min

KSI Min/Max

Min

50

40/56

20

a

Gr2

Part Number selection table - Standard lengths available from stock OD mm

250mm

Part Number x OD x Length (mm) 500mm 750mm 1000mm 1500mm

2000mm

5 6 8

Ti/5/250 Ti/6/250 Ti/8/250

Ti/5/500 Ti/6/500 Ti/8/500

Ti/5/750 Ti/6/750 Ti/8/750

Ti/5/1000 Ti/6/1000 Ti/8/1000

Ti/5/1500 Ti/6/1500 Ti/8/1500

Ti/5/2000 Ti/6/2000 Ti/8/2000

10 12 15

Ti/10/250 Ti/12/250 Ti/15/250

Ti/10/500 Ti/12/500 Ti/15/500

Ti/10/750 Ti/12/750 Ti/15/750

Ti/10/1000 Ti/12/1000 Ti/15/1000

Ti/10/1500 Ti/12/1500 Ti/15/1500

Ti/10/2000 Ti/12/2000 Ti/15/2000

18 20 25

Ti/18/250 Ti/20/250 Ti/25/250

Ti/18/500 Ti/20/500 Ti/25/500

Ti/18/750 Ti/20/750 Ti/25/750

Ti/18/1000 Ti/20/1000 Ti/25/1000

Ti/18/1500 Ti/20/1500 Ti/25/1500

Ti/18/2000 Ti/20/2000 Ti/25/2000

1/4” ½” 3/4”

Ti/1/4”/250 Ti/½”/250 Ti/3/4”/250

Ti/1/4”/500 Ti/½”/500 Ti/3/4”/500

Ti/1/4”/750 Ti/½”/750 Ti/3/4”/750

Ti/1/4”/1000 Ti/½”/1000 Ti/3/4”/1000

Ti/1/4”/1500 Ti/½”/1500 Ti/3/4”/1500

Ti/1/4”/2000 Ti/½”/2000 Ti/3/4”/2000

1” 1 ½”

Ti/1”/250 Ti/1½”/250

Ti/1”/500 Ti/1½”/500

Ti/1”/750 Ti/1½”/750

Ti/1”/1000 Ti/1½”/1000

Ti/1”/1500 Ti/1½”/1500

Ti/1”/2000 Ti/1½”/2000

2” 2 ½”

Ti/2”/250 Ti/2½”/250

Ti/2”/500 Ti/2½”/500

Ti/2”/750 Ti2½”/750

Ti/2”/1000 Ti/2½”/1000

Ti/2”/1500 Ti/2½”/1500

Ti/2”/2000 Ti/2½”/2000

a

a

a

a

a

a

Other Titanium Products Available: Wire/Rod type Platinized Titanium Anode/Electrode - from 1mm sizes Mesh type Platinized Titanium Anode/Electrode - from 25mm x 25mm square Sheet/Plate Platinized Titanium Anode/Ectrocde - from 25mm x 25mm square Please request further information on these from TEA Transmissions.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

277


Linear Slide Systems - overview Precision Round Shaft

Page

Steel - hardened, ground & chromium plated Stainless steel - hardened & ground Metric/Inch Bearing Blocks & Shaft Support

280-285

Ball Screws & Nuts Thread sizes: 14 x 4 to 80 x 10 Single or Double Nuts - with or without flange High lead type Miniature type Low noise type Internal or external ball types Plus support units for Ball Screw

286-303

Hiwin HG & EG Series Linear Guideways

304-314

Rail widths from 15 to 65mm Normal to ultra high precision Blocks with or without flange

DualVee Motion Technology

315-322

Single edge track - 4 sizes - to mtr lengths 6 sizes of guidewheel Special washdown guidewheel in 2 sizes

UtiliTrak速 Linear Guides Steel, aluminium or stainless steel to 3.6 mtrs

323

MinVee速 Miniature linear guideway system Using DualVee size 0 wheels

324

LoPro Driven Systems Belt actuated system Chain actuated system Lead Screw actuated system Ball screw actuated system

325-328

LoPro Un-driven System Non actuated system - supplied ready to install 4 sizes available

329

278


Linear Slide Systems - overview HepcoMotion® GV3 Linear Guidance and Transmission System High accuracy and fine finish of components - allows constant driving force without vibration Friction free motion allows smaller - lower cost motors to be used Optimised bearing and slide interface design - very high speeds with low wear Low stick friction and low inertia of bearing rotation - fast acceleration for shortest stroke High degree of slide parallelism and minimum bearing clearance - virtually zero play Important dimensions accurately controlled Specially designed bearing and slide geometry - quiet system All steel slideway & Rugged construction Compliant bearing design for tolerance of misalignment Reliable performance confirmed by testing Wide choice of slides, carriages, bearings, gearboxes & motors Single & double edge spacer slides Single & double edge flat slides Standard carriages Belt driven carriages Rack driven carriages Flat Track Narrow Rollers Wide Rollers Slimline Rollers

Page

330-360

HepcoMotion® PRT Ring Slide & Track System

361-380

HepcoMotion® Heavy Duty Slide System

381-385

HepcoMotion® SL2 Stainless Steel Slide System

386-394

HepcoMotion® PDU2 Aluminium Profile Belt Driven System

395

HepcoMotion® DLS Driven Linear System with AC geared motors & worm gearboxes

396

HepcoMotion® HPS Powerslide-2

397

HepcoMotion® PSD80 Screw Driven Linear Unit

398

HepcoMotion® PSD120 Profile Screw Driven Linear Unit

399

HepcoMotion® SBD Sealed Belt Driven unit standard and clean room configurations

400

Linear Slide System Type AD with 120 degree grooved guide wheels

401-403

Mechanical Linear Guides Type AK

404-405

279


Precision Round Shaft

Ra = Average roughness value It identifies a mean arithmetic value of all distances of the roughness diagram points, referred to a mean line and a given length. Tp = Supporting surface The ratio between the actual contact area of the surface examined and a perfectly smooth surface, and the ideal contact area that can be reached if the two surfaces were perfectly smooth.

Series W - Hardened & Ground Material: CK60 (1.1221) Surface Hardness: 62±2 HRc Tensile Strength: 550-750 N/mm2 Shaft Diam.*

Weight per mtr.

Standard Hardening Standard Length** Depth Tolerance

d Part No.

mm

kg.

mm

Rht (max) DIN6773

ISO h6

mm

µm

Special Tolerances

Roundness Parallelism Straightness (circular) (cylindric)

ISO j6

ISO g6

T1

T2

T3

µm

µm

µm

µm

µm

W 6

6

0.22

3000

0.8

0 -8

+6 -2

-4 -12

4

6

300

W 8

8

0.39

3000

1.0

0 -9

+7 -2

-5 -14

4

6

300

W10

10

0.61

3000

1.0

0 -9

+7 -2

-5 -14

4

6

300

W12

12

0.89

3000

1.3

0 -11

+8 -3

-6 -17

5

8

200

W15

15

1.37

3000

1.3

0 -11

+8 -3

-6 -17

5

8

200

W16

16

1.57

3000

1.6

0 -11

+8 -3

-6 -17

5

8

200

W20

20

2.45

3000

1.6

0 -13

+9 -4

-7 -20

6

9

100

W25

25

3.83

3000

1.8

0 -13

+9 -4

-7 -20

6

9

100

W30

30

5.51

3000

2.0

0 -13

+9 -4

-7 -20

6

9

100

W40

40

9.80

3000

2.5

0 -16

+11 -5

-9 -25

7

11

100

W50

50

15.3

3000

3.0

0 -16

+11 -5

-9 -25

7

11

100

* Other sizes available on request **

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

280


Precision Round Shaft Series WV - Hardened, Ground and Chromium Plated Material: CK60(1.1221) CF53(1.1213) Surface Hardness: 800-1100 HV Chrome Hardening Depth Standard Special Roundness Parallelism Straightness Rht (max) Tolerance Tolerance (circular) (cylindric) DIN6773 ISO h7 ISO h6 T1 T2 T3

Shaft Diam.* d

Weight per mtr.

Standard Length**

Part No.

mm

kg.

mm

mm

µm

µm

µm

µm

µm

WV12 WV16 WV20 WV25 WV30

12 16 20 25 30

0.89 1.58 2.47 3.85 5.55

3000 3000 3000 3000 3000

1.3 1.6 1.6 1.8 2.0

0 -18 0 -18 0 -21 0 -21 0 -21

0 -11 0 -11 0 -13 0 -13 0 -13

8 8 9 9 9

12 12 12 12 12

200 200 100 100 100

Series WRB - Hardened and Ground Stainless Steel Material: X46Cr13 (1.4034) Tensile Strength: 650-800N/mm2 Surface hardness: 55±2 HRC Hardening Standard Depth Standard Roundness Parallelism Straightness Length** DIN50190 Tolerance (circular) (cylindric) DIN6773 ISO h6 T1 T2 T3

Diam.* d

Weight per mtr.

Part No.

mm

kg.

mm

mm

µm

µm

µm

µm

WRB 8 WRB 10 WRB 12 WRB 16 WRB 20 WRB 25 WRB 30

8 10 12 16 20 25 30

0.40 0.62 0.89 1.58 2.47 3.85 5.55

3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000

0.9 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.4

0 -9 0 -9 0 -11 0 -11 0 -13 0 -13 0 -13

4 4 5 5 6 6 6

6 6 8 8 9 9 9

300 300 200 200 100 100 100

Series WZ - Hardened and Ground Inch dimensions Material: CK60(1.1221) CF53(1.1213) Surface Hardness: 62±2 HRC Shaft Diam.*

Part No. WZ 9 WZ12 WZ15 WZ19 WZ25 WZ31 WZ50

mm

inch

9.525 3/8” 12.700 1/2” 15.875 5/8” 19.050 3/4” 25.400 1” 31.750 1 1/4" 50.800 2”

Hardening Depth Tolerance Standard Roundness Parallelism Straightness Rht (max) Tolerance (circular) (cylindric) DIN6773 Class ISO h6 T1 T2 T3

Weight Per mtr.

Standard Length**

kg.

mm

mm

0.56 0.99 1.55 2.24 3.97 6.22 15.91

3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000

1.0 1.3 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0 3.0

"L" -13 -25 -13 -25 -13 -25 -13 -25 -13 -25 -13 -25 -15 -33

* Other sizes available on request **

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

281

µm

µm

µm

µm

0 -9 0 -12 0 -12 0 -13 0 -13 0 -16 0 -19

4 5 5 6 6 7 7

6 8 8 9 9 11 11

300 200 200 200 100 100 100


Bearing Block Type SC - Aluminium alloy housing - Standard ball bushing - Sealed

W Datum plane

B1

4-S 1x

l

L

B

C

A

T h H1 H THK marking side

4-S2 W1

Dimensions in mm Shaft size Height Width Length

Mounting hole position

Basic load rating

±0.02 ±0.02

TA P

Part No. ø

H

W

L

SC 12UU

12

29

42

36

SC 16UU

16

38.5

50

SC 20UU

20

42

SC 25UU

25

SC 30UU

B

B1

C

30.5

5.75

26

44

36

7

54

50

40

51.5

76

67

30

59.5

78

SC 40UU

40

78

SC 50UU

50

102

Unit Weight

c N

co N

g

8

412

598

102

46

9

775

1180

189

36

52

11

863

1370

237

38

41

68

12

980

1570

555

30

39

49

72

15

1570

2750

685

M8

40

51

62

96

20

2160

4020

1600

M8

52

61

80

116

25

3820

7940

3350

S2

h

A

H1

W1

M5x12

M4

15

21

25

39

34

M5x12

M4

19

25

35

7

40

M6x12

M5

21

27

54

11

50

M8x18

M6

26

72

58

10

58

M8x18

M6

102

90

80

11

60

M10x25

122

110

100

11

80

M10x25

T

1N=0.102kgf

Bearing Block Type SC-V - Compact aluminium housing - 2 mounting holes - Standard ball bushing - Sealed

W Datum plane

B1

L M

B A

M/2

2–S 1x l M/2

T h H1 H

2–S 2

W1

Dimensions in mm

Part No.

Shaft size Height Width Length

Mounting hole position

Basic load rating

±0.02 ±0.02

TA P

Unit Weight

S2

h

A

H1

W1

T

c N

co N

g

M5x10

M4

15

22

26

41

8

411

598

74

23.5

M5x12

M4

19

25

35

46

9

774

1176

132

7

27.4

M6x12

M5

21

27

36

52

11

862

1372

170

54

11

37.4

M8x10

M6

26

38

41

68

12

990

1568

405

64

58

10

40.9

M8x18

M6

30

39

49

72

15

1568

2794

495

102

80

80

11

56.4 M10x25

M8

40

51

62

96

20

2156

4019

1220

122

100

100

11

68.9 M10x25

M8

52

61

80

116

25

3823

7941

2300

ø

H

W

L

B

B1

M

SC 12VUU

12

30

44

30

33

5.5

20.5

SC 16VUU

16

38.5

50

37

36

7

SC 20VUU

20

42

54

42

40

SC 25VUU

25

51.5

76

59

SC 30VUU

30

59.5

78

SC 40VUU

40

78

SC 50VUU

50

102

1N=0.102kgf

282


Bearing Block Type SC-TK - Aluminium alloy housing - Super ball bushing - Self-aligning capability - Sealed

Also available with: Stainless steel or ceramic bearings or Tandem version (2 bearings per housing) W

Datum plane

B1

4-S1x

l L

B

C

A

T h H1 H

4-S2 W1

Dimensions in mm Shaft size Height Width Length

Mounting hole position

TA P S1x

Basic Unit load rating Weight

±0.02 ±0.02

Part No. ø

H

W

L

B

B1

C

SC 12TKUU

12

30

44

39

33

5.5

26

SC 16TKUU

16

38.5

50

44

36

7

SC 20TKUU

20

42

54

53

40

SC 25TKUU

25

51.5

76

67

SC 30TKUU

30

59.5

78

SC 40TKUU

40

78

SC 50TKUU

50

102

l

c N

co N

g

8

1020

1290

100

46

9

1250

1550

160

52

11

2090

2630

230

41

68

12

3780

4720

460

39

49

72

15

5470

6810

630

40

51

62

96

20

6590

8230 1270

52

61

80

116

25

8600

7100 2450

S2

h

A

H1

W1

M 5x10

M4

15

22

26

41

34

M 5x12

M4

19

25

35

7

40

M 6x12

M5

21

27

36

54

11

50

M 8x18

M6

26

38

76

58

10

58

M 8x18

M6

30

102

90

80

11

60

M10x25

M8

122

110

100

11

80

M10x25

M8

T

1N=0.102kgf

Bearing Block Set Type SC-TKOPN - Aluminium alloy housing - Super ball bushing - Self-aligning capability - Sealed

Also available with: Stainless steel or ceramic bearings or Tandem version (2 bearings per housing)

W Datum plane

B1

4-S 1x

l

L

B

C

A

T h H1 H

h1 4-S 2

60° W1

Dimensions in mm

Part No.

Shaft size Height Width Length

Mounting hole position

Basic Unit load rating Weight

±0.02 ±0.05

TA P

c N

co N

8

816

1032

90

9

1000

1240

140

52

11

1672

2104

200

41

68

12

3024

3776

420

49

72

15

4376

4126

580

51

62

96

20

5232

6554

1210

61

80

116

25

8940

7380

2380

S1x l

S2

h

A

H1

W1

7

M5x10

M4

15

22

26

41

9

M5x12

M4

19

25

35

46

40

9

M6x12

M5

21

27

36

11

50

12

M6x18

M6

26

38

10

58

14

M8x18

M6

30

39

80

11

60

20

M10x25

M8

40

100

11

80

23

M10x25

M8

52

ø

H

W

L

B

B1

C

h1

SC 12TKUUOPN

12

28

44

39

33

5.5

26

SC 16TKUUOPN

16

35

50

44

36

7

34

SC 20TKUUOPN

20

39

54

53

40

7

SC 25TKUUOPN

25

47

76

67

54

SC 30TKUUOPN

30

55

78

76

58

SC 40TKUUOPN

40

74

102

90

SC 50TKUUOPN

50

98

122

110

T

g

1N=0.102kgf

283


Standard Ball Bushings

Also available: Stainless steel version L

- All steel outer - Resin retainer - Sealed both ends - Standard ball bushing dimensions - Available as open or closed series

B W

W

dr D

D1

Dimensions in mm dr ø

D

L

KB 5GUU

5

4

12

22

KB 8GUU

8

4

16

25

KB 12GUU

12

4

22

32

KB 16GUU

16

4

26

36

KB 20GUU

20

5

32

45

KB 25GUU

25

6

40

58

KB 30GUU

30

6

47

68

KB 40GUU

40

6

62

80

KB 60GUU

60

6

90

125

*KB 80UU

80

6

120

165

Part No.

Basic Unit load rating Weight

Tolerance

No. of ball circuits

tol

B

W

D1

c N

co N

g

1.1

11.5

206

265

11

1.1

15.2

265

402

22

1.3

21

510

784

45

1.3

24.9

578

892

60

1.6

30.3

862

1370

102

1.85

37.5

980

1570

235

1.85

44.5

1570

2740

360

2.15

59

2160

4020

770

3.15

86.5

4700

9800 2220

4.15

116

7350 16000 5140

tol

0 -0.12 14.5 0 16.5 -0.2 0 22.9 -0.2 0 24.9 -0.2 0 31.5 -0.2 0 44.1 -0.2 0 52.1 -0.3 0 60.6 -0.3 0 101.7 -0.4 0 -0.4 133.7

0 -0.2 0 -0.2 0 -0.2 0 -0.2 0 -0.2 0 -0.3 0 -0.3 0 -0.3 0 -0.4 0 -0.4

1N=0.102kgf

*KB80UU has a steel retainer

Super Ball Bushings - Higher load capacities - Longer travel life - Self-aligning capabilities

Also available: Stainless steel version

- Integral floating seals - Standard ball bushing dimensions - Available as open or closed series Recommended Tolerance for Shaft O.D. and Housing Bore.

Housing bore

Shaft diameter dr D D1

Part No.

dr mm

Tol.(h6) µm

D mm

Tol.(h7) µm

TK12

12

0

22

+21

TK16

16

-11

26

0

TK20

20

0

32

+25

TK25

25

-13

40

0

TK30

30

TK40

40

W

Self-aligning 1° in all directions

W B L L

47 0/-16

+30/0

62

Dimensions in mm dr ø

D

L

TK 12UU

12

5

22

32 ±0.2

TK 16UU

16

5

26

36 ±0.2

TK 20UU

20

6

32

45 ±0.2

TK 25UU

25

6

40

58 ±0.2

TK 30UU

30

6

47

68 ±0.2

TK 40UU

40

6

62

80 ±0.2

Part No.

Basic Unit load rating Weight

Tolerance

No. of ball circuits

284

tol

B

tol

0 22.9 -0.2 0 24.9 -0.2 0 31.5 -0.2 0 44.1 -0.2 0 52.1 -0.2 0 60.6 -0.2

W

D1

c N

co N

g

1.3

21

1020

1290

21

1.3

24.9

1250

1550

43

1.6

30.3

2090

2630

58

1.85

37.5

3780

4720

123

1.85

44.5

5470

6810

216

2.15

59

6590

8230

333


Shaft Support Blocks Type SK

Dimensions in mm Shaft size Part No. d

H

W

L

B

S

Unit

Mounting ±0.02 ±0.05 bolt h A

b

I

g

Tightening Weight bolt g

SK10

10

32.8

42

14

32

5.5

M5

20

21

5

18

6

M4

24

SK12

12

37.5

42

14

32

5.5

M5

23

21

5

20

6

M4

30

SK16

16

44

48

16

38

5.5

M5

27

24

5

25

8

M4

40

SK20

20

51

60

20

45

6.6

M6

31

30

7.5

30

10

M5

70

SK25

25

60

70

24

56

6.6

M6

35

35

7

38

12

M6

130

SK30

30

70

84

28

64

9

M8

42

42

10

44

12

M6

180

SK40

40

96

114

36

90

11

M10

60

57

12

60

15

M8

420

SK50

50

120

126

40

100

14

M12

70

63

13

74

18

M12

750

Flanged Shaft Support Blocks W

Type SHF - Aluminium Alloy

B

Dimensions in mm Unit S Adjusting Weight (bolt size) bolt size g

Shaft diameter

W

L

T

F

G

B

SHF10

10

43

10

5

24

20

32

5.5 (M5)

M4

13

SHF12

12

47

13

7

28

25

36

5.5 (M5)

M4

20

SHF13

13

47

13

7

28

25

36

5.5 (M5)

M4

20

SHF16

16

50

16

8

31

28

40

5.5 (M5)

M4

27

SHF20

20

60

20

8

37

34

48

7 (M6)

M5

40

SHF25

25

70

25

10

42

40

56

7 (M6)

M5

60

SHF30

30

80

30

12

50

46

64

9 (M8)

M6

110

SHF35*

35

92

35

14

58

50

72

12 (M10)

M8

380

SHF40*

40

102

40

16

67

56

80

12 (M10)

M10

510

SHF50*

50

122

50

19

83

70

96

14 (M12)

M12

890

SHF60* * Cast iron

60

140

60

23

95

82

112

14 (M12)

M12

1500

Part No.

2-S

L T

G

F

NB mark

Shaft Support Rails - High rigidity - Low overall height - Light weight aluminium alloy Shaft support Rails are designed to support the shafts on which ball bushings run to prevent them from bending under load. Shaft Support Rails are delivered in ready sections of high dimensional accuracy and are designed to give high rigidity. Their low overall height allows the construction of extra compact linear motion assemblies.

T/2

T

T/2 Length

Dimensions in mm Part No.

d M

Hole spacing

±0.01 d

H

A

V

M

O1

U1

N

E

t

O2

U2

T1

T2

1050-512-00

12

22

40

5

5.8

M 4x20

4

8

29

4.5 M 4x12

4

75

120

1050-516-00

16

26

45

5

7

M 5x20

5

9

33

7.5 M 5x16

5

100

150

1050-520-00

20

32

52

6

8.3

M 6x25

6

11

37

8

M 6x16

6

100

150

1050-525-00

25

36

57

6

10.8

M 8x30

8

15

42

7.5 M 6x16

6

120

200

1050-530-00

30

42

69

7

11

M10x35

10

17

51

9.5 M 8x25

8

150

200

1050-540-00

40

50

73

8

15

M10x40

10

19

55

9.5 M 8x25

8

200

300

1050-550-00

50

60

84

9

19

M12x45

12

21

63

11.5 M10x30

10

200

300

285

145o N o H 50o for 12-40

O2 U2

46 for 50

t

V O1

U1 E A


Ball Screws & Nuts

A Ball Screw is a threaded shaft that provides a spiral raceway for the ball bearings assembled in a nut. This combination provides a precision screw to enable controlled rotational motion to be converted into linear motion. Ball Screws are able to withstand high thrust loads with minimal internal friction. They are made to close tolerances and are therefore suitable for use in applications where high precision is necessary. While reducing friction, Ball Screws can operate with some preload, effectively eliminating backlash between input rotation and output linear motion. This feature is essential when they are used in computer-controlled motion-control systems e.g. CNC machines tools. The four preload classes available in our standard nuts are P0 With Backlash, P1 No Backlash, P2 Light Preload and P3 Heavy Preload. These low friction Ball Screws yield high mechanical efficiency compared to other alternatives. A typical Ball Screw may be 90% efficient, versus 50% efficiency for a trapezoidal thread of equal size. This low internal friction also means Ball Screws can be back driven (depending upon their lead angle) and therefore are usually unsuitable for hand operated machine tools, in which case trapezoidal thread spindle is the better choice. Ball Screws are fabricated as either ground or rolled screw shafts. Although Ground Ball Screw is designed for the highest precision requirements, Rolled Ball Screw, which is less precise and considerably less expensive, is still a mechanically efficient product to be considered. Rolled Ball Screw can have positional precision as low as 0.008mm over 300mm of travel for the highest precision grade (C3) and 0.05mm for the same length of travel for the lowest grade available (C7). Whether using Ground or Rolled Ball Screw great care is needed to avoid contamination by dirt and other abrasive particles so as to maintain the inherent accuracy and ensure long life. This is easily and simply achieved by using rubber or leather bellows to completely or partially enclose the working surfaces.

286


Ball Screw & Nut Part Number Description

2R25-05A2-2-FSED-2000-2500- C 7 - R-P2 Axial clearance and preload code: PO : with backlash, P1 : No-backlash, P2 : light preload, P3 : heavy preload a

R: Rolled ball screw G: Ground ball screw a

Accuracy grade code: C3, C5, C7 (more details see pg. 295) a

Overall length of shaft (mm) a

Thread length (mm) a

Flange cut type: N : Full flange O S : Flange cut on one side (O) O D : Flange cut two sides (O) Circuit Type: W: External type U : Internal type DIN69051 I : Internal circulation E : High lead type K : Miniature type C : Low noise type Y : Cylindrical type (with keyway) Nut type: S : Single nut D : Double nut a

a

Flange: F : with flange R : without flange X : special flange a

Number of nuts on one screw shaft a

Quantity of circulation tubes a

Effective ball circuits: T A B C

: 1 circuit : 1.8 circuits : 2.5 circuits : 3.5 circuits

a

Lead (mm) a

Screw nominal O.D. a

Thread direction: R : right, L : left a

Number of threads

287


Type FSU - flanged single nut, internal circuit type DIN69051

Type FSI -

flanged single nut, internal circulation

.

All specifications are subject to change without notice

288


Type FDU -

Type FDI -

flanged double nut, internal circuit type DIN69051

flanged double nut, internal circulation

.

All specifications are subject to change without notice

289


Type FSW -

flanged single nut, external circuit type

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

290


Type FDW -

flanged double nut, external circuit type

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

291


Type FSC -

flanged single nut, low noise type

Left helix option

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

292


Type FSE -

flanged single nut, high lead type

Type RSW -

single nut, external circuit type

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

293


Type RSU -

single nut, internal circuit type DIN69051

Type FSK -

flanged single nut, miniature type

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

294


5

7

8

18

50

6

8

3

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

295


Selection of Nut

296


297


Support Units for Ball Screw

298


Recommended Shaft End Shape for Support Unit Types BK, FK and EK Fixed Side

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

299


Recommended Shaft End Shape for Support Unit Types FF, EF and BF (Floated side)

()

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

300


FK

Fixed side

FF

Floated side

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

301


BK

Fixed side

BF

Floated side

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

302


EK

Fixed side

EF

Floated side

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

303


Linear Guideways HG Series HG Series - Heavy Load Ball Type Linear Guideway HG series linear guideways are designed with load capacity and rigidity higher than other similar products with circular-arc groove and structure optimization. It features equal load ratings in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions, and self-aligning to absorb installation-error. Thus, HIWIN HG series linear guideways can achieve a long life with high speed, high accuracy and smooth linear motion.

Features of HG Series (1) Self-aligning capability By design, the circular-arc groove has contact points at 45 degrees. HG series can absorb most installation errors due to surface irregularities and provide smooth linear motion through the elastic deformation of rolling elements and the shift of contact points. Self-aligning capability, high accuracy and smooth operation can be obtained with an easy installation.

(2) Interchangeability Because of precision dimensional control, the dimensional tolerance of HG series can be kept in a reasonable range, which means that any blocks and any rails in a specific series can be used together while maintaining dimensional tolerance. And a retainer is added to prevent the balls from falling out when the blocks are removed from the rail.

(3) High rigidity in all four directions Because of the four-row design, the HG series linear guideway has equal load ratings in the radial, reverse radial and lateral directions. Furthermore, the circular-arc groove provides a wide-contact width between the balls and the groove raceway allowing large permissible loads and high rigidity.

Construction of HG Series Block

Bolt cap

Rail

End cap

End seal ( Double s eals and s craper )

Grease nipple Bottom seal Ball Retainer

Rolling circulation system: Block, Rail, End Cap and Retainer Lubrication system: Grease Nipple and Piping Joint Dust protection system: End seal, Bottom Seal, Bolt Cap, Double Seals and Scraper

Part Numbers of HG Series HG series guideways can be classified into non-interchangeable and interchangeable types. The sizes are identical. The only difference between the two types is that the interchangeable type of blocks and rails can be freely exchanged, and their accuracy can reach up to P class. The model number of HG series contains the size, type, accuracy class, preload class, etc..

304


Non-interchangeable type

Part Number of HG Block

HG W 25 C

A

E

2

R 1600 E ZA P

II + DD/E2 Dust Protection 2

Series HG

No. of Rails per Matched Set 1

Block Type W : Flange Type H : Square Type

Precision Code: C, H, P, SP, UP

Model size 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65

Preload Code: Z0, ZA, ZB

E2: Self-Lubricant SE: Metallic End Cap

E: Special Rail None: Standard Rail

Load Type C : Heavy Load H : Super Heavy Load

Rail Length (mm)

Block Mounting A : Mounting from Top B : Bottom C : Top or Bottom

Rail Mounting Type R : Mounting from Top T : Bottom Note: 1. The r oman numerals expr es s a matched s et of r ails 2. No s ymbol indicates s tandar d pr otection (end s eal and bottom s eal)

No. of Blocks per Rail

E: Special Block None: Standard Block

ZZ : End s eal, bottom s eal and s cr aper KK: Double s eals , bottom s eal and scraper DD: Double s eals and bottom s eal

Interchangeable type

Part Number of HG Block

HG W 35 C

A

E ZA P

+ ZZ/E2 E2: Self-Lubricant SE: Metallic End Cap

HG Series

Dust Protection

Block Type W : Flange Type H : Square Type

2

Precision Code : C, H, P Preload Code : Z0, ZA

Model size 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65 Load Type C : Heavy Load H : Super Heavy Load

E: Special Block None: Standard Block Block Mounting Type A : Mounting from Top B : Bottom, C : Top or Bottom

Part Number of HG Rail

HG R 25 R

1200 E

HG Series

P Precision Code : C, H, P

Interchangeable Rail

E: Special Rail, None: Standard Rail Model size Rail Length (mm) 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65 Rail Mounting Type R : Mounting from Top T : Bottom

305


Linear Guideways HG Series Preload HG Series - Heavy Load Ball Type Linear Guideway

(1) Definition

Elastic displacement

HG series linear guideways are designed with load capacity and rigidity higher than other similar products with A preload can be applied to each guideway. Oversized balls Z0 circular-arc groove and structure optimization. It features equal load ratings in the radial, reverse radial Elasticand displacement are used. Generally, a linear motion guidway has a negative without preload lateral directions, and self-aligning to absorb installation-error. Thus, HIWIN HG series linear guideways can clearance between groove and balls in order to improve achieve a long life with high speed, high accuracy and smooth linear motion. stiffness and maintain high precision. ZB Elastic displacement The figure shows the load is multiplied by the preload, the with heavy preload rigidity is doubled and the deflection is reduced by one half. Features of HG Series The preload not larger than ZA would be recommended for Self-aligning capability the model(1)size under HG20 to avoid an over preload Preload amount By design, the circular-arc groove has contact points at 45 degrees. HG series can absorb most installation errors affecting the guidewayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s life. due to surface irregularities and provide smooth linear motion through the elastic deformation of rolling elements and the shift of contact points. Self-aligning capability, high accuracy and smooth operation can be obtained with an easy installation.

(2) Preload classes

(2) Interchangeability HIWIN offers three classes of standard preload for various applications and conditions. Because of precision dimensional control, the dimensional tolerance of HG series can be kept in a reasonable range, which means that any blocks and any rails in a specific series can be used together while maintaining dimensional Table 2.15 Preloadtolerance. ClassesAnd a retainer is added to prevent the balls from falling out when the blocks are removed from the rail. Class Code Preload Condition Examples of Application

(3) High rigidity in all four directions

Tr ans por tation devices , auto-packing machines , X -Y L ight tain load ection,low impact, Cerdesign, Because of 0.02C the four-row thedirHG series linear guideway has equal load ratings in the radial,machines reverse radial Z0 0~ axis for gener al indus tr ial machines , welding , pr ecis ion r equir ed preload and lateral directions. low Furthermore, the circular-arc groove provides a wide-contact width between the balls and welder s

the groove raceway allowing large permissible loads and high rigidity. Medium preload Heavy preload

ZA

0.05~ 0.07C

High pr ecis ion r equir ed

Construction of HG Series ZB

0.10C~ 0.12C

High r igidit y r equir ed, with vibr ation and impact

Machining center s , Z axis for gener al indus tr ial, machines , EDM, NC lathes , pr ecis ion X-Y tables , meas ur ing equipment Machining inding Blockcenter s , grBolt capmachines , NC lathes , hor izontal and ver tical milling machines , Z axis of machine tools , Heavy cutting machines Rail

End cap Note : 1. The C inEnd preload dynamic load rating. seal column means basic 2. preload Classes Interchangeable Guideway: Z0, ZA. ( Double s ealsof and s craper ) preload Classes of Non-Interchangeable Guideway: Z0, ZA, ZB

Grease nipple Bottom seal Ball Retainer

Rolling circulation system: Block, Rail, End Cap and Retainer Lubrication system: Grease Nipple and Piping Joint Dust protection system: End seal, Bottom Seal, Bolt Cap, Double Seals and Scraper

Part Numbers of HG Series HG series guideways can be classified into non-interchangeable and interchangeable types. The sizes are identical. The only difference between the two types is that the interchangeable type of blocks and rails can be freely exchanged, and their accuracy can reach up to P class. The model number of HG series contains the size, type, accuracy class, preload class, etc..

306


Non-interchangeable Accuracy Classestype

PartofNumber HG Block The accuracy HG series canof be classified into normal (C), high (H), precision (P), super precision (SP), ultra precision (UP), five classes. Please choose the class by referring the accuracy of applied equipment.

HG W 25 C

A

E

2

R 1600 E ZA P

II + DD/E2 Dust Protection 2

Series HG

No. of Rails per Matched Set 1

Block Type W : Flange Type H : Square Type

Precision Code: C, H, P, SP, UP

Model size 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65

(1) Accuracy

Preload Code: Z0, ZA, ZB E: Special Rail None: Standard Rail

Load Type C : Heavy Load : Super Heavy Load of Hnon-interchangeable

Rail Length (mm) Rail Mounting Type R : Mounting from Top T : Bottom

Block Mounting Table 2.6 Accuracy Standards A : Mounting from Top B : Bottom C : Top or Bottom

Item

HG - 15, 20

No. of Blocks per Rail

Normal

Accuracy Classes

E: Special Block (C) None: Standard Block

Dimens ional toler ance of height H

Interchangeable type

Dimens ional toler ance of w idth N

Part Number of HG Block

Var iation of height H Var iation of w idth N

HG W 35 C

A

Unit: mm

Note: 1. The r oman numerals expr es s a matched s et of r ails Super Ultra 2. No s ymbol indicates s tandar d pr otection High Precision (end s eal and bottom s eal) Precision Precision (H)

± 0.1

± 0.03

± 0.1

± 0.03

0.02

0.01

ZZ(P) : End s eal, bottom(SP) s eal and s cr aper(UP) KK: Double s eals , bottom s eal and scraper DD: 0 Double s eals and 0 bottom s eal 0

- 0.03 0 - 0.03 0.006

E ZA 0.01 P + ZZ/E2 0.02 0.006

R unning parallelis m of block s ur face C to s ur face A

- 0.008 0 - 0.008 0.003

0.004

0.003

E2: Self-Lubricant

R unning parallelis m of block s ur face D to s ur face B

see Table SE:2.14 Metallic End Cap Dust Protection

Block Type

Table 2.7 Accuracy W Standards : Flange Type

2

Unit: mm

Precision Code : C, H, P

H : Square Type

HG - 25, 30 35

Preload Code : Z0, ZA

Accuracy Classes

- 0.015 0 - 0.015 0.004

see Table 2.14

HG Series

Item

E2: Self-Lubricant SE: Metallic End Cap

Model size 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 45, 55, 65

Normal

High

E: Special Block None: (C ) Standard Block (H)

Precision

Super Precision

Ultra Precision

(P)

(SP)

(UP)

Variation of height H

0 ± Block 0.1 Mounting ± Type 0.04 - 0.04 A : Mounting from Top : Bottom, C± : Top or Bottom 0 ± B0.1 0.04 - 0.04 0.02 0.015 0.007

0 - 0.02 0 - 0.02 0.005

0 - 0.01 0 - 0.01 0.003

Variation of width N

0.03

0.005

0.003

Dimensional toler ance of height H

Load Type C : Heavy Load Dimensional toler ance of width NH : Super Heavy Load

Part Number of HG Rail

Running parallelism of block sur face C to sur face A

HG R 25 R Running parallelism of block sur face D to sur face B

0.015

1200 E

0.007

P

s ee Table 2.14 s ee Table 2.14

HG Series

Additional data pages showing additional sizes, the interchangeable block type and Precision Coderunning : C, H, P parallelism are available. Please contact T.E.A. or go to www.tea.net.au Interchangeable Rail E: Special Rail, None: Standard Rail

Model size 45, 55, 65

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Rail Length (mm) Rail Mounting Type R : Mounting from Top T : Bottom

307


Linear Guideways HG Series Types (1) Block types HIWIN offers two types of linear guideway which are flange and square types. Because of the low assembly height and larger mounting surface, the flange type is suitable for heavy moment load application.

Table 2.4 Block Types

Square

Type

Model

Shape

(mm)

Rail Length (mm)

28

100

Height

Main Application

Machine Centers

HGH-CA

¯ ¯ NC L athes

HGH-HA

90

4000

Grinding Machines Pr ecis ion Machining Machines Heavy Cutting Machines

24 HGW-CA

Automation Devices

¯ ¯ Tr ans por tation Equipment Meas ur ing Equipment 90 4000 Devices R equir ing High P os itional Accur acy

HGW-HA

24

Flange

100

100

HGW-CB ¯ ¯ HGW-HB 90

4000

24

100

HGW-CC ¯ ¯ HGW-HC 90

4000

(2) Rail types Besides the standard top mounting type, bottom mounting type of rails are also available.

Table 2.5 Rail Types Mounting from Top - dimensions same tables as Blocks

Mounting from Bottom - see page 299 for dimensions

308


Dust Proof Accessories (1) Codes of accessories If the following accessories are needed, please add the code followed by the model number.

t2

Bottom seal

End seal Scraper

End seal No symbol: Standard Protection (End seal + Bottom seal)

Spacer

ZZ (End seal + Bottom seal + Scraper)

End seal

End seal

Spacer

Spacer t1

Scraper KK (Double seals + Bottom seal + Scraper)

DD (Double seals + Bottom seal)

(2) End seal and bottom seal To prevent life reduction caused by iron chips or dust entering the block.

(3) Double seals Enhances the wiping effect, foreign matter can be completely wiped off.

Table 2.18 Dimensions of end seal Size

Thic kness (t1) (mm)

Size

Thic kness (t1) (mm)

HG15 E S

3

HG 35 ES

3.2

HG20 E S

3

HG 45 ES

4.5

HG25 E S

3

HG 55 ES

5

HG30 E S

3.2

HG 65 ES

5

(4) Scraper The scraper removes high-temperature iron chips and larger foreign objects.

Table 2.19 Dimensions of scraper Size

Thic kness (t2) (mm)

Size

Thic kness (t2) (mm)

HG15 SC

1.5

HG 35 SC

1.5

HG20 SC

1.5

HG 45 SC

1.5

HG25 SC

1.5

HG 55 SC

1.7

HG30 SC

1.5

HG 65 SC

1.7

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

309


Linear Guideways HG Series Dimensions for HIWIN HG Series (1) HGH-CA / HGH-HA

l

Model No.

Dimensions of Assembly (mm)

Basic Basic Mounting Dynamic Static Dimensions of Rail (mm) Bolt for Load Load Rail Rating Rating

Dimensions of Block (mm)

Static Rated Moment MR

H HGH 15CA

W

B

B1

28 4.3 9.5

34

26

4

30 4.6 12

44

32

6

H1

N

HGH 20CA

C

L1

L

G

Mxl

T

H2

H3 WR HR D

h

d

P

E

(mm)

26 39.4 61.4

5.3

M4x5

6

8.5 9.5 15 15 7.5 5.3 4.5 60 20

M4x16

12

M5x6

8

36 50.5 77.5

HGH 20HA

6

7

20 17.5 9.5 8.5

6

60 20

35 58 40 5.5 12.5 48

84

35 6.5

HGH 25HA

12

M6x8

8

10

13

23 22 11

9

7

60 20

40 70 45

6

16

60

HGH 30HA HGH 35CA 55 7.5

18

70

97.4

40 10

12 60 93

120.4

50 80

112.4

50 10

HGH 35HA

12

M8x10

8.5 9.5 13.8 28 26 14 12

M8x12 10.2 16 19.6 34 29 14 12

9

9

80 20

80 20

60 97 70 9.5 20.5 86

HGH 45HA

75 117.7 166.7 80

13 23.5 100 75 12.5

HGH 55HA

12.9 M12x18 17.5 22

29

53 44 23 20 16 120 30

70 144.2 200.2 90

15 31.5 126 76 25

HGH 65HA

0.17

0.15

0.15

0.18

17.75

37.84

0.38

0.27

0.27

0.30

21.18

48.84

0.48

0.47

0.47

0.39

26.48

56.19

0.64

0.51

0.51

0.51

32.75

76.00

0.87

0.88

0.88

0.69

38.74

83.06

1.06

0.85

0.85

0.88

47.27

110.13

1.40

1.47

1.47

1.16

49.52

102.87

1.73

1.20

1.20

1.45

60.21

136.31

2.29

2.08

2.08

1.92

77.57

155.93

3.01

2.35

2.35

2.73

94.54

207.12

4.00

4.07

4.07

3.61

114.44

227.81

5.66

4.06

4.06

4.17

139.35

301.26

7.49

7.01

7.01

5.49

12.9 M16x20 25

15

15

63 53 26 22 18 150 35

163.63

324.71

10.02

6.44

6.44

7.00

120 203.6 259.6

208.36

457.15

14.15

11.12

11.12

9.82

Note : 1 kgf = 9.81 N

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

310

1.45

2.21

3.21

4.47

6.30

10.41

15.08

M14x45

95 155.8 204.8

HGH 65CA

25.31

12.9 M10x17 16 18.5 30.5 45 38 20 17 14 105 22.5 M12x35 80 128.8 171.2

HGH 55CA

11.38

M8x25

139.4

60 13

kg kg/m

M8x25

72 105.8 138.2

HGH 45CA

C0 (kN) kN- m kN- m kN- m

M6x20

50 78.6 104.6

HGH 30CA

MY Block Rail

M5x16

50 65.2 92.2

HGH 25CA

C(kN)

MP

Weight

21.18

M16x50


Linear Guideways HG Series Dimensions for HIWIN HG Series (2) HGW-CA / HGW-HA

Dimensions of Assembly (mm) Part No.

Dimensions of Block (mm)

Dimensions of R ail (mm)

Basic B asic Mounting Dynamic Static Bolt for Load L oad Rail Rating R ating

Static R ated Moment MR

H HGW15CA

N

W

B

24 4.3 16

47

38 4.5 30 39.4 61.4

H1

B1

C

L1

L

G

M

T

5.3 M5

12

T1 H2 H3 WR HR D

h

d

P

E

(mm)

6

8.9 4.5 5.5 15 15 7.5 5.3 4.5 60 20

M4x16

8

10

M5x16

50.5 77.5

HGW20CA 30 4.6 21.5 63

53

5

40

HGW20HA

M6

6

7

20 17.5 9.5 8.5

6

60 20

65.2 92.2

HGW25CA

58

84

36 5.5 23.5 70 57 6.5 45 HGW25HA

12

M8

8

14

6

9

23 22 11

9

7

60 20

70 42

6

31

90 72

9

HGW30HA HGW35CA 4 8 7.5

33 100 82

9

97.4

52

12 93

120.4

80

112.4 12

62

HGW35HA

M10 8.5 16 6.5 10.8 28 26 14 12

M10 10.1 18

9 12.6 34 29 14 12

9

9

80 20

80 20

97 60 9.5 37.5 120 100 10

HGW45HA

117.7 166.7 70

13 43.5 140 116 12

12.9 M14 17.5 26.5 12 19

95

53 44 23 20 16 120 30

HGW65CA

144.2 200.2 90

15 53.5 170 142 14 110

HGW65HA

25.31

0.17

0.15

0.15

0.17

17.75

37.84

0.38

0.27

0.27

0.40

21.18

48.84

0.48

0.47

0.47

0.52

26.48

56.19

0.64

0.51

0.51

0.59

32.75

76.00

0.87

0.88

0.88

0.80

38.74

83.06

1.06

0.85

0.85

1.09

47.27

110.13

1.40

1.47

1.47

1.44

49.52

102.87

1.73

1.20

1.20

1.56

60.21

136.31

2.29

2.08

2.08

2.06

77.57

155.93 3.01

2.35

2.35

2.79

94.54

207.12

4.00

4.07

4.07

3.69

114.44

227.81

5.66

4.06

4.06

4.52

139.35

301.26

7.49

7.01

7.01

5.96

12.9 M16 25 37.5 15

15

63 53 26 22 18 150 35

163.63

324.71

10.02

6.44

6.44

9.17

203.6 259.6

208.36

457.15

14.15

11.12

11.12 12.89

Note : 1 kgf = 9.81 N

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

311

kg/m 1.45

2.21

3.21

4.47

6.30

10.41

M14x45

155.8 204.8

HGW55HA

11.38

kg

12.9 M12 15.1 22 8.5 20.5 45 38 20 17 14 105 22.5 M12x35 128.8 171.2

HGW55CA

C0 (kN) kN- m kN- m kN- m

M8x25

139.4

80

C(kN)

M8x25

105.8 138.2

HGW45CA

MY Block Rail

M6x20

78.6 104.6

HGW30CA

MP

Weight

15.08

M16x50

21.18


Linear Guideways HG Series Dimensions for HIWIN HG Series (3) HGW-CB / HGW-HB

Dimensions of Assembly (mm) Part No.

B asic B asic Mounting Dynamic Static Dimensions of R ail (mm) Bolt for L oad L oad Rail R ating R ating

Dimensions of Block (mm)

Static R ated Moment MR

H

H1

N

W

B

B1

C

L1

L

G M T T1 T2 H2 H3 WR HR D

h

d

P

E

(mm)

5.3 4.5 6 8.9 6.5 4.5 5.5 15 15 7.5 5.3 4.5 60 20

M4x16

12

M5x16

C(kN)

Ă&#x2DC;

HGW15CB

24 4.3 16

47

38 4.5 30 39.4 61.4 50.5 77.5

HGW20CB 30 4.6 21.5 63

53

5

40

HGW20HB

6

8 10 9.5 6

7

20 17.5 9.5 8.5

6

60 20

65.2 92.2

HGW25CB

58

84

36 5.5 23.5 70 57 6.5 45 HGW25HB

12

7

8 14 10 6

9

23 22 11

9

7

60 20

70 42

6

31

90 72

9

HGW30HB HGW35CB 4 8 7.5

33 100 82

9

97.4

52

12 93

120.4

80

112.4 12

62

HGW35HB

9 8.5 16 10 6.5 10.8 28 26 14 12

9 10.1 18 13 9 12.6 34 29 14 12

9

9

80 20

80 20

97 60 9.5 37.5 120 100 10

HGW45HB

12.9 11 15.1 22 15 8.5 20.5 45 38 20 17 14 105 22.5

117.7 166.7 70

13 43.5 140 116 12

12.9 14 17.5 26.5 17 12 19

95

53 44 23 20 16 120 30

144.2 200.2

HGW65CB 90

12.9 16 25 37.5 23 15 15

15 53.5 170 142 14 110

HGW65HB

63 53 26 22 18 150 35

203.6 259.6

Note : 1 kgf = 9.81 N

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

312

25.31

0.17

0.15

0.15

0.17

17.75

37.84

0.38

0.27

0.27

0.40

21.18

48.84

0.48

0.47

0.47

0.52

26.48

56.19

0.64

0.51

0.51

0.59

32.75

76.00

0.87

0.88

0.88

0.80

38.74

83.06

1.06

0.85

0.85

1.09

47.27

110.13

1.40

1.47

1.47

1.44

49.52

102.87

1.73

1.20

1.20

1.56

60.21

136.31

2.29

2.08

2.08

2.06

77.57

155.93

3.01

2.35

2.35

2.79

94.54

207.12

4.00

4.07

4.07

3.69

114.44

227.81

5.66

4.06

4.06

4.52

139.35

301.26

7.49

7.01

7.01

5.96

163.63

324.71

10.02

6.44

6.44

9.17

208.36

457.15

14.15

11.12

11.12 12.89

1.45

2.21

3.21

4.47

6.30

10.41

M14x45

155.8 204.8

HGW55HB

11.38

M12x35

128.8 171.2

HGW55CB

kg kg/m

M8x25

139.4

80

C 0 (kN) kN- m kN- m kN- m

M8x25

105.8 138.2

HGW45CB

MY Block Rail

M6x20

78.6 104.6

HGW30CB

MP

Weight

15.08

M16x50

21.18


Linear Guideways HG Series Dimensions for HIWIN HG Series (4) HGW-CC / HGW-HC

Dimensions of Assembly (mm) Part No.

Dimensions of Block (mm)

Dimensions of R ail (mm)

Basic Basic Mounting Dynamic Static Bolt for Load Load Rail Rating Rating

Static R ated Moment MR

H

H1

N

W

B

B1

C

L1

L

G M

T T1 T2 H 2 H3 WR HR D

h

d

P

E

(mm)

5.3 M5 6 8.9 6.5 4.5 5.5 15 15 7.5 5.3 4.5 60 20

M4x16

12 M6 8 10 9.5 6

M5x16

C(kN)

Ă&#x2DC;

HGW15CC

24 4.3 16

47

38 4.5 30 39.4 61.4 50.5 77.5

HGW20CC 30 4.6 21.5 63

53

5

40

HGW20HC

7

20 17.5 9.5 8.5

6

60 20

65.2 92.2

HGW25CC

58

84

36 5.5 23.5 70 57 6.5 45 HGW25HC

12 M8 8 14 10 6

9

23 22 11

9

7

60 20

70 42

6

31

90 72

9

HGW30HC HGW35CC 4 8 7.5

33 100 82

9

97.4 12 M10 8.5 16 10 6.5 10.8 28 26 14 12

52 93

120.4

80

112.4 12 M10 10.1 18 13

62

HGW35HC

9 12.6 34 29 14 12

9

9

80 20

80 20

97 60 9.5 37.5 120 100 10

117.7 166.7 70

13 43.5 140 116 12

12.9 M1417.5 26.5 17 12 19

95

53 44 23 20 16 120 30

144.2 200.2

HGW65CC 90

12.9 M16 25 37.5 23 15 15

15 53.5 170 142 14 110

HGW65HC

0.17

0.15

0.15

0.17

17.75

37.84

0.38

0.27

0.27

0.40

21.18

48.84

0.48

0.47

0.47

0.52

26.48

56.19

0.64

0.51

0.51

0.59

32.75

76.00

0.87

0.88

0.88

0.80

38.74

83.06

1.06

0.85

0.85

1.09

47.27

110.13

1.40

1.47

1.47

1.44

49.52

102.87

1.73

1.20

1.20

1.56

60.21

136.31

2.29

2.08

2.08

2.06

77.57

155.93

3.01

2.35

2.35

2.79

94.54

207.12

4.00

4.07

4.07

3.69

114.44

227.81

5.66

4.06

4.06

4.52

139.35

301.26

7.49

7.01

7.01

5.96

63 53 26 22 18 150 35

163.63

324.71

10.02

6.44

6.44

9.17

203.6 259.6

208.36

457.15

14.15

11.12

11.12 12.89

Note : 1 kgf = 9.81 N

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

313

1.45

2.21

3.21

4.47

6.30

10.41

M14x45

155.8 204.8

HGW55HC

25.31

12.9 M12 15.1 22 15 8.5 20.5 45 38 20 17 14 105 22.5 M12x35 128.8 171.2

HGW55CC

11.38

M8x25

139.4

80

HGW45HC

C0 (kN) kN- m kN- m kN- m kg kg/m

M8x25

105.8 138.2

HGW45CC

MY Block Rail

M6x20

78.6 104.6

HGW30CC

MP

Weight

15.08

M16x50

21.18


EG Series - Low Profile Ball Type Linear Guideway The design of the EG series offers a low profile, high load capacity and high rigidity. It also features an equal load rating in all four directions and self-aligning capability to absorb installation error, allowing for higher accuracies. Additionally, the lower assembly height and the shorter length make the EG series more suitable for high speed automation machines and applications where space is limited. The retainer is designed to hold the balls in the blocks even when it is removed from the rail.

Construction of EG Series

Cap

Block

Rail End cap End seal (Double seals ) Scraper

Grease nipple

Rolling circulation system: Block, rail, end cap and retainer Lubrication system: Grease nipple and piping Joint Dust protection system: End seal, bottom seal, cap and scraper

Ball Retainer Bottom seal

Two Types of EG Series EG series linear guideways are classified into non-interchangeable and interchangeable types. The sizes of these two types are the same as one another. The main difference is that the interchangeable type of blocks and rails can be freely exchanged and they can maintain p-class accuracy. Because of strict dimensional control, the interchangeable type linear guideways are a wise choice for customers when rails do not need to be matched for an axis. The model number of the EG series identifies the size, type, accuracy class, preload class, etc.

Part Number description for the Interchangeable EG Block

EG W 25 C A

E ZA P

+ ZZ

Series Block Type W : Flange Type H : Square Type

Dust Protection - ZZ -End Seal, bottom seal and scraper KK -Double Seal, bottom seal and scraper Precision Code : C, H, P DD -Double Seal and bottom seal

Model Size 15, 20, 25, 30

Preload Code : Z0, ZA

Load Type C : Heavy Load s: Medium Load

E: Special Block None: Standard Block

Block Mounting Type A : Top Mounting B : from Bottom

Part Number description for Interchangeable EG Rail

EG R 25 R

1200

E

P

Series Precision Code : C, H, P

Interchangeable Rail

E: Special Rail, None: Standard Rail

Model Size 15, 20, 25, 30

Rail Length (mm)

Rail Mounting Type R/U : Mounting from Top T : Bottom

For full specifications of the non-interchangeable types please visit our website www.tea.net.au or contact T.E.A.

314


Guide Wheel Dimensions & Materials

W 90째

MDw INSIDE A

B 60째 MDw OUTSIDE

90째

Dimensions3,11 in mm & (inches) Part Number

W1X

Outside Diameter A 19.58 (0.771)

W2X

30.73 (1.210)

W3X

45.80 (1.803)

W4X

59.94 (2.360)

W4XXL W1SSX

W1SS2279, 10 W2SS2279, 10 W3SS2279, 10 W4SSCR10

52100

52100

52100

Nylon 66

A591

NBR

Alvania 2

52100

52100

52100

Nylon 66

A591

NBR

Alvania 2

52100

52100

52100

Nylon 66

A591

NBR

Alvania 2

52100

52100

52100

Nylon 66

A591

NBR

Alvania 2

52100

52100

52100

Nylon 66

A591

NBR

Alvania 2

440C

440C

440C

Nylon 66

304

NBR

Alvania 2

440C

440C

440C

Nylon 66

304

NBR

Alvania 2

440C

440C

440C

Nylon 66

304

NBR

Alvania 2

440C

440C

440C

Nylon 66

304

NBR

Alvania 2

440C

440C

440C

Nylon 66

304

NBR

Alvania 2

440C

440C

440C

304

304

None

Krytox227

440C

440C

440C

304

304

None

Krytox227

440C

440C

440C

304

304

None

Krytox227

440C

440C

440C

304

304

None

Krytox227

7.95

11.89

9.53

11.13

12.70

18.26

12.00

15.88

19.05

27.00

(0.4724) (0.625) (0.750) (1.063) 15.00

19.05

25.40

34.92

(0.5906) (0.750) (1.000) (1.375) 25.40

31.75

44.45

(1.250)

(1.750)

4.76

7.87

7.95

11.89

30.73 45.80 59.94

Grease7

(0.3750) (0.438) (0.500) (0.719)

(1.000)

19.58

Retainer1 Shield1 Seal2

(0.1875) (0.310) (0.313) (0.468)

22.00

(2.360) W4SSXXL

7.87

Ball8

(0.8661)

(1.803) W4SSX

4.76

Inner Race8

75.39

(1.210) W3SSX

Width W6

(2.968) (0.771) W2SSX

Bore Size B4,5

Material

Inside Outside Vee Vee Outer Radius Radius Race8 MDw MDw Inside Outside

(0.1875) (0.310) (0.313) (0.468) 9.53

11.13

12.70

18.26

(0.3750) (0.438) (0.500) (0.719) 12.00

15.88

19.05

27.00

(0.4724) (0.625) (0.750) (1.063) 15.00

19.05

25.40

34.92

(0.5906) (0.750) (1.000) (1.375)

75.39

22.00

25.40

31.75

44.45

(2.968)

(0.8661)

(1.000)

(1.250)

(1.750)

19.58

4.76

7.87

7.95

11.89

(0.771)

(0.1875)

(0.310)

(0.313)

(0.468)

30.73

9.53

11.13

12.70

18.26

(1.210)

(0.3750)

(0.438)

(0.500)

(0.719)

45.80

12.00

15.88

19.05

27.00

(1.803)

(0.4724)

(0.625)

(0.750)

(1.063)

59.94

15.00

19.05

25.40

34.92

(2.360)

(0.5906)

(0.750)

(1.000)

(1.375)

Notes: 1. "A591"shield material (JIS SECC) is cold rolled carbon steel with electrolytic zinc coating (classified by ASTM A591). "304" reflects 304 stainless steel. 2. "NBR" seal material is nitrile butadiene rubber. 3. All dimensions are in mm & (inches). 4. Bore ID tolerance is +.0000, -.0003 inch, except W4XL. 5. W4XL Bore ID tolerance is +.0000, -.0004 inch. 6. Width tolerance is +.0000, -.0047 inch. 7. Krytox GPL 227 is a DuPont product. Alvania # 2 is a Shell Oil product. 8. "52100" reflects hardened AISI 52100 bearing steel (Rc 60-62); "440C" reflects hardened AISI 440C stainless steel (Rc 58-60). 9. High Temperature Compatible - Heat stabilized components allow for operating temperatures to 500째F. 10. Clean Room Compatible - All stainless steel components are internally lubricated with Krytox GPL 227. 11. Guide wheels are manufactured to ABEC class 5 tolerances. 12. Weights: W1 - 12g, W2 - 40g, W3 - 136g, W4 - 285g. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

316


W

LA

90째

Guide Wheels

MDw INSIDE

LR

A B 60째 MDw OUTSIDE

90째

Load Capacity (N)

Load Capacity (lbf ) Part Number

Radial Working Load Capacity LRmax (lbf )1, 2

Axial Working Load Capacity LAmax (lbf )1, 2

Radial Working Load Capacity LRmax

Axial Working Load Capacity LAmax

(N)2,3

(N)2,3

650

123

W0

146

28

W1X (SS)

274

57

1220

252

W2X (SS)

596

141

2650

625

W3X (SS)

1326

382

5900

1701

W4X (SS)

2181

900

9700

4001

W4XXL

3215

1473

14300

6552

Notes: 1. Sizing and selection should be based on working load capacity ratings according to the sizing guidelines presented in the technical reference section. See load/life relationship page 321. 2. Working load capacities reflect lubricated wheel/track interface. 3. W..X = steel version, W..XSS stainless steel version. 4. Load Capacities for all versions of Guide Wheels see page 322. 5. For Studded or Integral Studded Guide wheels please go so www.tea.net.au for further data and specifications. 6. For Wheel Cover and Lubricator Assemblies please go so www.tea.net.au for further data and specifications.

Washdown Wheels a

Proven to extend life in harsh and extreme environments. FDA approved grease. AISI type 440C stainless steel balls and races. Unique outer shield and inner seal for exceptional protection from liquids and debris. Ideally suited for food and beverage applications, as well as high speed water jet cutting machinery. Use together with DualVee standard AISI 420 stainless steel track.

Part Number

Radial Load (N)

Radial Load (lbf)

Axial Load (N)

Axial Load (lbf)

Weight (g)

2420

544

400

89.9

37.8

5200

1169

580

130.4

128.3

Bore Size B

Width W

Inside Vee

Outside Vee

(+.0000, -.0003in)

(+.0000, -.0047in)

Radius MDW

Radius MDW

a

WDW2SSX a

WDW3SSX

mm (inch)

Size

Outside Diam. A

a

2

30.73 (1.210)

9.53 (.3750)

11.13 (.438)

12.70 (.500)

18.26 (.719)

3

45.80 (1.803)

12.00 (.4724)

15.88 (.625)

19.05 (.750)

27.00 (1.063)

a

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

317


Single Edge Track - Undrilled 90°

• Easy installation/available from stock • Single edge design allows for flexible track pair spacing • Patented mounting shoulder allows for accurate positioning of Vee ways • Available from stock as induction hardened, polished and undrilled, AISI1045 carbon steel • Induction hardened track remains soft below the mounting shoulder, allowing for drilling or other machining • 420 stainless steel available on request • Can be easily butt-joined for stroke lengths exceeding maximum single piece lengths (4 mtrs) • Single edge track with drilled mounting holes available - please go to www.tea.net.au for further details and specifications. • Size 0 double edge track, drilled and undrilled available - please go to www.tea.net.au for further details and specifications.

DualVee Track Part No.

Width

Height

W mm (inch)

H mm (inch)

Mounting Shoulder Location MDT mm (inch)

MDT

W MSD

MSC

H

Mounting Shoulder to Centre Line MSC mm (inch)

Mounting Shoulder depth MSD mm (inch)

Kg/m (lbs./ft)

Weight

T1

11.10 (0.437)

4.75 (0.187) 3.17 (0.125)

0.79 (0.031)

1.57 (0.062)

0.272 (0.183)

T2

15.87 (0.625)

6.35 (0.250) 4.75 (0.187)

0.79 (0.031)

2.39 (0.094)

0.510 (0.343)

T3

22.22 (0.875)

8.71 (0.343) 6.35 (0.250)

1.57 (0.062)

2.77 (0.109)

1.03 (0.690)

T4

26.97 (1.062)

11.10 (0.437) 7.92 (0.312)

2.36 (0.093)

3.17 (0.125)

1.64 (1.100)

Track available from stock to 4 metres cut to 500mm increments Please advise exact length required at time of ordering, as there is a 5mm cutting wastage. Ordering Example: T1-1000 represents a 1 metre length of hardened, carbon steel, size 1 track T1-1000-SS represents a 1 metre length of stainless steel size 1 track Notes: 1. All dimensions are in mm and (inches). 2. The overall length tolerance is ±1.6mm / ±1/16 inch. 3. For non-standard track lengths or other non-standard options, contact TEA for quotation. 4. Maximum single piece track lengths: hardened = 6.096 mtr, unhardened = 6.7056 mtr. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

318

VIRTUAL APEX


Bushings • Rigidly affixes guide wheels to a mounting surface in a precise, orthogonal fashion • Material: 303 stainless steel • Concentric and eccentric configurations allow for fit up adjustment • Design calls for a fastener to pass through the bushing and the guide wheel, locking the elements into place against the mounting surface

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Ø

Concentric (MB)

DualVee Size

Metric Bushings

1

2

3

4

4XL * a

Inch Bushings

1

2

3

4

4XL *

Eccentric (MBX)

Length Length Outside Inside Head Body Overall Diameter Diameter Diameter ID8 LB HD LO OD3

Part Number

Recommended Fastener Size

Hex Size HS

Offset EC

Head Height HH7

MB1

M4

-

-

6.22

7.6

13.8

4.76

3.96

11.2

MBX1

M4

12

0.25

6.22

7.6

13.8

4.76

3.96

-

MB2

M6

-

-

6.65

10.8

17.4

9.52

6.00

14.2

MBX2

M6

14

0.61

6.65

10.8

17.4

9.52

6.00

-

MB3

M8

-

-

9.47

15.6

25.1

11.99

8.00

19.1

MBX3

M8

19

1.07

9.47

15.6

25.1

11.99

8.00

-

MB4

M10

-

-

11.10

18.8

29.9

15.00

10.00

22.4

MBX4

M10

22

1.52

11.10

18.8

29.9

15.00

10.00

-

MB4XL

M14

-

-

14.35

25.1

39.5

21.97

14.00

31.8

MBX4XL

M14

30

1.52

14.35

25.1

39.5

21.97

14.00

-

B1

#6

-

-

0.250

0.300

0.550

0.1873

0.140

0.44

BX1

#6

7/16

0.012

0.250

0.300

0.550

0.1873

0.138

-

B2

1/4

-

-

0.281

0.425

0.706

0.3748

0.250

0.56

BX2

1/4

9/16

0.024

0.281

0.425

0.706

0.3748

0.250

-

B3

5/16

-

-

0.375

0.615

0.990

0.4722

0.312

0.75

BX3

5/16

3/4

0.042

0.375

0.615

0.990

0.4722

0.312

-

B4

3/8

-

-

0.437

0.740

1.177

0.5904

0.375

0.88

BX4

3/8

7/8

0.060

0.437

0.740

1.177

0.5904

0.375

-

B4XL

9/16

-

-

0.565

0.990

1.555

0.8650

0.563

1.25

BX4XL

9/16

1 1/4

0.060

0.565

0.990

1.555

0.8650

0.563

-

Most sizes from stock (* Available on request) Notes: 1. All dimensions are in mm for metric bushings, and inch dimensions for imperial bushings. 2. Standard material 303 stainless steel. 3. The bushing's outside diameter is designed to fit the corresponding size DualVee® guide wheel. Outside diameter (OD) tolerance is +0.00mm, -0.01inch (.25mm) 4. Part # X_ indicates eccentric (adjustable) bushing; rotation of eccentric allows fit up adjustment between track and guide wheels. 5. All mounting information within this catalogue assumes a central position of the eccentric bushing, thus allowing wheel position adjustment from "+EC" to "-EC". 6. Part # MB or B_ indicates concentric (stationary) bushing; Since concentrically mounted wheels have a fixed position, these bushings set the alignment of the carriage assembly to the rail. Concentrically mounted wheels should be configured to carry the majority of the load whenever possible. 7. Head height (HH) tolerance is ±0.001 inch and ±0.03mm. 8. Inside diameter (ID) tolerance is +0.002, -0.000 inch and +0.05mm -0.00mm.

All specfications are subject to change without notice.

319


Mounting Dimensions / Formulas for DualVee®-basic wheel plate and track plate assemblies When fabricating a DualVee ® linear guide from componentry, the following (formulae) are applicable for mating carriage plate and track plate designs:

A

F or sizes 1 through 4 DualVee ® single edge track with equivalent sized guide wheels: • Inboard Mounting (See Figure 1): A = B + X • Outboard Mounting (See Figure 2): A = C - X • Exterior Mounting (See Figure 3): A = D - Y A = hole centres for wheel plate

B Figure 1 Inboard Mounting

A

Y

X

DualVee Size

inch

mm

inch

mm

1

0.874

22.2

0.934

23.7

2

1.374

34.9

1.436

36.5

3

2.000

50.8

2.124

53.9

4

2.624

66.6

2.750

69.9

4XL

3.124

79.3

3.500

88.9

C Figure 2 Outboard Mounting

A Notes: 1. Information above uses the same size DualVee® track and wheel except for size 4XL which uses W4XXL guide wheel with size T4 track. 2. Side views shown only, length of wheel plates can be any length required. 3. It is recommended that wheel plates be constructed with concentric bushings on one side of the plate and eccentric bushings on the opposing side. 4. "D" dimension is to the theoretical sharp of the 90°angle.

D Figure 3 Exterior Mounting

Applications Clean Room Products

High Temperature Products

TEA's clean room compatible guide wheels are manufactured from 440C stainless steel bearing elements, and contain stainless steel retainers and shields. They are internally lubricated with synthetic, corrosion resistant, clean room compatible grease.

All T.E.A. high temperature guide wheel products are manufactured from specially processed, thermally stabilised, 440C stainless steel. Lubricated with a specially formulated synthetic grease, these guide wheels are capable of operating in temperatures up to 500°F. Special consideration should be given to guide wheel based designs when operating above temperatures of 300°F. Designers must make sure that a suitable lubricant is used on the wheel track interface, and if lubrication is prohibitive, the appropriate derating of the bearing should be factored in.

For clean room operation, it is often desirable to plate the track with thin dense chrome (armoloy), black oxide, or electroless nickel. Stainless steel track can also be specially cleaned prior to heat treat and then passivated. Contact T.E.A. applications engineering for assistance with your clean room linear guidance questions. Higher level assemblies, custom engineered to accommodate specific clean room requirements, can be furnished by T.E.A. Contact T.E.A. for particle emissions data.

320


The Load/Life Relationship All standard considerations involved in statics calculations must be accounted for, including inertial forces, gravitational forces, external forces such as tool pressure, bearing element spacing, magnitude and direction of the payload. Any external forces that generate a reaction through the wheel/track interface need to be considered. If assistance is required in resolving specific loads into the resultant reaction forces at the guide wheel interface, contact our applications engineering staff for support.

Several factors influence the service life of a DualVee® linear guide. Through research and development spanning over thirty years, BWC has devised a simple method to estimate the load/life relationship for a specific DualVee® guide mechanism under defined loading conditions. The methodology accounts for the size of the DualVee® bearing elements, relative spacing, and the orientation, location, and magnitude of the load. The curve is based upon clean and well lubricated track conditions; so for applications where lubrication is prohibitive, a derating factor must be applied.

Step 2: Calculate the load factor for the most heavily loaded bearing.

It is important to note that secondary considerations such as maximum velocity, acceleration rates, duty cycle, stroke length, environmental conditions, the presence of shock, vibration and extreme temperature ranges can all impact service life to varying degrees. As such, the sizing method outlined below should be used conservatively, and considered only as a guideline for the sizing of DualVee® components and assemblies. When time and budget permits, the prototyping of a DualVee® arrangement is recommended to confirm service life expectations.

L F = L A / L Amax + L R / L Rmax Where L F = Load Factor L A = Resultant axial load on the guide wheel L Amax = The maximum axial working load capacity of the guide wheel L R = Resultant radial load on the guide wheel L Rmax = The maximum radial working load capacity of the guide wheel

• Bearings should be sized such that L F<1 • The most heavily loaded bearing will have the highest load factor

The Load/Life Equation Sizing and Selection

Due to varying application load, speed parameters and environmental conditions, the appropriate adjustment factor must be applied to the maximum axial and radial working load capacities (LAmax and LRmax) as follows:

The load/life estimation requires a basic understanding of the principles of statics, the ability to work with free-body diagrams, and the capacity to resolve externally applied forces on a carriage assembly into the radial and axial reaction forces at each guide wheel in the design. The life of a DualVee® guide will be limited to the life of the most heavily loaded bearing in the design.

Adjustment Factor

Application Conditions

1.0-0.7

Clean, low speed, low shock, low duty

0.7-0.4

Moderate contaminants, medium duty, medium shock, low to medium vibration, moderate speed

0.4-0.1

Heavy contamination, high acceleration, high speed, medium to high shock, high vibration, high duty cycle

Oscillating motion resulting in less than one full revolution of the wheel under load can cause accelerated wear on the internal bearing elements. Testing of such systems is recommended to verify compatibility of the design with load/life requirements.

Step 1: Calculate the resultant radial and axial loads reflected to each bearing element in the linear guide design.

321


DualVee Guide Wheel Load Capacities Load Capacity (N)

Load Capacity (lbf ) Radial Working Load Capacity LRmax

Part Number

(lbf )1, 2

Axial Working Load Capacity LAmax (lbf )1, 2

Radial Working Load Capacity LRmax

Axial Working Load Capacity LAmax

(N)2,3

(N)2,3

W0

146

28

650

123

W1

274

57

1220

252

W2

596

141

2650

625

W3

1326

382

5900

1701

W4

2181

900

9700

4001

W0X

146

28

650

123

W1X

274

57

1220

252

W2X

596

141

2650

625

W3X

1326

382

5900

1701

W4X

2181

900

9700

4001

W4XXL

3215

1473

14300

6552

W1SSX

274

57

1220

252

W2SSX

596

141

2650

625

W3SSX

1326

382

5900

1701

W4SSX

2181

900

9700

4001

W4SSXXL

3215

1473

14300

6552

W0SSCR

121

23

540

102

W1SS227

228

47

1013

209

W2SS227

494

117

2200

519

W3SS227

1101

317

4897

1412

Step 3: Apply the load factor to the load/life equation below:

Life Constant DualVee Size inches of travel life kilometres of travel life

3

Life = L C / (L F) Where L F = Load Factor L C = Life Constant Life constants are provided in both inch and metric as tabulated.

0

1.65 x 106

41

1

2.19 x 106

55

2

3.47 x 106

87

3

5.19 x 106

130

4

6.84 x 106

171

4XL

8.58 x 106

215

Notes: 1. Basic Dynamic Load Rating, According to AFBMA STD 9-1990. Based on industry standard bearing calculations and are for comparison purposes only. Maximum working load figures should be used for component sizing and selection. 2. Basic Static Load Rating, According to AFBMA STD 9-1990. Based on industry standard bearing calculations and are for comparison purposes only. Maximum working load figures should be used for component sizing and selection. 3. Working load capacities reflect clean, well lubricated wheel/track interface. 4. For Operating Considerations - Lubrication; Track Splicing; Accuracy; Track Hardening; Contamination/Wear Resistance, Fit-up Adjustment and Wash-down Environments please go to our web site www.tea.net.au to download data pages. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

322


UtiliTrak® Linear Guide The UtiliTrak linear guide provides a narrow, compact profile solution that is well suited for a variety of environments where smooth, high speed motion is required. a It is the ideal choice for running two systems in parallel, where one slide used DualVee guide wheels and the other uses MadeWell™ crowned rollers. Because precise parallelism is difficult to achieve, it is not uncommon the mounting surfaces to be slightly out of parallel. UtiliTrak’s design compensates for mounting errors, and does not require absolute parallelism for accurate operation. The DualVee guide wheel carriage assembly and vee channel serves as the motion side, while the MadeWell crowned roller and open channel side allows for parallel misalignment. a Bridge connections further simplify assembly, and completes the system by joining the two slides and providing a stable mounting surface. a UtiliTrak is offered in two basic series; SW series steel guide wheels running on a hardened bearing steel channel for larger loads and smooth operation, and PW series polymer guide wheels running on an anodized aluminium channel, which provides a more economical choice for lighter duty applications where highly smooth operation is not as critical. A third option, Stainless Steel Composite UtiliTrak is ideal for higher loads where corrosion resistance is required.

SW Series - Ideal for medium to heavy duty transport applications, and offers high speeds, excellent load capacity, smooth antifriction operation and debris tolerance. • Channel is one-piece ground 52100 carbon steel • Running surface smooth to Ra 0.8 micrometers • Loads to 14040N • Speeds to 5.5m/s • Acceleration to 5 g’s • 3, 4, or 5 wheel carriage assemblies available • Available in sizes 1, 2 and 3 a

PW Series - Is a lightweight solution for light to medium duty transport applications, and offers corrosion resistance, low noise and wear resistance. • Channel is one-piece ground 6063-T6 aluminium alloy • Wheels feature chemically resistant high temperature polymer over-moulded on a stainless steel bearing • Built-in wiper caps at each end of the carriage clear debris from the track • Loads to 311N • Speeds to 1.5m/s • Acceleration to 3 g’s • 3 wheel carriage assemblies • Available in sizes 0, 1 and 2 a

Stainless Steel Composite Series - is a great option for high load requirements where carbon steel cannot be used due to corrosion. • Channel features induction heat treated 420 stainless steel DualVee track mounted to an extruded aluminium base • Stainless steel DualVee wheels feature sealed bearings • Loads to 5739N • Speeds to 5.5m/s • Acceleration to 5 g’s • 3 wheel carriage assemblies • Available in sizes 1, 2 and 3

Wheel size/model

0, 1, 2, 3

0, 1, 2, 3

Wheel Diam.

15 to 46mm (.58 to 1.8 in)

15 to 46mm, (.58 to 1.8 in)

Wheel Technology

DualVee 90o

Crown Roller

Steel (size 1, 2, 3)

Steel (size 1, 2, 3)

Polymer (size 0, 1, 2)

Polymer (size 0, 1, 2)

Wheel Material

Carriage Working load (smallest to largest size - based on 4 wheels) Axial Dynamic Load (LA)

88 to 7140N (20 to 1605 lbs)

Axial Load not recommended

Radial Dynamic Load (LR)

55 to 14040 N (12 to 3156 lbs)

55 to 14040 N (12 to 3156 lbs)

Vee Channel

Open Channel

Aluminium, Steel, Stainless Steel

Aluminium, Steel

Unlimited

Unlimited

3.6 mtr (11.9 ft) single piece

3.6 mtr (11.9 ft) single piece

Track Material Lengths

For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

323


MinVee速 MinVee are compact linear slides designed to run on double edged track. (please contact T.E.A. Transmissions for data sheets for this track. Size 0 non-actuated MinVee linear slides are available with your choice of wheel carriage with steel or polymer DualVee Wheels. MinVee linear slides include stainless steel lubricators to provide lubricant to the track and wheel interface. Other options include stainless steel stand-offs for mounting track. MinVee linear slides feature a patented self-aligning mounting shoulder, reducing installation time and cost. Low profile MinVee linear slides are ideal for semiconductior, laboratory, medical and packaging applications.

Wheel size/model Wheel Diam.

0 15mm (.58 in)

Wheel Technology Wheel Material Carriage Working load - based on 4 wheels Axial Dynamic Load (LA) Radial Dynamic Load (LR) Track Material Lengths

DualVee 90o Double Row Bearings Steel or Polymer 67 to 540N (15 to 121 lbs) 65 to 490 N (14 to 110 lbs) Dual Edge Steel Unlimited

For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

324


LoPro Belt Driven Systems • Complete belt actuated system, ready for installation • Long stroke, high speed and acceleration capability • AT style reinforced polyurethane belting • Linear accuracy of .008 in/ft (0.2mm/300mm) • Repeatable within .004 in (0.1mm) • Small and large drive options available on size 2 • Aluminum support beams, steel beams or un-mounted (without beams)

• Basic wheel plate or wiper wheel plate • Optional NEMA and IEC motor mounts • Standard and corrosion resistant versions available • Aluminum alloy drive end pulleys with aluminum or plated steel ?anges

Carriage Assembly Load Capacities

System Size

Axial Load Capacity L A N

1 2S/2L 3 4

Radial Load Capacity L R

lbs

N

lbs

MP

Pitch Moment Capacity M p

Yaw Moment Capacity M Y

N·m

N·m

988 222 2391 538 26 2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220

ft·lbf

18.9 70.3 254.9 899.5

ft·lbf

Roll Moment Capacity M R N·m

62 45.7 27 202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174

LA

MR

ft·lbf

19.8 73.8 274.1 865.6

LR

MY

LoPro System Belt Load Capacities System Size

Belt Size

1

10AT5

Working Tensile Load N

lbs

630

142

Drive End Pulleys Pitch Diameter

28.7mm (1.128in)

Belt Teeth Shear Strength Formula (N)* (Approx.)

F=315-1.17V3+15.3V2-75.3V 3

2

Belt Teeth Shear Strength at V=0 m/s (N)*

Belt Teeth Shear Strength at V=5.5 m/s (N)*

315

169

2S

16AT5

1008

227

38.2mm (1.504in)

F=672-1.06V +18.4V -120V

672

392

2L

16AT10

2085

469

79.6mm (3.133in)

F=1407-2.59V3+34.2V2-208V

1407

867

3

20AT10

2606

586

95.5mm (3.759in)

F=1761-2.98V3+37.3V2-230V

1761

1128

95.5mm (3.759in)

3

2818

1805

4

32AT10

4170

937

2

F=2818-4.80V +60.0V -369V

If the customer plate will be subjected to shock loads, divide the permissible linear force by a safety factor of 1.4 (light shock) to 2 (high shock). V = Linear Speed. *The belt teeth shear strength is the permissable linear force which the drive pulley can apply to the carriage. The sum of the linear force applied to the carriage and the belt pretension load must not exceed the working tensile load.

For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

325


LoPro Chain Driven Systems • Complete chain actuated system, ready for installation

• Ideal for vertical hoisting and large load actuation over long lengths

• Standard or corrosion resistant ANSI roller chain • Accurate to 0.4mm/300mm (.015 in/ft) • Repeatable within 0.2mm (.008 in) • Small and large drive options available on size 2 • Aluminum support beams, steel beams or unmounted (without beams)

• Basic wheel plate or wiper wheel plate • Optional NEMA and IEC motor mounts • Steel or stainless steel drive end sprockets MP

Carriage Assembly Load Capacities

System Size

Axial Load Capacity L A N

1 2S/2L 3 4

lbs

Radial Load Capacity L R N

lbs

LA

Pitch Moment Capacity M p

Yaw Moment Capacity M Y

Roll Moment Capacity M R

N·m

N·m

N·m

988 222 2391 538 26 2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220

ft·lbf

18.9 70.3 254.9 899.5

ft·lbf

ft·lbf

62 45.7 27 202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174

LR

19.8 73.8 274.1 865.6

LoPro System Chain Load Capacities Static/Slow Speed Working Load System Size

Chain Size Single Strand N

lbs

N

MY

Drive End Sprockets Working Load at 0.5 m/s

Stainless Steel

Steel

MR

Stainless Steel

Steel

lbs

N

lbs

N

Pitch Diameter

No. of Teeth

lbs

1

25

431

97

347

78

267

60

214

48

24.5mm (.966in)

12

2S

35

1036

233

841

189

618

139

494

111

36.8mm (1.449in)

12

2L

35

1036

233

841

189

645

145

516

116

79.0mm (3.111in)

26

3

40

1975

444

1481

333

1152

259

863

194

93.3mm (3.672in)

23

4

50

3261

733

2322

522

1788

402

1272

286

91.4mm (3.599in)

18

Working load varies with speed, Please contact T.E.A Transmissions for specific application information. For further information and specification data downloads, please visit our web site www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

326


LoPro Lead Screw Driven Systems • Complete lead screw actuated system, ready for installation

• Standard (BY) or anti-backlash (NTBY & VHDY) nuts • Lead accuracies to .0006mm/mm (in/in) • Repeatable within 0.01mm (.0005 in) • Aluminum support beams, steel beams or unmounted (without beams)

• Basic wheel plate or wiper wheel plate • Optional NEMA and IEC motor mounts • Standard and corrosion resistant versions available

MP

rew

Carriage Assembly Load Capacities

System Size

Axial Load Capacity L A N

1 2 3 4

lbs

Radial Load Capacity L R N

lbs

Pitch Moment Capacity M p

Yaw Moment Capacity M Y

Roll Moment Capacity M R

N·m

N·m

N·m

988 222 2391 538 26 2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220

ft·lbf

18.9 70.3 254.9 899.5

ft·lbf

62 45.7 27 202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174

Screw Diameter

Nut Type

in

19.8 73.8 274.1 865.6

1

1/4

2

3/8

3 4

1/2 5/8 3/4

Dynamic Load Capacity N

lbs

BY

222

50.0

NTBY

44

9.9

BY

334

75.0

NTBY

89

20.0

NTBY

444

100.0

BY

1000

225.0

BY

1556

350.0

VHDY

1556

350.0

For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

327

MR

ft·lbf

Lead Screw Thrust Capacities

System Size

LA

LR

MY


LoPro Ball Screw Driven Systems • Complete ball screw actuated system, ready for installation

• Accurate to 100µm/300mm (.004 in/ft) • Repeatable within 0.07mm (.003 in) or better, depending on size of lead

• Aluminum support beams, steel beams or un-mounted (without beams)

• Basic wheel plate or wiper wheel plate • Optional NEMA and IEC motor mounts

MP

Carriage Assembly Load Capacities

System Size

Axial Load Capacity L A N

2 3 4

lbs

Radial Load Capacity L R N

lbs

Pitch Moment Capacity M p

Yaw Moment Capacity M Y

Roll Moment Capacity M R

N·m

N·m

N·m

2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220

ft·lbf

70.3 254.9 899.5

ft·lbf

202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174

Screw Diameter

Maximum Length

Lead

mm

mm

mm

N

lbs

2

10

3000

2

1250

281.0

3

2800

629.4

3

12

1500

73.8 274.1 865.6

16

1500

20

1800

4

Dynamic Load Capacity

5

2300

517.0

10

1500

337.2

5

5600

1258.9

10

5800

1303.8

5

8600

1933.3

For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

328

MR

ft·lbf

Ball Screw Thrust Capacities

System Size

LA

LR

MY


®

LoPro Un-driven Systems • Complete non-actuated linear system, ready for immediate installation

• Standard aluminum and steel support beam options available

• Two standard available wheel plate options • Available in standard and corrosion resistant versions • High speed and acceleration capacity • Long stroke length capability (virtually unlimited)

MP

Carriage Assembly Load Capacities

System Size

Axial Load Capacity L A N

1 2S/2L 3 4

lbs

Radial Load Capacity L R N

lbs

Pitch Moment Capacity M p

Yaw Moment Capacity M Y

N·m

N·m

988 222 2391 538 26 2450 551 5194 1168 95 6668 1499 11564 2600 346 15684 3526 19012 4274 1220

ft·lbf

18.9 70.3 254.9 899.5

ft·lbf

LA

Roll Moment Capacity M R N·m

62 45.7 27 202 148.9 100 599 442.1 372 1478 1090.3 1174

MR

ft·lbf

19.8 73.8 274.1 865.6

LR

Basic Wheel Plate

Aluminum Support Beam Integral Wheel Lubricator

Lubricant Saturated Felt

For further information please contact T.E.A. Transmissions, or visit our website www.tea.net.au All specifications are subject to change without notice.

329

MY


Hepco GV3 Linear Guidance and Transmission System The GV3 linear guidance and transmission system has been designed to provide the customer with an unrivalled choice of sizes and options to cater for virtually every linear motion requirement. In devising GV3, Hepco have retained the best features of their highly successful Generation 2 and CM Slide Systems in a greatly expanded range. Many new components have been added including Single Edge Slides, Flat Tracks and drive options. Customer may now choose Slides from three grades of precision and combine them with either Twin Bearings, Double Row Bearings or low cost Slimline Bearings. This enables the ideal system to be specified for optimum performance within the budget available. The reliability of Hepco's all steel slideway and V bearing concept has been proved conclusively over nearly fifty years. Improvements are continually being made to this fundamentally sound design resulting in a truly evolutionary system for the 21st century. By choosing GV3, customers can be assured of a quality and performance which surpasses all expectations.

CAD CD available

GV3 Benefits SMOOTH: FAST: ACCURATE: QUIET: DURABLE:

SIMPLE: VERSATILE:

ECONOMIC:

• High Accuracy and fine finish of components allows constant driving force without vibration. • Friction free motion allows smaller, lower cost motors to be selected. • Optimised Bearing and Slide interface design enables very high speeds with low wear. • Low stick friction and low inertia of Bearing rotation allows fast acceleration for shortest stroke. • High degree of Slide parallelism and minimum Bearing clearance results in virtually zero play. • Important dimensions accurately controlled for reliable system height and positional accuracy. • Specially designed Bearing and Slide geometry results in one of the quietest slide systems available. • All steel Slideway three times stiffer than composite aluminium slide systems. • All rugged construction suits high duty applications and harsh environments. • Lubrication devices available maximises life with no relubrication necessary in most instances. • Unique wiping action expels debris in environments where other systems fail. • Compliant bearing design for tolerance of misalignment. • Reliable performance confirmed by testing specify Hepco with confidence. • Easily understood proven technology little to go wrong and simple to maintain. • Hugh range of sizes, types and ancillary components available provides solution to most design problems. • Long lengths available up to 4mtrs. in most sizes saves on assembly time. • Works in any plane and orientation unrestricted use in machine construction. • Operates without lubrication ideal for food machinery and clean applications. • Driven systems available complete solutions from a single source saves design and administration time. • Choice of Slide precision and bearing design to match cost/performance requirements. • Designed for minimum installation time significantly reduces cost.

The following 30 pages describe Hepco's Linear Motion System with Standard Bearing Program. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au to view: Hepco's Linear Motion System with Slimline Bearing Program and Hepco's Linear Motion System incorporating Flat Tracks and Rollers.

330


Application Examples (E)

Eccentric (E)

Fixing Slides to Tubular Framework Ease of Alignment using all Eccentric Bearings

(E)

Hepco Single Edge Flat Slides have been designed to attach to the edges of many sizes of square or rectangular tube with sufficient protrusion of the Slide V running face to provide clearance for Hepco Bearings and Lubrication devices. The fixing hole positions have been regulated to clear the external corner radius of the tube and to allow attachment by means of standard sizes of hexagon bar. Alternatively, Slides can be attached by "Flowdrilling" or by welding.

Example shows the possibility to adjust the Hepco GV3 slide system in one plane, thus avoiding the necessity for precision drilling and fitting

(E)

Light Applications Where very light loads are anticipated, three Bearings may be used instead of the usual configuration of four. This saves on component cost and assembly time.

(C)

(E)

Low Height System A very compact slide system can be achieved by using Hepco Flat Slides in conjunction with Slimline Bearings and by choosing thin section material for the carriage and slide support.

Concentric (C)

Tamper Proof Carriage Hepco Carriages can be supplied "Tamper-proof" by pinning the Bearing studs once they have been factory adjusted to the Slide. After pinning, the counterbores are filled with resin.

Cap Seal (E)

(E)

Heavy Load Requirements For increased load capacity, additional Eccentric Bearings may be installed in between the outermost one. Multiple bearing installations benefit from the use of Controlled Height Bearings which ensure better load distribution. Cap Seals will also maximise load capacity (see load/life section). Please see pages 363-367 Hepco's Heavy Duty Slide System where very high loads are anticipated.

Eccentric (E)

(E)

(E) (E)

Concentric (C)

Wide Platform

(E) (E) Eccentric (E)

Rigidity is achieved at the extremities of a wide platform by mounting slides in parallel; this provides maximum support for a wide but short platform. Single Edge Slides (see pages 332-333) should be considered for a wide but (C) long platform. Alternatively, Hepco Flat Track with Track Rollers in conjunction with an opposing Double Edge Slide, will obviate the need to set slides parallel. Please see our web site: www.tea.net.au for more data.

331

Removable Carriage This example shows how a Carriage incorporating Double Eccentric type Bearings can be taken off a Slide in any position without running the Carriages off the end. This facility saves having to dismantle part of the machine in cases where the ends of the Slide are 'Blocked".


System Composition Pages 332-333 provide an overview of the comprehensive GV3 linear motion system. Below is shown the basic range of Slides and components available with Hepco's Standard Twin and Double Row Bearings. A similar range is available with Hepco's Slimline Bearings. Components are available factory assembled where possible or as individual parts if preferred. Many sizes and types of Hepco component can be interchanged to achieve an unrivalled combination of space and performance possibilities.

ALL SLIDES (COMMON FEATURES) pages 344-349

LUBRICATOR Lubricates contact surfaces increasing load capacity and life. Can be attached from either side of a carriage. Lightly sprung felt wiper ensures low friction. Flanged and Compact versions available. Long lubrication interval.

One piece construction for assured parallelism and rigidity. Manufactured from high quality bearing steel. Deep hardened ‘V’ faces for maximum wear resistance. Soft centre section allows customising. Wide range of sizes to choose from. 3 grades of precision to suit cost/performance requirements. Any length supplied up to 4 metres, unground grade to 6 metres. Unlimited length achieved by butting. Attractive, corrosion inhibiting black finish on unground faces. Common 70° ‘V’ allows many bearing/slide combinations.

* Contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheet

gSINGLE EDGE FLAT SLIDE / DOUBLE EDGE FLAT SLIDE pages 348-349 g Lower weight for less inertia where Slide is the moving component. g Lower cost in cases where spacer is part of customer's construction. g Plain hole, or counterbored fixing option for flush top surface. g A number of widths for each basic section gives 11 sections to choose from. g Can be spaced apart for high moment load capacity.

CAP SEALS g Lubricates contact surfaces increasing load

capacity and life. “Lubricated for life” in most applications. Seals against ingress of debris. Improves operational safety. Enhances appearance of system. Incorporates both through hole and tapped hole fixing facility. * Contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheet

g g g g g

PINIONS Bored type and integral shaft type available. Hardened teeth for long life. 2Keyway provided in bored type pinion. Shaft type pinion compatible with Hepco Rack Driven Carriage. Shaft type pinion compatible with Hepco Motor Gearboxes. * Contact T.E.A. for faxed data sheet

g g g g g

DOUBLE EDGE SPACER SLIDE pages 350-351 g Mounts directly to a flat surface. No spacer required. g Keyway and datum edges provide means of location

SINGLE EDGE SPACER SLIDE pages 346-347 g g g g g g g g

Mounts directly to a flat surface. No spacer required. Can be spaced apart for high moment load capacity. Keyway and datum edges provide means of location and alignment. Counterbored hole fixing, tapped hole fixing or undrilled options available. Plastic hole plugs provided to avoid debris traps. Rack cut option provides means of driving. Back face provides mounting register, or running surface for Track Roller. 5 sections to choose from.

332

and alignment. g Counterbored hole fixing, tapped hole fixing or

undrilled options available. g Plastic hole plugs provided to avoid debris traps. g A number of widths for each basic section gives 11

sections to choose from.


System Composition The GV3 philosophy is to provide a solution to every linear motion problem. ALL BEARINGS (COMMON FEATURES & OPTIONS) Pages 350-351 g Special raceway conformity and low radial clearance, for Slide applications. g Twin bearing for tolerance of misalignment and smooth running. g Double row bearing for tolerance of debris and higher load capacity. g Range of 5 useful sizes to choose from. g Metal shields for exclusion of particulates and low friction running. g Nitrile sealed version prevents ingress of liquids.

CONCENTRIC BEARING Pages 350-351 Provides datum reference for the system. Short fixing stud for thin carriage plate. Long fixing stud for thick carriage plate. Controlled height option improves system height accuracy.

g g g g

DOWEL PINS Pages 345 & 347 g Easy method of location and alignment.

ECCENTRIC BEARING Pages 350-351 g Provides simple means of adjustment via centre hexagon or socket each end. g Short fixing stud for thin carriage plate. g Long fixing stud for thick carriage plate. g Controlled height option improves system height accuracy.

CARRIAGE / CARRIAGE PLATE Pages 338-343 g Factory adjusted to chosen Slide, or supplied as a kit of parts. g Available with Bearings only, or with the addition of Cap Seals or Lubricators. g Useful size platform with flush surface for mounting purposes. g Tapped holes in convenient positions for attachment purposes. g Groove along sides to provide register for switch brackets etc. g Carriages available for all 11 Slide sections in all grades. g 3 lengths available in each size and most types. g Tamper proof option. g Removable option for direct disengagement from Slide. g Controlled height option for special accuracy requirements.

DOUBLE ECCENTRIC BEARINGS Pages 350-351 g Eccentric throw sufficient for direct removal of Carriage from Slide. g All attributes of the standard Eccentric version apply.

}

Pages g BLIND HOLE CONCENTRIC BEARING 350-351 • BLIND HOLE ECCENTRIC BEARING g• For mounting into thick plates or where access to opposite side restricted. • Adjustable from operating side for ease of access.

gTWIN BEARING/DOUBLE ROW BEARING

Pages 350-351 g Twin bearing for tolerance of misalignment and

smooth running. • Double row bearing for tolerance of debris and high load capacity. g• Special raceway conformity and low radial clearance, for Slide applications. g• General quality to ISO Class 4. Aspects to Class 2. g• Made in Hepco factory which has the following accreditation: - ISO 9001 Aerospace Sector Certification TS 157

333


Linear Motion Sy stem Incorporating Flat Tracks & Rollers Pages 334/5 provide an overview of the comprehensive GV3 linear motion programme. Below is shown the extensive range of Flat Tracks and Track Rollers compatible with Hepco' s linear motion systems. See page 336 for the varied ways in which they can be used. The GV3 philosophy is to provide a solution to every linear motion problem. FLAT TRACK page 352 Choose from ground all over, ground on 2 opposing faces, or unground. Attractive, corrosion inhibiting black finish on unground faces. Deep hardened faces for maximum wear resistance. Manufactured from high quality carbon steel. Offset fixing holes for versatility of mounting. 4 useful sizes compatible with Hepco V Slides. Any length supplied up to 4 metres in most sizes. Unlimited length achieved by butting.

NARROW TRACK ROLLER (CONCENTRIC) page 353 W IDE ROLLER (CONCENTRIC)

Download at www.tea.net.au

TRACK ROLLERS (COMMON FEATURES) page 353 Size and load capacity equivalent to Hepco V Bearing. Special raceway conformity with low radial clearance. Range of 4 useful sizes to choose from. Crowned running face for tolerance of misalignment. Metal shields for exclusion of particulates and low friction running. Nitrile sealed version prevents ingress of liquids. Designed to run on Track or back face of Single Edge Spacer Slides. General quality to ISO Class 4. Aspects to Class 2. Made in Hepco factory which has the following accreditation: ISO 9001 - Aerospace Sector Certification TS 157.

Provides datum reference for the system. SLIMLINE ROLLER (ECCENTRIC) W IDE ROLLER (ECCENTRIC)

Download at www.tea.net.au Provides simple means of adjustment.

BLIND HOLE, W IDE, CONCENTRIC ROLLER BLIND HOLE, W IDE, ECCENTRIC ROLLER

Download at www.tea.net.au For mounting into thick plates or where access to opposite side restricted. Adjustable from operating side for ease of access. Provides datum reference for the system.

334


Linear Motion Sy stem w ith Drive Facility / Support Structure Pages 334-5 provide an overview of the comprehensive GV3 linear motion programme. Below is shown the range of GV3 products available with enhanced features to provide a complete engineering package. The GV3 philosophy is to provide a solution to every linear motion problem.

BELT DRIVEN CARRIAGE Pages 340-341 Use with Flat Slides, Spacer Slides or Slide Beams in all grades of precision. Choice of 5 sizes each available in two useful lengths. Integral belt tensioners for ease of adjustment. Removable mounting platform for ease of customising. Tapped holes for convenience of attaching components. Available with most Hepco Standard Bearing variants and Lubrication devices.

TIMING PULLEY S Low backlash profile for high positional accuracy. W idth to suit Belt Driven Carriages. Diameter enables belt return through Slide Beam.

TIMING BELT High strength, steel reinforced AT profile open length belt. Cut to length, up to 50 m. W idths to suit Hepco Belt Driven Carriages & Pulleys.

RACK DRIVEN CARRIAGE UNIT Pgs 342-343 Carriage includes drive pinion & AC geared motor or gearbox. Carriages available to suit 7 rack-slide sizes. Size, shape, and drive position bespoke to your requirements. Carriages available with all Standard Bearing types and Lubrication devices. Fine adjustment facility for pinion assures low backlash. Gearbox, Flange, Pinions & Motor are available separately for use in your own design, or with rack cut single edge slides or separate racks.

SLIDE BEA MS Can be used as machine construction member. Strong section, spans wide gaps. Available up to 8 metres in one piece. Choice of 2 beam sections and 5 Slide widths. Slides available in 3 grades of precision. Lightweight version available. Counterbored Slide version for belt support. Hollow centre for belt, cable or chain return. T slots for attaching components. Plastic T slot covers, T nuts and fixing clamps available.

SEPARATE RACK As used in Rack-Slide assembly. 4 sizes available. Lengths up to 1.83 m, longer lengths achievable by butting.

PINIONS Please see previous page for features.

335

RACK-SLIDE ASSEMBLY Dowelled Rack-Slide assembly is ready to fix to your mounting surface. Available in 10 useful sizes and 3 grades of precision for Slide. Slides with compound racks available up to 4 metres, unground slide grade to 6 metres. Unlimited Rack-Slide length achieved by butting. Attractive, corrosion inhibiting black finish on unground Slide faces and on Rack.


Application Examples

1

2

Air Flow Tests for Racing Car Nose Cone Design

1

Cantilevered Linear Guide Short stroke sliding movements may be supported from one only, using long series Hepco Flange Clamps 1 . Flange Clamps may be bolted to either side of the supporting framework and are available with either through holes or tapped holes.

Hepco Slide systems are capable of continuous operation at extremely high speed. The factor which limits speed is the build up of heat in the bearings. Intermittent use as in the application allows the heat to disperse thus making even higher speeds possible. The application shows a very long system using Hepco Double Edge Flat Sides 1 with a model racing car nose cone mounted onto a Belt Driven Carriage. Lubricators 2 . are used to apply a film of oil to the 'V' faces of the Slide without imposing significant friction. The aerodynamic forces are measured by a load cell mounted on the Carriage.

Dipping System for Plating Vat 1

1

2

Simple Two Axis Connection Hepco short series Flange Clamps 1 are an ideal method of connecting opposing Carriages and creating a second axis which can be easily installed or removed. Care should be taken to ensure parallelism between slides. Using Hepco Flat Track and Track rollers in place of one of the slides will overcome the necessity to set parallel (please go to www.tea.net.au for more data).

A basket of parts is lowered into vat by means of Rack Driven Carriage 1 and Rack Mounted Slide 2 , available for Hepco has complete unit. System includes AC Motor gearbox and pinion with micro adjustment for correct tooth engagement. The system is able to withstand high transmission forces and provides a low cost reliable solution capable of working in a hostile environment.

1 2

1

3

Rolled Slide for Curved Applications

Multi-lane Row Divider Hepco Flange Clamps 1 can be used to support a Double Edge Spacer Slide 2 in a number of positions by utilising the base mounting facility. No oil is permitted in this examples, so bearings 3 are used without Cap Seals or Lubricators. The GV3 system is well suited to run "dry" especially in lighter duty applications.

336

Hepco Flat Slides 1 can be rolled to any diameter above 500 mm depending on section and whether hardened or not (unhardened slides available to special order). Also, Slides in unrolled condition may be bolted to a gently curved surface. Bearing mounting faces on the carriage should be machined so that each pair of Bearing is perpendicular to the slide. Please contact T.E.A. for further information.


System Selector The customer has a wide choice of Hepco GV3 components in order to satisfy most linear requirements. To facilitate the selection process, the most commonly used components for basic slide system have been tabulated to show comparative benefits when used within a complete system. The benefits in the table are the important ones which can be shown in comparative form and are by no means exhaustive. Please see the system composition section pages 332-333 and pages relating to the individual components for other features, benefits and variants.

Bearing Type

Load Speed

Tolerance of Smoothness Misalignment

Rigidity

System Height

Tolerance of Debris

Price

Standard Pattern Twin Type

Standard Pattern Double Row Type

Slimline Pattern

Slide Precision Grade

= ground surface

General Accuracy

Smoothness/ Quietness

Friction

Price

P1 P2 P3 Lubrication Method

None

Load

Lubrication Interval

Debris Exclusion

Friction

Safety & Appearance

* *

Lubricators

Cap Seals or Cap Wipers

*The Hepco 'V' bearing principle has a natural wiping action which tends to expel debris. The above information is a general guide intended for preliminary selection purposes only.

337

Price


Standard Carriages Hepco Standard Carriages are available to suit all sizes and types of Double Edge Slide in all grades of precision. Each Carriage comes complete with 4 Standard Bearings and is available in 3 useful lengths to cater for customers' component size and offset load requirements. The Carriage Plates are fully machined from aluminium alloy and are supplied anodised. Tapped holes are provided in convenient positions to enable components to be attached. Carriages may be specified as Assembled Units (AU type) which are factory assembled and set to the Slide. Alternatively, the carriage may be specified as a Kit of Components (K type) for customers wishing to carry out their own assembly. The following types or options of Bearing and lubrication device may be specified (refer also to availability table below right). The Twin Bearing type which is the default choice, comprises two individual bearings on a common stud. This construction offers some compliance, with smoother running, easy adjustment and greater tolerance of misalignment. The Double Row Bearing type (DR) incorporates a one piece bearing with two ball tracks. This offers higher load capacity, especially in the radial direction and is less susceptible to entrapment of debris. See examples on page 326.

Example: Short Carriage with Lubricators on a Flat Slide

Part Number AU 12P1/P2 13... AU 12P3 13... 20 18... AU 28 18... AU 25 25... AU 35 25... AU 50 25... AU 44 34... AU 60 34... AU 76 34... AU 76 54... AU 120 54... AU

For Use With Slides MS 12 MS 12 V 20 V 28 S 25 S 35 S 50 M 44 M 60 M 76 L 76 L 120

& & & & & & & & & & & &

NMS 12 NMS 12 NV 20 NV 28 NS 25 NS 35 NS 50 NM 44 NM 60 NM 76 NL 76 NL 120

Bearing Ø

A ~

B

13 13 18 18 25 25 25 34 34 34 54 54

12 12 20 28 25 35 50 44 60 76 76 120

40 40 64 72 80 95 112 116 135 150 185 240

D*6

C 7.34 7.34 10 11 11.5 12.5 14 14.5 17 18 20 24

35 35 43 52 51 70 80 88 110 130 140 180

60 60 55 80 74 90 100 103 125 165 198 258

E 85 85 95 130 120 140 160 153 205 265 298 378

30 17 30 17 50 20 58 25 65 24 80 40 95 50 96 50 115 60 130 80 160 90 210 120

6

F*6 25 25 44 55 60 65 70 80 90 110 135 165

G* No of Holes x Thread 50 50 62 80 82 90 100 103 130 160 185 225

4 x M4 4 x M4 4 x M5 4 x M5 4 x M6 4 x M6 4 x M6 4 x M8 4 x M8 4 x M8 4 x M10 4 x M10

4 x M4 4 x M4 6 x M5 6 x M5 6 x M6 6 x M6 6 x M6 6 x M8 6 x M8 6 x M8 6 x M10 6 x M10

4 x M4 4 x M4 6 x M5 6 x M5 6 x M6 6 x M6 6 x M6 6 x M8 6 x M8 6 x M8 6 x M10 6 x M10

2

H – – 57 65 78.5 88.5 103.5 116 132 148 182 226

J* P1

P2 & P3

19 19 24.75 25.75 30.5 31.5 33 38.5 41 42 58.5 62.5

19.2 19.2 24.95 25.95 30.7 31.7 33.2 38.7 41.2 42.2 58.7 62.7

*Notes: 1. Maximum loads quoted assume lubrication at the interface of Bearings and Slide. This can best be achieved by using Cap Seals or Lubricators. It is strongly recommended that load and life are determined using the methods shown in the Calculations section. The bearing static and dynamic load capacities (C and Co) often quoted by manufacturers are not the best basis for practical life calculations. C and Co figures are included on the Bearing pages for comparison. 2. Some dimensions will vary by the amount of the grinding allowance according to which grade of slide is selected. All Carriages are compatible with all grades of Slide with the exception of the smallest (size 12-13). Two sizes of 12-13 Carriages are therefore required, AU 12P1/P2 13 which is suitable for slide grades P1 and P2, and AU 12P3 13 which is suitable for slide grade P3. 3. Carriage size AU 28 18 incorporates a recess in the underside for fixing screw clearance when used with size V28 Flat Slide. The V dimension in the table includes for this recess. 4. The datum mark identifies the reference edge used in manufacture. The concentric Bearings are always mounted on this side. 5. CH (Controlled Height) Bearings are selected to be within 0.005 mm in respect of 'B1' dimension on pages 336-337 compared to Standard Bearings which are within 0.025mm. Customers requiring CH Bearings with the same tolerance band in respect of a number of Carriages should state this on their order. 6. Carriages are available in 3 standard lengths, therefore bearing centres 'D' and the number and position of component mounting holes 'G' will vary accordingly. Hepco will make carriages to your special length requirement on request. 7. The carriage plate bearing centres are optimised for use with any precision grade of slide. Customers making their own carriage should calculate their bearing and Lubricator/Cap Seal mounting centres for the particular slide grade selected. Please see Assembled Systems or individual component pages for details of calculations.

338


Standard Carriages The Nitrile Sealed Bearing option (NS) provides a higher degree of sealing against ingress of water or debris than does the default metal shielded type. A small increase in friction may result. The Controlled Height Bearing option (CH) minimizes variation between Bearings in respect of the important 'Q' dimension. This may be desirable in some high precision applications *5 The Tamper Proof option (T) which prevents any adjustment or removal of the Bearing assemblies, may be desirable if equipment is to be maintained by untrained personnel. The Cap Seal option (CS) ensures best possible lubrication of the V contact surfaces and protects against ingress of debris. Operational safety and system appearance are also improved. Lubrication vastly increases load capacity and life. Depending on stroke, duty and environmental factors, no further lubrication is required. Access to Cap Seal fixing screws is from the top of the Carriage for ease of adjustment. The Lubricator option (LB) applies oil to the V contact surfaces by means of lightly sprung felt pads which are charged with oil to give long intervals between re-lubrication. The Lubricator option is useful where the advantages of increased load and life are required but with lower friction compared to the cap seals.

Example: Medium Length Carriage with Cap Seals on a Spacer Slide

L*

K

6

N*2

M

P1 & P2

– – 14 14 18 18 18 22.5 22.5 22.5 36.5 36.5

50 50 65 75 80 100 110 125 150 170 200 240

75 75 100 125 135 150 160 180 200 240 300 360

100 100 140 175 180 200 220 225 280 340 400 480

8.5 4 x 1.8 8.5 4 x 1.8 12 5x2 6 x 2.5 20 6 x 2.5 15 25 8x3 10 x 3.5 40 26 8x3 10 x 3.5 42 58 12 x 4 50 15 x 5 45 x 9.5 94

P P3

8.9 8.9 12.4 20.4 15.4 25.4 40.4 26.4 42.4 58.4 50.4 94.4

R*2

Q P1

10.1 10.1 12.4 12.4 16.6 16.6 16.6 21.3 21.3 21.3 34.7 34.7

5.46 1.49 5.46 1.49 6.75 2.1 6.75 2.1 2.36 9 2.36 9 2.34 9 3.08 11.5 3.05 11.5 3.05 11.5 4.56 19 4.56 19

S

T

– – 42 42 55 55 55 70 70 70 98 98

7 7 11 11 13 13 13 15 15 15 27 27

V*2,3

W Ø x depth

3.8 – 3.8 – 2.5 4.5 2.5 5.5 6.5 3 6.5 3 6.5 3 8.3 4 8.3 4 8.3 4 14.3 6 14.3 6

12.5 x 4.8 12.5 x 4.8 16 x 7 16 x 8 22 x 8.4 22 x 9.4 22 x 10.9 25 x 8.7 25 x 11 25 x 12.5 32 x 13.5 32 x 17.5

U

P2 & P3

1.6 1.6 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 4.7 4.7

~Weight (kg) 0.07 0.07 0.21 0.25 0.41 0.53 0.67 1.1 1.5 1.8 3.8 5.5

0.09 0.09 0.27 0.36 0.54 0.7 0.89 1.4 1.8 2.3 4.8 7.4

0.11 0.11 0.34 0.47 0.66 0.86 1.2 1.6 2.3 3.1 5.8 9.3

Max DR L1 – – 760 760 1600 1600 1600 3600 3600 3600 10000 10000

Load Capacity (N)*1 L2 L1 DR L2 240 240 – 240 240 – 400 500 1200 400 500 1200 3000 1280 1200 3000 1280 1200 3000 1280 1200 6000 3200 2800 6000 3200 2800 6000 3200 2800 10000 7200 6400 10000 7200 6400

Ordering Details

Assembled Carriages will be adjusted to the Slide to make a system. Simply state the number of systems with the number of carriages per slide: Example: 2 x (3 x AU6034 L200 CS DR + NM60 L3056 P1) (2 systems each with 3 carriages per slide)

Availability of Carriage Options

*Not available on short carriages.

339

T Tamper Proof

*

Controlled Height

NS CS LB CH

Lubricators

Cap seals

Part Number AU 12... 13... AU 20 18... AU 28 18... Larger sizes

DR

Nitrile Seals

Metal Shields

T = Tamper Proof option Leave blank if not required 5 CH = Controlled Height Bearings* Leave blank if not required NS = Nitrile Sealed Bearings Leave blank if not required DR = Double Row Bearings Leave blank if not required

Double Row

Part Number AU... = Assembled Carriage K... = Kit of parts CP... = Carriage plate only Carriage Length ‘L’ = 180mm Lubrication Options CS for Cap Seals* or LB for Lubricators Leave blank if not required

Twin Bearings

AU4434 L180 (CS) (DR) (NS) (CH) (T) + Slide Part Number


Belt Driven Carriages Hepco Belt Driven Carriages are available to suit 10 sizes of Double Edge benefits of the Standard along with many additional features:

in all grades of precision. They have all of the

Carriages may be specified with the Removable Option which is the key feature of the Removable . This allows at any position along its length, without the need for complete disassembly. the carriage to be disengaged from the Each Belt Driven Carriage incorporates a base plate and a Removable Top Plate which can simply be unscrewed and reworked as required. Tapped holes are provided in convenient positions to enable components to be attached. Belt Driven Carriages are normally supplied as Assembled Units (AU type) which are factory assembled and set to the , lubrication devices and load capacities is given on the page for Standard Information regarding the options for

. * 1.

The Belt Driven Carriage incorporates an integral Belt Gripper & Tensioner at each end. The Gripper securely holds the toothed belt and the fixing screws allow controlled pretensioning and adjustment.

Ex ample: Short Carriage w ith Cap Seals on a Spacer Slide LP* 4

Optional Toothed Belt Belt Pitches are AT5 & AT10 F B

A

F

E U

Belt W idths are 20 (for AT5) 25 (for AT10) Max length = 50m V

G Tapped Holes for Customer Use* 4

L* 4 C C

J K M

Spacer Slide

Part Number AU BD 35 AU BD 50 AU BD 44 AU BD 60 AU BD 76

25... 25... 34... 34... 34...

S

N

Cap Seal

H

Bearing For Use Ø W ith Slides 25 S 35 & NS 35 25 S 50 & NS 50 34 M 44 & NM 44 34 M 60 & NM 60 34 M 76 & NM 76

Carriage Part Number AU BD 35 25... AU BD 50 25... AU BD 44 34... AU BD 60 34... AU BD 76 34...

Part Number TP20...& IP20... TP20...& IP20... TP25...& IP25... TP25...& IP25... TP25...& IP25...

W 49.5 49.5 67 67 67

A

B

D *4

C

F *4

E

G *4

35 50 44 60 76

90 112 116 135 150

W1 47 47 67 67 67

13 14 15 17 18

70 82 95 119 139

Pull ey s X 25 25 30 30 30

X1 27 27 32 32 32

150 162 168 199 239

48 60 65 75 100

Y 12 12 15 15 15

50 50 60 75 80

Z 39.4 39.4 56.8 56.8 56.8

100 90 90 115 130

4 4 6 6 6

x x x x x

M6 M6 M8 M8 M8

No of Teeth

27 27 20 20 20

6 6 6 6 6

J *2

H

No of Holes x Thread

x x x x x

M6 M6 M8 M8 M8

Belt Part No. DB 20 AT5... DB 20 AT5... DB 25 AT10... DB 25 AT10... DB 25 AT10...

88 103 114 130 146

P1

P2 & P3

45 47 54 58 60

45.2 47.2 54.2 58.2 60.2

Belt Tension * 5 W orking

Max

560 560 1225 1225 1225

5390 5390 12450 12450 12450

* Notes: page. It is strongly recommended that load and life are determined using the methods shown in the section. 1. For load capacities see Standard 2. Some dimensions will vary by the amount of the grinding allowance according to the grade of slide selected. All Carriages are compatible with all grades of . are selected to be within ±0.005 mm in respect of ' B1' dimension on pages 50-51 compared to Standard Bearings which are 3. CH (Controlled Height) within ±0.025 mm. Customers requiring CH Bearings with the same tolerance band in respect of a number of Carriages should state this on their order. 4. Carriages are available in 2 standard lengths, therefore centres ‘D’ and the number and position of component mounting holes ‘G’ will vary accordingly. Hepco will make carriages to your special length requirements on request. 5. The Max belt tension stated relates to the breaking load, and is provided for comparison purposes only. The working belt tension should not be exceeded when used with Hepco pulleys and grippers. or controlled height . 6. The removable option is not available in conjunction with 7. The IP 25 P15 idler pulley is fitted with 2 off 6302 2RS deep groove ball bearings (C = 11400N, Co = 5400N per bearing). The IP 20 P12 idler pulley is fitted with 2 off 6001 2RS deep groove ball bearings (C = 5070N, Co = 2360N).

340


Belt Driven Carriages In addition to the Carriage, Hepco will supply the necessary belt and pulleys to complete the system. Belts are steel reinforced polyurethane, and have the high strength AT tooth profile. Bored drive pulleys with zero backlash AT profile teeth are available in one size to provide a useful driving ratio for most applications. Idler pulleys are plain without teeth and are supplied complete with fitted deep groove ball bearings, ready to fit onto a shaft. Customers wishing to run the Carriage on a Flat would otherwise foul the heads of the screws.

must specify the counterbored slide fixing hole option as the belt

Customers requiring a beam mounted Belt Driven Carriage with pulleys should consider the Hepco DLS Linear Transmission which is a complete ready to mount positioning system including drive motor if required. Please send for the DLS catalogue. See Application Ex amples on page 133

Ex ample: Short Carriage w ith Lubricators on a Flat Slide

Y

Optional Toothed Drive Pulley

Z

W

X

Y

Optional Plain Idler Pulley

Z

W1

Belt Gripper & Tensioner

Belt Tensioning Screws

End Cover

Belt Clamp Screw

X1 Deep groove ball d)*7 bearings (

T - Top Plate Fixing Screws

Clamp Plate

Removable Top Plate

Belt Gripper

Tension Set Screw

C Belt

C Q

P R Eccentric Bearing

K 18 18 22.5 22.5 22.5

L *4 150 160 200 224 244

230 240 280 304 344

LP *4 138 148 184 208 228

M

218 8x3 228 10 x 3.5 264 8 x 3 288 10 x 3.5 328 12 x 4

Ordering Details

Lubricator

Flat Slide

Concentric Bearing

N *2

P

P1 & P2

P3

25 40 26 42 58

25.4 40.4 26.4 42.4 58.4

Q

16.6 9 16.6 9 21.3 11.5 21.3 11.5 21.3 11.5

D

R *2 P1

P2 & P3

2.4 2.4 3.1 3.1 3.1

2.5 2.5 3.2 3.2 3.2

T *4

S 55 55 70 70 70

4 5 5 5 5

x x x x x

M6 M6 M8 M8 M8

5 5 5 5 5

U x x x x x

M6 70 M6 88 M8 90 M8 109 M8 124

AUBD4434 L200 (R) (CS) (DR) (NS) (CH) (T) +

Part Number AU... = Assembled Carriage Carriage Length ‘L’ = 200 mm R = Removable Carriage Option Leave blank if not required* 6 Lubrication Options or LB for CS = Leave blank if not required

V *4 97 112 130 156 188

180 192 215 236 288

Carriage ~Weight ( kg) *4 1.2 1.7 1.6 2.3 2.0 2.8 3.4 4.3 4.1 5.6

Part Number

T= option Leave blank if not required CH = Controlled Height *3 Leave blank if not required NS = Nitrile Sealed Leave blank if not required DR = Double Row Leave blank if not required

Ordering Details for Pulley s & Belts TP 20 AT5 T27 P12 0 TP 25 AT10 T20 P15 0 IP 20 P12 IP 25 P15 DB 20 AT5 L2345 DB 25 AT10 L3456

Toothed Drive Pulley for 20 mm wide AT5 belt with 27 teeth & 12 mm plain bore. Toothed Drive Pulley for 25 mm wide AT10 belt with 20 teeth & 15 mm plain bore. Idler Pulley for 20 mm wide belt with fitted bearings to run on 12 mm Ø shaft. Idler Pulley for 25 mm wide belt with fitted bearings to run on 15 mm Ø shaft. Drive Belt 20 mm wide with AT5 tooth profile. L2345 is the required length in mm. Drive Belt 25 mm wide with AT10 tooth profile. L3456 is the required length in mm.

341


Rack Driven Carriages Hepco Rack Driven Carriages are available to suit 5 sizes of Double Edge Spacer (with fitted racks) in all grades of precision. They have all of the benefits of the Standard type along with many additional features including microwith the rack. adjustment facility for achieving the correct engagement of the Rack Driven Carriages include the Hepco Worm , Drive and Shaft of suitable ratio. The Gearbox may be supplied coupled with an intergral Hepco AC Motor which is the most economical means of producing point-to-point linear motion, and which may be controlled for speed and acceleration via the , which is available from Hepco. The Gearbox can also be supplied with an adaptor flange and input shaft coupling tailored to suit other makes or types of motors including steppers and servos which benefit from the low backlash of the Hepco Gearbox. Bespoke carriages are available on short delivery for customers wishing to use their own motor, gearbox and pinion. Part Number AU RD 44 34... AU RD 60 34... AU RD 76 34... AU RD 76 54... AU RD 120 54...

Use with Slides NM 44...R NM 60...R NM76...R NL76...R NL120...R

A ~ 44 60 76 76 120

F1*4

F

B

G

G1

G2

H

28.8 20.3 12.3 27.2 24.5

22 22 22 33 33

97.8 105.3 113.3 141.2 182.5

56 56 56 80 80

J

K

N

P

P1

18 18 18 20 20

22.5 22.5 22.5 36.5 36.5

70 70 70 98 98

Standard Removable

38.2 72.3 74.8 29.7 88.3 90.8 21.7 104.3 106.8 41.2 119.1 123 38.5 163.1 167

133 144 154 193 240

43 74.1 43 74.1 74.1 43 100.6 57 119.8 111.3

Please see other table for dimensions C, D, E & L L M - Tapped holes for customer use (optional)* 5

E D

C

=

= Double Edge Spacer Slide Rack Assembly

For dimensions & specifications of the AC Motor, Worm Gearbox & Drive Flange see pages 354-355

B

G1

F1

~A

G2

V - rack & pinion tooth size (module)

G1 F

G

y Datum point for customer holesM

x

J K

Cap Seal (optional)

Lubricator (optional) V1 Pinion PCD

Concentric Bearings on this side

Shaft Pinion BlankingPlugs for Cap Seal & Lubricator holes supplied as necessary

Pinion adjuster for correct mesh

Worm Gearbox with hollow shaft BlankingPlugs x 4 (supplied)

W1

Drive Flange

W2

W

W3

W4

N S

Q

P T U

R

P1

Q1

Z

* Notes: 1. The maximum load capacities quoted on the Standard and Removable pages, assume lubrication at the interface of and . This can best be achieved by using or . It is strongly recommended that load and life are determined using methods shown in the section. 2. Some dimensions will vary by the amount of the grinding allowance according to the grade of selected. All are compatible with all grades of Slide. 3. CH (Controlled Height) are selected to be within Âą0.005 mm in respect of ' B1' dimension on pages 350-351compared to Standard Bearings which are within Âą0.025 mm. Customers requiring CH Bearings with the same tolerance band in respect of a number of should state this on their order. 4. The Carriage and fixing centres F1 are optimised for use with any precision grade of . Customers making their own carriage plate should calculate their drilling centres for the particular grade of Slide selected. Please see Assembled Systems or individual component page for details of calculations. 5. Any number and size of tapped mounting holes ' M' can be provided in any available position. These may be specified in the ordering details after the designation M by stating the co-ordinates X & Y relative to the datum point, followed by the tapped hole size. Ex ample: M - X10Y25M6 - x=10 mm, y=25 mm, hole size = M6. Care should be taken to avoid any hole position that bridges the contact area between and carriage plate as this will allow grease to escape. 6. The removable option is not available in conjunction with or Controlled Height . 7. The quoted rack drive force is determined by the rack and size, bearings and gears, and the duty. Please go to our web site: www.tea.net to download drive calculations.

342


Rack Driven Carriages Carriages may be specified as the Removable type which incorporates Double Eccentric and allows the disengagement of the from the at any position along its length without the need for complete disassembly. . More Rack Driven Carriages are normally supplied as Assembled Units (AU type) which are factory assembled and set to the specific information regarding the options for , lubrication devices and load capacities is given on the pages for both Standard and Removable * 1. For details of linear drive performance, please see the section. For best performance, the teeth should be lubricated with No. 2 consistency lithium soap-based grease.

See Application E xample on page 336 Q 21.3 21.3 21.3 34.7 34.7

Q1

R

34 34 34 54 54

T

S

17 17 17 25 25

P1

P2 & P3

42 42 42 58.5 58.5

42.25 42.25 42.25 58.75 58.75

8 10 12 15 45

U

V

V1

P1 & P2

P3

MOD

PCD

26 42 58 50 94

26.5 42.5 58.5 50.5 94.5

1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2

42 42 42 54 54

W

W1

W2

W3

W4

Z

35 35 35 34.5 34.5

71 71 71 72.5 72.5

5.4 5.4 5.4 6.5 6.5

7.5 7.5 7.5 9.5 9.5

25 25 25 32 32

118 118 118 147 147

Rack Drive Force/N* 7 400 400 400 700 700

Specify ing the Format and Size of the Carriage 3 styles of Carriage are available with motor mounting positions as shown in the diagram below. The style and size are specified by selecting the required values for dimensions C, D, E, & L in the table below the diagram. Any values for these dimensions may be chosen subject to the recommended limitations in the table. If Lubricators are specified with style 2 Carriage, these will be offset to one another as indicated in the diagram. The motor and gearbox can be mounted in any one of 8 orientations. Please see pages 354-355 for details. L C

L

L E

E C

D

Style 1

Style 2

E D

C

D

Style 3

D1

Minimum Recommended Values

Carriage Style

Part Number

Style 1

AU RD...34... AU RD...54... AU RD...34... AU RD...54... AU RD...34... AU RD...54...

Style 2 Style 3

C 36 51 36 51 E+92* E+119*

With Cap S eals E D C+D+92* F1 F1 C+D+119* 182* C+92* 237* C+119* F1 59 F1 73.5

C L 18 E+60 28 E+75 18 C+D+36 28 C+D+51 C+D+36 E+73* C+D+51 E+91*

W ith Lubricators D1 D E – F1 C+D+73* – F1 C+D+91* 124 177* C+89* 154 235* C+118* – F1 59 – F1 73.5

L E+60 E+75 C+D+18 C+D+28 C+D+18 C+D+28

Figures marked * are the minimums which can be achieved without the flange covering the stud counterbore or the or fixings. Smaller values of these dimensions can be achieved if overlap is acceptable to the customer. W hen specifying such reduced dimensions, the customer should ensure that the does not interfere with either Bearings, Cap Seals or Lubricators.

Ordering Details AURD4434 L288 C36 D100 E228 (M) (R ) (DR) (NS) (CH) (CS) (T) Part Number AU... = Assembled Carriage Carriage Length ‘L’ = 288mm Dimension ‘C’ = 36 mm Dimension ‘D’ = 100 mm Dimension ‘E’ = 228 mm M - Customer mounting holes* 5 Leave blank if not required R for Removable Carriage Option Leave blank if not required* 6

T = Tamper Proof option Leave blank if not required Lubrication Options: CS for or LB for Leave blank if not required CH = Controlled Height *3 Leave blank if not required NS = Nitrile Sealed Leave blank if not required DR = Double Row Leave blank if not required

AC Motor/ W orm Gearbox page 50-51 - Please state part number as the second line of your order. Double Edge Spacer Slide Rack Assembly pages 344-345 Please state part number as the third line of your order.

343


Double Edge Spacer Slides Hepco Double Edge Spacer Slides are available in 11 sizes and three precision grades to meet exactly the requirements of almost any linear motion application. They are zone hardened on the 'V' edges to provide an extremely hard wearing surface. Grades P1 & P2 are precision ground on the V running faces to a high degree of accuracy and parallelism, with P1 being ground on the mounting surface as well. The unground version P3 is also sufficiently accurate for many applications. Please see System Selector for comparative data. In addition to the fixing hole options shown below, Slides are also available without holes if preferred. Slide fixing holes are accurately positioned, allowing customers to pre-drill their mounting holes. All Hepco Slides are left 'soft' in the centre portion to allow for subsequent machining if required. The one piece construction of the Spacer Slide bolts directly to the mounting surface of the machine, providing the required running clearance for Bearings and Lubrication Devices. A central keyway is provided for simple location by means of Hepco Dowel Pins or customer's own key. In cases where Cap Seals or Lubricators are not being used, the precision datum edges on the spacer portion of the Slide may be used for location against a machined register *5.

Slides with Counterbored Holes

Part Number NMS NV NV NS NS NS NM NM NM NL NL

12... 20... 28... 25... 35... 50... 44... 60... 76... 76... 120...

Use With Standard ...J13... ...J18... ...J18... ...J25... ...J25... ...J25... ...J34... ...J34... ...J34... ...J54... ...J54...

Bearings* Slimline – ...J195... ...J195... ...J265... ...J265... ...J265... ...J360... ...J360... ...J360... ...J580... ...J580...

4

A ~Slide Width

12 20 28 25 35 50 44 60 76 76 120

B P1 & P2

Slide with Tapped Holes

C & D* P3

12.37 13.25 20.37 21.01 28.37 29.01 25.74 26.58 35.74 36.38 50.74 51.38 44.74 45.58 60.74 61.38 76.74 77.38 76.74 77.58 120.74 121.38

1,2

Slide only with rack

20.5 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 88 88

– 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 30 30

E

Slide with Fitted Rack

F

H

G

±0.2

P1

P2 & P3

P1

P2 & P3

45 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 180 180

3.0 4.21 4.21 4.71 4.71 4.71 6.21 6.21 6.21 9.21 9.21

3.2 4.42 4.42 4.93 4.93 4.93 6.42 6.42 6.42 9.43 9.43

6.2 8 8 10 10 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 19.5 19.5

6.4 8.2 8.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 12.7 12.7 12.7 19.7 19.7

4 5 6 6 8 10 8 10 12 15 45

1.8 2 2.5 2.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 4 5 9.5

1,3

P1 & P2

P3

K Ø

P1 & P2

P3

8.5 12 20 15 25 40 26 42 58 50 94

8.9 12.4 20.4 15.4 25.4 40.4 26.4 42.4 58.4 50.4 94.4

1.7 1.75 1.75 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.3 2.3 2.3 4.8 4.8

1976 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020

1976 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000

H1

J

L Max*

*Notes: 1. Any length of Slide within L max dimension can be supplied, but for optimum price and delivery time, Slide lengths should be specified which maintain the C and D dimensions in the table above. In all cases unless otherwise specified by the customer, C and D dimensions will be supplied equal. The position of the teeth on the rack mounted versions relative to the mounting holes or slide ends, will vary. Rack mounted Slides with a regulated tooth position can be supplied on request. 2. The C and D dimensions for rack mounted slides are less than that for plain versions to provide support of the rack close to its end. Slide lengths which require C and D dimensions which differ from this may require an extra hole at a non-standard pitch. 3. Where Slides longer than the maximum length are required, lengths can be matched suitable for butting. 4. In the table, the preferred choices of Bearings to use with each Slide are quoted. However, other combinations are possible. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for further information on Hepco Mix and Match. 5. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily absolutely straight. If straightness is important, the slide may be set by bolting down against a register or by utilizing the central keyway. If Hepco Dowel Pins are used, these should be positioned one each end central between the Slide end first hole and one located central between each pair of fixing holes, or as deemed necessary for the application. 6. The NL120 section recess has a wider tolerance than the keyways in the other sections. One side only should be used as a register face if precise straightness is important. 7. Low head cap screws DIN 6912 are not universally stocked, so Hepco offers them as a convenience to customers in a single length for each thread size (see table). The NL120 Rack Slide Assembly (and all plain Double Edged Spacer Slides) is secured with cap screws to DIN 912 which are widely stocked.

344


Double Edge Spacer Slides The rigidity of the Spacer Slide enables it to be used as a self-supporting element or construction member of the machine, when used in conjunction with Hepco Flange Clamps. Slide deflection is covered in the Calculations section. All Double Edge Spacer Slides with the exception of the smallest are available with a rack attached by dowels to the top surface. This becomes a fully serviceable element when bolted down to the mounting surface, providing a convenient means to power the linear movement. Rack teeth are machined to a high degree of precision and conform to ISO 1328 grade 8. Racks may comprise a number of lengths, precision mounted to a single Slide. Pinions which mate with these Racks are included in the GV3 range as are Rack Driven Carriages which mount directly to the Slide and may be specified with optional AC Motor, to provide a complete drive solution. Note that Double Edge Spacer Slides with the fitted rack option are not compatible with Carriages using the Slimline Bearings, as there is no clearance for the Rack. See Application Examples on pages 323 and 326.

Available Grades of Slide

M

M1

3.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 7 7 7 9 9 14 11

6.2 x 3.1 8 x 4.1 10 x 5.1 10 x 5.1 11 x 6.1 11 x 6.1 11 x 6.1 15 x 8.1 15 x 8.1 20 x 12 18 x 10

N – 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 14 11

N1 – 7.6 x 2.9 7.6 x 2.9 9.6 x 4 9.6 x 4 9.6 x 4 11 x 4.5 11 x 4.5 11 x 4.5 20 x 8 18 x 10

P M3 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M12 M10

P1*7 Screw Part No. – M4 x 20 M4 x 20 M5 x 25 M5 x 25 M5 x 25 M6 x 30 M6 x 30 M6 x 30 M12 x 50 –

Q

– FS420 FS420 FS525 FS525 FS525 FS630 FS630 FS630 FS1250 –

– 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 8

R – 6.35 6.35 7.8 7.8 7.8 8.3 8.3 8.3 13.2 13.2

S

T

– – 6.35 6.2 6.35 6.2 7.85 8.5 7.85 8.5 7.85 8.5 11.7 10.8 11.7 10.8 11.7 10.8 18.6 18 18 18.6

U – 4 4 6 6 6 7.5 7.5 7.5 13.3 13.3

V – 5.65 5.65 6.85 6.85 6.85 10.2 10.2 10.2 16.6 16.6

W Mod

Dowel

X K6

Y m6

Z

Pin

– 0.7 0.7 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2

SDP4 SDP5 SDP6 SDP6 SDP8 SDP10 SDP8 SDP10 SDP12 SDP15 –

4 4 4 4 6 8 6 8 10 10 –

4 5 6 6 8 10 8 10 12 15 –

6.75 6 6 6 8 12 8 12 15 15 –

Z1

Weight - kg/m Slide Only Slide+Rack

– 1.75 2.25 2.25 2.75 3.25 2.75 3.25 3.75 4.75 –

0.5 1.0 1.6 1.5 2.3 3.2 3.5 5.5 7 10 15

– 1.4 2.0 2.3 3.0 4.0 4.7 5.7 8.2 13 18

Part Number NMS 12... NV 20... NV 28... NS 25... NS 35... NS 50... NM 44... NM 60... NM 76... NL 76... NL 120...

Ordering Details NS35 L1290 P1 R (T) (C15) (D15) Part Number Slide Length ‘L’ = 1290mm Precision grade: options are P1, P2 & P3 R - Rack mounted on Slide (not available on NMS12) Leave blank if not required

Example: 1 x NM60 L480 P2 R 7 x SDP 10 6 x FS630

Bespoke values of ‘C’ & ‘D“ dimensions Leave blank if standard *1, 2 Fixing hole style: T - tapped fixing holes; N- no holes Leave blank for counterbored holes (Options T & N are only available with Rack option to special order)

Double Edge Spacer Slide x 480 mm long in precision grade 2, fitted with Rack. 10mm Ø Dowel Pins (optional). Low head socket cap screws M6 thread x 30 mm long (optional).

345


Single Edge Spacer Slides Hepco Single Edge Spacer Slides are available in 5 sizes and three precision grades. They are zone hardened on the 'V' edge to provide an extremely hard wearing surface. Grades P1 & P2 are precision ground on the V faces and datum edges to a high degree of accuracy and parallelism, with P1 being ground on the top and bottom faces as well. The unground version P3 is also sufficiently accurate for many applications (please see System Selector for comparative data). In addition to the fixing hole options shown below, Slides are available without holes if preferred. Slide fixing holes are accurately positioned, allowing customers to pre-drill their mounting holes *5. All Hepco Slides are left 'soft' in the centre portion to allow subsequent machining if required. The one piece construction of the Spacer Slide bolts directly to the mounting surface of the machine, providing the required running clearance for Bearings and Lubrication devices. A central keyway is provided for simple location by means of Hepco Dowel Pins or customer's own key. In cases where Cap Seals or Lubricators are not being used, the Precision datum edge on the spacer portion of the Slide may be used for location against a machined register *4.

Slide with counterbored Holes

Part Number NMS NV NS NM NL

E... E... E... E... E...

Use with Bearings*3 Slimline Standard ...J13... ...J18... ...J25... ...J34... ...J54...

â&#x20AC;&#x201C; ...J195... ...J265... ...J360... ...J580...

Slide with Tapped Holes

A

B

~Slide Width P1 & P2

11 16 21 29 43

11.19 16.19 21.37 29.37 43.37

P3 11.71 16.72 21.89 29.89 43.89

B1 P3 P1 & P2 5 6.5 8.5 10.5 16

5.3 6.7 8.7 10.7 16.2

Rack Cut Slide

C*1 20.5 43 43 43 88

D*1 20.5 43 43 43 88

E Âą0.2

P1

45 90 90 90 180

3 4.21 4.71 6.21 9.21

F P2 & P3 3.2 4.42 4.93 6.42 9.43

G P2 & P3

H

P1 6.2 8 10 12.5 19.5

6.4 8.2 10.2 12.7 19.7

4 4 6 8 12

*Notes: 1. Any length of Slide within L max dimension can be supplied, but for optimum price and delivery time, Slide lengths should be specified which maintain the C and D dimensions in the table above. In all cases unless otherwise specified by the customer, C and D dimensions will be supplied equal. The position of the teeth on the rack cut versions relative to the mounting holes or Slide ends, will vary. Rack cut Slides with a regulated tooth position can be supplied on request. 2. Where Slides longer than the maximum length are required, lengths can be matched suitable for butting. Some sizes of rack cut slides are not always stocked in maximum lengths. In such cases the customer will be offered matched lengths for butting. 3. In the table, the preferred choices of Bearings to use with each Slide are quoted. However, other combinations are possible. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for further information on Hepco Mix and Match. 4. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily absolutely straight. If straightness is important, the slide may be set by bolting down against a register. If Hepco Dowel Pins are used, these should be positioned one each end centrally between the Slide end first hole and one located centrally between each pair of fixing holes, or as deemed necessary for the application. 5. For Slide size NVE, the counterbore diameter 'N' for the rack cut grade has been regulated to suit socket head cap screws DIN 912 with a plain head which has a slightly smaller diameter than those with a knurled finish. This is to maximize the strength between the counterbore and the root of the rack teeth. Suitable screws are available from Hepco if required: Part No PFS415 (M4 x 15 long). Customers are advised not to pre-drill fixing holes for these unless they have the means to control their hole positions very accurately. 6. The Max Rack Force quoted is that continuous drive force which can be sustained by a well lubricated rack used in conjunction with the appropriate Hepco Pinion.

346


Single Edge Spacer Slides The Single Edge format allows two Slide V's to be mounted wide apart, thus providing a considerable increase in moment load capacity, stiffness and stability. The space between the two Slides can be made sufficient to allow central positioning of the drive, whether by means of ball screw, air cylinder or other type of actuator. Single Edge Spacer Slides are available with a rack cut into the back face, providing a convenient means of driving. Rack teeth are machined to a high degree of precision and conforms to ISO 1328 grade 8. The large face width of the racks makes these the best choice for applications which require high driving forces (see drive Calculations). Pinions which suit the Racks are also available. Shaft type pinions can be coupled directly to the Hepco Geared Motor or Gearbox, which can be mounted using the Drive Flange to the customer's own carriage plate. Although not hardened, the rear face of the Slide is sufficiently durable to act as track for Hepco Track Rollers.

Available Grades of Slide

H1 1.8 1.5 2.5 3 4

J P1 & P2

P3

9.25 12 16 20 30

9.65 12.4 16.4 20.4 30.4

K 1.7 1.75 2.6 2.3 4.8

L Max*1,2 P1 & P2 P3 1976 4020 4020 4020 4020

M

N*5

P

4020 3.5 6.2 x 3.1 M3 4020 4.5 8 x 4.1 M4 4020 5.5 10 x 5.1 M5 6000 7 11 x 6.1 M6 6000 11 18 x 10 M10

R

S

3.80 4.5 4.82 5.8 6.15 7.4 7.69 9.25 11.6 14.1

W Dowel Mod Pin 0.5 0.7 1 1.25 2

X K6

SDP4 4 SDP4 4 SDP6 4 SDP8 6 SDP12 10

Y m6

Z

Z1

4 4 6 8 12

6.75 6.75 6 8 15

– – 2.25 2.75 3.75

Weight Max Rack kg/m Force (N)*6 0.55 1.0 1.6 2.6 6.0

180 300 500 1000 1600

Part Number NMS E... NV E... NS E... NM E... NL E...

Ordering Details NME L1930 P1 R (T) (C15) (D15) Part Number Slide Length ‘L’ = 1930 mm Precision grade: options are P1, P2 & P3 R - Rack mounted on Slide, leave blank if not required

Example: 1 x N S E L2066 P3 N 24 x SDP6

Bespoke values of ‘C’ & ‘D“ dimensions Leave blank if standard *1 Fixing hole style: T - tapped fixing holes N - no holes, leave blank for counterbored holes

Single Edge Spacer Slide in precision grade 3, 2066 mm long with no holes. 6mm Ø head dowel pins (optional).

347


Double Edge Flat Slides Hepco Double Edge Flat Slides are available in a range of 11 sizes corresponding to those of the Double Edge Spacer Slides. Single Edge Flat Slides are also available in 5 complementary sections. All Flat Slides come in 3 grades of precision and are zone hardened on the 'V' edges to provide an extremely hard wearing surface. Grade P1 and P2 are precision ground on the V and opposing faces to a high degree of accuracy and parallelism with P1 being ground on the mounting surfaces as well *4. The unground version P3 is also sufficiently accurate for many applications (please see System Selector for comparative data). Flat Slides are supplied with plain fixing holes as standard and with counterbored holes to suit low head cap screws as an option. Unground grade P3 slides are available without holes if preferred. The counterbored option is necessary if the Double Edge Flat Slides are used in conjunction with Belt Driven Carriages in order to provide an uninterrupted path for the belt. Also, where there is insufficient room between slide and carriage plate for a conventional screw head (possible in 'Mix and Matchâ&#x20AC;? situations or where customer's own flat carriage plates are used in conjunction with Slimline Bearings). The Slide fixing holes are accurately positioned, allowing customers to pre-drill their mounting holes.

Slide with Standard Holes

Slide with Counterbored Holes

Available Grades of Slide

Part Number Double Edge

Single Edge

MS 12... MS E... V V

20... 28...

S S S

25... 35... 50...

V E...

S E... M 44... M 60... M 76... M E... L 76... L 120... L E...

Use With Bearings*3

A

B

C

Standard

Slimline

~Slide Width

P1 & P2

P3

...J13... ...J13... ...J18... ...J18... ...J18... ...J25... ...J25... ...J25... ...J25... ...J34... ...J34... ...J34... ...J34... ...J54... ...J54... ...J54...

...J195... ...J195... ...J195... ...J265... ...J265... ...J265... ...J265... ...J360... ...J360... ...J360... ...J360... ...J580... ...J580... ...J580...

12 20 28 25 35 50 44 60 76 76 120 -

12.55 20.37 28.37 25.81 35.81 50.82 44.81 60.81 76.81 76.81 120.81 -

13.13 21.01 29.01 26.58 36.58 51.58 45.58 61.58 77.58 77.58 121.58 -

13 20.5 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 88 43

D 13 20.5 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 88 43

E

F

Âą0.2

P1

P2 & P3

30 45 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 180 90

3.05 3.05 4.27 4.27 4.27 4.78 4.78 4.78 4.78 6.28 6.28 6.12 6.28 9.12 9.12 9.12

3.2 3.2 4.42 4.42 4.42 4.93 4.93 4.93 4.93 6.42 6.42 6.42 6.42 9.43 9.43 9.43

*Notes: 1. Any length of Slide within L max dimension can be supplied, but for optimum price and delivery time, Slide lengths should be specified which maintain the C and D dimensions in the table above. In all cases unless otherwise specified by the customer, C and D dimensions will be supplied equal. 2. Where Slides longer than the maximum length are required, lengths can be matched suitable for butting. 3. In the table, the preferred choices of Bearings to use with each Slide are quoted. However, other combinations are possible. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au for further information on Hepco Mix and Match. 4. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily absolutely straight. If straightness is important, the slide may be set by bolting down against a register. 5. Counterbored holes for Flat Slides are designed to suit socket cap head screws DIN 6912. These screws are not universally stocked, so Hepco offers them as a convenience to customers in a single length for each thread size (see table).

348


Single Edge Flat Slides All Hepco Flat Slides are left 'soft' outside the area of the V's to allow subsequent machining if required. Flat Slides are useful where weight saving or minimum inertia is required in cases where the slide is the moving component. Also, where it is practical to design a support profile as an integral part of the machine to provide running clearance for the Bearing and Lubrication devices. The Single Edged format allows two slide V's to be mounted wide apart, thus providing a considerable increase in moment load capacity, stiffness and stability. The space between the two slides can be made sufficient to allow central positioning of the drive whether by means of ball screw, air cylinder or other types of actuator. Single Edge Flat Slides can be attached to commonly available square and rectangular hollow section material by means of tapped hexagonal bar to achieve a low cost, high strength structure complete with linear guide (see page 323). See Application Examples on pages 323-326.

Slide with Standard Holes

Slide with Counterbored Holes

Available Grades of Slide

G

H

~Slide Width P1 & P2

11 16 19 25 32

11.37 16.37 19.46 25.46 32.46

J

K

P3

P1 & P2

P3

11.8 16.8 20.0 26.0 33.0

4.5 6 6.5 8 10

4.7 6.2 6.7 8.2 10.2

Ø

3.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 4.5 7 7 7 5.5 7 9 9 7 11.5 11.5 9

L Max

Screw SIze P1 & P2

M3 M3 M4 M5 M4 M6 M6 M6 M5 M6 M8 M8 M6 M10 M10 M8

1000 1000 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020 4020

M1*5

M P3

1976 1976 4020 4020 5500 6000 6000 6000 5500 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000

Screw SIze Part No.

M4 x 10 FS410 4.5 M4 x 10 FS410 4.5 M4 x 10 FS410 4.5 M5 x 10 FS510 5.5 M5 x 10 FS510 5.5 M5 x 10 FS510 5.5 M5 x 10 FS510 5.5 M6 x 12 FS612 7 M6 x 12 FS612 7 M6 x 12 FS612 7 M6 x 12 FS612 7 11.5 M10 x 20 FS1020 11.5 M10 x 20 FS1020 M8 x 20 FS820 9

N

Weight kg/m

Ø x Depth Double Edge Single Edge

8 x 2.8 8 x 2.8 8 x 2.8 10 x 3.5 10 x 3.5 10 x 3.5 10 x 3.5 11 x 4 11 x 4 11 x 4 11 x 4 18 x 6 18 x 6 15 x 6

0.23 0.6 0.9 0.8 1.3 1.7 1.9 2.7 3.4 5 8.5 -

0.22 0.5 0.7 1.2 2.2

Ordering Details M60 L930 P1 (R) (C15) (D15) Part Number Slide Length ‘L’ = 930 mm Precision grade: options are P1, P2 & P3 R - Rack mounted on Slide, leave blank if not required

Example: 1 x LE 2156 P3 C 24 x FS820

Bespoke values of ‘C’ & ‘D“ dimensions in mm Leave blank if standard *1 Fixing hole options are: C - counterbored holes (not available on MS12 & MSE) N - no holes (P3 grade only), leave blank for plain holes

Single Edge Flat Slide x 2156 mm long in unground grade 3 with counterbored holes. Low head socket cap screws M8 thread x 20 mm long (optional).

349


Standard Bearings All Hepco Standard Bearings are compatible with all grades of Slide and although designed to be used with particular sizes of slide, may be “mixed and matched” in many instances. The following Bearing formats and fixing methods may be chosen to cater for most design requirements. The Twin Bearing type which is the default choice, comprises two individual deep groove ball bearings on a single stud. This construction offers some compliance allowing smoother running, easy adjustment and greater tolerance of misalignment. The Double Row Bearing type (DR) incorporates a one-piece bearing with two ball tracks. This offers higher load capacity, especially in the radial direction and is less susceptible to entrapment of debris. Both types of bearing have been designed specially for Slide system applications and their performance confirmed by rigorous testing. External dimensions are identical. The Nitrile Sealed option (NS) available for both bearing formats, provides a higher degree of sealing against ingress of water and debris than does the default metal shielded type. A small increase in friction may result. The Through Hole Fixing type is available in two stud lengths covering most thicknesses of carriage or mounting plate, the short stud version being compatible with the Hepco Carriage plates.

Through Fixing Type (SJ/LJ)

Short Stud (SJ)

Part Number

... J 13 ... ... J 18 ... ... J 25 ... ... J 34 ... ... J 54 ...

Eccentric (E&DE)

Socket Tool (for part no. & tightening torques please contact T.E.A.)

Long Stud (LJ)

Concentric (C)

Adjusting Wrench (for part no. & tightening torques please contact T.E.A.)

C

C1

C2

Use With 9 Slide Section*

A

B

B1

Short Stud

Long Stud

Short Stud

Long Stud

Short Stud

Long Stud

D

D1

MS & NMS V & NV S & NS M & NM L & NL

12.7 18 25 34 54

10.1 12.4 16.6 21.3 34.7

5.47 6.75 9 11.5 19

5.8 7.4 9.8 13.8 17.8

9.5 14 19 22 30

3 3.4 3.8 6.6 8.2

6.7 10 13 14.8 20.4

2.2 2.4 3.4 5.2 5.7

2.4 2.5 4.9 5.9 7.9

9.51 14.0 20.27 27.13 41.76

4.76 7.0 10.13 13.56 20.88

±0.025

±0.025

S1

T

T1

T2

U

U1

V

W

X

Y

Z

SJ...

Weight ~g LJ... BHJ...C

6.6 10.5 9 8.5 16.4

8.5 10 12 17.5 23.5

3.75 4 5 6.5 10.5

6.75 8 10 12.5 18.5

30 38 50 60 89.5

47.5 54 72 90.5 133

8 11 14 17 25

20 24.5 32 42 62

M3 M4 M5 M6 M8

5.5 7 8.5 10 13

8 7 10 14 20

8 19 48 115 415

8 20 51 120 425

±0.1

7 18 43 105 390

BHJ...E 27 45 105 235 800

*Notes: 1. It is recommended that holes to suit Bearing mounting studs should be reamed to tolerance F6 for a sliding fit. 2. All eccentric Through Fixing type Bearing studs are supplied with sockets for adjustment as shown, with the exception of size 13. 3. Nuts for the Through Fixing type Bearings are chemically blacked on the concentric version and bright zinc plated on the eccentrics for identification purposes. 4. 'R' dimension is both the eccentric offset of the adjusting nut and the total adjustment available at the bearing centre line for 360° rotating of the adjusting nut. 5. Double Eccentric Bearings require different mounting hole centres (Please contact T.E.A. for a faxed data sheet on Removable Carriages to see dimension H1). 6. The Blind Hole eccentric Bearings cannot be fitted with Cap Seals, however Lubricators may be specified instead. 7. Controlled Height Bearings are selected within ±0.005 mm in respect of B1 dimension compared to the normal tolerance of ± 0.025 mm. They are supplied in sets of up to eight Bearings within the same tolerance band. Larger quantities of bearings within the same tolerance band are available on request. 8. The quoted static and dynamic load capacities are based on industry standard calculations. These do not accurately reflect system performance, and are only provided for comparison with other systems. Please use the Max Working Load figures and the load/life calculations of pages 338 - 339 to determine system performance. 9. The preferred Slide choices for each Bearing are listed. Other Slides may be used as shown in the Mix & Match tables, please visit www.tea.net.au

350


Standard Bearings Both versions are available in Concentric type (C) which are fixed, Eccentric type (E), adjustable and Double Eccentric type (DE)*5 which have sufficient adjustment to enable a carriage to be disengaged from the Slide (see application drawing on page 235). All Through Hole Fixing types are available in a Controlled Height version (CH)*7 which minimises variation between Bearings in respect of the important 'B1' dimension. This may be desirable in some high precision applications. The Blind Hole Fixing type (BH) allows mounting into a solid machine base where through mounting holes are not possible, or where the thickness of the mounting plate is too great. The Blind Hole Fixing type is also useful where adjustment from the front is preferred or where access to the opposite side of the mounting hole is restricted. They are available in Concentric type (C) which are fixed, or Eccentric type (E)*6 which are adjustable. All Bearings are greased for life internally. Customers are strongly recommended to provide lubrication to the interface between Bearings and Slide by specifying Hepco Cap Seals which fit over the bearings, or by using Hepco Lubricators. Lubricators greatly increases load capacity and life. See Application Examples on page 323.

Blind Hole Fixing Type (BHJ) Concentric (C)

Eccentric (E)

To calculate drilling centres with all types of Slide, refer to theoretical 'V' apex dimension B or H on the relevant Slide page.*5 'X' - 2 cap screws DIN 912 (supplied)

F E

Metric Fine

G

H

I

J

K

L*

M

M1

N 5 ...E... ...DE...*

5 7 10 12 25

M4 x 0.5 M6 x 0.75 M8 x 1 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5

8 10 14 18 28

0.5 0.6 0.5 0.7 1.6

5.8 7.4 9.8 13.8 17.8

0.8 0.8 1 1.25 1.6

2.2 3.2 5 6 8

2.5 3 4 6

7 10 13 17 22

9 13 17 21 28

0.5 0.7 0.75 1 1.5

Max Working Load Capacities (N) Double Row Bearings

Twin Bearings

Radial

Axial

Radial

Axial

600 1500 3000 5000

190 400 900 2500

120 200 600 1400 3200

60 125 320 800 1800

2

1.9 2.6 2.75 3.6 5.5

+0 -0.03

O*1

P

Q

R*4

S

4 6 8 10 14

7 11 13 15 27

1.5 2 3 4 8

1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 3.0

6.25 8 7 9.5 14.5

-

NS

-

DR

CH

Metal Shields

Nitrile Seals

Twin Bearings

Double Row Bearings

Controlled Height

Bearing Static (Co) and Dynamic (C) Load Capacities (N)*8 For Double Row Bearings Radial Loads Co C

Axial Loads Co C

For each of two Twin Bearings Radial Loads Co C

Options Available

Axial Loads Co C

Part Number

-

-

-

-

265

695

74

194

... J 13 ...

1168

2301

435

857

593

1438

173

419

... J 18 ...

2646

5214

821

1618

1333

3237

326

791

... J 25 ...

5018

9293

1362

2523

2600

5291

557

1270

... J 34 ...

12899 21373

2777

4601

6657

13595

1136

2320

... J54 ...

Ordering Details LJ 25 C (DR) (NS) (CH) Controlled Height*7 Leave blank if not required Nitrile Sealed Bearing Leave blank if metal shields are required Double Row Bearing Leave blank if Twin Bearing is required

Fixing type: Choose from: SJ = Short Stud, LJ = Long Stud & BHJ = Blind Hole Fixing Part Number (~ Bearing Diameter in mm) C = Concentric (fixed), E = Eccentric (adjustable) Or DE = Double Eccentric (for disengagement purposes)

351


Flat Tracks Hepco GV3Flat Tracks are made from high quality carbon steel and are hardened on all four faces to provide an extremely durable running surface. They have been designed to be used with the Hepco range of Track Rollers. Flat Tracks are often used in conjunction with Hepco V Slides in large systems where the design can eliminate the requirement to set slides accurately parallel. Flat Tracks are available in 4 sizes and in a number of quality grades. The P3 grade has a commercial high accuracy on various faces according to the requirements of the application.

straight, however, they may be set to the required degree of straightness during installation. It is recommended that holes in

See Application Examples on our website www.tea.net.au

X

A

E

C* 1

E

D* 1

B

X L * 1,2

F

±0.2for Grades P1 & P2B -0 +0.4 for Grades P3 & P2A

A ±0.025

G

B ±0.025

Socket head cap screw to DIN 912 (not supplied)

P1

P2A

P2B

P3

Chamfer K x 45 ° (min)

Indicates surfaces which are precision ground

Section X-X

Part Number FT 24 12 FT 32 16 FT 40 20 FT 66 33

Use With Track Roller ...R 18... ...R 25... ...R 34... ...R 54...

A

C*1

B

D*1

E

F

P1& P2A P2B & P3 P1 & P2B P2A & P3

12 16 20 33

12.4 16.4 20.4 33.4

24 32 40 66

24.4 32.4 40.4 66.4

20.5 43 43 88

20.5 43 43 88

45 90 90 180

7.5 8.75 12 17

G Ø 6 7 9 14

Screw Size M5 M6 M8 M12

H Ø 10 11 15 20

J ~ 5 6 8 12

K

L*1,2

(min)

(max)

0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4

2000 4020 4020 4020

Weight kg/m 2.3 4 6.3 17

Ordering Details FT4020 L1830 P2A C15 D15 Part Number Track Length ‘L’ =1830 mm Precision grade: options are P1, P2A , P2B & P3

Bespoke values of ‘C’& ‘D’ dimensions Leave blank if standard (see table)

Notes: 2. Where tracks longer than maximum length are required, two or more lengths in grades P1, P2A& P2B can be matched suitable for butting, on request. In these cases the mating ends will be ground square.

352


Narrow Track Rollers

please visit www.tea.net.au

please visit www.tea.net.au

(www.tea.net.au)

289

353


Gearboxes, AC Geared Motors & Drive Flanges Linear motion systems incorporating a Hepco and will need a means to drive the pinion. The Hepco Gearboxes, AC Geared Motors & Drive Flanges provide this function for . The same Gearboxes, Geared Motors & or Rack Cut Single Edge to provide a simple, and easily Drive Flanges can also be used with Separate adjustable linear drive. The Drive Flange which connects the gearbox to the carriage incorporates a unique micro-adjustment facility for achieving correct engagement of the with the rack. Customers using the Drive Flange in conjunction with a carriage of their own for principle). construction will need to provide a keyway to accommodate the sliding key portion P1 (see To obtain the best performance from the rack and pinion drive, it is important that the meshing teeth are lubricated. A No. 2 lithium soap-based grease is recommended for this purpose. In dirty environments, it is advisable to guard against ingress of debris. The Worm Gearboxes are available in ratios from 5:1 to 80:1. Each uses a hardened and ground worm shaft running with a centrifugally cast bronze wheel, with oil bath lubrication. The wheel shaft is supported on high capacity rolling bearings in a high strength aluminium casting. This makes the gearbox strong, accurate, quiet and long lasting. It is also much lighter in weight and more compact than comparable units, making it particularly well suited for dynamic applications. Their low U (Brake M otor) k* 1 g* 1

T (Std Motor)

a* 2 m* 1 hole details

h* 1 j* 1

c*

H

2

S 4 holes tapped with thread P on ØN PCD

b* 2

H

X

90° L

1 e* 1 f*

V (Std Motor)

d* 1

M

K

F

G

W (Brake M otor)

J Hollow Shaft Worm Gearbox with Input Flange Motor* 3 Detail

Gearbox/A C Geared Motor Part Number WG3 WG4 Motor Frame Size* 4 56 63 71

Use with Gearbox WG3 WG3 & WG4 WG3 & WG4

Drive Flange Part Number WGF3 WGF4

F

G

AC Geared Moto r*3

A 72 76

B 75 80

C 77 82

D 38 48

E 33 40

F 39 49

G 41 51

H 57 71

S 60 65 65

T 90 100 100

U 130 140 140

V 167 187 212

W 210 247 272

X 111 123 138

Y 100 100 110

Z 109 113 125

J 15 20

K 25 35

L 5 6

M 17.3 22.8

P Ø Depth M5 10 M6 12

N 62.5 85

Q 67 85

Gearbox Rated Output Torque 17Nm (typical) 32Nm (typical)

R 69 76

Power

Use with Gearbox WG3... WG4...

A1 118 147

B1 35 34.5

C1 75 100

D1 63 88.8

E1 75 88.8

F1 9 9

G1 2 5

2 Pole ‘S’ 90 W 180 W 370 W

H1 49 62.8

J1 14 17

K1 M5 M6

2 Pole ‘L’ 120 W 250 W 550 W

L1 5 6

M1 6 6

4 Pole ‘S’ 60 W 120 W 250 W

N1 48 70

P1 20 25

Q1 2 3

R1 4 5

4 Pole ‘L’ 90 W 180 W 370 W

S1 57 76

T1 43 57

Weight 0.34 kg 0.5 kg

The AC Geared Motor and Worm Gearbox may be mounted onto a in any one of the 8 configurations shown below. The terminal box may take one of 4 positions A...D and the cable exits also have 4 possible positions 1...4. Please use the diagram below as a guide to selection. 1 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

B

2

A

C 1 2

D

3

4

3

4

3

4

2

1 1

Terminal box position A1 is the default, which is usually available on express delivery.

* Notes: 1. The customer’s motor dimensions marked * 1 on the drawing should be advised to Hepco when the input motor flange option is required. 2. The gearbox input flange dimensions marked * 2 on the drawing will be advised to to the customer by Hepco once motor details (see above) have been given. 3. The motor of the standard AC Geared Motor package is integral with the gearbox, saving space, weight & cost, and cannot be removed by the user. Customers who require that the motor should be separable from the gearbox should specify the 2 worm gearbox, and request that a separate motor be fitted. Hepco can supply a range of suitable motors for such requirements. 4. Other motor sizes beyond those listed are available from Hepco, but may not be compatible with the Drive Flange. Please consult T.E.A. Transmisisons.

354


Gearboxes, AC Geared Motors & Drive Flanges backlash and high strength make them suitable for use with servo and stepper motors as well as AC motors. W hen sold separately, Worm Gearboxes have an input flange and shaft coupling which will be tailored to suit the shaft and face details of the customer’s motor. Gearboxes and Geared Motors may be specified with an adjustable torque limiting clutch if required. For the AC motors, Hepco supplies 3 phase squirrel cage type to VDE 0530 supported by DIN 42677. Motors in 3 IEC frame sizes from 56 to 71 can be supplied, each with the choice of short or long field windings and 2 or 4 pole designs (running at approximately 2800 and 1400 rpm respectively). Power ratings from 60W to 0.55kW are available. Motors are rated at 400/ 230V, are protected to IP54, and are finished in blue epoxy paint as standard. Motors with fitted disk brakes, alternative single and three phase windings, special finishes and enhanced IP protection rating are available on request. The AC Geared Motor provides a very cost effective linear drive for simple point-to-point applications, and can easily be to provide a complete drive control system. teamed up with the Hepco Please see the

section for details of linear drive performance. Data sheets available from www.tea.net.au

See Application E xamples on page 331

Z

Drive Flange L1

A1 E1

B1 F1

Y

J1

ØN

K1

H1 E Q

A

A

D1

D

T1 G1 Gearbox body Register Hollow Shaft

Available Ratios 5, 7, 10, 12, 15, 18, 24, 30, 38, 50, 75:1 6.75, 8, 10, 12, 15, 2 0, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80:1

R

M1

WG3 ‘L’ Motor

WG4 ‘S’ Motor

WG3 ‘L’ Motor

4.5 kg 4.8 kg 6.8 kg

4.7 kg 5.3 kg 7.8 kg

– 5.6 kg 7.6 kg

– 6.1 kg 8.6 kg

P1 N1

Section A- A Motor

with Gearb ox size

WG3 ‘S’ Motor

Gearbox

Pinion Adjuster for correct mesh

Shaft Type Pinion

Section of Assembled Gearbox, Flange & Pinion

Drive Flange

for AC Geared Motor & W orm Gearbox W G3 R30 (T) (4) M

56 (L) (2 ) (B) (A) (1)

Part Number Gearbox Reduction Ratio (R30 = 30:1) T = Optional Torque Limiter Leave blank if not required Gearbox mounting position Choose 1-8 or leave blank for unassembled* 2 Input Options: F = Flange* 1,2; M = fitted AC Motor Drive Flange* Shaft Pinion*

4 cap screws to DIN9 12 ge) (supplied w

Hollow Shaft

retaining washer & screw (included with pinion)

Ordering Details

R1 Q1

Weight of Gear box with Input Flange for Motor 1.6 kg 2.5 kg

Weight of AC Geared Motor

C1 S1

Torque Limiter Option

Cable Exit Position: choose 1-4 Terminal Box Position: choose A-D B = Brake Motor Leave blank if not required Motor Poles: 2 =~2800RPM or 4 = 1400RPM Motor field winding: S = short or L = long Motor frame size: 56, 63 or 71* 4

These items only apply if AC motor is required.

A B C

Please state part number as second line of the order (see table above left). Please state part number as third line of the order - (data www.tea.net.au)

* Customers requiring Geared Motor or Worm Gearbox for use with included as standard.

should not specify Drive Flange or Shaft

355

as they are


GV3 Load / Life Calculations V Slide and Bearing Systems The load capacity and life of Hepco V Slide Systems will be determined by several factors. The key issues are the size and type of Bearing and Slide, the presence or absence of lubrication and the magnitude and direction of loads. Other factors including operational speed, length of stroke and environmental conditions may also have an effect*2. When calculating the system load and life, one of two approaches should be taken: If the system uses a conventional 4 bearing carriage (such as any of the Hepco Carriages), then this may be treated as a single item, and the load and life be determined as in the 4 Bearing Carriage Calculations below; alternatively, each V bearing can be treated separately according to the method shown in the Individual Bearing Calculations section.

4 Bearing Carriage Calculations When calculating the loading and life of a V Slide System using a 4 bearing carriage, the loading on the system should be resolved into the direct load components, L1 and L2, and the moment loading components M, Mv and Ms (see diagram on right). The maximum direct and moment load capacities for standard carriages are given in the tables below. Capacities are included for both 'dry' and 'lubricated'*4 conditions this refers to the 'V' contact, since all bearings are greased internally for life. Values are based on shock-free duty.

Dry System, Twin and DR Type Carriage L 1(max) L 2(max) M S (max) M V (max) Part Numbers N N Nm Nm 90 90 0.5 45 x D AU... 12 13... 180 180 1.6 90 x D AU... 20 18... 180 180 2.3 90 x D AU... 28 18... 400 400 4.5 200 x D AU... 25 25... 400 400 6.5 200 x D AU... 35 25... 400 400 9.5 200 x D AU... 50 25... 800 800 16 400 x D AU... 44 34... 800 800 22 400 x D AU... 60 34... 800 800 29 400 x D AU... 76 34... 64 900 x D AU... 76 54... 1800 1800 100 900 x D AU... 120 54... 1800 1800

Carriage Part Numbers AU 20 195... AU 28 195... AU 25 265... AU 35 265... AU 50 265... AU 44 360... AU 60 360... AU 76 360... AU 76 580... AU 120 580...

Bearing M ( max) Nm 45 x D 90 x D 90 x D 200 x D 200 x D 200 x D 400 x D 400 x D 400 x D 900 x D 900 x D

Lubricated System, Twin Type Bearing Lubricated System, DR Type Bearing L 1(max) L 2(max) M S (max) M V (max) M ( max) L 1(max) L 2(max) M S (max) M V (max) M ( max) N N Nm Nm Nm Nm N Nm*6 N Nm 240 240 1.3 120 x D 120 x D Not Available 500 400 4.5 200 x D 250 x D 7 760 600 x D 380 x D 1200 500 400 6.5 200 x D 250 x D 10 760 1200 600 x D 380 x D 1280 1200 14 600 x D 640 x D 1600 3000 18 1500 x D 800 x D 1280 1200 21 600 x D 640 x D 1600 3000 26 1500 x D 800 x D 1280 1200 30 600 x D 640 x D 1600 3000 38 1500 x D 800 x D 3200 2800 65 1400 x D 1600 x D 3600 6000 73 3000 x D 1800 x D 3200 2800 90 1400 x D 1600 x D 3600 6000 100 3000 x D 1800 x D 3200 2800 115 1400 x D 1600 x D 3600 6000 130 3000 x D 1800 x D 7200 6400 250 3200 x D 3600 x D 10000 10000 360 5000 x D 5000 x D 7200 6400 410 3200 x D 3600 x D 10000 10000 580 5000 x D 5000 x D

Dry System, Slimline Type Bearing M ( max) M S (max) M V (max) L 1(max) L 2(max) Nm Nm Nm N N 90 x D 90 x D 1.6 180 180 90 x D 90 x D 2.3 180 180 200 x D 200 x D 4.5 400 400 200 x D 200 x D 6.5 400 400 200 x D 200 x D 9.5 400 400 400 x D 400 x D 16 800 800 400 x D 400 x D 22 800 800 400 x D 400 x D 29 800 800 900 x D 900 x D 64 1800 1800 900 x D 900 x D 100 1800 1800

Lubricated System, Slimline Type L 1(max) L 2(max) M S (max) M V (max) Nm Nm N N 240 x D 3.5 480 400 240 x D 5 480 400 575 x D 10.5 1150 940 575 x D 15 1150 940 575 x D 22 1150 940 1200 x D 40 2000 2400 1200 x D 55 2000 2400 1200 x D 70 2000 2400 2600 x D 150 4240 5200 2600 x D 240 4240 5200

Bearing M ( max) Nm 200 x D 200 x D 470 x D 470 x D 470 x D 1000 x D 1000 x D 1000 x D 2120 x D 2120 x D

Calculating the System Load Factor To calculate the system life, the load factor LF should first be calculated using the equation below. Where Mv & M loads are concerned, the Mv(max) and M(max) for the relevant carriage will need to be determined. This is established by multiplying the figure shown in the table by the spacing of the bearings, D, in metres. LF =

L1 L2 MS MV M + + + + L1(max) L2(max) MS(max) MV(max) M(max)

LF should not exceed 1 for any combination of loads. Once LF has been determined for the application, the life is calculated as shown at the bottom of page 339.

356


Load / Life Calculations Individual 'V' Bearing Calculations Many systems do not use a standard 4 bearing carriage. In such cases it is necessary to use conventional statics calculations to determine the loading on each bearing in the system, by resolving loads into axial (LA*1) and radial (LR*1) components. The maximum LA and LR load capacities for all types of Hepco 'V” Bearing are given in the tables below. Capacities are included for both “dry” and “lubricated” conditions this refers to the 'V' contact, since all bearings are greased internally for life. Values are based on shock-free duty.

Load Capacities for Twin Standard Bearings Dry Lubricated Bearing L A (max) L R (max) L A (max) L R (max) Part N N N N Numbers 22.5 45 60 120 ...J 13... 45 90 125 200 ...J 18... 100 200 320 600 ...J 25... ...J 34... 200 400 800 1400 900 1800 3200 ...J 54... 450

Load Capacities for Double Row Standard Bearings Dry Lubricated Bearing L A (max) L R (max) L A (max) L R (max) Part N N*6 N N Numbers 90 45 190 600 ...J 18 DR... 200 100 400 1500 ...J 25 DR... 400 200 900 3000 ...J 34 DR... 900 ...J 54 DR... 450 2500 5000

LA*3

LR

Axial Load

Radial Load

Load Capacities for Slimline Bearings Dry Lubricated Bearing L A (max) L R (max) L A (max) L R (max) Part N N N N Numbers 100 90 240 45 ...J 195... 235 200 575 100 ...J 265... 500 400 1200 200 ...J 360... 1060 900 2600 ...J 580... 450

The above figures assume that Bearings are used with Slides equal to or larger than the preferred Slide selection for that Bearing size. For details of the preferred sizes, see table on pages 336-337. For loading of Bearings with smaller Slides, please contact T.E.A.

Calculating the System Load Factor To calculate the system life, the load factor LF should first be calculated using the equation below. LF =

LA LR + LA (max) LR (max)

LF should not exceed 1 for any combination of loads. Once LF has been determined for each bearing, the life can be calculated as follows: Calculating System Life With LF determined for either a 4 bearing carriage or for an individual bearing, the life in km can be calculated using one of the two equations below. In these equations, the Basic Life is taken from the table (right) in respect of the bearing and the lubrication condition applicable. Dry System Life (km) =

Lubricated System Basic Life

(0.03 + 0.97LF)

2

Life (km) =

Basic Life

Bearings ...J 13... ...J 18... ...J 18 DR... ...J 25... ...J 25 DR... ...J 34... ...J 34 DR... ...J 54... ...J 54 DR... ...J 195... ...J 265... ...J 360... ...J 580...

Basic Life Dry 40 50 50 70 70 100 100 150 150 50 70 100 150

Basic Life Lubricated 50 100 100 50 70 100 250 250 500 100 50 250 200

(0.03 + 0.97LF)3

Example calculations using the methods above are included on page 340. *Notes 1. The maximum values of L1, L2, MS, M, LA and LR, and the magnitudes of the system Basic Life for each bearing type relate to the performance of complete systems. Tests have shown these figures to be more reliable than working from the theoretical static and dynamic load capacities (C and Co) of the bearings. Values of C and Co have been included in tabulated data on the relevant Bearing pages as a means of comparison with other systems. 2. The calculations within this section assume that the linear stroke involves a number of complete bearing revolutions. If the stroke of any application is less than five times the bearing outside diameter, then please calculate the distance travelled as if it moves five bearing diameters per stroke. Systems operating at speeds in excess of 8 m/s may require additional calculation. Please contact T.E.A. for assistance. 3. For the purposes of the Load/Life calculations on this page, the axial load LA is that load in the axial direction which the bearing can accept from a 'V' slide engaged in its outer ring. Since the line of force is some distance removed from the axis of the bearing, this value is much less than the theoretical axial load capacity which is quoted on the relevant bearing page. 4. In the above calculations, the term lubricated refers to the contact between the slide and bearing 'V's. This lubrication may best be achieved using Hepco Lubricators, Cap Seals or Cap Wipers, however other methods which ensure the presence of a suitable grease or oil in the critical area are acceptable. 5. When a system consists of more than 4 bearings per carriage (E.G. see application examples on page 326) it cannot always be guaranteed that the load will share equally between all bearings. In such cases it is recommended that Controlled Height Bearings are specified (where available) and that the system is de-rated to allow for the life of the most heavily laden bearing. 6. For some sizes of DR bearing, the actual life for applications with mainly L2/radial loads may be higher than the calculations indicate. This is because the calculations are simplified for easy use. Please contact T.E.A. for details in instances where a higher system life is required.

357


Load / Life Calculations Example Calculation 1 A machine incorporates a heavy cast component mounted into a Hepco AU 76 34 L240 CS DR carriage (Standard Carriage with fitted Cap Seals and Double Row Bearings - see pg 328 mounted onto an NM76 P1 Double Edge Spacer Slide (see pg 330-331). The weight of the cast component and carriage is 50 kg. and the centre of mass is central along the length of the carriage, and 0.07 m from the slide 'V' as shown in the diagram. The Load Factors LF is calculated using the method detailed on page 338. L1 = M = MV = 0 L2 = 50kg x 9.81 (gravity) = 491 N MS = 491 x 0.07 = 34.4 Nm LF =

L1 L2 MS MV M + + + + L1 (max) L2(max) MS(max) MV(max) M(max)

The values for L1(max), L2(max), MS(max), MV(max) & M(max ) are taken from the table on page 338 LF =

0 491 N 34.4 Nm 0 0 + + + + = 0.347 3600 6000N 130Nm 3000 x D 1800 x D

The basic life for this system (using SJ34DR bearings in the lubricated condition) is taken from the table on page 339 - this is 250. The system life is calculated as shown on page 339. Life =

Basic Life = (0.03 + 0.97LF)3

250 = 5070 km (0.03 + 0.97 x 0.347)3

Example Calculation 2 An overhead transfer system uses a combination of an NLE P3 Single Edge Spacer Slide (see pages 332-333) and an FT 66 33 P3 flat track on either side of a machine bay. 2 off LJ54CDR bearings with CS54 Cap Seals run on the 'V' Slide. 2 off LR54C Track Rollers run on the flat track. A single LRN54E Narrow track roller is on the non-loaded side of both the 'V' slide and Flat Track to retain the moving structure on the slides. A weight of 400 kg is located centrally on the structure, such that the load is equally distributed between the LJ54's and LR54's each therefore experiencing a radial load of 9.81 x 100 = 981 N. The Load Factor LF for the 'V' Bearing is calculated using the method detailed on page 339. LA = 0

LR = 981 N

The values for LA(max) and LR(max) are taken from the table on page 339 LF =

LA LR 0 981 N + = + = 0.196 LA(max) LR(max) 2500 5000N

The basic life for these LJ54 bearings used in the lubricated condition is taken from the table on pg 339 - this is 500. The bearing life calculated as shown on page 339. Basic Life 500 Life = + = 46,880 km 3 (0.03 + 0.97LF) (0.03 + 0.97 x 0.196)3 The Load Factor LF for the Track Rollers is calculated using the method detailed*. As before, LR = 981 N: the value for LR(max) is taken from the table*. The LR54, LR(max) is 8000 N. The Load Factor LF is calculated from the equation* as follows: LF =

LR = LR(max)

981 N = 0.123 8000 N

The Track Roller Life is then calculated using the second equation* Life =

1000 LF3

=

(*Please contact T.E.A. to request Load Life Calculations page 60)

1000 = 537,000 km 0.1233

From this it can be seen that the 'V' bearings are the life determining factor for the system as a whole. Calculation Examples 3 & 4: for Slimline Carriages without cap wipers or lubricators, running dry; and Single Edge Spacer Slide using Blind Hole Bearings and lubricators can be found on our web site www.tea.net.au

358


Deflection of Self Supporting Slides When GV3 Slide Beams and Spacer Slides are used as self supporting beams, see examples on page 326, the Slides will deflect under load and their own weight. Care should be taken when designing an installation to take account of this deflection, by choosing a Slide or Slide Beam which will give both adequate life and satisfactory stiffness for the duty. The deflection of a Slide or Slide Beam across a span (as shown opposite), will be a maximum at the centre of the span when the load passes over this point. This maximum deflection is given by equation (1): +

5L4Qg 384EI

{

FL3 48EI

{

(1)*2,3 d =

Deflection due to the applied load

Deflection due to the Slide or Slide Beam's weight

The deflection of a Slide or Slide Beam acting as a cantilever will be a maximum at the free end when the load is at the outermost extremity of its stroke. This maximum deflection is given by equation (2) *1:

d =

FL2 (3L-k) 6EI

+

L4Qg 8EI

{

1, 2, & 3

{

(2) *

Deflection due to the applied load

Deflection due to the Slide's weight

In the equation (1) and (2) above, L, k and d are the dimensions shown in the relevant diagrams (in mm) and F is the load applied in Newtons. The term EI is the product of the Slide or Slide Beam material's Young's modulus and the section moment in inertia, which is a constant relating to the stiffness of the Slide section in the orientation of the application. The term Q is the mass of the Slide in kg/mm and g is the acceleration due to gravity (=9.81m/s2). The values of EI and Q for the various sections are given in the table below:

Slide Part Number NS 25... NS 35... NS 50... NM 44... NM 60... NM 76... NL 76... NL 120...

El (Section Stiffness â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Nmm5) Q = Section Mass 3 kg/mm Horizontal*3 Vertical* 0.0015 4.2 x 108 1.2 x 109 9 0.0023 7.5 x 108 4.6 x 10 0.0032 1.1 x 109 1.55 x 1010 9 0.0035 9.8 x 109 1.7 x 10 0.0055 2.6 x 109 3 x 1010 0.007 3.4 x 109 6.8 x 1010 0.010 1.1 x 1010 8.6 x 1010 0.015 1.8 x 1010 4.3 x 1011

Horizontal Bending Slide Beam El (Section Stiffness â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Nmm2) 3 Part Number Horizontal*3 Vertical* 10 10 SB S 35... 5.8 x 10 9.5 x 10 SB S 35 ...L... (lightweight) 3.2 x 1010 5.6 x 1010 10 SB S 50... 5.8 x 10 1 x 1011 SB S 50 ...L... (lightweight) 3.2 x 1010 6.2 x 1010 11 SB M 44... 1.5 x 1011 2.1 x 10 11 SB M 60... 2.3 x 1011 1.5 x 10 SB M 76... 1.5 x 1011 2.5 x 1011

Q = Section Mass kg/mm 0.0068 0.0043 0.0072 0.0047 0.0104 0.0112 0.0129

Vertical Bending

*Notes 1. The calculations for the defleciton of a cantilevered slide assumes that the slide is held absolutely rigidly at one end. This is often difficult to achieve in practice, and it is usual to allow for additional deflection due to the compliance of the support. T.E.A. will supply such data on flange clamps on request. 2. The deflection calculated are for static loads. In some situations dynamic loading may increase the amount of bend. 3. For maximum stiffness, the slide or slide beam section should be arranged such that the bending made with the higher value for EI resists bending. Care should be taken in such applications to ensure that offset loads do not cause excessive bending in the weaker perpendicular plane.

359


Technical Specifications V' Slides Material and Finish:

Flat Tracks Material and Finish:

High carbon bearing steel AISI 52100, hardened on 'V' faces to 58-62 Rockwell 'C' scale. Those areas which are ground have N5 surface finish. Other areas have a chemical black finish.

Carbon steel, hardened on all faces to 58-62 Rockwell 'C' scale. Those areas which are ground have N5 surface finish. Other areas have a chemical black finish.

Bearings & Track Rollers Bearing Raceways and Balls: Shields: Seals: Cage: Studs: BH...'E' Base Plate: Temperature Range:

Carbon-chromium bearing steel AISI 52100, hardened and tempered. Steel with bright zinc plated finish. Nitrile rubber. Plastic. High Tensile Steel with tensile strength = 695 N/mm2. Chemical black finish. Cast Steel with chemical black finish. -20° C to + 120° C

Carriage Plates & Flange Clamps Material: Finish:

High Strength Aluminium Alloy Clear Anodised to 15 m thickness.

Carriage Plates & Slide Counterbore Plugs Material: Plastic Cap Seals Material:

Temperature Range:

Body: Thermoplastic elastomer Inserts: Impact resistant plastic Wipers: Felt -20° C to +60° C

Cap Wipers & Lubricators Material: Temperature Range:

Impact resistant plastic with felt wiper -20° C to +60° C

Frictional Resistance for 'V' Slide Systems Coefficient of friction (without Cap Seals, Cap Wipers or Lubricators) = 0.02 Cap Seals and Lubricators add friction as follows: 4 Cap Seals or Wipers per Carriage CS18 or CW195 = 4 N CS34 or CW360 = 15 N 2 Lubricators per Carriage LB12 = 1 N LB25 & LB265 = 2.5 N LB54 & LB580 = 4 N

CS25 or CW265 = 7 N CS54 or CW580 = 28 N LB20 & LB195 = 1.5 N LB44 & LB360 = 3 N

Extenal Lubrication Cap Seals and Cap Wipers should be lubricated with grease NLGI consistency No. 2 Lubricators should be oiled using 68 cSt viscosity or similar oil. Food compatible lubricants can also be used. Maximum Linear Speeds for 'V' Slides and Bearings and Flat Tracks & Rollers Unlubricated 'V' Slides = 2m/s Higher speeds are possible. Speed depends upon Lubricated 'V' Slides & all Flat Track applications = 8m/s stroke, duty and environmental conditions.

}

Material specifications may change for reasons of technical advantage or availability.

360


Hepco - PRT2 Ring Slide & Track System Hepco has been solving customer's circular motion problems for years. Building up an indispensable knowledge of applications and clever technical solutions. This knowledge coupled with many months of research and development has resulted in the introduction of a comprehensive range of ring slides and track systems to suit virtually every need. The ring slide and track system products complement Hepco's extensive range of linear motion products enabling customers to choose a single source for all their motion guidance requirements.

Benefits (Common) • Friction free motion • Fully adjustable • Zero play • Tolerant of misalignment • Simple and effective means of lubrication

• Stainless steel options • Tolerant of debris • Works in any plane • Easy to install • 2D and 3D CAD files available

Benefits (Ring slides and segments) • Circular motion control at the periphery where it is needed • Large hollow centre to accommodate other components (ring slides) • Will track the curvature of cylindrical shapes • Easy means of driving available • Gearcut options for ease of driving • Double edge and single edge versions • Carriage brake available Benefits (Track system) • Limitless variety of circuits available • Precision positioning possible • High load support option at work stations • Simple alignment facility provided • Various carriage plate options • Components available for driving • Support frame available

361


System Composition RING SYSTEMS: A useful range of nine different ring diameter comprising four different sections is available togther with corresponding bearing assemblies. 90째 and 180째 stock segments are available in each ring size. BLIND HOLE BEARING ASSEMBLY (ECCENTRIC) g Two screw fixing direct into mounting surface where access to opposite side is restricted.

RINGS g Precision ground all over for optimum accuracy and concentricity. g Hardened 'V' faces for maximum wear resistance. g Soft centre section allows customising. g Datum location faces provided both internally and externally. g Gearcut option for ease of driving. g Through hole fixing or tapped hole fixing.

BEARING ASSEMBLY (CONCENTRIC) Two piece ground bearing with precision clearance. Zero play when system adjusted. High rigidity. Two stud lengths available in each size. Provides datum reference for the system.

BEARING ASSEMBLY (ECCENTRIC) g Provides simple means of adjustment via centre hexagon or socket each end. g Eccentric throw is sufficient to enable removal of ring without disassembly.

g g g g g

FIXED CENTRE CARRIAGE g Low cost mounting platform for your components. g May be used with ring, segment, or unidirectional track system of common bend radius. g Incorporates lubricators for increased load/life. g Accurate overall height. g Keyway location facility. g Useful fixing holes provided.

ADJUSTMENT KEY AND JACKING FACILITY (For use with track system curved segments only) g Easy alignment to adjacent straight side. g Overcomes minor inaccuracy in positioning.

362


System Composition TRACK SYSTEMS: Ring segments combine with straight slides to build into an almost limitless variation of either open or closed circuits. Unidirectional or bidirectional bends can be negotiated depending upon the carriage used. Segments in all standard ring sizes are available in addition to straight slides up to 4 metres in length.

BOGIE CARRIAGE g Negotiates 'S' bends and differing bend radii. g Large platform for mounting purposes. g Adjustable axial/radial swivel bearings lubricated for life. g Accurate overall height. g Useful fixing holes provided. g Factory adjusted to suit track system.

LUBRICATOR g Provides lubrication to the contact surfaces thereby increasing the load capacity and life. g Alternative screw fixing options. g Flanged and compact versions available.

BLIND HOLE BEARING ASSEMBLY (CONCENTRIC) g Screws direction into mounting surface where access to

opposite side is restricted.

STRAIGHT SLIDES g Precision ground on all important faces. g Hardened 'V' faces for maximum wear resistance. g Soft centre section allows customising. g Central keyway provided for ease of location and alignment. g Ground datum faces provided both sides as an alternative means of location and alignment. g Available up to 4 metres long in most sizes. g Unlimited lengths can be achieved by butting.

SEGMENTS g 90째 and 180째 segments available. g Any length segment easily cut from standard size rings. g May be used independently or as part of a track system.

DOWEL PINS g Locates in central keyway of straight slide providing easy method of location and alignment.

363


Application Examples SPRAY SYSTEM Spray head mounted on HepcoMotion double edge ring segment, with external gear drive, tracks curvature of product.

MOBILE SAW FOR LONG TUBES Motor and saw assembly mounted on carriage, is hand operated around 360º HepcoMotion double edge ring slide in order to cut tube.

ROTARY ASSEMBLY FIXTURE HepcoMotion ring provides a large mounting area for attaching components. The precision ground surface ensures accuracy and the unhardened area inboard of the V’s enables tooling holes to be drilled as required.

SIMPLE PICK AND PLACE UNIT HepcoMotion double edge ring slide with external gear drive and bearings mounted externally, gives excellent stability for 360° rotation and provides an uninterrupted space in the centre for routing the services.

LASER ENGRAVER FOR ROTARY PRINT SCREENS Special HepcoMotion ring slide slips over screen tube ensuring integrity of shape. Hinged bearing assembly bracket enables fast load and unload.

364


Application Examples BODY SCANNER Imaging head mounted on HepcoMotion ring slides rotates around the patient. Smooth, silent operation and zero play ensures high quality definition. HepcoMotion floating bearings cater for any slight differences in parallelism of the rings due to mounting and ensure that accuracy is determined by the master ring alone.

REMOVING FLASH FROM MOULDING Carriage on track system accurately follows the profile of the product. Rigidity of the carriage assembly ensures good quality finish of the trimmed edge.

LAMINATING MACHINE Carriages on upper track cooperate with carriages on the lower track to pressure laminate chemical sensitive paper. HepcoMotion track systems permit continuous motion at high speed and ensure precise alignment with zero play. HepcoMotion bogie carriages on the bottom track allow track system segments of different radii to be negotiated.

MULTI-STATION ASSEMBLY MACHINE Carriages linked by connecting rods are indexed around a track system by means of a walking beam system operated by HepcoMotion GV3 straight sides. Zero play and precise positioning enables highly accurate work to take place at each station. Bogie carriages provide a large platform for mounting the components.

THREE AXIS ASSEMBLY ROBOT HepcoMotion ring disc with gear drive provides an ideal platform on which to mount the robot. The large diameter disc with HepcoMotion bearings gives support at the periphery, ensuring excellent stability and friction free mounting.

365


Assembled Ring System The HepcoMotion Ring system may be used in either complete ring form or as segments. The carriage may be used to run on the ring track (see below) or constructed in order to embrace the complete ring (see page 367) where the bearing assemblies may be placed internally and/or externally. In all cases either the ring or the carriage may be the moving component. Specially developed Hepco 'R' series bearing assemblies have sufficient adjustment to enable complete removal of the ring slide from the carriage (see our website www.tea.net.au PRT2 Technical Pages).

(see page 370)

(see page 370)

(see page 373)

(see page 372)

(see pages 368-369)

K Slide Ring Ref No.

~ A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

MAX

MIN

R12-93

93

12

11.67

34.7

19

9.1

8.6

1.5

5.8

9.5

6.7

2.2

R12-127

127

12

11.67

34.7

19

9.1

8.6

1.5

5.8

9.5

6.7

2.2

R25-159

159

25

19

71.2

30.5

20.9

15.4

2.4

9.8

19

13

2.2

R25-255

255

25

19

71.2

30.5

20.9

15.4

2.4

9.8

19

13

2.2

R25-351

351

25

19

71.2

30.5

20.9

15.4

2.4

9.8

19

13

2.2

R44-468

468

44

24

106

38.5

37.8

26

2.7

13.8

22

14.8

5.2

R44-612

612

44

24

106

38.5

37.8

26

2.7

13.8

22

14.8

5.2

R76-799

799

76

38.5

172.8

58.5

64.4

50.5

3.8

17.8

30

20.4

5.7

R76-1033

1033

76

38.5

172.8

58.5

64.4

50.5

3.8

17.8

30

20.4

5.7

NOTES: 1. Two lengths of stud are available for each size bearing assembly (see page 370). Choose according to your required carriage thickness. 2. Offset holes in carriage for eccentric bearing assemblies, necessitate adjustment rotation in direction of arrow shown. 3. Standard pinions are available from most manufacturers to suit gear drive option slide rings (see page 368). 4. Exact theoretical values have been given for 'Q', 'R' and 'S'. Positional accuracy of dimension 'S' will determine the axis of the ring. Positional accuracy for dimensions 'Q' and 'R' are not normally critical. Holes for bearing assemblies should be reamed to tolerance F6 for a sliding fit.

366


Assembled Ring System When using HepcoMotion Double Edge Ring Slides encircled by bearings as shown below it is recommended that two concentric bearings should be placed 120° apart in order to provide a datum reference. The other bearings used should be the eccentric type. All eccentrics may be used where positional adjustment of the ring is required. One or more lubricators may be fitted at convenient positions to take advantage of the increased load/life afforded by lubrication (see technical section pages 378-380). ).

(see page 370)

(see page 372) (see page 371)

(see page 370)

(see page 370)

Drilling Position (see note *3) L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

±0.2

±0.2

±0.2

±0.2

T

U

V

W

Slide Ring X

Ref No.

7.7

6.2

55

22

40

1.3

12.3

10.9

30

11.5

6.5

12

20.5

R12-93

7.7

6.2

55

21

40

1.3

12.3

10.9

30

11.5

6.5

12

20.5

R12-127

12.25

10

95

43

80

1.9

24.9

23.0

50

22.5

16

18

40.2

R25-159

12.25

10

100

42

80

1.9

24.9

23.0

50

22.5

16

18

40.2

R25-255

12.25

10

105

42

80

1.9

24.9

23.0

50

22.5

16

18

40.2

R25-351

15.5

12.5

145

61

116

2.5

38.5

35.9

60

34.5

22

25

59.1

R44-468

15.5

12.5

150

61

116

2.5

38.5

35.9

60

34.5

22

25

59.1

R44-612

24

19.5

190

96

185

3.9

63.1

59.2

89.5

57

33

38

95.6

R76-799

24

19.5

210

96

185

3.9

63.1

59.2

89.5

57

33

38

95.6

R76-1033

Ordering Details: Simply list the components required and if relevant, bracket those you wish to be factory assembled.

Example: ASSEMBLED

R25-159-R180 {11 Xx FCP-25-159

180° Ring Segment (see pages 350-351) Fixed Centre Carriage (see page 355)

367


Slide Rings & Segments Hepco 'R' series slide rings are manufactured from high quality steel, zone hardened on the v edges and precision ground all over with datum register faces provided both internally and externally for ease of location. Gear drive options are available with teeth machined into either the internal or external register face. The number of teeth on the standard external option is divisible by 12 in order to provide maximum choice of pinion size for exact ratio requirements. Customers may also choose the tapped hole option 'N' which enables the slide ring to be bolted from below. Stainless steel ring slides and segments are available for customers requiring corrosion resistance.

Slide Ring Section X-X

Gear Drive Option 'P' (External)

'O' Chamfer x 45° (Internal & External)

Gear Drive Option 'Q' (Internal)

Tapped Hole Option 'N'

NOTES: 1. Standard ring segments will be slightly less than 90° and 180° because of the cutting allowance. Full 90° and 180° segments can be supplied to customer’s special order. 2. Socket head cap screws DIN912 will protrude 1mm above the surface of the R12 section slide rings. Customers requiring screws to be flush should use low head type DIN7984, available from Hepco upon request.

368


Slide Rings & Segments HepcoMotion series ring segments are cut from complete 360° slide rings, and are available in nominal 90° and 180° segments. Any length segment can be cut to customer's special order and additional holes drilled as required. Although suitable for most applications, slight out of roundness and flatness may be experienced with slide rings and segments in their free unmounted condition. This may be overcome by installing against a register and bolting to a flat surface. True shape ring segments are available on request.

Part

±0.2

D

D1

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

Socket cap head screw ISO 4762 (see note 2)

105.37

80.63

12

12.37

8.6

7.7

6.2

3

3.5

6x3

3.7

M3*

8.6

7.7

6.2

3

3.5

6x3

3.7

M3*

M4x0.7

15.4

12.25

10

4.5

5.75

9x6

5.5

M5

M8x1.25

15.4

12.25

10

4.5

5.75

9x6

5.5

M5

M8x1.25

25.74

15.4

12.25

10

4.5

5.75

9x6

5.5

M5

M8x1.25

44.74

26

15.5

12.5

6

7

11x 7

6.8

M6

M8x1.25 M8x1.25

~

JS6

C

±0.025

Number

A

B

R12-93

93

84.4

±0.011

101.6

±0.037 REF

R12-127

127

118.4

±0.011

135.6

±0.037 REF

139.37

114.63

12

12.37

R25-159

159

143.6

±0.013

174.4

±0.039 REF

184.74

133.26

25

25.74

R25-255

255

239.6

±0.015

270.4

±0.041 REF

280.74

229.26

25

25.74

376.74

325.26

25

512.74

423.26

44

N M4x0.7

R25-351

351

335.6

±0.018

366.4

±0.044 REF

R44-468

468

442

±0.02

494

±0.046 REF

R44-612

612

586

±0.022

638

±0.048 REF

656.74

567.26

44

44.74

26

15.5

12.5

6

7

11x 7

6.8

M6

R76-799

799

748.5

±0.051

849.5

±0.051 REF

875.74

722.26

76

76.74

50.5

24

19.5

9

12

20x13

14

M12

M16x2

R76-1033 1033 982.5

±0.028

1083.5

±0.054 REF

1109.74 956.26

76

76.74

50.5

24

19.5

9

12

20x13

14

M12

M16x2

U

V

External Gear O

P

MOD

Internal Gear

No. of Teeth (R=360°)

Q

MOD

Holes within ±0.2 of True Position

Stock Segments (see note 1)

No. of Teeth (R=360°)

No. of Holes (R=360°)

Part Mass-kg (R=360°)

Number

0.2

100.8

0.4

252

85.2

0.4

213

90

180

360

8

45

22.5

16.8

1

0.16

R12-93

0.2

134.4

0.4

336

119.2

0.4

298

90

180

360

8

45

22.5

23.3

1

0.22

R12-127

0.5

172.8

0.8

216

145.6

0.8

182

90

180

360

8

45

22.5

29.4

1

0.77

R25-159

0.5

268.8

0.8

336

241.6

0.8

302

90

180

360

8

45

22.5

47.8

1

1.2

R25-255

0.5

364.8

0.8

456

337.6

0.8

422

90

180

360

12

30

15

44.4

1

1.65

R25-351

0.5

492

1.0

492

444

1.0

444

90

180

360

12

30

15

58.6

2

5.1

R44-468

0.5

636

1.0

636

588

1.0

588

90

180

360

16

22.5

11.25

57.7

2

6.7

R44-612

1.0

846

1.5

564

751.5

1.5

501

90

180

360

16

22.5

11.25

75.9

2

25

R76-799

1.0

1080

1.5

720

985.5

1.5

657

90

180

360

20

18

9

78.8

2

32

R76-1033

Notes: 1. Standard ring segments will be slightly less and 90° and 180° because of the cutting allowance. Full 90° and 180° segments can be supplied to customer's special order. 2. Socket head cap screws ISO 4762 will protrude 1mm above the surface of the R12 section slide rings. Customers requiring screws to be flush should use low head type DIN7984, available from Hepco upon request. Ordering Details: Example:

(SS) - R25-351- (R360) - (R180) - (R90) - (P) - (Q) - (N) Tapped hole option 'N' Internal gear drive option 'Q' External gear drive option 'P' 90° segment 180° segment Full 360° ring slide Part number SS = Stainless steel option (Leave blank if not required)

369


Bearing Assemblies Two basic bearing assembly options are available, the standard economy through fixing type which requires access to the retaining nut on the opposite side of the mounting plate, and the blind hole fixing type for use where access to the opposite side is denied. The through fixing type is available in two stud lengths to cater for most applications, the short stud version being compatible with the Hepco carriage plates. All bearing assemblies incorporate Hepco high precision ball races for durability, rigidity and friction free running. The bearings are greased for life and are supplied dust shielded as standard or neoprene sealed upon request. Bearing assemblies are available in concentric form to provide a datum reference and in eccentric form for ease of system adjustment.

Through Fixing Type (RSJ/RLJ)

ECCENTRIC (E) (see note 4)

CONCENTRIC (C) (see note 4)

SOCKET TOOL ADJUSTING WRENCH SHORT STUD LONG STUD (RSJ) (RLJ)

Part Number

For use with Ring/Slide Section (see note 6)

A

B

B1

RSJ/RLJ-13-C/E / BHJ-13-C/E

R–12/TNMS–12

12.7

10.1

5.47

±0.025

RSJ

RLJ

RSJ

RLJ

C

C

C1

C1

5.8

9.5

3

6.7

RSJ/RLJ-25-C/E / BHJ-25-C/E

R–25/TNS–25

25

16.6

9

9.8

19

3.8

13

RSJ/RLJ-34-C/E / BHJ-34-C/E

R–44/TNM–44

34

21.3

11.5

13.8

22

6.6

14.8

RSJ/RLJ-54-C/E / BHJ-54-C/E

R–76/TNL–76

54

34.7

19

17.8

30

8.2

20.4

U

U1

V

±0.2

Q

R

S

S1

T

T1

T2

W

X

Y

1.5

1.0

6.25

6.6

8.5

3.75

6.75

30

47.5

8

20

M3 x 0.5

5.5

3

1.5

7

9

12

5

10

50

72

14

32

M5 x 0.8

8.5

4

2.0

9.5

8.5

17.5

6.5

12.5

60

90.5

17

42

M6 x 1

10

8

3.0

14.5

16.4

23.5

10.5

18.5

89.5

133

25

62

M8 x 1.25

13

Notes: 1. It is recommended that holes to suit bearing assembly mounting studs should be reamed to tolerance F6 for a sliding fit. 2. Nuts and washers are supplied with both concentric and eccentric RSJ/RLJ type bearing assemblies. 3. ‘N’ is the eccentric offset due to the double eccentric design (2 x N = total stroke). R dimension is both the eccentric offset of the adjusting nut and total stroke at the bearing centreline. 4. For adjusting toll part numbers see table. For adjustment procedure and fixing nut tightening torques contact T.E.A. 5. Fasteners for the through fixing type bearings are black on the centric version and bright zinc plated on the eccentric version for identification purposes, except stainless steel type. 6. Each size of bearing assembly has been designed for use with a specific size of ring/slide (see table above). However, any bearing assembly may be used in conjunction with any ring/slide section larger than that for which it was designed if required by the application. Additionally, size 34 bearing assemblies may be used with size 25 ring/slide section and size 54 bearing assemblies may be used with size 44 ring/slide section. 7. Stainless steel bearings are only available nitrile sealed.

370


Bearing Assemblies Through Hole Fixing type is available in two stud lengths covering most thicknesses of mounting plate, the short version being used in HepcoMotion carriages. Both are available in Concentric (C) which provides a datum for the system, and Eccentric (DE) to provide enough adjustment to permit disengagement of a carriage or ring encircled by bearings. All bearings are available in a Controlled Height version (CHK) which minimises variation in the B1 dimension. This is desirable in high precision applications and is recommended whenever Double Row Bearings are used. Blind Hole Fixing type (RBHJ) allows mounting into a solid machine base where through mouting holes are not possible, or where the thicknes of the mounting plate is too great. The Blind Hole Fixing type is also useful where adjustment from the front is preferred or where access to the opposite side of the mounting hole is restricted. They are available in Concentric (C) which are fixed, or Eccentric (E) which are adjustable. All bearings are greased for life internally. Customers are strongly advised to provide lubrication to the interface between bearings and ring slide by specifying HepcoMotion lubricators or Bleed Lubrication system. Lubrication greatly increases load capacity and life.

Blind Hole Fixing Type (BHJ) ECCENTRIC (E)

CONCENTRIC (C)

X (2 x socket head cap screws ISO 4762 supplied) +0.00 -0.03

±0.025

C2

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

M1

N

O

P

2.5

9.51

5

M4 x 0.5

8

0.5

5.8

0.8

2.2

7

9

1.9

4

7

2.5

20.27

10

M8 x 1

14

0.5

9.8

1

5

3

13

17

2.75

8

13

5.5

27.13

12

M10 x 1.25

18

0.7

13.8

1.25

6

4

17

21

3.6

10

15

6

41.76

25

M14 x 1.5

28

1.6

17.8

1.6

8

6

22

28

5.5

14

27

MASS ~g

Z

Adjusting Wrench

Socket Tool

RSJ C/E

RLJ–C/E

BHJ–C

BHJ–E

Part Number

8

AT13

8

8

7

27

RSJ/RLJ-13-C/E / BHJ-13-C/E

10

AT25

RT8

48

51

43

105

RSJ/RLJ-25-C/E / BHJ-25-C/E

14

AT34

RT10

115

120

105

235

RSJ/RLJ-34-C/E / BHJ-34-C/E

20

AT54

RT14

415

425

390

800

RSJ/RLJ-54-C/E / BHJ-54-C/E

Ordering Details: Example:

(SS) - 2 x (RSJ) - (RLJ) - (BHJ) - 25 - (C) - (E) - (NS)

Stainless Steel Option Leave blank for steel version

Quantity Through fixing type with short stud Through fixing type with long stud Blind hole fixing type

Neoprene sealed bearings required Adjustable (eccentric) type Concentric type Size reference (~'A' dimension)

371


Lubricator HepcoMotion Lubricators are made from impact resistant plastic and house a sprung oil impregnated felt wiper designed to apply a constant film of oil to the working surfaces of the ring slide without imposing undue friction. The application of oil significantly increases the load/life of the system. The compact type can be used with Hepco fixed centre carriage plates. Customers may also consider using the HepcoMotion bleed lubrication facility suitable for track systems.

COMPACT TYPE (C)

FLANGED TYPE (F) OIL IMPREGNATED FELT WIPER

'J' SCREW SIZE (see note 1)

OIL LUBRICATION POINT (see note 2) 'J1' (see note 1)

Part Number

Use With Ring Segment Type

Type F

Type C

A

A1

B

C

D

E

LB-12

R/TR–12

17

7

10

13

5.2

2

LB-25

R/TR–25

25

12

16.5

28

9.9

2

LB-44

R/TR–44

34

17

20

38

15

2.4

LB-76

R/TR–76

50

25

33.5

57

22.7

4.5

J1

J F

G

G1

H

I

Ø x LENGTH

3

6.5

12

3.1

3

2.5 x 5

Part

Screw

Hole Ø

K

L

M

N

O

Number

M2.5 x 6

2.7

2.5

3

5.46

9

2.2

LB-12

6

16

18

5.5

7

3 x 10

M3 x 8

3.2

4.5

5

9

15.25

5.5

LB-25

8

22

25

7

11

3 x 16

M4 x 10

4.2

5.5

6.25

11.5

18.25

8

LB-44

12

33

38

10

18

3.5 x 22

M5 x 12

5.2

9

10

19

31.5

11.5

LB-76

Notes: 1. 2 machine screws with cross-recessed pan heads to DIN9785A are supplied for fixing the flanged lubricator (see J1 in table. Additionally, 2 self tapping screws fo plastic with PT thread form and cross re-cessed pan heads are supplied for the compact type lubricator (see J in table. 2. Lubrication interval depends on length of stroke, duty and environmental factors. Replenish lubrication as necessary using a 68 viscosity EP mineral oil. 3. Sizes 25, 44 & 76 lubricators are available with increased “H1” to accommodate the “V float”’ of the floating bearings. Ordering Details: Example:

3 x LB-44 (F) (C) Compact Type 'C' Flanged Type 'F' Part Number Quantity

372


Fixed Centre Carriage The HepcoMotion Fixed Centre Carriage is designed for use with track systems with unidirectional bends of a common radii and for use with double edge ring slides and segments. The unique geometry enables carriages on a track system travel from straight to curve with negligible play in the transition zone. Such play as may develop is not detrimental to the performance of the system *1. Carriages are available with twin or double row (DR) bearings, and with floating bearings. Carriages with twin bearings have the smoothest running quality and have some compliance to accommodate misalignment. Carriages with DR bearings have better load capacity and stiffness. Due to the rigidity of DR bearings, carriages with this option are supplied as Controlled Height (CHK)*5 as standard. The corrosion resistant version has stainless steel bearings and fasteners, and a high performance USDA approved surface treatment to the aluminium carriage plate in place of the standard anodised finish.

Part Number

USE WITH RING / SEGMENT TYPE

A

B

±0.1

±0.1

±0.1

+0.13 -0.5

B1

C

C1

D

±0.1

E

F

G

H

±0.1

I

J

FCC-12-93

R/TR–12–93

55

40

25

48

20

19

12.8

21.9

25.52

11.11 14.41 6.5

FCC-12-127

R/TR–12–127

55

40

25

48

20

19

12.8

21.9

23.84

10.27 13.56 6.5

FCC-25-159

R–25–159

95

80

50

85

37

30.5

20.5

46

50.15

22.7

27.46

16

FCC-25-255

R/TR–25–255

100

80

50

80

36.5

29

19

46.1

43.88

20.53 23.35

16

FCC-25-351

R/TR–25–351

105

80

50

85

40

29

19

46.1

45.67

21.42 24.25

16

FCC-44-468

R/TR–44–468

145

115

75

120

65

38

25.5

71.9

75.96

36.21 39.75

22

71.9

78.80

FCC-44-612

R/TR–44–612

150

115

75

125

70

38

25.5

37.63 41.17

22

FCC-76-799

R/TR–76–799

190

185

100

160

90

56.5

37

118.7 104.60 49.12 55.48

33

FCC-76-1033 R/TR–76–1033

210

185

100

180

110

56.5

37

118.7 123.51 58.57 64.94

33

+0.1

+0.1

O

P

+0.1 -0

Q

+0.025 -0

S

T

1

3

Mass

K

L

M

9.3

7.8

4.5 x 4.5

2.7 11.89 10.94 12.5 x 4.8

4

+0.018 +0.018

8.8

7.8

4.5 x 4.5

2.7 11.89 10.94 12.5 x 4.8

4

+0.008 +0.018

1

3

7.34

4

10.1

70

FCC-12-127

17.1

14

5.3 x 4.5

3.2 24.38 23.01

22 x 8.4

8

+0.010 +0.022

2

5

11.5

6

16.6

400

FCC-25-159

15.9

14

5.3 x 4.5

3.2 24.38 23.01

22 x 8.4

8

+0.010 +0.022

2

5

11.5

6

16.6

410

FCC-25-255

15.6

14

5.3 x 4.5

3.2 24.38 23.01

22 x 8.4

8

+0.010 +0.022

2

5

11.5

6

16.6

420

FCC-25-351

25.8

23

5.3 x 4.5

3.2 38.25 35.94

25 x 8.7

10

+0.010 +0.022

2

6

14.5

8

21.3 1080 FCC-44-468

25.5

23

5.3 x 4.5

3.2 38.25 35.94

25 x 8.7

10

+0.010 +0.022

2

6

14.5

8

21.3 1100 FCC-44-612

43

40

8.0 x 6.0

3.8 63.76 59.25 32.1 x 13.5 14

+0.015 +0.027

4

8

20

10

34.7 3460 FCC-76-799

43

40

8.0 x 6.0

3.8 63.76 59.25 32.1 x 13.5 14

+0.015 +0.027

4

8

20

10

34.7 3660 FCC-76-1033

Notes: 1. For complete specifications please contact T.E.A. Transmissions. Ordering Details: Example:

Simply specify the quantity and part number required. 6 x (CR) FCC-44-612 (LB) (DR) (NS) (CHK)

373

U

Part

7.34

V1Ø

W

~g

Number

4

10.1

70

FCC-12-93


Track Systems HepcoMotion track systems provide a unique method of achieving an almost limitless variety of open or closed circuits by combining straight lines with curved slides. They can be used in any orientation, from horizontal to vertical. Any number of carriages can be accommodated, either the fixed centre economy type or the bogie type which enables 'S' bends of varying radii to be negotiated and provides a larger platform for mounting purposes. A unique jacking screw facility incorporated within the track system enables perfect alignment of straight slides to curved slides. Various drive possibilities exist. Lubrication of the system is achieved either by means of the bleed lubrication facility which injects lubricant direct to the V faces of the track. The relevant dimensions of individual track system slides are held on record to enable spares and replacements to be supplied. Track systems are also available in stainless steel for applications requiring greater corrosion resistance.

SEE ORDERING DETAILS MAXIMUM CARRIAGE PLAY AT JOIN (see note 1)

FIXED CENTRE CARRIAGE (see page 373)

SEE ORDERING DETAILS

ALL JOINS BOGIE CARRIAGE (see page 377) ADJUSTMENT KEY

TRACK SYSTEM CURVED SEGMENT REF NOTE 2 (see page 358) JACKING SCREW FOR ALIGNMENT

TRACK SYSTEM STRAIGHT SLIDE (see page 375)

Installation Procedure: Installation requires manual drilling and setting. Track systems are also available in suitable grade to correspond with customers pre=drilling mounting holes. Please visit www.HepcoMotion.com/PTR2datauk and select datasheet No. 2 Installation details. Notes: 1. With the fixed centre carriage, some slight play develops as each pair of opposing bearings traverse the join between straight and curve. This is rarely an issue in use. The maximum play acting in the direction of the arrows is shown on www.tea.net.au PRT2 Ring Slide & Track System Fixed Centre Carriage Play at Straight/Curve Transition Zones 2. Standard curved segments will be slightly less than 90° and 180° due to the cutting allowance. This is not detrimental to the smoothness of travel across the joins. Full 90° and 180° segments and segments to any number of degrees can be supplied on request.

Ordering Details: Simply list the curved segment and straight slide part numbers in sequential order in clockwise direction (see arrows in illustrations), starting at any point according to preference. Viewing plan elevation as per illustrations and traveling clockwise round the circuit. Curved segments should be designated suffix 'C' for clockwise bend and suffix 'A' for anticlockwise bend. The final item should indicate the quantity and part number of the carriages required. For grade of track suitable for pre-drilled holes, specify track system type ‘P’. Bleed lubrication may also be specified. Example:

1x

(1)TNM-44-B1020- 2 x AK (2) TR-44-468-R180/C (3) TNM-44-B1020- 2 x AK (4) TR-44-468-R180/C 6 x FCP-44

Track system straight slide Clockwise curved segment Track system straight slide Clockwise curved segment Fixed centre carriage

374


Track System Straight Slides HepcoMotion track system straight slides are modified straight slides from Hepco's highly acclaimed GV3 system. The slides are manufactured from quality high carbon steel, zone hardened on the 'V' faces for maximum wear resistance and precision ground for high accuracy and conformity. The centre portion of the slide is left soft to allow for customising. Standard lengths are available up to 4020mm (1976mm in the TNMS-12 section) and unlimited lengths can be achieved by butting slides together. Slides are available in stainless steel for applications requiring corrosion resistance. Sets of short slides in incremental lengths can be supplied for customers wishing to extend a system in order to take up chain or belt stretch. Please visit www.HepcoMotion.com/PRT2datauk and select datasheet No. 10 Slip Block adjustment. A bleed lubrication facility is available to channel lubricant direct to the running surfaces. All straight slides within a track system are matched in essential respects both with each other and with their corresponding curved segments. They are ground square on the ends for precision butting and are marked with a reference number and sequence number for identification during installation and for replacement purposes. Opposing slides within a track system are ground to identical lengths. Adjustment keys are available to facilitate alignment with adjacent curved segments. B (see note 1)

Part

~

SEE NOTE 5

Number

A

A1

+0 -0.2

B MAX

C

D

E

F

+0.05 - 0.00

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW ISO 4762

G

±0.025

H

H1

I

J

TNMS-12

12

12.37

1976

15

45

6x3

3.5

M3

3

4

1.8

8.5

1.7

TNS-25

25

25.74

4020

30

90

10 x 5

5.5

M5

4.71

6

2.5

15

2.6

TNM-44

44

44.74

4020

30

90

11 x 6

7

M6

6.21

8

3

26

2.3

TNL-76

76

76.74

4020

30

180

20 x 12

14

M12

9.21

15

5

50

4.8

ADJUSTMENT KEY (AK) (see note 2)

DOWEL PIN (SDP) (see note 3)

OØ (hole size)

L x 45° (4 positions) SEE NOTE 5

m6

K

L

6.2

0.2

4

10

0.3

+0.0 -0.3

+0.012 +0.004

4

+0.002 -0.006

6.75

2

16

4

3

6

+0.012 +0.004

2.25

4

+0.002 -0.006

6

6

32

7

6

2.75

6

+0.002 -0.006

8

8

33

8

7

4.75

10

+0.002 -0.007

15

15

32

10

11

12.5

0.3

8

+0.015 +0.006

19.5

0.3

15

+0.018 +0.007

Mass

Part

~kg/m

Number

1.5

0.5

TNMS-12

2.2

1.5

TNS-25

2.7

3.5

TNM-44

4.5

1000

TNL-76

K6

N

P

Q

R

S

T

U

Notes: 1. Standard slide lengths are available in multiples of hole pitch 'D' + (2 x 'C') up to a maximum length per 'B' dimension in the table above. Special length slides can be cut to order. 2. Adjustment keys are required at every join between straight slide and curved slide. Please order accordingly (see ordering details). Please note that 'Q' dimension for the TNMS-12 slide is stepped one end to fit keyway 'H'. 3. Please note that dowel pins for the TNMS-12 slide are not stepped. 4. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily straight. They should be set to the required straightness when bolting down to the mounting surface at assembly. 5. Dimensions 'A1' and 'K' will be matched with corresponding dimension 'F' and 'I' page 368 for track system requirements. Ordering Details: Example:

(SS) - TNM-44 - B1500 - (2xAK) - (1xAK) - (16xSDP)

Stainless steel option

16 x Dowel pins required 1 x adjustment key required 2 x adjustment keys required Length of slide 'B' - 1500mm Part Number

Leave blank for steel version

375


Track System Curved Segments HepcoMotion track system curved segments are cut from stock rings or segments (see pages 368-369 for dimensions and details). They are matched in essential respects with their corresponding track system straight slides and ground square on the ends to a specified dimension relative to their true shape. A clearance keyway and tapped hole facility is incorporated each end to provide a method of alignment when assembled together with the mating key of the track system straight slide (see page 375). An additional fixing hole is provided adjacent to the keyway each end to give extra support at the join position for all segments except the TR12-93 and TR12-127. All track system curved segments are marked with a reference number and sequence number (see page 374) and are available in stainless steel for applications requiring corrosion resistance. Segments to any number of degrees can be supplied to cater for all track system configurations. ADDITIONAL FIXING HOLE (STANDARD SIZE)

J (socket head set screws ISO 4026 supplied)

CENTRE LINE OF CUT

For all other details and dimensions see pages 368-369. Part

~

±0.2

Number

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

TR12-93

93

12.37

4.25

1.5

2.5

2

3.25

1.75

M2.5 x 3

R° 90

180

TR12-127

127

12.37

4.25

1.5

2.5

2

3.25

1.75

M2.5 x 3

90

180

TR25-159

159

25.74

7

18

1.5

7

5

6.5

3

M4 x 4

90

180

TR25-255

255

25.74

7

20

1.5

7

5

6.5

3

M4 x 4

90

180

TR25-351

351

25.74

7

20

1.5

7

5

6.5

3

M4 x 4

90

180

TR44-468

468

44.74

8

25

2.5

10

6

7.5

4

M5 x 6

90

180

TR44-612

612

44.74

8

25

2.5

10

6

7.5

4

M5 x 6

90

180

TR76-799

799

76.74

10

30

2.5

18

7

11.5

6

M8 x 16

90

180

TR76-1033

1033

76.74

10

30

2.5

18

7

11.5

6

M8 x 16

90

180

Notes:

1. Some distortion may be present in segments in their free unmounted state. This may be overcome by bolting to the mounting surface and setting to adjacent slides using the keyway alignment facility Ordering Details:

(SS) - TR44-612 - (R90) - (R180) - (N)

Example:

Stainless Steel Option

Tapped hole option 'N' (see page 368) 180° segment 90° segment Part Number

Leave blank for steel version

376


Bogie Carriage The HepcoMotion bogie carriage is designed for use with track systems where 'S' bends or bends of varying radii are to be negotiated. Each bogie swivels on an special play free axial / radial ball bearing which is lubricated for life. This enables the bogie carriage to follow exactly the path of the track at all times. Carriage plates and bogie swivel plates are made from high strength aluminium alloy and finished anodised. Bogie carriages are supplied assembled and adjusted to suit the accompanying track system. Customers are advised to specify the HepcoMotion bleed lubrication facility within the track as lubricators cannot be fitted to bogie carriages. Special size carriage plates are available upon request. BOGIE FIXING SCREW

BOGIE

RSJ TYPE CONCENTRIC BEARING ASSEMBLY (see page 370)

SEE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (b)

CARRIAGE PLATE

PRELOAD ADJUSTING SCREWS

I (6 x FIXING HOLES)

RSJ TYPE CONCENTRIC BEARING ASSEMBLY (see page 370) Part Number

USE WITH TRACK SYSTEM (SEGMENT TYPE)

±0.1

±0.1

A

B

C

D

E

80 42.1 44.5 46.1

±0.1

F

G

H

75

45

60

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

M6 x 1.0 38 75 15 25.5 34.5 46

P

ADJUSTMENT BRACE

Mass ~kg

BCP-25

TR–25

130

29

AB–25

0.8

BCP-44

TR–44

175 115 53.8 56.5 71.9 100 62.5 85 M8 x 1.25 53 105 18 32.5 44

34

AB–44

2.1

BCP-76

TR–76

240 185 77.2 81 118.7 130 87.5 125 M10 x 1.5 72 170 24 42.5 61.5 100 70

AB–76

6.3

59

Adjustment Procedure: Notes: 1. In rare cases where adjustment of the eccentric bearings is required, the bogies must be removed from the carriage plate and bolted instead to the adjustment brace. This will mimic the carriage and provide access to the fixing nuts allowign adjustment of the eccentric bearings to take place. 2. Please note that the floating bearings cannot be supplied with bogie carriages. Ordering Details: Example:

BCP76 - (DR) - (NS) - (CHK)

CHK = Controlled height option

Part Number DR = Double row bearings

Standard with DR bearings Leave blank if not required for twin bearing version

Leave blank for twin bearings

NS = Nitrile sealed option

377


Load Capacity and Life Expectancy The load capacity and life expectancy of Hepco ring, segment and track systems will be determined by several factors. These are the size of the ring and the size and number of bearing assemblies used, the presence of lubrication, the magnitude and direction of loads, the speed of operation (see note 2 page 379 ) and the length of the path traversed (see note 3 page 379). It is usual to run systems with less than the maximum load to prolong the life, which can be calculated using the data and formulae in this section. For calculation purposes, Hepco ring slide and track systems fall into two categories, those in which a carriage runs on a ring segment or track, and those in which a ring rotates captivated by a number of bearing assemblies (or similar arrangement where the ring is stationary and the bearing assemblies and load rotate). Wherever possible, Hepco ring and track systems should be lubricated using the Hepco lubricators (see page 372). Such lubrication will greatly increase the load capacity and extend the life of the system (see table below and page 361 and nomograms on pages 379 and 380).

Systems With Carriages On Rings, Segments & Tracks When calculating the life, the loading on the system should be resolved into the direct load components L1 and L2 and the moment load components M, MV and MS (see adjacent diagram and refer also to note 2).

Maximum Lubricated Load Capacity Direct Loads (N)

Maximum Unlubricated Load Capacity

Moment Loads (Nm)

Direct Loads (N)

Moment Loads (Nm)

Carriage

L1

L2

M

Mv

Ms

L1

L2

M

Mv

Ms

FCP-12-93

120

120

1.25

1.25

0.6

80

80

0.8

0.8

0.4

FCP-12-127

120

120

1.2

1.2

0.6

80

80

0.8

0.8

0.4

BCP-12

120

120

1.7*

1.7*

0.6

80

80

1.2*

1.2*

0.4

FCP-25-159

800

800

16

16

9

300

300

6

6

3.5

FCP-25-255

800

800

15

15

9

300

300

6

6

3.5

FCP-25-351

800

800

17

17

9

300

300

7

7

3.5

BPC-25

800

800

27*

27*

9

300

300

10*

10*

3.5

FCP-44-468

1600

1600

57

57

35

600

600

22

22

14

FCP-44-612

1600

1600

65

65

35

600

600

24

24

14

BCP-44

1600

1600

75*

75*

35

600

600

28*

28*

14

FCP-76-799

3800

3800

165

165

140

1400

1400

62

62

55

FCP-76-1033

3800

3800

210

210

140

1400

1400

81

81

55

BCP-76

3800

3800

220*

220*

140

1400

1400

86*

86*

55

* See note 1 To calculate the life of a system using a standard carriage, first obtain the load factor LF by entering the values for L1, L2, M, MV and Ms in respect of the proposed duty into equation (1) below, together with the maximum load capacities from the table above. (1)

LF =

M MV MS L1 L2 + + + + M(max) MV max) MS(max) L1(max) L2(max) (

The life for the system can be read from the nomogram on page 379 (for lubricated systems) or on page 380 (for systems running dry) by taking the life figure on the lower scale opposite the calculated value for LF on the upper scale (see examples on page 380).

Notes: 1. If using a bogie type carriage which differs from the standard length, the M and MV moment load capacities will increase pro rata with the increase in the distance between the bogie swivel centres (see dimension 'F' on page 377). 2. When calculating L2 and MS, the centrifugal force must be included, which acts radially outwards from the centre of mass (COM) of the moving objects. Its magnitude is F=DV2/R where V is the velocity of the COM in m/s, R is the distance of the COM from the ring axis in m and D is the mass in kg. F is in N (newtons).

378


Systems with Rings Slides in Bearings It is usual to space bearings equally around the ring *1. When calculating the life, the load should be resolved into the direct load components LA and LR and the moment load component M, as shown in the diagram opposite. Capacities are shown for both ‘dry’ and ‘lubricated’ conditions - this refers to the bearing and slide ‘V’ contact, since all the bearings are lubricated internally for life. Values are based on shock-free duty.

Bearing Assembly Size RSJ/BHJ-13

RSJ/BHJ-25

RSJ/BHJ-34

RSJ/BHJ-54

Used with Ring Part Number R12–93 R12–127

Maximum Lubricated Load Capacity

Maximum Unlubricated Load Capacity

Number of Bearing Assemblies Equally Spaced

LA (N)

LR (N)

M (Nm)

LA (N)

LR (N)

M (Nm)

3

90

52

18 x øC*

60

34

13 x øC*

4

113

60

22.5 x øC*

75

40

16 x øC*

EACH ADDITIONAL 1

23

15

4.5 x øC*

5

3

1.2 x øC*

R25–159

3

600

350

150 x øC*

230

125

55 x øC*

R25–255

4

750

400

187 x øC*

285

150

69 x øC*

R25–351

EACH ADDITIONAL 1

150

100

37 x øC*

18

12

5 x øC*

3

1200

700

300 x øC*

460

255

110 x øC*

R44–468 R44–612 R76–799 R76–1033

4

1500

800

375 x øC*

575

300

138 x øC*

EACH ADDITIONAL 1

300

100

75 x øC*

38

24

27 x øC*

3

2850

1650

750 x øC*

1050

600

260 x øC*

4

3600

1900

875 x øC*

1300

700

325 x øC*

EACH ADDITIONAL 1

700

470

175 x øC*

75

50

*see note 4

18 x øC* *see note 4

To calculate the life of this type of system, first obtain a value for the load factor LF by entering the values for LA, LR and M in respect of the proposed duty, into equation 2 below, together with the maximum load capacities from the table above. (2)

LF =

M M(max)

+

LA LR + LA max) LR(max)

See note 2 on page 378

(

The life for the system can be read from the nomogram below (for lubricated systems) or on page 380 (for systems running dry) by making the life figure on the lower scale opposite the appropriate value for LF on the upper scale. (See example page 380).

Load/life Nomogram For Lubricated Systems Load Factor LF

Life (km) Notes: 1. In certain applications in which the bearing assemblies rotate with the load, and this has large LR or M components, it may be beneficial to space the bearing assemblies unequally around the ring. Contact T.E.A. for details. 2. SPEED OF OPERATION. Hepco ring, segment and track systems are rated for speeds of 1m/s without lubrication or 1.5m/s when lubricated. Greater speeds may be tolerated at reduced loads. Contact T.E.A. for details. 3. SHORT STROKE OPERATION. The life of the Hepco ring, segment and track systems will be reduced when the length of the path traversed in each cycle is very short. For path lengths below 0.2m, the life will reduce pro-rata with the path length. e.g. a system with a 0.08m stroke will have its life reduced by a factor of 0.08 ÷ 0.2 = 0.4 compared to that calculated from the appropriate nomogram. 4. Øc is the contact diameter, i.e. the diameter of the circle which passes through the points of contact between bearing assemblies and the ring. This will be usual to the P.C.D. of the ring ±9, 20, 37 & 64mm for the 12, 25, 44 & 76 sections respectively (depending on whether the bearing assemblies are running on the outside or inside of the ring).

379


Load/life Nomogram For Unlubricated Systems Load Factor LF

Life (km)

Load/life Calculation Examples Example 1 A track system consist of: 1 x TR44 - 468-R180/C; 1 x TNM-44B870-2xAK; 1 x TR44-468-R180/C; 1 x TNM-44-B870 - 2xAK; 1 x FCP-44-468. The carriage carries a dead weight such that the mass of the load and the carriage together is a total of 40kg whose centre of mass is over the middle of the carriage. The centre of mass is 80mm above the slide V's. The speed of operation is 0.7m/s and the system is lubricated with the Hepco lubricators which are supplied as part of the fixed centre carriage.

PLAN VIEW

L1 = 40kg x 9.81m/s2 (g) = 392.4N L2 (centrifugal force see note on page 272 = DV2/R) L2 = 40kg x (0.7m/s)2 รท 0.234m = 83.7N MS = L2 x 0.08m = 83.7N x 0.08 = 6.7Nm MV = M = 0

LF =

M MV MS + + + M(max) MV(max) MS(max)

L1 + L1(max)

L2 = L2(max)

0 57

+

0 57

+

6.7 35

+

392.4 83.7 + = 0.49 1600 1600

The value of 0.49 for the life factor LF can then be entered into the nomogram for lubricated systems to obtain the linear life. Reading from the nomogram on page 361 we see that the life corresponding to an LF value of 0.49 is 2,900km.

Example 2

An antenna is mounted on a Hepco R25-351-360 ring which rotates in 6 x RLJ-25 bearing assemblies. The system is lubricated with 5 x LB-25 lubricators. The antenna rotates once per second and the mass of the rotating assembly (which includes the ring, platform and the antenna) is 8kg. The centre of mass of the assembly is 100mm from the axis of the ring, and 150mm above the ring V's. The system is required to work on average 36 hours per week. LA = 8kg x 9.81m/s2 (g) = 78.5N Speed of the centre of mass: 1 rev/s = 2 x x 0.10m x 1 = 0.63m/s LR = DV2/R = 8kg x (0.63m/s)2 รท 0.10m = 31.8N M = LR x h = 31.8N x 0.15m = 4.77Nm From the table on page 273 we find that M(max) = (187 + 2 x 37) x ร˜c = 261 x (0.351 + 0.020) = 96.8Nm. LA(max) = 750 + 2 x 150 = 1050N; LR(max) = 400 + 2 x 100 = 600N.

LF =

M M(max)

+

LA LR 4.77 78.5 31.8 + = + + = 0.177 LA(max) LR(max) 96.8 1050 600

Reading from the nomogram on page 379 we see that the life corresponding to an LF value of 0.177 is 39000km. 1 revolution = .351 x = 1.1m Each week the system runs for 3600revs/hour x 36 hours = 143km. System life = 39000 รท 143 = 273 weeks = 5.25 years

380


HDLS Hepco Heavy Duty Slide System Introduction HepcoMotion has updated the highly successful Heavy Duty Slide System, retaining the best features from the previous system, and incorporating them in a greatly expanded range under the name of HDS2. Many new components have been added including larger bearings, with increased load capacity, two sizes of construction beam, single edge V slides and flat track, as well as a range of drive options. All this, with an option for stainless steel or corrosion resistant components as standard, enables the HDS2 range to offer a solution to most customer’s applications. Customers can choose from low cost commercial slides for general use or high precision ground slides to suit applications where accuracy and smoothness are key requirements. Customers can save design and manufacturing time by specifying ready mounted systems complete with rack driven carriages, safe in the knowledge that everything has been designed and tested by one of the worlds leading specialists in linear technology.

• Can operate without lubrication, ideal for food machinery and clean operations.

FEATURES AND BENEFITS • Low cost commercial, precision ground and stainless steel systems available.

• Slides and tracks available in one piece up to 4 metres long, saves on assembly time.

• Spur or helical rack and pinion options for ease of driving.

• Long lengths comprising replaceable segments, reduces downtime in the event of damage.

• Unique wiping action expels dirt and debris, in harsh environments.

• Flat tracks overcome necessity for parallel installation.

• Available as assembled units or in component form, providing maximum flexibility of design.

• Simple alignment facility to achieve parallelism of V slides. • Works in any plane and orientation for unrestricted use in machine construction.

• Versatile construction beams for multiple design options. • System capacities up to 68kN.

381


System Composition The new Heavy Duty slide system comprises of a versatile family of slides, flat tracks and other components which may be used with either double row ball bearing assemblies for high load applications or with blocks containing four needle roller bearings for super high load applications. Slides and flat track are available up to 4 metres in length in both high precision ground and low cost, commercial versions and a rack cut option is available with pinions to provide a simple and effective means of driving.

n BORED

TYPE PINIONS

n SHAFT

TYPE PINIONS n Hardened teeth for long life. n Shaft diameter and tolerance to suit standard bearings. n Two useful lengths available. n Centred both ends for easy reworking. Bore diameter and tolerance to suit compatible shaft size. Keyway provided.

n V BEARINGS

TRACK ROLLERS deep ground V form. n Rigid mounting register. n Compact design. n Blind hole version bolted and adjusted from front face. n High load capacity. n Eccentric version easily adjusted. n Deep groove double row precision bearing. n Can be mounted in virtually any thickness plate. n Dust shielded or neoprene sealed versions available. Track rollers permit out of parallel installation. Crowned contact face to overcome misalignment. Narrow version for restricted space applications. n Precision

REINFORCING RODS n Provide 40% increase in stiffness of beam. n Allow predetermined bend to be induced in beam.

BACK construction in light weight aluminium. n Profiles to suit all rails with either bearings or blocks. n Adjustable alignment option to obtain parallelism of system. n Strong

CAP WIPER n Lubricates contact faces reducing wear. n Long interval before relubrication is necessary. n Excludes debris from bearing contact faces. n Incorporates both through hole and tapped hole fixing facility. n Removable cover allows adjustment of system without disassembly.

BACK PLATE ALIGNMENT DOWEL n Adjustable alignment in conjunction with jacking screw.

382


System Composition The slides and tracks may be attached direct to a suitable section, or they may be used in conjunction with Hepco back plates to give a ready made support profile. The considerable problems to set systems in parallel have been overcome with the unique jacking screw alignment option. A rigid aluminium beam section is available to which all Hepco Heavy Duty systems may be attached in 22 different positions and in dozens of different combinations providing a versatile all in one guide, drive and construction element.

BEARING BLOCK n Four high precision roller bearings per block. n Super high load capacity. n True rolling motion for low wear and sustained accuracy. n Rugged housing for extreme rigidity and stability. n Adjustable end and side seals prevent ingress of debris. n Lubrication system direct to bearings and contact faces. n Concentric or eccentric (adjustable) mounting journals. n Tapped hole version for alternative method of installation. n Cast iron and aluminium versions available.

WIDE FLAT TRACK/ DOUBLE EDGE V SLIDE n NARROW

FLAT TRACK/

SINGLE EDGE V SLIDE One piece rail with built-in parallelism. Lightened centre with attractive debris cover. n Available up to 4 metres in length. n Soft centre section for customising. n Back edge may be used as a datum face. n Keyway provided for ease of location and alignment. n Stepped dowel pins available for location in keyway. n Deep hardened edges for maximum wear resistance. n Precision ground and low cost, unground versions available. n Rack cut option provides means of driving. n Narrow rail with register face for convenience of spacing apart.

T NUTS n Simple means of attaching components. n Retaining spring prevents loss of position. n Location type fits back plate keyway. n Adjustment type for ease of alignment.

PLATES n Easily incorporated into customers design. n Will attach to all T slot positions of construction beam. n Key locations for attachment of rail and for mounting. n Pillar types available for intermittent support. TAPPED HOLE OPTION n Allows easy attachment of adjoining components.

BACK PLATE LOCATION DOWEL n Simple means of location and alignment.

CONSTRUCTION BEAM n Attractive construction member in reduced weight aluminium. n Stiff section for long unsupported spans. n Eight corner mounting positions to suit narrow slide and track profiles. n Fourteen T slot mounting positions to locate with any backplate.

383


Load Capacity The load capacity and life expectancy of Hepco Heavy Duty Systems will be determined by several factors. These include the number and arrangement of bearing blocks, bearing assemblies and track rollers, the type of slides used, the length of travel, speed of motion and the state of lubrication. It is usual to run systems with less than the maximum load to prolong the life, which can be calculated using the data and formulae found on our web site: www.tea.net.au In all systems the loading can be resolved into a combination of axial loads LA (direction parallel to the axis of the mounting stud) and radial load LR. These loading directions are illustrated in the figures below.

The maximum load capacities of the various bearing blocks, V bearing assemblies and track rollers are detailed in the table below.

BEARING ELEMENT TYPE

MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITIES* AXIAL LOAD LA RADIAL LOAD LR

V Bearing Assemblies HJ64-C/E & B-HJ64-C/E

2.5kN

8kN

0

10kN

0

5kN

10kN

20kN

Track Roller Assemblies HR58-C/E & B-HR58-C/E Narrow Track Roller Assemblies HRN58-C/E & B-HRN58-C/E Bearing Blocks HC25-S-C/E

*When used with precision ground slides and tracks and properly lubricated For all data, dimensions and technical information including how to calculate the expected life of a system for Hepco's Heavy Duty Slide System please visit our web site: www.tea.net.au or contact T.E.A. for faxed sheets.

384


Application Examples GANTRY ROBOT: The Hepco heavy duty system with its rigid construction beam, and drive facility is the ideal choice for XY gantry robot design. The example shows single edge V slides mounted direct to the corner faces of the beam with high load carrying capacity bearing blocks supporting the greater mass of the X axis and V bearing assemblies with cap wipers (not shown) supporting the Y axis. The continuous 4 metre long slide rack cut on the back face together with pinions provides smooth transmission of the drive and overcomes the problems of multiple butt joining. Many gantry robot applications do not require the precision of ground slides. By choosing the commercial unground system customers are provided with an economic solution with adequate accuracy for their requirements.

DRIVEN CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY: This example shows the ease with which a single edge V slide and narrow flat track can be spaced apart using a requisite number of cross members of equal length. In this way the slide and track form integral members of the frame therefore saving both weight and cost. By using a V slide on one side and flat track on the other, the necessity for precise parallelism of the two elements is overcome. The rack cut version of the slide provides an easy means of driving and the carriage assembly is prevented from lifting off by the drive pinion one side and single track roller the other.

MACHINE BED APPLICATION: This example shows a vertically inclined precision ground single edge V slide one side and ground narrow flat track the other. The high load capacity bearing blocks have maximum capacity in the vertical plane due to 4 roller bearings per block sharing the load. The back face tapped hole mounting option is used for maximum rigidity in this application. Eccentric type track rollers are used in conjunction with the flat track for individual adjustment to ensure that the load is shared equally by all rollers.

SLIDING TABLE: This example shows the ease with which a high load capacity sliding table can be constructed using single edge V slides mounted on back plates to provide access in the centre for the ball screw drive. The jacking screw alignment facility has been incorporated one side to enable that element to be set exactly parallel to the other. In this case bearing blocks have been used although bearing assemblies and cap wipers could just as easily have been incorporated depending on the load requirements.

385


Introducing the Hepco SL2 Stainless Steel Based Slide System Based on the proven Generation II range, Hepco's SL2 System offers the user basic interchangeability with Gen II and GV3 components in an extensive linear range consisting of stainless steel Bearing Assemblies, Flat Slides and Spacer Slides. A complementary range of lightweight aluminium Carriage Plates and Flange Clamps is also available, with special surface treatment providing corrosion resistance better than most stainless steels. This process is approved by the U.S. Department of Agriculture for use in food processing machinery.

FEATURES AND BENEFITS • Hardened and ground Slides for durability, resistance to corrosion and smooth running. • Long lengths available up to 4m in most sections, saves on assembly time. • Extensive range of Spacer or Flat Slides gives many design options.

• Three lengths of Carriage Plate available for each Slide section gives many design options. • Double Row Bearing Assembly option for high radial loads and long life, ideal for dirty applications. • Twin Bearing Assembly option gives low friction and is tolerant of misalignment.

• Proven Hepco 'V' concept for low friction and good rigidity.

• Low friction characteristics allow system to operate 'dry' with no lubrication.

• Cap Seals prevent ingress of dirt and offer positive lubrication, long life and improved safety.

• Available as assembled unit or in component form for maximum flexibility.

• Lubricators offer positive lubrication with improved life and low friction.

• Extensive use of plastic plugs eliminates dirt traps.

• Suitable for many clean room applications.

• Maintenance-free, therefore can perform in arduous conditions.

386


Application Examples Industrial Applications

SL2 System is used for vertical and horizontal guidance on a bottle filling machine in the cosmetic industry. Spacer Slides are shown fixed to the machine structure on the horizontal axis. Short undrilled Spacer Slides are used on the vertical axis supported one end only by long type Flange Clamps. Hepco Carriage Plates are shown used throughout. Alternatively, Bearing Assemblies and Cap Seals can be mounted direct to the moving components of the machine. Care should be taken to ensure parallelism of opposing Slides during installation. Twin type Bearing Assemblies can be used throughout in cases where there may be slight misalignment of opposing Slides.

SL2 System is used as the vertical guidance in a food industry application to move a diverting conveyor between two further conveyors alternately. High speed and high duty operation driven by a crank arm. The SL2 Flat Slide has been chosen as the moving element in order to reduce mass. Blind Hole type Bearing Assemblies have been used due to the thickness of the mounting plate being too great to accommodate the stud and nut of the Through Fixing type. The system is lubricated by means of Hepco Lubricators, since Cap Seals cannot be used with the Blind Hole eccentric type Bearing Assemblies. Lubricated systems allow much greater life for any given load.

Scientific/Test Applications

SL2 System is used for telescopic horizontal guidance in a Nuclear Industry drum handling application. Vertical movement is provided by a scissor lift. The environment experiences a low level of radiation, therefore the Bearing Assemblies are supplied with special grease lubrication internally. The system is required to be all stainless steel, therefore the standard coated aluminium Carriage Plates have been replaced by specials, manufactured by Hepco to the customer's drawings. External lubrication of the Slides is not possible in this application, however, the low friction characteristics of Hepco systems means that 'dry' running is not a problem.

SL2 System is used as the means of guidance for all axes of a non-destructive ultrasonic testing machine. An ultrasonic probe is lowered into a spray tank during research in a university engineering department. For vertical guidance a special curved section stainless steel backplate manufactured by Hepco to the customer's drawings is incorporated, allowing an SL2 Flat Slide to be mounted to the circular section probe. The SL2 System is ideally suited to this humid environment. The use of Twin type Bearing Assemblies offers extra compliance to compensate for slight deviations of the opposing Slides on the horizontal axis. Lubricators give increased system life whilst retaining low friction. The zero play which is characteristic of the Hepco system ensures rigidity of the probe end, despite the large overhang in this application.

387


SL2 System Composition SL2 offers excellent performance through a quality manufacturing process and careful selection of materials, and has been designed to provide the ideal combination of corrosion resistance and long service life even in the most arduous application. The SL2 range of Slides is very extensive, comprising seven Flat Slide sections and four Spacer Slide sections. This very wide range ensure that the most suitable Slide can always be specified for any application. All except the smallest are available in 4 metre lengths, ground on all main surfaces with hardened 'V' running faces. SL2 Carriages are available in three standard lengths as fully assembled units, factory adjusted to the Slide of your choice. The system makes extensive use of plastic sealing plugs to close off counterbores, thus avoiding the possibility of dirt traps. SL2 is therefore ideally suited for food processing and clean room applications.

BLIND HOLE FIXING BEARING ASSEMBLY CONCENTRIC & ECCENTRIC For use where access to opposite side of the mounting plate is restricted. Easy fixing from one side only. Twin type or Double Row Bearing Assemblies available (see opposite). Low ratio adjustment for controlled setting. Defines the datum position for the system.

STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE SPACER TYPE & FLAT TYPE Hardened 'V' faces for long life. Centre section unhardened for drilling or machining. Length cut to your requirements, up to 4m in one piece. Mounts directly to machine. No special construction or additional components required. Keyway and datum faces for easy alignment. Available without holes for use with Flange Clamps or for customising. Plastic caps for fixing screws to seal off counterbores. Useful where weight saving and minimum inertia are important. Extra Slide width options.

THROUGH HOLE FIXING BEARING ASSEMBLY CONCENTRIC & ECCENTRIC For use in mounting plates of limited thickness where there is unrestricted access to the opposite side. Two stud lengths available to suit most mounting plate thicknesses. Twin or Double Row types available (see opposite). Defines the datum position for the system. Easily adjusted via hexagon flange or socket in stud.

FLANGE CLAMPS Enables Slide to become a self-supporting beam. Two mounting possibilities - face fixing or base fixing. Available in long or short type, to support a Slide at one end or both ends. High strength aluminium, with corrosion resistant coating approved by U.S. Dept. of Agriculture.

388


SL2 System Composition Carriages can be supplied fitted with: BEARING ASSEMBLIES ONLY - for dry or minimum friction applications. CAP SEALS - to shroud the Bearing Assemblies - for excellent lubrication and sealing quality. LUBRICATORS - for the application of lubricant with lower friction. All components are available individually for customers who wish to construct their own Carriage Plates, or where the Carriage may be part of the machine structure. All Bearing Assemblies are of stainless steel construction, in either Twin Bearing or Double Row format, and are supplied lubricated for life. They are hardened and precision ground to special tolerances and raceway conformity to suit Slide System applications.

LUBRICATOR (OPTIONAL) Use with short Carriage Plate/Miniature System or as an option to Cap Seals on longer Carriage Plates. Provides lower friction running with long system life. Applies very small quantities of oil, for long system life. Supplied charged with mineral oil as standard, or dry on request (for other oil types).

STAINLESS STEEL TWIN OR DOUBLE ROW BEARING OPTION ACROSS RANGE* Twin type Bearing Assemblies provide slight compliance offering accurate, play-free motion and tolerance of misalignment. Frictional resistance can be varied, useful where very low friction is required. Economical, and easy to adjust. Double type Bearing Assemblies have higher radial load capacity. They are more suited to harsh environments and high speed conditions where extra long life is required. One piece construction avoids dirt traps. *All except smallest size.

CAP SEAL (OPTIONAL) Lubricates contact surfaces from a grease reservoir, giving extended re-lubrication interval and long system life. Totally encloses the Bearing Assembly. Increases load capacity. Extends system life. Excludes debris. Improves operational safety. Can be used on medium and long Carriage lengths (on all but miniature systems).

CARRIAGE PLATE High strength, lightweight aluminium alloy with corrosion resistant coating approved by the U.S. Dept. of Agriculture. Large mounting area with flush surface. Three standard lengths in each size. Pre-drilled and tapped component mounting holes. Counterbores sealed with plastic plugs to eliminate dirt traps. Recess both sides to facilitate location of switch cams and other components. Stainless steel Carriage Plates available on request (to customer's drawings).

389


Stainless Steel Spacer and Flat Slide Hepco SL2 stainless steel Slides are zone hardened on the ‘V’ edges and precision ground on all main surfaces to a high degree of parallelism. Slide fixing holes are accurately positioned, allowing Customers to pre-drill their mounting holes. All Hepco Slides are left ‘soft’ in the centre portion for subsequent machining if required. However, since SL2 Slides are specially finished to promote resistance to corrosion, Customers should be aware that machining may reduce localised resistance. To maximise corrosion resistance following machining, polishing is recommended. Two varieties of Slide are available, Spacer type and Flat type.

Spacer Slide A one piece construction that bolts directly to the mounting surface of the machine, providing adequate running clearance for Bearing Assemblies, Cap Seals and Lubricators.

B ±2mm (see note 1) C

E

D

Dowel Pin (optional) (See note 5)

F

Socket Head Cap Screw ISO 4762 (not supplied)

H1 Q P H

A1 A

I

ØN

ØO (hole size)

J K

Part Number

L (Ø x depth)

Use With

A

A1

B

Spacer

Flat

Bearing Ø

~

Theoretical

Max

Slide

Slide

see note 3

Apex

see note 1

12

12.37

1976

SS NMS 12

13 SS MS 12

SS NS 25

C

D

Plastic Cap (Supplied)

E

F

G

G

±0.1

20.5

45

H1

+0.05

Non Acc.

20.5

H

‘M’ x 45° (4 positions)

I

J

±0.025

- 0.00

3

6.2

4

13

12

12.55

1016

13

13

30

3

-

-

25

25

25.74

4020

43

43

90

4.5

10

6

1.8

8.5

1.7

-

-

2.5

15

2.5

SS S 25

25

25

25.81

4020

43

43

90

4.7

-

-

-

-

-

SS S 35

25

35

35.81

4020

43

43

90

4.7

-

-

-

-

-

SS S 50 SS NM 44

25

50

50.83

4020

43

43

90

4.7

-

-

-

-

-

34

44

44.74

4020

43

43

90

6

12.5

8

3

26

2.5

SS M 44

34

44

44.81

4020

43

43

90

6.1

-

-

-

-

-

SS M 60

34

60

60.81

4020

43

43

90

6.1

-

-

-

-

-

SS M 76 SS NL 76 SS L 76

34

76

76.81

4020

43

43

90

6.1

-

-

-

-

-

54

76

76.74

4020

88

88

180

9

19.5

15

5

50

5

54

76

76.81

4020

43

43

90

9.1

-

-

-

-

-

Notes: 1. Any length of Slide within B Max dimension can be supplied, but for optimum price and delivery time, Slide lengths should be specified which maintain the C and D dimensions in the table above. In all cases unless otherwise specified by the Customer, C and D dimensions will be supplied equal. Customers are requested to ensure that the proximity of the fixing holes to the ends of the Slide will accommodate the Fixing Screws and to note that Slide lengths which bisect the fixing holes will require dimensions C and D to be specified unequal. 2. Where longer Slides are required, standard lengths can be matched suitable for butting, on request. In these cases the mating ends will be ground square and additional holes may be inserted to give support near the joins. A light stoning of the ‘V’s will be necessary after installation to ensure smooth travel across the joins. 3. In the table, the standard size of Bearing diameter to use with each Slide is quoted. However, other combinations are possible. 4. Fixing screws for Flat Slides must have head length sufficient to clear the Carriage. Low head socket cap screws DIN 7984 provide sufficient clearance and are available from Hepco (see table). 5. Slides in their free unmounted state are not necessarily straight. If straightness is important, the Slide may be set straight by bolting down against a register or by utilising the central keyway. If Hepco Dowel Pins are used, these should be positioned one each end midway between the Slide end and first hole. Also, midway between all fixing hole centres, or as deemed necessary for the application.

390


Stainless Steel Spacer and Flat Slide A central keyway is provided for simple location by means of Hepco Dowel Pins or Customer’s own key. In cases where Cap Seals or lubricators are not being used, the precision datum edges on the spacer portion of the Slide may be utilised for location against a machined register. The rigidity of the Spacer Slide enables it to be used as a self-supporting element or construction member of the machine, when used in conjunction with Hepco Flange Clamps. Plastic caps are provided with all Spacer Slides to close off debris traps at the hole positions. These caps engage in the sockets of the fixing screws.

Flat Slide Designed for Customers who prefer to bolt the Slide to a spacer which is part of their own machine construction. Where the Slide is required to be the moving component an aluminium spacer plate can be construction in order to reduce inertia.

Optional Low Head Fixing Screw (See table and note 4)

B ±2mm (see note 1) C

E

D

F

A1 A

70°

K

K

L

Dowel Pin Option (see note 5)

M

Part No. 3.5

6x3

-

3.5

-

-

5.5

10 x 5

1.0

7

-

-

N

O

m6

K6

+0.002 SS SDP 4 4 +0.012 +0.004 4 - 0.006

SS SDP 6 6 -

+0.012 +0.004

4

-

+0.002 - 0.006

-

P

Flat Slide Fixing Screw

Mass~g

(see note 4)

/100mm

Q Part No.

Thread Length

6.75

-

-

-

-

44

-

-

SS FS 3-8

M3

8

23

6

2.25

-

-

-

140

-

-

SS FS 6-16

M6

16

82

Part Number Spacer

Flat

Slide

Slide

SS NMS 12 SS MS 12 SS NS 25 SS S 25

7

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

SS FS 6-16

M6

16

130

SS S 35

7

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

SS FS 6-16

M6

16

170

SS S 50

7

11 x 6

1.0

8

2.75

-

-

-

330

7

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

SS FS 6-20

M6

20

190

SS M 44

9

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

SS FS 8-20

M8

20

265

SS M 60

-

-

-

9 14 11.5

+0.015

SS SDP 8 8 +0.006 6

+0.018

+0.002 - 0.006

+0.002

20 x 12 1.0 SS SDP 15 15+0.007 10 - 0.007 -

-

-

-

-

-

-

SS FS 8-20

M8

20

340

15

4.75

-

-

-

1000

-

-

SS FS 10-25

M10

25

500

Ordering Details:

SS NM 44 626 (P) Part Number (’N’ denotes the Spacer Slide option)

Slide required without holes (Spacer Slide only)

Required length (mm) Multiple of hole Spacing (E) plus dimensions C and D

Example:

1 x SS NS 25 536 6 x SS SDP6

Stainless steel Spacer Slide x 536mm long 6mm Ø head, stainless steel Dowel Pins

391

SS NM 44

SS M 76 SS NL 76 SS L 76


Stainless Steel Bearing Assemblies A number of Bearing Assembly options are available from Hepco in order to cater for most design requirements. The Through Hole Fixing type is available in two stud lengths covering most thicknesses of carriage or mounting plate, the short stud version being compatible with the Hepco Carriage Plates. The Blind Hole Fixing type allows mounting into a solid machine base where through mounting holes are not possible, or where the thickness of the mounting plate is too great. The Blind Hole Fixing type is also useful where adjustment from the front is preferred, or where access to the opposite side of the mounting hole is restricted. The Blind Hole Fixing eccentric type Bearing Assemblies will not accommodate Cap Seals, however, Hepco Lubricators may

Through Hole Fixing Type (SS SJ/SS LJ)

Eccentric (E) L (see note 3)

C1 C2

Concentric (C) O (see note 1)

L

F M M1

O

A

N

J K

B1

P

C

B

Socket Tool Short Stud (SS SJ)

Adjusting Wrench

Long Stud (SS LJ)

For use with Part Number

Slide Reference

SS SJ

SS LJ

SS SJ

SS LJ

C

C

C1

C1

±0.025

(see note 6)

A

B

B1

SS SJ/SS LJ 13 C/E / SS BHJ 13 C/E

MS/NMS

12.7

10.1

5.46

5.8

9.5

3

6

SS SJ/SS LJ 25 C/E / SS BHJ 25 C/E

S/NS

25

16.6

9

9.8

19

4

13

SS SJ/SS LJ 34 C/E / SS BHJ 34 C/E

M/NM

34

21.3

11.5

13.8

22

6

14

SS SJ/SS LJ 54 C/E / SS BHJ 54 C/E

L/NL

54

34.7

19

17.8

30

8

20

±0.2

Q

R

S

S1

T

T1

T2

U

U1

V

W

X

Y

1.5

1.0

6.25

8

8

3.75

6.75

30

47.5

8

20

M3 x 0.5

5.5

3

1.5

7

8.5

12

5

10

50

72

14

32

M5 x 0.8

8.5

4

2.0

9.5

8.5

17.5

6.5

12.5

60

90.5

17

42

M6 x 1

10

8

3.0

14.5

14

23.5

10.5

18.5

89.5

133

25

62

M8 x 1.25

13

Notes: 1. It is recommended that holes to suit Bearing Assembly mounting studs should be reamed to tolerance as per dimension R (not shown here). Please contact T.E.A. for additional faxed data sheet. 2. Thread form is metric fine. See dimension 'F' in table above. 3. All Through Fixing type eccentric Bearing Assembly studs are supplied with sockets for adjustment as shown, with the exception of size 13. 4. Nuts and washers are supplied with all Through Fixing type Bearing Assemblies. 5. 'R' dimension is both the eccentric offset of the adjusting nut and the total adjustment available at the bearing centre line for 360° rotation of the adjusting nut. 6. Each size of Bearing Assembly has been designed for use with a specific thickness of Slide. This is designated within the Slide part number by reference as shown in the table above. However, any Bearing Assembly may be used in conjunction with any Slide according to practicality of design. Please contact T.E.A. for additional faxed data sheet. 7. Double Row Bearing Assemblies are not available for size 13 Bearing Assemblies.

392


Stainless Steel Bearing Assemblies be specified, as a means of applying lubrication to the system. Both varieties of Bearing Assembly are available with two types of bearing configuration. The Twin bearing type comprises two individual deep groove ball bearings on a single stud. This construction offers some compliance, which allows smoother running and is more tolerant of misalignment or uneven mounting surface. The Double Row type (see note 7) is a one piece construction bearing with two ball tracks. This removes potential dirt traps and offers higher load capacity (particularly radially), plus longer life. Both types of bearing have been designed specially for slide system applications and the performance confirmed by rigorous testing. Their external dimensions are identical.

Blind Hole Fixing Type (SS BHJ) Concentric (C) B1 G I

H

Eccentric (E)

B1

R Z

D

E

F

W

A V

70° Q

B Y

B

T

T2

T1 S

X' (2 cap screws ISO 4762 - supplied)

S1 U U1 +0.00

Âą0.025

C2

D

-0.03

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

M1

N

O

P

2.5

9.51

5

M4 x 0.5

8

0.5

6

0.8

2

-

7

9

0.5

4

7

2.5

20.27

10

M8 x 1

14

0.5

10

1

5

3

13

17

0.75

8

13

5.5

27.13

12

M10 x 1.25

18

0.7

14

1.25

6

4

17

21

1.0

10

15.2

6

41.76

25

M14 x 1.5

28

1.6

18

1.6

8

6

22

28

1.5

14

27

Mass ~g Z

SS SJ C/E

SS LJ C/E

SS BHJ C

Part Number

SS BHJ E

8

8

8

7

27

SS SJ/LJ 13 C/E / SS BHJ 13 C/E

10

48

51

43

105

SS SJ/LJ 25 C/E / SS BHJ 25 C/E

14

115

120

105

235

SS SJ/LJ 34 C/E / SS BHJ 34 C/E

20

415

425

390

800

SS SJ/LJ 54 C/E / SS BHJ 54 C/E

Ordering Details:

(SS SJ) (SS LJ) (SS BHJ) 25 (C) (E) (DR) NS Through Hole Fixing type with short stud Through Hole Fixing type with long stud

Nitrile Seals (standard) Double Row Bearings (no designation for Twin Bearings) Eccentric (adjustable) type required Concentric type required

Blind Hole Fixing type Size reference (~'A' dimension)

Example:

2 x SS SJ 34 C NS Stainless steel short stud size 34 concentric Bearing Assemblies with Twin bearings and standard Nitrile Seals. 2 x SS SJ 34 E NS Stainless steel short stud size 34 eccentric Bearing Assemblies with Twin bearings and standard Nitrile Seals.

393


SL2 Technical Data Load/life Calculations Maximum moments and direct load capacities for the SL2 System are given in the table below. Capacities are given for 'dry' and 'lubricated' conditions - this refers to the 'V' contact, since all Bearing Assemblies are greased for life internally. Values are based on shock-free duty. Dry System, Twin & DR Type Bearing Carriage L1(max) L2(max) MS(max) Mv(max)

M(max)

Lubricated System, Twin Type Bearing L1(max) L2(max) Ms(max) Mv(max)

M(max)

Type

N

N

Nm

Nm

Nm

N

N

Nm

Nm

Nm

SSCPMS12

80

80

0.4

40 x Y

40 x Y

240

240

1.3

120 x Y

120 x Y

Lubricated System, DR Type Bearing L1(max) L2(max) Ms(max) Mv(max) N

N

Nm

M(max)

Nm

Nm

Not Applicable

SSCPS25

320

320

3.6

160 x Y 160 x Y

960

960

11

480 x Y

480 x Y

1600 3000

17

1500 x Y

800 x Y

SSCPS35

320

320

5

160 x Y 160 x Y

960

960

15

480 x Y

480 x Y

1600 3000

25

1500 x Y

800 x Y

960

480 x Y

SSCPS50

320

320

7.3

160 x Y 160 x Y

960

22

480 x Y

1600 3000

37

1500 x Y

800 x Y

SSCPM44

640

640

13

320 x Y 320 x Y 3000 3000

60

1500 x Y 1500 x Y 3600 6000

72

3000 x Y

1800 x Y

SSCPM60

640

640

18

320 x Y 320 x Y 3000 3000

84

1500 x Y 1500 x Y 3600 6000

100 3000 x Y

1800 x Y

SSCPM76

640

640

23

320 x Y 320 x Y 3000 3000

108

1500 x Y 1500 x Y 3600 6000

129 3000 x Y

1800 x Y

SSCPL76

1440 1440

50

720 x Y 720 x Y 6000 6000

210

3000 x Y 3000 x Y 8000 10000 280 5000 x Y

4000 x Y

Calculating System Life for SL2 To calculate system life, the load factor LF should be calculated using the equation below. Where M and MV moment loads are concerned, the M(max) and MV(max) for the relevant Carriage Plate will need to be determined. This is established by multiplying the figure shown in the table by the spacing of the Bearing Assemblies, Y, in metres.

LF =

L1 L1(max)

+

L2 L2 max) (

+

MS MV M + + MS(max) MV(max) M(max)

Bearing

Basic Life

Basic Life

Assemblies

Lubricated

Dry

SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 13

40

40

SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 25

40

70

SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 25 DR

70

70

SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 34

100

100

SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 34 DR

150

100

SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 54

200

150

SS SJ/LJ/BHJ 54 DR

400

150

Y

LF should not exceed 1 for any combination of loads. Once LF is calculated, the life in km can be calculated using one of the two equations below, with Basic Life being taken from the table for the Bearing Assembly and lubrication condition applicable.

Dry System: Life (km) =

Basic Life (LF)2

Lubricated System: Life (km) =

Basic Life (LF)3

SL2 Technical Specifications: Slideways Material and Finish: Hardness of 'V' Surfaces: Straightness: Parallelism: Hole Pitch Tolerance: Bearing Assemblies Bearing Raceways & Balls: Hardness: Seals: Cage: Studs: BHJ 'E' Baseplate: Temperature Range: Grease:

Special martensitic Stainless Steel conforming generally to AISI 420 series, ground on all main surfaces to N5. Generally to 52 HRC. Generally 0.2mm/m unmounted - the slides can be set straight during the assembly process. 'V" and datum faces 0.013mm/m non-accumulative. ±0.1mm non-accumulative. Stainless Steel AISI 440C 58-62 HRC Nitrile rubber Plastic Stainless Steel AISI 303 Stainless Steel AISI 316 -20 C° to +120 C° Lithium soap grease NLGI 2

Please visit our web site: www.tea.net.au for specifications on SL2 Carriage Plates, Cap Seals, Lubricators and Flange Clamps, plus further technical data.

394


HepcoMotion速 PDU2 - Aluminium Profile Driven Unit

Please go to www.tea.net.au for PDU2 catalogue download 395


HepcoMotion速 DLS Linear Transmissions

Please go to www.tea.net.au for DLS catalogue download 396


HepcoMotion速 HPS Powerslide-2

Please go to www.tea.net.au for HPS Powerslide-2 catalogue download 397


HepcoMotion® PSD80 - Screw Driven Linear Unit The HepcoMotion® PSD80 is a new screw driven linear unit which is a companion to the popular and cost effective PDU2 range of belt driven units, and to the larger PSD120 unit. It shares the PDU2’s use of Hepco Herculane ® wheels running inside a profile and is actuated by a stainless steel leadscrew with a bearing quality polymer nut. Ballscrew versions are available on request. The closed unit is fully covered with a stainless steel sealing band. Screw leads of 4, 15, 25 & 70mm are available, meaning that carriage speeds from zero up to ~1m/s are possible without the need for additional gearing. PSD80 carriages have a substantial 500N load capacity, and are also capable of thrust loads of 300N. The PSD80 beam profile is compatible with the Hepco MCS aluminium frame construction system, and can be assembled into multi-axis systems with Hepco PDU2 and PDU2M units.

PSD80 - Screw Driven Linear Unit Internal Buffers • End of stroke protection at both ends Carriage • High load capacity - up to 500N and 7.5Nm • High speed - up to 1m/s • Long life with no re-lubrication • Multiple carriges on a single unit available • Top plate easily removed & machined

Stainless Steel Cover • Effectively seals the unit from debris

Aluminium Beam • Rigid & lightweight • T-slots in bottom & side faces • Lengths to 3m +

Polymer Drive Nut • Smooth & durable • Most pitches will back drive • Thrust loads to 300N Hepco Herculane ® Wheels • Ultra-high performance wheels mounted in adjustable carriage body for zero play Stainless Steel Leadscrew • Smooth, strong & precise • Available in leads of 4, 15, 25 & 70mm with right and left handed threads • Ballscrew version also available Limit Switch & Bracket • Mechanical & inductive versions available • IP67 rating

PSD80 pdf download www.tea.net.au

398


HepcoMotion® PSD120 - Profile Screw Driven Unit ®

The HepcoMotion PSD120 linear drive unit can be used for single or multi-axis applications and combines Hepco’s Herculane® wheel technology with a ball screw drive to give excellent all-round performance in a highly cost effective package. The integrated linear guide and ball screw drive are housed in a high strength aluminium beam fitted with a continuous sealing strip protecting the internal mechanism. The Hepco Herculane® wheel technology enables a smooth, low friction movement of the externally mounted carriage plate. The PSD120 has a full range of options and accessories to optimise each unit for the application.

PSD120 - Profile Screw Driven Unit Stainless Steel Sealing Strip • Continuous metal sealing strip protects internal guide and drive mechanisms from ingress of debris • Effective in any orientation • Enhances safety and appearance

Removable Carriage Plate • Easily detachable for customising • Can be rotated 180º to change the switch cam to the other side

Mounting Platform • Tapped holes for ease of component attachment • Direct fixing of multi-axis mounting brackets Limit Switch & Bracket • Mechanical and inductive versions • IP67 rating • Easily adjustable

Shaft • Supplied with fitted key • Motor connection kits available

PSD120 pdf download www.tea.net.au

399


HepcoMotion® SBD Sealed Belt Drive The HepcoMotion® is an exceptionally rugged, quiet and precise linear unit. It uses super-smooth Hepco LBG caged linear ball guides having such a high load capacity that system life is rarely an issue. Drive is provided by a new high strength tooth belt. The unit is housed in an anodised aluminium beam and is completely enclosed with a stainless steel cover to provide excellent protection from dirt and debris. A corrosion resistant version with all external components made in stainless steel or anodised aluminium is an option. A version for use in high specification cleanrooms is also available.

Stainless Steel Cover

• Help protect internal mechanism from ingress of debris • Effective in any orientation • Enhances safety and appearance Removable Carriage Plate

• Easily detachable for customising • Can be rotated 180° to change handling of switch cam

Mounting Platform

• Tapped holes for ease of component attachment • Direct fixing of multi-axis mounting brackets

Limit Switch & Bracket

• Mechanical & inductive versions • IP67 rating • Easily adjustable

Aluminium Beam

• Available up to 6 metres in one piece • Stiff self supporting beam may form part of the machine construction

• 6 T-slots compatible with Hepco MCS and other profiles

• T-nuts, T-slot covers, mounting brackets & multi axis connection brackets available

Drive Shaft

• Supplied with fitted key • Right, left, double & hollow shaft options (right hand shown) • Motor connection kits available

SBD pdf download www.tea.net.au

400


Linear Slide System - Type AD - with Steel or Aluminium Carriage Plate

fig. 1 Dimensions (in mm) Type AD106 AD208 AD208R AD210 AD312 AD316 AD416 AD416R AD420

A 120 140 140 150 180 180 200 200 200

A1 18.5 25.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 27.0 30.0 30.0 30.0

A2 83 90 90 98 126 126 140 140 140

B 80 120 120 120 150 150 180 180 180

B1 19.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 40.0 40.0 40.0

B2 41 70 70 70 90 90 100 100 100

C 10 15 20 20 20 25 25 25 25

D 54 54 54 54 70 70 70 70 70

F 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30

L (max.) 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000

d1 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20

N 30.5 37.0 42.0 44.0 51.0 61.5 61.5 61.5 61.5

P 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 20 20

Part Numbers

Component Parts & System Load Type AD106 AD208 AD208R AD210 AD312 AD316 AD416 AD416R AD420

Guide + length D10_ _ D10_ _ D10_ _ D10_ _ D20_ _ D20_ _ D20_ _ D20_ _ D20_ _

* A = aluminium

R 58 58 58 58 75 75 75 75 75

S 150 150 150 150 300 300 300 300 300

T 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

Load N Wheels

Carriage* M106_ M208_ M208R_ M210_ M312_ M316_ M416_ M416R_ M420_

O 11 11 11 11 17 17 17 17 17

C106+ E106 C208 + E208 C208R + E208R C210 + E210 C312 + E312 C316 + E316 C416 + E416 C416R + E416R C416 + E416

Axial

Radial

800 1600 2400 2400 3200 6400 6400 17200 20000

400 2000 2600 2600 3200 7000 7000 8600 31400

S = steel

Two steel bars with a circular section, hardened, ground with a tolerance of h6, and chromium-plated, are stiffened and held parallel by an aluminium profile, available to a max. length of up to 6mtrs. Running along the middle for the entire length is a slim ruler indicating where holes must be made for fastening the bars to the frame. This is the simplest and safest system to use both when wanting to keep the guide stationary while the carriage with wheels runs up and down, and when the carriage is instead stationary and the guide slides. Guides are supplied cut to the requested size up to 6000mm in length. The screws locking the bars in place are positioned with the axis 30mm from the heads with centre to centre distance S. Where lengths are not an exact multiple of S (+60), head centre to centre distance S are varied as we deem most appropriate, or according to any customer specifications. The system comes complete with carriage for fitting relevant concentric and eccentric wheels. Assembly is left to the purchaser so that he can perform any necessary additional machining. In some applications where the load hangs over the side, a screwing torque may be generated on the bars causing them to slowly slide in their housings. To prevent this sliding, all D10-D20-G20 guides are fitted with a mechanical stop at each bar head. Value "T" in fig. 1 indicates the difference in length between the bar and profile required when applying the slide-inhibiting stops. The steel bars, unless otherwise specified by the customer, are always supplied shorter than the aluminium profile by a value of two times "T" so that the "bar stops" can be fitted. How to order the AD System: When using the whole system, i.e. guide plus carriage complete with wheels, order by quoting the type of system followed by the length in mm. ex. AD312; L-3500 Components may be ordered separately as follows: Guideways: Wheels: Carriages:

See www.tea.net.au for dimensions. To order state slide type followed by length in mm ex. D20; L-3500 See pages 402 to 403 for dimensions. To order state part number ex. C312 See www.tea.net.au for dimensions. To order state part number and abbreviate which material: A = Aluminium S = Steel ex. M312S All dimensions are subject to change without notice.

401


Roller Bearing Guide Wheels - suitable for 120째 Guideways V-Grooved wheels with an idler pin and round shafts. Each wheel size is produced with a concentric and eccentric bolt. Concentric wheels enable you to achieve parallelism between the carriage and guide, while eccentric wheels eliminate play. The system can be pre-loaded to achieve smoother or more rigid sliding depending on application demands. The 120째 groove on the outer race insures that the load is distributed over two points of the guide at all times meaning each carriage slides smoothly along its guide. The bolt features a recessed hexagonal nut at both ends so that the preload can be adjusted from whichever side is most convenient. These 120째 guide wheels are ideal for use with our precision round shaft - page 280-281

120째 V-Grooved Roller Bearing Guide Wheels Dimensions in mm

Part No. Wheel

Guide

D

d

d1

L1

L2

L3

C106* E106* C208 E208 C208R* E208R* C210* E210* C312 E312 C316 E316 C416* E416* C416R* E416R* C420 E420

S10/D10

22

M6

10

11

14.5

9.5

S10/D10

30

M8

10

14

18.0

S10/D10

30

M10

10

14

S10/D10

39

M10

10

S10/D10 G20 S10/D10 G20 S20/D20 G20 S20/D20 G20 S20/D20 G20

40

M12

40

L

1

Load Weight Dynamic Static g. A(N) R(N)

B1

B2

B3

B4

E

ES

I

S

S

24.0

6.5

8

2.5

7

1.0

2.5

14.5

2.5

1.0

300

300

31.2

14.0

32.0

9.0

9.0

4.5

9.5

1.0

3.0

18.0

2.0

2.0

400

1000

65.3

18.0

19.0

37.0

9.0

9.0

4.0

15.0

1.0

5.0

18.0

2.0

2.0

600

1300

73.8

18

22.5

19.0

41.5

11.0

11.5

4.0

15.0

1.0

5.0

22.0

2.5

2.0

600

1300

151

20

18

24.0

19.0

43.0

11.0

13.0

4.0

15.0

1.5

5.0

28.0

4.0

2.0

800

1600

165

M16

20

18

30.0

24.0

54.0

11.0

19.0

10.0

14.0

1.5

8.0

28.0

10.0

2.0

1600

3500

210

57

M16

20

22

33.5

24.0

57.5

14.5

19.0

10.0

14.0

1.5

8.0

35.0

8.0

3.5

1600

3500

414

58

M16

20

25

31.5

24.0

55.5

12.5

19.0

10.0

14.0

1.5

8.0

35.0

6.5

-

4300

4300

431

57

M20

20

22

33.5

24.0

57.5

14.5

19.0

10.0

14.0

1.5

8.0

35.0

8.0

3.5

5000

7850

491

1g = 0.0352736 oz.

C type - concentric E type - eccentric

Roller Bearing Load Runners

Dimensions in mm

Part No.

Load Dynamic Static Weight g. A(N) R(N)

S

S1

22.0

3.0

2.0

-

1300

151

5.0

28.0

3.0

0.5

-

1600

190

8.0

35.0

6.5

2.5

-

3500

480

Wheel

Guide

D

d

d1

L1

L2

L3

L

B1

B2

B3

B4

E

ES

I

CC210* EC210* CC312 EC312 CC416*

S10/D10

34

M10

10

17

22.0

19.0

41.0

10.5

11.5

4.0

15.0

1.0

5.0

S10/D10 G20 S10/D10

36

M12

20

20

23.5

19.0

42.5

10.5

13.0

4.0

15.0

1.0

50

M16

20

25

34.0

24.0

58.0

15.0

19.0

10.0

14.0

1.5

1g = 0.0352736 oz. Options: Nickel plated and made watertight - Add RS to Wheel Part No. ex. C106RS. Stainless Steel only available for wheels marked * - Add SS to Wheel Part No. ex. C106SS. The nut and Belleville Washer are supplied as standard issue. The latter, apart from acting as a washer, also prevents unscrewing. For improved unscrewing protection, the regular nut can be replaced with a locknut.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

402


Technical Data For Using 120째 Roller Bearing Guide Wheels On Hexagonal Bar (fig. 1)

fig. 1

Dimensions in mm Wheel Part No. C106 E106 C208 E208 C208R E208R C210 E210 C312 E312 C316 E316 C416 E416 C416R E416R C420 E420

Load Radial (N)

CHmax.

Axial (N)

-

15

300

300

31.2

19

-

-

400

1000

65.3

23.0

19

-

-

600

1300

73.8

39

30.5

24

-

-

600

1300

151

40

30.5

24

-

-

800

1600

165

40

33.0

30

24

36

1600

3500

210

57

41.0

30

-

36

1600

3500

414

58

41.0

30

27

36

4300

4300

431

57

41.0

30

-

36

5000

7850

491

D

I2

CH

22

17.0

14

30

23.0

30

CHmin

Weight g

1g = 0.0352736 oz.

120째 Roller Bearing Guide Wheels Without Bolt (fig. 2)

Dimensions in mm Wheel Part No.

D

d

C106SP C208SP C210SP C312SP C416SP

22 30 39 40 57

7 10 15 15 20

Load

L

Axial (N)

Radial (N)

Weight g

11 14 18 18 22

3400 6400 11500 11500 18000

1200 2700 7500 7500 10000

19.9 45.4 96.4 99.3 255.2

1g = 0.0352736 oz.

fig. 2

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

403


Mechanical Linear Guides - Type AK

Compact, high quality, versatile and easy to install and maintain.

Advantages: Very small overall dimensions Double drive head for perfect guide symmetry and securing points on four sides for the reduction gear. Patented locking and tensioning system that makes it possible to adjust and maintain the belt, working on two sides of the carriage and leaving the support surface free. Side grooves for brackets and for proximity or other switches. Possibility of using standard or longer carriages.

Three versions available: AK208R - this version has a roller guide and hardened, chrome-plated, not lubricated tracks ideal for: dirty environments dust, swarf, abrasives, filaments, etc.), environments in which track lubrication may contaminate the product (paper and fabric machining, packaging, etc.) also when easy sliding is required. AK208R Stainless Steel This is the version for the food industry and for corrosive environments (water, marine salt, steam, acids, etc.). AKR20 This version has ball bearing guides for applications that call for even greater rigidity and a very narrow carriage.

Construction: Section and connection. The basic structure of the AK range of guides consists of an extruded anodised aluminium section, measuring 30x60mm with maximum 6 mtr lengths. The two â&#x20AC;&#x153;Tâ&#x20AC;? slots formed in the sides can be used to anchor the entire linear guide using special fixing brackets. The slots can also be used for plates with M5, M6 and M8 holes.

Ball Bearing Guide One of the great advantages of the AKR20 range of linear guides is the possibility of fitting different models of track guides. In fact all size 20 guides can be easily fitted above the trolley. In addition to its basic support function, the plate also has a mechanism for tensioning the belt.

Roller Guide The AK208R range is fitted with a D10 type sliding track. The guide is composed by an aluminium profile and two hardened, ground steel bars secured on the sides. The carriage, which measures 130x130x20 has two concentric C208R wheels and two E208R eccentric wheels that can be adjusted to cause the trolley to slide by eliminating any play on the guide.

The Belt Clamp In order to provide driving force on both heads, a system has been devised for tensioning the carriage belt. A double wedge system grips the belt and does not allow it to slip by means of the teeth on the lower element. The unit is made up of two aluminium elements and one end of the belt is inserted into a specific slot in the carriage, where it is secured by means of two screws that are used for correct tensioning.

404


Mechanical Linear Guides - Type AK

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

405


Roller Bearings: Cam, Load Runners & Combined - overview Page

Low Cost Stud Style HEC Cam Followers

407

M6-M30

Low Cost Yoke Type HEC Cam Followers

408

Outside Diameter 16mm - 90mm

Lubrication Free Inch Stud Style Cam Followers

409

Plain concentric stud style. Composite Tread, stainless steel shaft. Suitable wet areas Outside Diameter ½” to 1 5/8th”

Inch/Metric Stud Style Load Runner Radial & thrust loads Concentric & Eccentric versions Outside Diameter 1” to 10”

Inch/Metric Flanged Stud Style Load Runner Radial & thrust loads Outside Diameter 1” to 8”

V-Grooved Inch/Metric Stud Style Load Runner Concentric & Eccentric versions. Radial & thrust loads Outside Diameter 1” to 8”

Plain Yoke Style Inch/Metric Load Runner Radial & thrust loads Higher capacity than stud style Outside Diameter 1” to 8”

V-Grooved Yoke Style Inch/Metric Load Runner Radial & thrust loads Outside Diameter 1” to 8” Higher capacity than stud style

Inch -410-411 Metric 418-419

Inch 412-413 Metric 420-421

Inch 414-415 Metric 422-423

Inch 416 Metric 424

Inch 417 Metric 425

Installation Notes for Load Runners

426

Load Rails & other Load Runner versions

*

Please visit our web site * www.tea.net.au for data sheets

Winkel Combined Bearings Bearings to take high radial & axial loads Many other types of Combined Bearings are available. Please visit our website www.tea.net.au to see full range, and download additional data.

406

427-436


HEC Cam Followers Sealed type with crowned outer ring Exceptionally well priced Many sizes in stock Ideal for large quantity orders Material - Bearing: Steel

R500

B2 g2

D

g1 G

d G1 C

C1

B1

B

Part No.

Nut Load Max Tightening Speed Weight Torque Dynamic Static (greased) approx. C1 Nm kN kN rpm kg

D

d

C

B

B1

B2

G

G1

g1

g2

KR16PP KR19PP KR22PP KR26PP

16 19 22 26

6 8 10 10

11 11 12 12

28 32 36 36

16.0 20.0 23.0 23.0

-

M6 x 1 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1 M10 x 1

8 10 12 12

4 4 4 4

-

0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

2.5 6.8 12.5 12.5

3.7 4.3 5.5 5.5

4.0 6.3 6.7 6.7

12000 9000 7000 7000

0.018 0.028 0.042 0.058

KR30PP KR32PP KR35PP KR40PP

30 32 35 40

12 12 16 18

14 14 18 20

40 40 52 58

25.0 25.0 32.5 36.5

6 6 8 8

M12 x 1.5 M12 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5

13 13 17 19

6 6 6 6

3 3 3 3

0.6 0.6 0.8 0.8

18.2 18.2 45.8 68.7

8.1 8.1 12.3 15.0

9.0 9.0 15.6 25.0

5500 2100 3600 2900

0.087 0.105 0.169 0.250

KR47PP KR52PP KR62PP KR72PP

47 52 62 72

20 20 24 24

24 24 29 29

66 66 80 80

40.5 40.5 49.5 49.5

9 9 11 11

M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M24 x 1.5 M24 x 1.5

21 21 25 25

8 8 8 8

4 4 4 4

0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

101 101 205 205

21.10 21.10 31.10 31.10

31.40 31.40 38.40 38.40

1200 2400 1900 1900

0.390 0.461 0.815 1.140

KR80PP KR85PP KR90PP

80 85 90

30 30 30

35 35 35

100 100 100

63 63 63

15 15 15

M30 x 1.5 M30 x 1.5 M30 x 1.5

32 32 32

8 8 8

4 4 4

1.0 1.0 1.0

351 351 351

46.30 46.30 46.30

63.00 63.00 63.00

1300 1300 1300

1.870 2.030 2.220

Sizes from 16 to 40 are standard stock items.

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

407


HEC Yoke Type Cam Followers With crowned outer ring Exceptionally well priced Ideal for large quantity orders

Load Stud Ø mm 16 19

24 30

32 35

40 47

52 62

72 80

85 90

d1

Dynamic N

Static N

Max. Speed (greased) rpm

11 11 11 11

12 12 14 14

3050 4500 3600 5700

3000 6300 3650 8700

22000 8500 20000 7000

0.014 0.015 0.020 0.021

15 15 15 15

14 14 14 14

19 19 23 23

4500 8600 6100 10900

5400 12000 7800 17000

5000 5500 11000 4500

0.041 0.042 0.064 0.065

32 32 35 35

15 15 19 19

14 14 18 18

25 25 27 27

6600 11800 10500 16000

9800 19000 17500 32500

9000 3900 7000 3400

0.071 0.072 0.103 0.105

17 17 20 20

40 40 47 47

21 21 25 25

20 20 24 24

32 32 37 37

11800 19600 17500 25800

19400 37000 29800 57000

6000 2900 4900 2600

0.144 0.152 0.246 0.254

NATR25PP ANTV25PP NATR30PP NATV30PP

25 25 30 30

52 52 62 62

25 25 29 29

24 24 28 28

42 42 51 51

19500 29000 31000 45500

36500 69600 57500 104000

3600 2100 2600 1700

0.275 0.285 0.470 0.481

NATR35 NATV35 NATR40 NATV40

NATR35PP NATV35PP NATR40PP NATV40PP

35 35 40 40

72 72 80 80

29 29 32 32

28 28 30 30

58 58 66 66

34500 50800 47000 64000

67500 109500 91500 139000

2000 1400 1700 1300

0.635 0.647 0.805 0.890

NATR45 NATV50 NATR50

NATR45PP ANTV50PP NATR50PP

45 50 50

85 90 90

32 32 32

30 30 30

72 76 76

49100 50500 69500

98000 10600 187000

1500 1700 1000

0.910 0.960 0.990

Part No Crowned Outer Ring

P/N with seal

d

D

B

C

NATR5 NATV5 NATR6 NATV6

NATR5PP ANTV5PP NATR6PP NATV6PP

5 5 6 6

16 16 19 19

12 12 12 12

NATR8 NATV8 NATR10 NATV10

NATR8PP ANTV8PP NATR10PP NATV10PP

8 8 10 10

24 24 30 30

NATR12 NATV12 NATR15 NATV15

NATR12PP ANTV12PP NATR15PP NATV15PP

12 12 15 15

NATR17 NATV17 NATR20 NATV20

NATR17PP ANTV17PP NATR20PP NATV20PP

NATR25 NATV25 NATR30 NATV30

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

408

Weight approx. kg.


Cam Runner, Plain - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

PCR-1/2

Item No.

96959

A B K L N Roller Dia Roller Width Stud Dia. Stud Length Fine Thread Length 0.500

0.406

0.188

0.625

10-32

M Thread 0.250

S Static Shoulder Capacity Length 0.031

110

PCR-9/16

96960

0.563

0.406

0.188

0.625

10-32

0.250

0.031

110

PCR-5/8

96961

0.625

0.469

0.250

0.750

1/4-28

0.313

0.031

230

PCR-11/16

96962

0.688

0.469

0.250

0.750

1/4-28

0.313

0.031

230

PCR-3/4

96963

0.750

0.563

0.375

0.875

3/8-24

0.375

0.063

700

PCR-7/8

96964

0.875

0.563

0.375

0.875

3/8-24

0.375

0.063

700

PCR-1

96965

1.000

0.688

0.438

1.000

7/16-20

0.500

0.063

870

PCR-1 1/8

96966

1.125

0.688

0.438

1.000

7/16-20

0.500

0.063

870

PCR-1 1/4

96967

1.250

0.813

0.500

1.250

1/2-20

0.625

0.063

1100

PCR-1 3/8

96968

1.375

0.813

0.500

1.250

1/2-20

0.625

0.063

1100

PCR-1 1/2

96969

1.500

0.938

0.625

1.500

5/8-18

0.750

0.063

1800

PCR-1 5/8

96970

1.625

0.938

0.625

1.500

5/8-18

0.750

0.063

1800

Dimensions are in inches

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

General Characteristics Cam Runners are significantly different from conventional needle bearing style cam followers. Cam Runners are manufactured with a composite synthetic tread and stainless steel stud. The composite tread consists of two different synthetic materials chosen to provide optimal characteristics for the outer wear surface and the inner bearing surface. The two synthetic parts are molded together to form a single mechanically bonded assembly that is mounted on the stud, eliminating the need for conventional seals and lubricants. The outer tread material offers high mechanical strength while the inner bearing material provides high lubricity. The stud provides optimum life and corrosion resistance. Tread bearing wear is critically dependent on the hardness of the mating surface. When this assembly is used as a direct replacement for a conventional cam follower, the life will be optimized if the cam or other mating surface is within the range of 55 - 60 Rc. Softer or harder materials may result in decreased life, particularly under high loads. The mating surface must be free of grease, oil and abrasive contaminants. This assembly is dimensionally interchangeable with conventional steel cam followers. Because of its unique construction, comparable load ratings are not applicable. In order to guide you in choosing applications, extensive testing has been utilized to develop life expectancies based upon continuous duty testing at various speeds and loads. In continuous duty operation under identical loads and speeds, the Cam Runner has been found to outlast conventional steel cam followers by an average of 10 times! Bearing to stud clearance is greater than for needle bearing designs and will increase during early use and will stabilize after ”wearing in“. Advantages • No lubrication required – ever! • Non sparking and low electrical conductivity • Thrust load tolerant • Extended life, ideal for difficult-to service- operations

• No lubricant leakage to contaminate your process • Quiet operation resulting from no internal moving parts • Wide range of operating temperatures • ISO 9001 compliant

Not recommended for ambient temperatures above 121°C, highly abrasive applications or repeated heavy shock loads.

409


Plain - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

Item No.

A B K L M Roller Roller Stud Stud Thread Dia. Width Dia. Length Length +0.000 +0.000 -0.001 -0.001

N Fine Thread

R S Rec.Mtg. Shldr. Shldr. Hole Size Dia. Length +0.001 -0.000

Mounting Approx. Member Weight Thickness (kg) Max. Min.

PLR 1

97318

1.000

0.781

0.437

1.000

0.500

7/16-20 0.500

0.031

0.438

0.625 0.500

0.090

PLR 1-1/8

97319

1.125

0.781

0.437

1.000

0.500

7/16-20 0.500

0.031

0.438

0.6250.500

0.136 0.136

PLR 1-1/4

97320

1.250

0.844

0.500

1.250

0.625

1/2-20 0.625

0.031

0.501

0.750 0.625

PLR 1-3/8

97321

1.375

0.844

0.500

1.250

0.625

1/2-20 0.625

0.031

0.501

0.750 0.625

0.181

PLR 1-1/2

95086

1.500

1.187

0.625

1.500

0.750

5/8-18 0.750

0.062

0.626

1.000 0.750

0.226

PLR 1-3/4

95112

1.750

1.187

0.750

1.750

0.875

3/4-16 1.000

0.062

0.751

1.125 0.875

0.362

PLR 2

95125

2.000

1.687

0.875

2.000

1.125

7/8-14 1.000

0.062

0.876

1.250 0.875

0.589

PLR 2-3

95126

2.000

1.375

0.875

2.000

1.125

7/8-14 1.000

0.062

0.876

1.250 0.875

0.544

PLR 2-1/4

95152

2.250

1.687

0.875

2.000

1.125

7/8-14 1.000

0.062

0.876

1.250 0.875

0.816

PLR 2-1/2

95160

2.500

1.687

1.000

2.250

1.500

1-14 1.250

0.062

1.001

1.250 0.750

1.043

PLR 2-1/2-10 95164

2.500

1.812

1.000

2.250

1.500

1-14 1.250

0.187

1.001

1.250 0.750

1.043

PLR 2-1/2-16 95165

2.500

1.812

1.000

2.250

1.500

1-14 1.250

0.062

1.001

1.250 0.750

1.043

PLR 2-3/4

2.750

1.687

1.000

2.250

1.500

1-14 1.250

0.062

1.001

1.250 0.750

1.270

95190

PLR 3

95200

3.000

2.000

1.250

2.500

1.750

1-1/4-12 1.750

0.062

1.251

1.250 1.000

1.814

PLR 3-1/4

95245

3.250

2.000

1.250

2.500

1.750

1-1/4-12 1.750

0.062

1.251

1.250 1.000

2.177

PLR 3-1/2

95248

3.500

2.000

1.250

2.750

1.750

1-1/4-12 1.750

0.062

1.251

1.500 1.250

2.494

PLR 4

95268

4.000

2.000

1.250

2.750

1.750

1-1/4-12 1.750

0.062

1.251

1.500 1.250

3.220

PLR 4-1/2

95304

4.500

2.000

1.250

2.750

1.750

1-1/4-12 1.750

0.062

1.251

1.500 1.250

4.082

PLR 5

95323

5.000

3.000

2.000

4.500

2.500

2-12 3.250

0.062

2.001

2.750 2.000

8.618 12.700

PLR 6

95353

6.000

3.000

2.500

5.500

3.250

2-1/2-12 3.250

0.062

2.501

3.250 2.000

PLR 7

95374

7.000

3.000

2.500

5.500

3.250

2-1/2-12 3.250

0.062

2.501

3.250 2.000

16.329

PLR 8

95386

8.000

3.000

2.500

5.500

3.250

2-1/2-12 3.250

0.062

2.501

3.250 2.000

22.226

PLR 10

95398

10.000 3.000

2.500

5.500

3.250

2-1/2-12 3.250

0.062

2.501

3.250 2.000

32.658

PLR 10-1

95399

10.000 5.000

4.250

9.000

4.000

3-1/2-4NC 5.000

0.125

4.252

5.750 5.125

58.967

Dimensions are in inches

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. * For stud hex socket size, see page 426. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au

410


Plain - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

Ball or Tapered Roller Bearings

Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (lbs)

3000 hrs 500 hrs L10 life @ L10 life @ 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM

Static Limit (Radial)

Bearing Capacity, Limiting Static Thrust (lbs)

Stud Capacity (lbs) Bending = 0.75 Sy

Shear = 0.75 x 0.5 x Sy

Concent. Concent. Load at B/2 Load at B

Load at Mtg. Rail

Ret. Ring Allow. Load (lbs)

PLR 1

BB

240

630

230

140

480

210

1970

380

PLR 1-1/8

BB

240

630

230

140

480

210

1970

380

PLR 1-1/4

BB

520

1350

600

370

880

390

3250

470

PLR 1-3/8

BB

520

1350

600

370

880

390

3250

470

PLR 1-1/2

BB

1050

2760

1100

680

1390

650

5780

470

PLR 1-3/4

BB

1050

2760

1100

680

1390

650

5780

470

PLR 2

BB

1460

3830

1620

1000

4010

1500

11610

910

PLR 2-3

BB

1460

3830

1620

1000

3090

1520

11610

910

PLR 2-1/4

BB

1460

3830

1620

1000

4010

1500

11610

910

PLR 2-1/2

BB

1980

5190

2270

1400

3730

1770

14580

1340

PLR 2-1/2-10

BB

1980

5190

2270

1400

3730

1770

14580

1340

PLR 2-1/2-16

TRB

4570

10880

7630

4570

6920

3700

25920

N/A

PLR 2-3/4

BB

1980

5190

2270

1400

3730

1770

14580

1340

PLR 3

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

12270

6330

40500

N/A

PLR 3-1/4

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

12270

6330

40500

N/A

PLR 3-1/2

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

12270

6330

40500

N/A

PLR 4

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

12270

6330

40500

N/A

PLR 4-1/2

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

12270

6330

40500

N/A

PLR 5

TRB

13990

33290

51900

32500

34120

17350

103670

N/A

PLR 6

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

66710

33910

161990

N/A

PLR 7

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

66710

33910

161990

N/A

PLR 8

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

66710

33910

161990

N/A

PLR 10

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

66710

33910

161990

N/A

PLR 10-1

TRB

34410

81890

159800

116000

194120

99480

468150

N/A

** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

411


Flanged - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

Item No.

A Roller Dia.

B C D K L M Roller Flange Flange Stud Dia. Stud Thread Width Dia. Thickness Length Length

N Fine Thread

R Shldr. Dia.

S Shldr. Length

Rec. Mtg. Hole Size +0.000 -0.001

+0.000 -0.001 FLR-1

97326

1.000

0.781

1.375

0.219

0.437

1.000

0.500

7/16-20

0.500

0.031

0.438

FLR-1 1/8

97327

1.125

0.781

1.500

0.219

0.437

1.000

0.500

7/16-20

0.500

0.031

0.438

FLR-1 1/4

97328

1.250

0.844

1.563

0.219

0.500

1.250

0.625

1/2-20

0.625

0.031

0.501

FLR-1 3/8

97329

1.375

0.844

1.688

0.219

0.500

1.250

0.625

1/2-20

0.625

0.031

0.501

FLR-1 1/2

95445

1.500

1.188

2.188

0.343

0.625

1.500

0.750

5/8-18

0.750

0.062

0.626

FLR-1 1/2-2

95446

1.500

1.063

2.000

0.343

0.500

1.375

0.750

1/2-20

0.625

0.125

0.501

FLR-1 3/4

95472

1.750

1.188

2.438

0.343

0.750

1.750

0.875

3/4-16

1.000

0.062

0.751

FLR-2

95482

2.000

1.688

2.688

0.593

0.875

2.000

1.125

7/8-14

1.000

0.062

0.876

FLR-2 1/4

95498

2.250

1.688

2.938

0.593

0.875

2.000

1.125

7/8-14

1.000

0.062

0.876

FLR-2 1/2

95502

2.500

1.688

3.188

0.593

1.000

2.250

1.500

1-14

1.250

0.062

1.001

FLR-2 1/2-1

95503

2.500

1.812

3.188

0.593

1.000

2.250

1.500

1-14

1.250

0.062

1.001

FLR-2 3/4

95515

2.750

1.688

3.438

0.593

1.000

2.250

1.500

1-14

1.250

0.062

1.001

FLR-3

95520

3.000

2.000

3.938

0.593

1.250

2.500

1.750

1 1/4-12

1.750

0.062

1.251

FLR-3 1/4

95555

3.250

2.000

4.188

0.593

1.250

2.500

1.750

1 1/4-12

1.750

0.062

1.251

FLR-3 1/2

95558

3.500

2.000

4.438

0.593

1.250

2.750

1.750

1 1/4-12

1.750

0.062

1.251

FLR-4

95562

4.000

2.000

4.938

0.593

1.250

2.750

1.750

1 1/4-12

1.750

0.062

1.251

FLR-4M

95567

4.000

2.000

4.938

1.000

1.250

2.750

1.750

1 1/4-12

1.750

0.062

1.251

FLR-4 1/2

95591

4.500

2.000

5.438

0.593

1.250

2.750

1.750

1 1/4-12

1.750

0.062

1.251

FLR-5

95601

5.000

3.000

5.938

0.718

2.000

4.500

2.500

2-12

3.250

0.062

2.001

FLR-6

95625

6.000

3.000

6.938

0.718

2.500

5.500

3.250

2 1/2-12

3.250

0.062

2.501

FLR-7

95640

7.000

3.000

7.938

0.718

2.500

5.500

3.250

2 1/2-12

3.250

0.062

2.501

FLR-8

95641

8.000

3.000

8.938

0.718

2.500

5.500

3.250

2 1/2-12

3.250

0.062

2.501

Dimensions are in inches

All specfications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. * For stud hex socket size, see page 426. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au

412


Flanged - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

Ret. Ring Roller Mounting Approx. Stud Capacity (lbs) Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (lbs) Bearing Allow. Member Thickness Weight Capacity, Tapered Shear = Limiting Bending = 0.75 Sy 0.75 x 0.5 Load Roller (kg) Max. Min. (lbs) Static Static Bearings 3000 hrs 500 hrs x Sy (inch) (inch) Thrust Limit L10 life @ L10 life @ Concent. Concent. Load at (lbs) Load at B/2 Load at B Mtg. Rail 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial)

FLR-1

BB

240

630

230

140

370

210

1970

380

0.625

0.500

0.136

FLR-1 1/8

BB

240

630

230

140

370

210

1970

380

0.625

0.500

0.136

FLR-1 1/4

BB

520

1350

600

370

710

390

3250

470

0.750

0.625

0.181

FLR-1 3/8

BB

520

1350

600

370

710

390

3250

470

0.750

0.625

0.181

FLR-1 1/2

BB

1050

2760

1100

680

1100

650

5780

470

1.000

0.750

0.272

FLR-1 1/2-2

BB

930

2430

970

600

700

420

4020

335

1.000

0.750

0.226

FLR-1 3/4

BB

1050

2760

1100

680

1100

650

5780

470

1.125

0.875

0.453

FLR-2

BB

1460

3830

1620

1000

2640

1500

11610

910

1.250

0.875

0.816

FLR-2 1/4

BB

1460

3830

1620

1000

2640

1500

11610

910

1.250

0.875

0.952

FLR-2 1/2

BB

1980

5190

2270

1400

2780

1770

14580

1340

1.250

0.750

1.270

FLR-2 1/2-1

TRB

4570

10890

7630

4570

5460

3580

25920

N/A

1.250

0.750

1.270

FLR-2 3/4

BB

1980

5190

2270

1400

2780

1770

14580

1340

1.250

0.750

1.451

FLR-3

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

9880

6330

40500

N/A

1.250

1.000

2.131

FLR-3 1/4

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

9880

6330

40500

N/A

1.250

1.000

2.404

FLR-3 1/2

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

9880

6330

40500

N/A

1.250

1.000

2.812

FLR-4

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

9880

6330

40500

N/A

1.250

1.000

3.583

FLR-4M

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

8530

6330

40500

N/A

1.250

1.000

3.674

FLR-4 1/2

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

9880

6330

40500

N/A

1.250

1.000

4.490

FLR-5

TRB

13990

33290

51900

32500

28300

17350

103670

N/A

2.750

2.000

8.391

FLR-6

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

55320

33910

161990

N/A

3.250

2.000

13.380

FLR-7

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

55320

33910

161990

N/A

3.250

2.000

17.236

FLR-8

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

55320

33910

161990

N/A

3.250

2.000

20.865

** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

413


Load Runners V-Grooved - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

Item No.

A Roller Dia.

B Roller Width

F Point Dia.

See below for details of design recommendations for roller on rail

G K L M Groove Stud Dia. Stud Thread Location Length Length

N Thread Dia.

R Shldr. Dia.

S Shldr. Length

Rec. Mtg. Hole Size +0.000 -0.001

+0.000 -0.001 VLR-1 1/2

97334

1.500

0.781

1.125

0.391

0.437

1.000

0.500

7/16-20

0.500

0.031

0.438

VLR-2

97335

2.000

0.844

1.375

0.422

0.500

1.250

0.625

1/2-20

0.625

0.031

0.500

VLR-2 1/2

95660

2.500

1.312

1.500

0.687

0.750

1.750

0.875

3/4-16

1.000

0.062

0.751

VLR-3 1/2

95678

3.500

1.687

2.250

0.875

0.875

2.000

1.125

7/8-14

1.000

0.062

0.876

VLR-3 1/2-16 95685

3.500

2.000

2.250

0.875

0.750

2.000

1.125

3/4-16

1.250

0.062

0.751

VLR-4 1/2

95729

4.500

2.000

3.000

1.000

1.250

2.500

1.750

1 1/4-12

1.750

0.062

1.251

VLR-5 1/2

95760

5.500

2.000

4.000

1.000

1.250

2.750

1.750

1 1/4-12

1.750

0.062

1.251

VLR-6 1/2

95770

6.500

3.000

5.000

1.500

2.000

4.500

2.500

2-12

3.250

0.062

2.001

VLR-7 1/2

95777

7.500

3.000

6.000

1.500

2.500

5.500

3.250

2 1/2-12

3.250

0.062

2.501

VLR-8 1/2

95782

8.500

3.000

7.000

1.500

2.500

5.500

3.250

2 1/2-12

3.250

0.062

2.501

Dimensions are in inches

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. * For stud hex socket size, see page 426. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au

Roller and rail design recommendations. Mounting locations are determined by matching the roller point diameter with the rail point dimension. (â&#x20AC;&#x153;Fâ&#x20AC;? dimensions on roller and rail pages.)

414


V-Grooved - Concentric Stud Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

VLR-1 1/2

Roller Mounting Approx. Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (lbs) Bearing Capacity, Member Thickness Weight Tapered Limiting Roller (kg) Max. Min. Static Static Bearings 3000 hrs 500 hrs (inch) (inch) Thrust Limit L10 life @ L10 life @ (lbs) 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial) 0.625

0.500

0.226

BB

240

630

230

140

Ret. Ring Bending = Shear = 0.75 Allow. Load 0.75 Sy x 0.5 x Sy (lbs) Concent. Load at Load at V Mtg. Rail Stud Capacity (lbs)

370

1970

380

VLR-2

0.750

0.625

0.272

BB

520

1350

600

370

920

3250

470

VLR-2 1/2

1.250

1.000

0.589

BB 1

050

2760

1100

680

1230

5780

470

VLR-3 1/2

1.250

1.000

1.542

BB

1980

5190

2270

1400

3730

14580

1340

VLR-3 1/2-16

1.250

1.000

1.542

TRB

3780

8990

7200

3150

3120

14580

N/A

VLR-4 1/2

1.250

1.000

3.175

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

12660

40500

N/A

VLR-5 1/2

1.500

1.250

4.762

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

12660

40500

N/A

VLR-6 1/2

3.000

2.000

11.566

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

34880

103670

N/A

VLR-7 1/2

3.250

2.250

16.782

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

68130

161990

N/A

VLR-8 1/2

3.250

2.250

20.865

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

68130

161990

N/A

** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

415


Plain - Yoke Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

Item No.

A Roller Dia.

B Roller Width

E Tread Width

P Bore Nom.

+0.000 +0.005 -0.001 -0.010

R Shldr. Dia. Tol.

S Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load Bearing Approx. Capacity, (lbs) Shldr. Tapered Limiting Weight Length Roller 3000 hrs (kg) Static 500 hrs Static Bearings L10 life @ L10 life @ Limit Thrust 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial) (lbs)

PLRY-1 1/2

90254

1.500

0.937

0.875

0.437

0.875

0.031

BB

710

1850

780

480

0.136

PLRY-1 3/4

90255

1.750

1.063

1.000

0.500

1.000

0.031

BB

710

1850

780

480

0.317 0.408

PLRY-2

90256

2.000

1.313

1.250

0.625

1.125

0.031

BB

1300

3400

1810

1120

PLRY-2 1/4

90257

2.250

1.313

1.250

0.625

1.125

0.031

BB

1300

3400

1810

1120

0.635

PLRY-2 1/2

96117

2.500

1.562

1.500

0.750

1.250

0.031

TRB

4570

10880

7630

4570

0.907

PLRY-2 1/2-7 90107

2.500

1.562

1.500

BB

2130

5590

2530

1560

0.907

2.750

1.562

1.500

0.750 +0.0005 1.250 0.750 -0.0000 1.250

0.031

PLRY-2 3/4-7 90108

0.031

BB

2130

5590

2530

1560

1.043

PLRY-3

3.000

1.812

1.750

1.000

0.031

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

1.179

96118

1.750

PLRY-3 1/4

96133

3.250

1.812

1.750

1.000

1.750

0.031

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

1.542

PLRY-3 1/2

96138

3.500

2.062

2.000

1.125

2.000

0.031

TRB

7390

17590

27200

13100

1.905 2.993

PLRY-4

96144

4.000

2.312

2.250

1.250

2.250

0.031

TRB

7390

17590

27200

13100

PLRY-5

96154

5.000

2.875

2.750

1.750

3.250

0.062

TRB

13990

33290

51900

32500

5.125

PLRY-6

96165

6.000

3.375

3.250

2.250

3.500

0.062

TRB

15060

35840

56400

33100

8.799

PLRY-7

96177

7.000

3.875

3.750

2.750

PLRY-8

96184

8.000

4.500

4.250

3.255

PLRY-9

96194

9.000

5.000

4.750

3.755

PLRY-10

96197 10.000

5.500

5.250

4.255

+0.001 -0.000

4.250

0.062

TRB

17830

42430

79800

48400

13.290

4.750

0.125

TRB

35250

83890

159800

110000

19.912

5.500

0.125

TRB

56400

134230

250000

147000

23.405

6.500

0.125

TRB

58080

138240

276000

196000

36.287

Dimensions are in inches

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. For heavy-duty shafts see www.tea.net.au

416


V-Grooved - Yoke Style Inch Sizes

Part No.

Item No.

See below for details of design recommendations for roller on rail.

A B E F G P Roller Roller Tread Point Groove Bore Dia. Width Width Dia. Location Nom. Tol. +0.005 -0.010

Bearing R S Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load Capacity, Approx. (lbs) Shldr. Shldr. Tapered Limiting Weight Dia. Length Roller 3000 hrs 500 hrs (Kg) Static Static Bearings L10 life @ L10 life @ Limit Thrust (lbs) 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial)

VLRY-2 1/2

90262

2.500

0.937 0.875 1.500

0.468

0.437

0.875 0.031

BB

710

1850

780

480

0.45

VLRY-3

90263

3.000

1.312 1.250 2.000

0.656

0.625

1.125 0.031

BB

1300

3400

1810

1120

0.95

VLRY-3 1/2-7 90109

3.500

1.562 1.500 2.250

0.781

0.750

1.250 0.031

BB

2130

5590

2530

1560

1.27

VLRY-3 3/4

96655

3.750

1.562 1.500 2.500

0.781

4570

10880

7630

4570

1.40

96266

4.500

1.812 1.750 3.000

0.906

0.750 +0.0005 1.250 0.031 1.000 -0.0000 1.750 0.031

TRB

VLRY-4 1/2

TRB

6000

14270

20000

12000

2.26

VLRY-5

96279

5.000

2.062 2.000 3.500

1.030

1.125

TRB

7390

17590

27200

13100

3.44

2.000 0.031

VLRY-5 1/2

96283

5.500

2.312 2.250 4.000

1.156

1.250

2.250 0.031

TRB

7390

17590

27200

13100

5.08

VLRY-6 1/2

96287

6.500

2.875 2.750 5.000

1.437

1.750

3.500 0.062

TRB

15060

35840

44600

23010

8.52

VLRY-7 1/2

96291

7.500

3.375 3.250 6.000

1.687

2.250

3.500 0.062

TRB

15060

35840

52600

26930

13.83

VLRY-8 1/2

96292

8.500

3.875 3.750 7.000

1.937

2.750

4.250 0.062

TRB

17830

42430

60300

30850

20.27

VLRY-9 1/2

96297

9.500

4.500 4.250 8.000

2.250

TRB

5250

*

69540

34770

29.12

VLRY-10 1/2 96300 10.500

5.000 4.750 9.000

2.500

3.255 +0.001 4.750 0.125 -0.000 3.755 5.500 0.125

TRB

56400

*

77380

38690

35.15

Dimensions are in inches

All specifications are subject to change without notice. * Exceeds static capacity Other sizes available on request. For heavy-duty shafts see www.tea.net.au

Roller and rail design recommendations. Mounting locations are determined by matching the roller point diameter with the rail point dimension. (“F” dimensions on roller and rail pages.)

417


Plain - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)

Part No.

Item No.

A Roller Dia.

B K L M Roller Stud Dia. Stud Thread Width Thickness Length

+0.000 -0.001

N Thread

R Shldr. Dia.

S Shldr. Length

Rec. Mtg. Approx. Hole Size Weight (kg) +0.00 -0.02

+0.00 -0.02

HPC-26

97374

26

20

10

23

13

M10×1

13.1

0.8

10.02

0.09

HPC-30

97375

30

20

12

25

14

M12×1.5

15.9

0.8

12.02

0.11

HPC-32

97376

32

22

12

25

14

M12×1.5

15.9

0.8

12.02

0.14

HPC-35

97377

35

22

16

32.5

18

M16×1.5

19.1

0.8

16.02

0.17

HPC-40

95064

40

30

14

40

26

M14×2

18

1.6

14.02

0.27

HPC-40-1

95063

40

27.6

18

36.5

19

M18×1.5

22

1.6

18.02

0.24

HPC-47

95065

47

27.6

20

40.5

21

M20×1.5

25.5

1.6

20.02

0.42

HPC-50

95068

50

40

16

50

35

M16×2

23

1.6

16.02

0.54

HPC-52

95066

52

33.6

20

40.5

21

M20×1.5

5.5

1.6

20.02

0.54

HPC-62

95070

62

44

24

58

35

M24×3

32

1.6

24.02

1.04

HPC-62-1

95069

62

44

24

49.5

25

M24×1.5

32

1.6

24.02

1.04

HPC-72

95072

72

44

24

49.5

25

M24×1.5

32

1.6

24.02

1.4

HPC-76

95074

76

52

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

1.91

HPC-80

95075

80

52

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

2.07

HPC-85

95076

85

52

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

2.37

HPC-90

95077

90

52

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

2.65

HPC-100

95079

100

52

30

80

50

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

3.33

HPC-100-1

95078

100

52

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

3.15

HPC-125

95080

125

76

48

105

60

M48×5

82.5

1.6

48.02

8.48

HPC-150

95081

150

76

64

140

82

M64×6

82.5

1.6

64.02

12.5

HPC-200

95082

200

76

64

140

82

M64×6

82.5

1.6

64.02

21.87

Dimensions are in mm

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au * For stud hex socket size, see page 426.

418


Plain - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)

Part No.

Ball or Tapered Roller Bearings

Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (N)

3000 hrs 500 hrs L10 life @ L10 life @ 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM

Static Limit (Radial)

Bearing Capacity, Limiting Static Thrust (N)

Stud Capacity (N) Bending = 0.75 Sy

Shear = 0.75 x 0.5 x Sy

Concent. Concent. Load at B/2 Load at B

Load at Mtg. Rail

Ret. Ring Allow. Load (N)

HPC-26

BB

1070

2790

1000

620

2120

910

8780

1700

HPC-30

BB

1070

2790

1000

620

2120

910

8780

1700

HPC-32

BB

2300

6010

2690

1660

3820

1690

14450

2090

HPC-35

BB

2300

6010

2690

1660

3820

1690

14450

2090

HPC-40

BB

4680

12260

4900

3030

6170

2890

25690

2090

HPC-40-1

BB

4680

12260

4900

3030

6330

3060

25690

2090

HPC-47

BB

4680

12260

4900

030

6330

3060

25690

2090

HPC-50

BB

6490

17020

7210

4450

8810

4570

45760

4050

HPC-52

BB

6490

17020

7210

4450

14430

7030

51600

4050

HPC-62

BB

8810

23080

10090

6230

16090

7650

64850

5960

HPC-62-1

BB

8810

23080

10090

6230

16070

7650

64850

5960

HPC-72

TRB

20330

48390

33940

20330

26410

13840

102960

N/A

HPC-76

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

45000

23170

160800

N/A

HPC-80

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

45000

23170

160800

N/A

HPC-85

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

45000

23170

160800

N/A

HPC-90

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

45000

23170

160800

N/A

HPC-100

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

45000

23170

160800

N/A

HPC-100-1

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

45000

23170

160800

N/A

HPC-125

TRB

62210

148070

230860

144570

128100

65120

411830

N/A

HPC-150

TRB

66990

159430

250880

147240

301500

153930

731550

N/A

HPC-200

TRB

66990

159430

250880

147240

301500

153930

731550

N/A

** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

419


Flanged - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)

Part No.

Item No.

A Roller Dia.

B C D K L M Roller Flange Flange Stud Dia. Stud Thread Width Dia. Thickness Length Length

N Thread

R Shldr. Dia.

S Shldr. Length

+0.02 -0.00

+0.00 -0.02 HPJ-26

97382

26

20

35

5

10

Rec. Mtg. Hole Size

23

13

M10×1

13.1

0.8

10.02

HPJ-30

97383

30

20

40

5

12

25

14

M12×1.5

15.9

0.8

12.02

HPJ-32

97384

32

22

42

5

12

25

14

M12×1.5

15.9

0.8

12.02

HPJ-35

97385

35

22

46

5

16

32.5

18

M16×1.5

19.1

0.8

16.02

HPJ-40

95410

40

30

54

8.8

14

40

26

M14×2

18

1.6

14.02

HPJ-40-1

95409

40

27.6

54

7.8

18

36.5

19

M18×1.5

22

1.6

18.02

HPJ-47

95411

47

27.6

61

7.8

20

40.5

21

M20×1.5

25.5

1.6

20.02

HPJ-50

95415

50

40

68

14

16

50

35

M16×2

23

1.6

16.02

HPJ-52

95413

52

33.6

66

10.8

20

40.5

21

M20×1.5

25.5

1.6

20.02

HPJ-62

95420

62

44

78

14

24

58

35

M24×3

32

1.6

24.02

HPJ-62-2

95418

62

44

78

14

24

49.5

25

M24×1.5

32

1.6

24.02

HPJ-72

95422

72

44

90

14

24

49.5

25

M24×1.5

32

1.6

24.02

HPJ-76

95427

76

52

98

14

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPJ-80

95429

80

52

102

14

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPJ-85

95430

85

52

107

14

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPJ-90

95431

90

52

112

14

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPJ-100

95435

100

52

125

14

30

80

50

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPJ-100-1

95434

100

52

125

14

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPJ-125

95440

125

76

148

18

48

105

60

M48×5

82.5

1.6

48.02

HPJ-150

95441

150

76

173

18.3

64

140

82

M64×6

82.5

1.6

64.02

HPJ-200

95443

200

76

223

18.3

64

140

82

M64×6

82.5

1.6

64.02

Dimensions are in mm

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au * For stud hex socket size, see page 426.

420


Flanged - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)

Part No.

HPJ-26

Approx Weight (Kg)

0.11

Ball or Tapered Roller Bearings

BB

Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (N)

3000 hrs 500 hrs L10 life @ L10 life @ 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM 1070

2790

Static Limit (Radial) 1000

Bearing Capacity, Limiting Static Thrust (N) 620

Stud Capacity (N) Bending = 0.75 Sy

Shear = 0.75 x 0.5 x Sy

Concent. Concent. Load at B/2 Load at B

Load at Mtg. Rail

1610

890

8780

Ret. Ring Allow. Load (N)

1700

HPJ-30

0.14

BB

1070

2790

1000

620

1610

890

8780

1700

HPJ-32

0.17

BB

2300

6010

2690

1660

3070

1690

14450

2090

HPJ-35

0.2

BB

2300

6010

2690

1660

3070

1690

14450

2090

HPJ-40

0.33

BB

4680

12260

4900

3030

4890

2890

25690

2090

HPJ-40-1

0.24

BB

4680

12260

4900

3030

5040

3060

25690

2090

HPJ-47

0.47

BB

4680

12260

4900

3030

5040

3060

25690

2090

HPJ-50

0.7

BB

6490

17020

7210

4450

6860

4570

45760

4050

HPJ-52

0.83

BB

6490

17020

7210

4450

11080

7030

51600

4050

HPJ-62

1.21

BB

8810

23080

10090

6230

12340

7650

64850

5960

HPJ-62-2

1.21

BB

8810

23080

10090

6230

12340

7650

64850

5960

HPJ-72

1.28

TRB

20330

48390

33940

20330

21390

14030

102960

N/A

HPJ-76

2.17

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

36890

23150

160800

N/A

HPJ-80

2.41

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

36890

23150

160800

N/A

HPJ-85

2.75

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

36890

23150

160800

N/A

HPJ-90

2.98

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

36890

23150

160800

N/A

HPJ-100

3.7

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

36890

23150

160800

N/A

HPJ-100-1

3.52

TRB

2670

63480

88960

53380

36890

23150

160800

N/A

HPJ-125

8.86

TRB

62210

148070

230860

144570

106160

64910

411830

N/A

HPJ-150

13.07

TRB

66990

159430

250880

147240

254530

153930

731550

N/A

HPJ-200

20.37

TRB

66990

159430

250880

147240

254530

153930

731550

N/A

** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

421


Load Runners V-Grooved - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)

Part No.

Item No.

A Roller Dia.

See below for details of design recommendations for roller on rail

B Roller Width

F Point Dia.

G K L M Groove Stud Dia. Stud Thread Location Length Length

N Tread

R Shldr. Dia.

S Shldr. Length

Rec. Mtg. Hole Size +0.02 -0.00

+0.00 -0.02 HPV-26

97390

40

20

26

10

10

23

13

M10×1

13.1

0.5

10.02

HPV-32

97391

50

22

32

11

12

25

14

M12×1.5

15.9

0.8

12.02

HPV-40

95648

60

33

40

17

14

40

26

M14×2

18

1.6

14.02

HPV-62

95652

90

44.5

62

23

24

57.9

34.9

M24×3

32

1.6

24.02

HPV-62-1

95651

90

44.5

62

23

24

49.5

25

M24×1.5

32

1.6

24.02

HPV-76

95654

120

50.5

76

26

30

70

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPV-100

95656

140

50.5

100

26

30

80

50

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPV-100-1

95655

140

50.5

100

26

30

69.5

40

M30×3.5

44.5

1.6

30.02

HPV-125

95657

165

76

125

37.8

48

60

M48×5

82.5

1.6

48.02

Dimensions are in mm

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au * For stud hex socket size, see page 426.

Roller and rail design recommendations. Mounting locations are determined by matching the roller point diameter with the rail point dimension. (“F” dimensions on roller and rail pages.)

422

105


V-Grooved - Concentric Stud Style Metric Sizes (mm)

Part No.

HPV-26

Approx. Ball or Weight Tapered (kgs) Roller Bearings

0.23

BB

Bearing Capacity, Radial Load (N)

3000 hrs 500 hrs L10 life @ L10 life @ 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM 1070

Static Limit (Radial)

2790

1000

Bearing Capacity, Limiting Static Thrust (N) 620

Stud Capacity (N) Bending = Shear = 0.75 0.75 Sy x 0.5 x Sy Concent. Load at V 2210

Ret. Ring Allow. Load (N)

Load at Mtg. Rail 8780

1700

HPV-32

0.26

BB

2300

6010

2690

1660

3960

14450

2090

HPV-40

0.53

BB

4680

12260

4900

3030

5480

25690

2090

HPV-62

1.79

BB

8810

23080

10090

6230

15960

64850

5960

HPV-62-1

1.9

BB

8810

23080

10090

6230

15880

64850

5960

HPV-76

3.27

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

46270

160800

N/A

HPV-100

4.77

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

46270

160800

N/A

HPV-100-1

4.77

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

46270

160800

N/A

11.56

TRB

62210

148070

216290

108140

130770

411830

N/A

HPV-125

** Lock washer and jam nut available at additional cost. For size see “N” dimension. Eccentric versions available, please see www.tea.net.au

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

423


Plain - Yoke Style Metric Sizes (mm)

Part No.

Item No.

A Roller Dia.

B Roller Width

E Tread Width

+0.00 -0.02

R S Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load Bearing Approx. Capacity, (lbs) Shldr. Shldr. Tapered Limiting Weight Dia. Length Roller (Kg) Static 3000 hrs 500 hrs Static Bearings L10 life @ L10 life @ Limit +0.00 Thrust 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial) (lbs) -0.02 P Bore

HPCA-40

90271

40

23

22

10

22

0.5

BB

3140

8220

3460

2140

0.14

HPCA-50

90272

50

33

32

15

28

0.5

BB

5780

15140

8070

4980

0.32

HPCA-62

97297

62

40

38

20

32

1

TRB

20330

48390

33940

20300

0.91

HPCA-62-2

90273

62

40

38

20

32

1

BB

9490

24880

11240

6940

0.91

HPCA-76

96105

76

46

44

25

44.5

1

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

1.24 1.41

HPCA-80

96107

80

46

44

25

44.5

1

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

HPCA-85

96108

85

46

44

25

44.5

1

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

1.6

HPCA-90

96109

90

56

54

30

57.2

1

TRB

32870

78240

120990

58270

1.92

HPCA-100

96110

100

56

54

30

57.2

1

TRB

32870

78240

120990

58270

2.93

HPCA-125

96111

125

71

68

45

82.6

1.5

TRB

62210

148070

230860

144570

5.01

HPCA-150

96112

150

73

70

55

1.5

TRB

66990

159430

250880

147240

8.65

HPCA-200

96114

200

79

76

70

108

88.9

1.5

TRB

79300

188740

354970

215290

19.58

HPCA-250

96116

250

79

76

70

108

1.5

TRB

79300

188740

354970

215290

35.74

Dimensions are in mm

All specifications are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. For heavy-duty shafts see www.tea.net.au

424


V-Grooved - Yoke Style

See below for details of design recommendations for roller on rail.

Metric Sizes (mm)

Part No.

Item No.

A B E F G Roller Roller Tread Point Groove Dia. Width Width Dia. Location

P Bore +0.00 -0.02

HPVA-40

90277

60

23

22

40

11.5

10

R S Ball or Bearing Capacity, Radial Load Bearing Approx. Capacity, (N) Shldr. Shldr. Tapered Limiting Weight Dia. Length Roller 3000 hrs (kg) Static 500 hrs Static Bearings L10 life @ L10 life @ Limit Thrust 100 RPM 33 1/3 RPM (Radial) (N) 22

0.5

BB

3140

8220

3460

2140

0.46

HPVA-50

90278

75

33

32

50

16.5

15

28

0.5

BB

5780

15140

8070

4980

0.96

HPVA-62

97299

90

40

38

62

20

20

32

1

TRB

20330

48390

33940

20330

1.27

HPVA-62-2

90279

90

40

38

62

20

20

32

1

BB

6930

18170

8070

6540

1.27

HPVA-76

96255

110

46

44

76

23

25

44.5

1

TRB

26670

63480

88960

53380

2.21

HPVA-100

96256

140

56

54

100

28

30

57.2

1

TRB

32870

78240

120990

58270

5.08

HPVA-125

96257

165

71

68

125

35.5

45

82.6

1.5

TRB

62210

148070

216290 108140

8.52

HPVA-150

96259

190

73

70

150

36.5

55

88.9

1.5

TRB

66990

159430

250880 126380

13.79

HPVA-200

96261

240

79

76

200

39.5

70

108

1.5

TRB

79300

188740

325740 162870

29.6

HPVA-250

96263

290

79

76

250

39.5

70

108

1.5

TRB

79300

188740

354970 199360

56.52

Dimensions are in mm

All dimensions are subject to change without notice. Other sizes available on request. For heavy-duty shafts see www.tea.net.au

Roller and rail design recommendations. Mounting locations are determined by matching the roller point diameter with the rail point dimension. (“F” dimensions on roller and rail pages.)

425


Load Runners Installation Notes

Flange Alignment

Yoke Style

The shoulder on the flange end of a flanged yoke-style idler-roller serves as the dimensional reference point for accurate positioning of the roller flange with respect to the supported structure.

General Considerations Load Runners yoke-style idler-rollers offer considerable mounting flexibility. They can be installed on a bolt or thrushaft between yoke brackets (“ears”) which are fabricated as an integral part of the equipment, or in individual yoke brackets which can be bolted into position wherever needed.

Orient each roller so that the flange is closest to the fixed (small diameter) end of the bolt or thru-shaft. (See Drawing.) When the bolt or thru-shaft is clamped, the reference shoulder will be pulled up tightly against the structure reference surface.

It is important that the members which support the mounting bolt or thru-shaft are rigid enough to resist bending (which could cause uneven loading on the rollers) and strong enough to withstand the operational radial and thrust loads.

By mounting a string of flanged yoke-style rollers in this manner, all flanges will be properly aligned.

Osborn offers an exclusive line of heavy-duty thru-shafts designed specifically for use with yoke-style Load Runners idler-rollers. See www.tea.net.au Axial clamping of yoke-style rollers (through the bore) is required to prevent the bearing components from separating, causing loss of bearing adjustment and premature failure. The outboard end of the mounting bolt or thru-shaft should be allowed to float in the yoke ear to avoid “pinching” and restricting the idler-roller tread when the roller is clamped. (See drawings below).

V-Groove Alignment The sharp-radius corner of a V-grooved, yoke-style idlerroller indicates which shoulder should be used as a dimensional reference point for accurate alignment of a Vgrooved roller with respect to the supported structure.

Shaft Style A See www.tea.net.au for actual shaft dimensions

Orient each roller so that the sharp-radius corner is closest to the fixed (small diameter) end of the bolt or thru-shaft. (See Drawing.) When the bolt or thru-shaft is clamped, the reference shoulder will be pulled up tightly against the structure reference surface. By mounting a string of V-grooved yoke-style rollers in this manner, all V-grooves will be properly aligned.

V-Grooves In-Line

Shaft Style B See www.tea.net.au for actual shaft dimensions

Stud Style Hex Socket Size

426

Inch

Metric

Stud Diameter Hex Socket Size < 1/2” 3/16” 5/8” – 7/8” 5/16” 1” – 1 1/4” 1/2” < 2” 5/8”

Stud Diameter Hex Socket Size 4 mm < 12 mm 6 mm 14 mm 8 mm 16 - 30 mm 12 mm < 30 mm


WINKEL Combined Bearings For economical designs in machines, lifting and handling systems.

Advantage of the Combined Bearing system:

General Advice Standard Combined Bearings are resistant from -20o to +80oC

Reduces your designing and production costs. Can take up high radial and axial loads.

For temperatures up to 250oC see Series HT

Strong profiles for high stat. and dynamic loads. Best dispersion of forces in the profiles. Longer lifetime for bearings and profiles. Economical assembling by welding bolt. Bearing components are easily exchangeable.

Technical Characteristics Outer rings are made from case-hardened steel UNI 16 CrNi 4 hardened at 62+2HRC. Inner rings are made from bearing steel En 31-SAE 52100 hardened at 62-2 HRC. Cylindrical rollers have flat ground heads, made from En 31-SAE 52100 steel hardened at 59 á 64 HRC. Welding bolts are made from UNI FE 510.C. Bolt tolerance â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 0.05 mm.

For the dimension of bearing and profile, the maximum allowable load F [N] max. stat. should be confirmed. see page 410-411 For welding operations on Combined Bearings with a diameter less than 100mm all bearing components must be disassembled. After assembling the bearings, or after the adjusting operation, the front side screws should be secured with Loctite. To avoid cracks in the welded joints please use welding electrodes and coreweld for unalloyed steel. For example E 7018-1 AWS/ASME SFA-5.1 For example E 71T-1 AWS/ASME SFA-5.20 Jumbo Combined Bearings should be welded on both sides of the bolt. The guideways in the profiles should be lightly greased and not painted.

Bearings from 4.055 to 4.063 are re-lubricateable. Bearings are lubricated with grease grade 3 (e.g. Shell Alvania 3, Esso Beacon 3).

427


Calculation of the bearing forces Q = Load capacity (N) L = Load distance to suspension point (mm) P = Suspension point A = Bearing distance (mm) recommended 500-1000 mm

F L

F

P

Formula Fmax [N] = stat. radial

QxL 2xA

Q A

F

To avoid wear out in the profile, which is not hardened, the pressure between bearing and profile should be max. Pzul = 860 N/mm2 for Nb-profiles (St.0-St.6 + PR0-PR6) Pzul = 750 N/mm2 for all profiles except Nb-series. Here indicated are Fmax stat radial+axial for each bearing.

F

Profile

Combined Bearing

FA max. stat. axial

FR max. stat. radial

Example Type

D mm.

T mm.

d -0.05 mm.

H mm.

h mm.

B mm.

A mm.

4.054 4.055 4.056 4.057 4.058 4.059 4.060 4.061 4.062 4.063

62.5 70.1 77.7 77.7 88.4 101.2 107.7 107.7 123.0 149.0

42 48 54 53 59 67 71 71 80 103

30 35 40 40 45 50 55 60 60 60

37.5 44.0 48.0 40.0 57.0 46.0 54.0 69.0 72.3 78.5

30.5 36.0 36.5 29.0 44.0 33.0 39.0 55.0 56.0 58.5

20 23 23 23 30 28 31 31 37 43

2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 5.5

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

428

S mm. 20 22 26 26 26 30 34 34 40 50

r mm. 3 4 4 4 3 3 5 5 5 3


Selection of bearings over the hertzian pressure

Radial Bearing

Combined Bearing

Combined Bearing

Combined Bearing

Combined Bearing with adjustable Axial Bearing Axial Bearing Axial Bearing bearing fix adjustable adjustable

Combined Bearing with combined bolt

FR KN

FA KN

max. stat. radial

max. stat. axial

Profiles

-

4.052 P

-

-

-

-

0.80

0.40

A

-

-

-

4.053

-

-

-

-

5.23

1.68

S

-

-

3.10

0NbV

PR 0NbV -

3.73

(2.86) 1NbV

3.87

2NbV

PR 2NbV -

-

-

(PR) 2.054 (PR) 4.054

(PR) 4.454

(PR) 4.072

JC 4.054

KB (PR) 4.072

9.40

(PR) 2.055 (PR) 4.055

(PR) 4.455

(PR) 4.073

JC 4.055

KB (PR) 4.073

11.30

(PR) 2.056 (PR) 4.056

(PR) 4.456

(PR) 4.074

JC 4.056

KB (PR) 4.074

11.72

4.057

4.457

4.075

(PR) 2.058 (PR) 4.058

(PR) 4.458

(PR) 4.076

-

-

(8.59)

-

JC 4.058

(2.97)

(8.92)

20.47 (15.57)

KB (PR) 4.076

6.76

(5.19) 3NbV

PR 1NbV (3018)

(3019)

PR 3NbV (3020)

-

4.059

4.459

4.077

-

-

(15.47)

(5.15)

-

-

(2912)

-

4.060

4.460

4.078

-

-

(16.49)

(5.49) -

-

(3100)

(PR) 2.061 (PR) 4.061

(PR) 4.461

(PR) 4.0784 JC 4.061

KB (PR) 4.0784

21.68

(PR) 2.062 (PR) 4.062

(PR) 4.462

(PR) 4.079

KB (PR) 4.079

30.92 (23.52)

10.20

(PR) 2.063 (PR) 4.063

(PR) 4.463

54.02

JC 4.063

(PR) 4.080

-

KB (PR) 4.080

PR 4NbV -

5NbV

PR 6NbV

17.80

6NbV

PR 6NbV -

37.81

17.80

6NbV

PR 6NbV

(7.84)

(3353)

-

-

-

-

4.089

-

-

-

41.71

13.91

10

-

-

-

-

4.090

-

-

-

58.00

19.40

16

-

-

-

-

4.091

-

-

-

84.00

28.00

18

-

-

-

-

4.092

-

-

-

101.50

33.90

28

-

-

-

-

4.093

-

-

-

139.40

46.50

36

42

-

C = CA = FR = FA =

-

-

JC 4.062

4NbV

7.16

Dynamic load capacity radial bearing (ISO 281/1),= CO Static load capacity radial bearing (ISO 76), Dynamic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 281/1),= COAStatic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 76), Load capacity radial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile, Load capacity axial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile

FR KN

9.40 11.30 11.72 20.47

21.68 30.92 54.02

(8.59) (8.92) (15.57) (15.47) (16.49)

FA KN 3.10 3.73 3.87 6.76

7.16 (23.52) 10.20 17.80

(2.86) (2.97) (5.19) (5.15) (5.49) (7.84)

C KN

CO KN

CA KN

COA KN

rpm max.

31.0 45.5 48.0 48.0 68.0 73.0 81.0 81.0 110.0 151.0

35.5 51.0 56.8 56.8 72.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 132.0 192.0

11 13 18 18 23 25 31 31 43 68

11 14 18 18 23 27 36 36 50 71

900 900 800 800 750 700 650 650 550 450

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

429

Weight kg 0.53 0.80 1.00 0.,87 1.62 1.74 2.27 2.82 3.89 6.52

Flange Plates AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3.1 AP4 AP4 AP6

Standard Profiles

AP0-Q AP1-Q AP2-Q

0 NbV 1 NbV 2 NbV

AP3

3 NbV

AP4-Q AP4-Q AP6-Q

4 NbV 5 NbV 6 NbV

(3018) (3019) (3020) (2912) (3100) (3353)


Axial Bearings - Fixed Relubrication only for types 4.055 - 4.063

Part No.

D mm.

T mm.

d -0.05 mm.

H mm.

h mm.

B mm.

A mm.

S mm.

r mm.

4.053 4.054 4.055 4.056 4.057 4.058 4.059 4.060 4.061 4.062 4.063

52.5 62.5 70.1 77.7 77.7 88.4 101.2 107.7 107.7 123.0 149.0

40 42 48 54 53 59 67 71 71 80 103

30 30 35 40 40 45 50 55 60 60 60

33.0 37.5 44.0 48.0 40.0 57.0 46.0 54.0 69.0 72.3 78.5

27.0 30,5 36.0 36.5 29.0 44.0 33.0 39.0 55.0 56.0 58.5

17 20 23 23 23 30 28 31 31 37 43

5.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 5.5

15 20 22 26 26 26 30 34 34 40 50

2 3 4 4 4 3 3 5 5 5 3

Part No. 4.053 4.054 4.055 4.056 4.057 4.058 4.059 4.060 4.061 4.062 4.063 C= CA = FR = FA =

FR KN 5.23 9.40 11.30 11.72 20.47

21.68 30.92 54.02

FA KN

1.68 3.10 (8.59) 3.73 3.87 (8.92) (15.57) 6.76 (15.47) (16.49) 7.16 (23.52) 10.20 17.80

C KN

24.0 31.0 (2.86) 45.5 48.0 (2.97) 48.0 (5.19) 68.0 (5.15) 73.0 (5.49) 81.0 81.0 (7.84) 110.0 151.0

C O KN CA KN COA KN rpm max. 32.0 35.5 51.0 56.8 56.8 72.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 132.0 192.0

7 11 13 18 18 23 25 31 31 43 68

7 11 14 18 18 23 27 36 36 50 71

800 900 900 800 800 750 700 650 650 550 450

Weight kg 0.46 0.53 0.80 1.00 0.87 1.62 1.74 2.27 2.82 3.89 6.52

see pg 415 for Flange Plates APS AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3.1 AP4 AP4 AP6

Dynamic load capacity radial bearing (ISO 281/1), C O = Static load capacity radial bearing (ISO 76), Dynamic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 281/1), C OA = Static load capacity axial bearing (ISO 76), Load capacity radial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile, Load capacity axial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.

430

see pg 416-418 for

Standard Profiles

AP0-Q AP1-Q AP2-Q

S 0 Nb 1 Nb 2 Nb

AP3

3 Nb

AP4-Q AP4-Q AP6-Q

4 Nb 5 Nb 6 Nb

(3018) (3019) (3020) (2912) (3100) (3353)


Axial Bearings - Eccentric Adjustable Bearings lubricated for life

1 4

Adjusting the Axial Bearing 1 2 3

3

4

2

5

loosen screws turn eccentric axle (Axial Bearing will be turned) check measure A (if necessary repeat Pos.2) secure screws with loctite lock screws

Part No.

D mm.

T mm.

d -0.05 mm.

H mm.

h mm.

B mm.

4.454 4.455 4.456 4.457 4.458 4.459 4.460 4.461 4.462 4.463

62.5 70.1 78.0 78.3 88.4 101.6 108.5 107.7 123.0 149.4

42 48 54 54 59 69 69 69 80 108

30 35 40 40 45 50 55 60 60 60

37.5 - 39.0 44.0 - 45.5 48.0 - 49.5 40.0 - 41.5 57.0 - 58.5 46.0 - 48.0 54.0 - 56.0 69.0 - 71.0 72.3 - 76.3 78.5 - 82.5

30.5 - 32.0 36.0 - 37.5 37.0 - 38.5 29.0 - 30.5 44.0 - 45.5 33.0 - 35.0 40.0 - 42.0 55.0 - 57.0 56.0 - 60.0 58.5 - 62.5

20 23 23 23 30 26 31 31 37 45

Part No. 4.454 4.455 4.456 4.457 4.458 4.459 4.460 4.461 4.462 4.463 C= CA = FR = FA =

FR KN 9.40 11.30 11.72 20.47

21.68 30.92 54.02

FA KN

C KN

3.10 31.0 (8.59) 3.73 (2.86) 45.5 3.87 48.0 (8.92) 48.0 (2.97) (15.57) 6.76 (5.19) 68.0 (15.47) (5.15) 73.0 (16.49) 81.0 (5.49) 81.0 7.16 (23.52) 10.20 (7.84) 110.0 151.0 17.80

COKN 35.5 51.0 56.8 56.8 72.0 82.0 95.0 95.0 132.0 192.0

CA KN C OAKN rpm max. 11 11 18 18 23 25 25 25 31 31

11 11 18 18 23 27 27 27 36 36

900 900 800 800 750 700 650 650 550 450

A mm. 4.0 4.0 3.5 3.5 4.0 4.5 4.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

Weight kg 0.53 0.80 1.00 0.87 1.62 1.74 2.27 2.82 3.60 6.30

431

r mm.

20 20 26 26 26 30 30 30 34 34

3 4 4 4 4 3 5 5 5 3

- 5.5 - 5.5 - 5.0 - 5.0 - 5.5 - 6.5 - 6.0 - 6.0 - 9.0 - 10.0

see pg 415 for Flange Plates AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3.1 AP4 AP4 AP6

Dynamic load capacity radial bearing (ISO 281/1), C O = Static load capacity radial bearing (ISO 76), Dynamic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 281/1), COA = Static load capacity axial bearing (ISO 76), Load capacity radial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile, Load capacity axial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile.

All specfications are subject to change without notice.

S mm.

AP0-Q AP1-Q AP2-Q AP3

AP4-Q AP4-Q AP6-Q

see pg 416-418 for Standard Profiles

0 NbV 1 NbV (3.18) 2 NbV (3019) 3 NbV (3020) (2912) (3100) 4 NbV 5 NbV (3353) 6 NbV


Axial Bearings - Adjustable by Shims

Adjusting the Axial Bearing The adjustment of dimension (A) is obtained by means of an insert positioned between the main body of the bearing and the housing of the side guide roller. Washers with 0.5 + 1.0mm thickness are available if required.

Part No.

D mm.

T mm.

d -0.05 mm.

H* mm.

h* mm.

B mm.

A mm.

S mm.

4.072 4.073 4.074 4.075 4.076 4.077 4.078 4.0784 4.079 4.080

62.5 70.1 78.1 77.7

42 48 54 54 59 67 71 71 80 103

30 35 40 40 45 50 55 60 60 60

43.0 48.0 50.5 45.0 61.0 50.5 58.5 69.0 75.5 89.0

33.0 40.0 39.5 34.0 48.0 37.5 44.5 55.0 59.5 69.0

20 23 23 23 30 28 31 31 37 45

5.5 6.5 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 15.0

16 16 21 21 21 21 33 33 33 50

Part No.

88.4

101.2 107.7 107.7 123.0 149.0

FR KN

4.072 9.40 4.073 11.30 4.074 11.72 4.075 4.076 20.47 4.077 4.078 4.0784 21.68 4.079 30.92 4.080 37.81

FA KN

C KN

31.0 3.10 (8.59) 3.73 (2.86) 45.5 48.0 3.87 (8.92) (2.97) 48.0 (15.57) 6.76 (5.19) 68.0 (15.47) (5.15) 73.0 (16.49) (5.49) 81.0 81.0 7.16 (23.52) 10.20 (7.84) 110.0 151.0 17.80

COKN 35,5 51,0 56,8 56,8 72,0 82.0 95.0 95.0 132.0 192.0

CA KN C OAKN rpm max. 8 14 14 14 15 18 31 31 35 68

8 14 14 14 15 19 36 36 38 71

900 800 700 700 600 600 500 500 500 400

Weight kg 0.56 0.85 1.02 0.92 1.69 1.85 2.38 2.80 4.08 6.70

See pg 415 for Flange Plates AP0 AP1 AP2 AP3.1 AP4 AP4 AP6

C = Dynamic load capacity radial bearing (ISO 281/1), C O = Static load capacity radial bearing (ISO 76), CA = Dynamic load capacity axial bearing (ISO 281/1), C OA = Static load capacity axial bearing (ISO 76), FR = Load capacity radial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile, FA = Load capacity axial bearing max. allowable force between bearing and profile. * Dimension H and h without washers, max. + 2mm All specifications are subject to change without notice.

432

AP0-Q AP1-Q AP2-Q AP3

AP4-Q AP4-Q AP6-Q

r mm. 3 4 4 4 3 3 5 5 5 5

see pg 416-418 for Standard Profiles 0 NbV 1 NbV (3018) 2 NbV (3019) 3 NbV (3020) (2912) (3100) 4 NbV 5 NbV (3353) 6 NbV


Fitting Flange Plates

Axial Bearing Fixed see pg 430

Axial Bearing Eccentric Adjustable See pg 431

Axial Bearing adjustable by shines See pg 432

“h” dimension please see Standard Profile specifications pages 434-436

Type AP AP AP AP AP AP AP

S 0 1 2 3.1 4 6

A

B

C

D

E

ØF

G

ØH

t

90 100 120 120 160 180 200

50 60 80 80 100 120 150

30 40 50 50 60 80 100

40 40 50 50 60 80 100

70 80 90 90 120 140 160

8.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 17.0 17.0 17.0

M8 M10 M12 M12 M16 M16 M16

30 30 35 40 45 60 60

10 10 15 15 20 20 20

Flange Plates Square Series AP-Q on request

0.5mm Washer

1.0mm Washer

DS-S-1.0 DS-S-0.5 DS-0-1.0 DS-0-0.5 DS-1-1.0 DS-1-0.5 DS-2-1.0 DS-2-0.5 DS-3.1-0.5 DS-3.1-1.0 DS-4-1.0 DS-4-0.5 DS-6-1.0 DS-6-0.5

Profiles see pg 434-436

All dimensions are in mm. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

433

Standard Profile

Weight kg

S 0 1 2 3 4 6

0.25 0.35 0.9 0.85 2.35 2.65 4.0


Standard Profiles Standard NbV-profiles All profiles from Standard 0 on are made from highquality steel UNI FE 510.C Nb, in sandblasted version. L max = 12 m. With our Combined Bearing system, we deliver most sizes of profiles in fixed lengths, immediately from stock. All profiles are available in fine straightened style on request. Higher load capacity with new NbV-series. Profiles Standard A and Standard S are manufactured in steel in UNI FE 360B

Standard A Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

2.62 kg 4.38 cm3 1.07 cm3 0.31 cm 0.78 cm 10.6 cm4 1.73 cm4 0.05 cm

L max = 6 m

Standard S Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

5.3 kg 11.9 cm3 2.5 cm3 2.4 cm 0.94 cm 38.8 cm4 5.2 cm4 0.8 cm

L max = 8 m

Notice: The straightness for fine straightened profiles is Âą 0.3 mm per meter. Standard Âą1.0 per meter All specifications are subject to change without notice.

434


Standard Profiles Standard 0 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

10.5 kg 32 6 3.2 1.3 137 15 1.0

cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm L max = 12 m

Standard 1 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

14.8 kg 53 11 3.8 1.5 273 27 1.2

cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm L max = 12 m

Standard 2 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

20.9 kg 81 15 4.3 1.5 493 38 1.2

cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm L max = 12 m

Standard 3 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

28.6 kg 128 27 4.8 2.0 865 89 1.5

cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm

L max = 12 m All specifications are subject to change without notice.

435


Standard Profiles Standard 4 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

36.0 kg

190 39 5.7 2.2 1494 150 1.8

cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm

L max = 12 m

Standard 5 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

42.8 kg

250 48 6.3 1.9 2185 205 1.9

cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm

L max = 12 m

Standard 6 NbV Weight/meter Wx: Wy: ix: ey: lx: ly: iy:

52.3 kg

340 57 7.1 2.0 3423 270 2.0

cm3 cm3 cm cm cm4 cm4 cm

L max = 12 m All specifications are subject to change without notice.

436


Halogen Work Lamps The HS Series The entire unit is extruded from aluminium - anode treated for scratch resistance, and weighs 50% less than other equivalent models. The elbow and base are made of engineering plastic which is durable, resistant to electric shocks and high temperatures, and are absolutely insulated, giving maximum safety without electric leakage interfering with machine control circuits, or elastic fatigue resulting in head deflection. The 12 position base swivel is constructed of steel ball and spring, permitting positive and convenient adjustment to any lighting direction.

Features • Water and oil resistant • Efficient heat dispersal • Designed with user in mind • Separately mounted switches • Easy bulb replacement

HSN

HS22

HS23

HS35 Part Number Volt

HSN

HS22

HS23

HS35

12

12

12

12

Watt

55

55

50

55

IP

65

65

65

65

Combined length of arm Transformer

85mm

495mm

600mm

792mm

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Transformer TS12/50C 437


Halogen Work Lamps The SL Series The SL Series of halogen work lamps feature a concentrated light source providing high intensity and high efficiency lighting. The base and shade are made of black engineering plastic, being durable and well resistant to electric leakage and high temperatures. The units are compact in design for space saving. The SL40 has a flexible gooseneck arm which is easily set to any lighting area, making it especially ideal for lighting on medium duty machinery, office, studio or house lighting applications. Optional Magnetic Bases allow quick and easy relocation of the whole lamp.

SLN

SL40

Mounting Bracket SL-MB

Magnetic Base SL-MAG

Part Number

SLN

SL40

Volt

12

12

Watt

20

50

IP

54

54

Length of arm

126mm

465mm

Transformer

Optional

Optional

Magnetic Base

Optional

Optional

Mounting Bracket

Optional

Optional

Transformer TS12/50C 438


Terms and Conditions 1.

INTERPRETATION: In these terms and conditions unless the context otherwise requires: (a) 'T.E.A.' means T.E.A. Transmissions Pty. Ltd.; (b) 'The Customer' means the person (including his successors and assigns) acquiring goods from T.E.A.: (c) 'goods' means all goods supplied by T.E.A. to the customer; (d) 'supply' when used as a verb includes supply (including resupply) by way of sale; (e) 'person' includes corporation, firm and unincorporated association; (f) â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;corporation' includes person, firm and unincorporated association; (g) any gender imports the other genders; (h) the singular includes the plural and vice versa. Clause headings used herein are for convenience only and shall be disregarded in construing these terms and conditions.

2. OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE: 2.1 These terms and conditions shall apply to the supply of goods by T.E.A. to the Customer where: (a) the Customer places an order for the goods which either contains no terms and conditions of supply or contains terms and conditions identical to those contained herein; and (b) T.E.A. accepts such order. 2.2 No contract for the supply of goods shall exist between T.E.A. and the Customer except upon these terms and conditions. Any order placed by the Customer for goods embodying terms inconsistent with these terms and conditions of supply shall be incapable of acceptance by T.E.A. Where the Customer places an order for goods which contain terms and conditions at variance with these, any subsequent delivery of the ordered goods to the Customer shall be construed as a counter offer to supply them on the terms and conditions contained herein. Such counter offer shall be deemed to be accepted by the Customer be acceptance of the goods when delivered. 2.3 T.E.A. reserves the right to accept in whole or in part any order by the Customer or to decline any such order. Any order or part order not accepted is deemed cancelled. 2.4 The giving of a quotation by T.E.A. shall be construed as an invitation to the Customer to make an offer based on such quotation. Such an order shall not create a contract between the Customer and T.E.A. 2.5 All telephone orders should be confirmed in writing by the customer. 2.6 Unless otherwise stated in a quotation, if the Customer does not place an order based on the quotation within thirty (30) days after the date of the quotation, the quotation shall be deemed to have been withdrawn by T.E.A. 2.7 Every order, or alteration to an order, requires the written confirmation of T.E.A. to be effective in law. 3. PRICES: 3.1 Unless otherwise agreed by T.E.A. in writing, the price for goods shall be that ruling at the date of delivery thereof, notwithstanding that delivery may be delayed by agreement or otherwise. 3.2 Subject to clause 3.1 prices shall be subject to alteration by T.E.A. without notice to the Customer. 3.3 Except as otherwise stated in writing by T.E.A. prices shall be exclusive of sales tax and delivery charges. 3.4 Where a price is stated in writing by T.E.A. to be inclusive of sales tax, any increase in sales tax between the date the price is stated and the date of delivery of goods which are the subject of the sales tax, shall be for the account of the Customer. 4. PAYMENT: 4.1 When the Customer opens an account with T.E.A. the Customer may be required to nominate referees or guarantors prior to credit trading being approved. 4.2 A minimum invoice charge may apply to the supply of goods on credit. 4.3 Unless otherwise agreed by T.E.A. payment for goods shall be made directly to T.E.A. only, and not to any representatives, agents, carriers or sub-contractors. 4.4 If the customer fails to comply with T.E.A.'s terms of payment, T.E.A. may forthwith discontinue supply of further goods to the Customer, and T.E.A. may without notice charge interest at the prime rate prevailing at the date of delivery of the goods. 4.5 Notwithstanding anything contained in Clause 4.4, T.E.A. may, at the time of any particular delivery of goods, require payment therefore in advance of delivery. 5. DELIVERY AND RETURN OF GOODS: 5.1 The customer shall bear all delivery charges for delivery of goods to the Customer's premises and all risks shall pass to the Customer at the time of dispatch. If the goods are ready for dispatch but the taking of delivery is delayed for reasons for which T.E.A. is not responsible, the risk passes to the Customer at the time that the Customer receives notification that the goods are ready for dispatch. 5.2 Where, in order to deliver or collect goods, T.E.A. or its carrier enters upon the Customer's premises, the Customer shall provide full and safe access to T.E.A. or its carrier and shall be liable for, and indemnify T.E.A. against the cost of all loss, damage to property and injury to persons, occurring directly as a result of the failure by the Customer to ensure the said full and safe access. 5.3 The customer shall be responsible for providing adequate labour and/or materials-handling equipment for the loading and unloading of goods at its premises. 5.4 There shall be no return of defective goods to T.E.A. unless the Customer notifies T.E.A. within seven(7) days of the Customer's receipt of such goods. Any claims after this period for return or compensation in respect of such defective goods are expressly excluded. 5.5 Where T.E.A. agrees to collect goods from the Customers premises, the Customer shall ensure that such goods are all available for collection at an easily accessible central point and that they are ready for loading at the time T.E.A. arrives to collect them. 5.6 Where the Customer returns goods to T.E.A. other than by T.E.A.'s vehicles, T.E.A. shall be informed in advance of the details of such returns, including details of goods and the date and method of return thereof. The Customer shall label goods with the name and address of the Customer. 5.7 Whenever goods are returned to T.E.A., the Customer shall ensure that they are returned in a safe condition, both from the point of view of risk to persons handling them and in their vicinity and from the point of view of the risk of damage to the goods themselves. 5.8 Where goods are transported by T.E.A. to the Customer's premises, delivery shall be deemed to take place at the moment that the goods pass over the side of the vehicle on or in which they were transported to the Customer's premises. 5.9 In the event that goods are returned to T.E.A. there shall be no refund of the costs of the packing material and labour used to pack such goods when delivered to the Customer and T.E.A. shall not be liable for any packing costs incurred in the return of the goods to T.E.A 5.10 Delivery dates proposed by T.E.A. shall not be binding on T.E.A.. T.E.A. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions in delivery of goods by any carrier or sub-contractor. In such event the Customer has no right of withdrawal from the contract. 6. PASSING OF TITLE AND RISK: 6.1 All property and title of goods sold by T.E.A. to the Customer, together with all risks in respect

of such goods, shall pass to the Customer upon delivery of the goods, subject to T.E.A.'s right to reclaim ownership of any goods supplied until any outstanding monies whatsoever owed by the Customer to T.E.A. have been paid in full. 6.2 In the event of attachment, seizure or restraint, by any party, of goods supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer, the Customer agrees to inform T.E.A. immediately upon the occurrence of such event. Any such attachment, seizure or restraint shall not affect T.E.A.'s title to goods nor rights herein. Any goods delivered to the Customer shall not be used as security nor encumbered in any manner. 7. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: 7.1 All technical information (including drawings, specifications, catalogues, illustrations and particulars of dimensions and weight) supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer is approximate only and shall not be binding by T.E.A. 7.2 All technical information supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer shall be treated by the Customer as confidential and the Customer shall not communicate such information to third persons without the written consent of T.E.A. No such information or materials shall be reproduced nor given to third parties. T.E.A. reserves the right to make alterations to the design, dimensions and weights of its goods. 7.3 Catalogues, photographs, samples and price lists remain the property of T.E.A. and shall be returned on demand. 8.

FORCE MAJEURE: If the performance or observance by T.E.A. of its obligations (or any of them) is prevented, restricted or interfered with by reason of any cause or causes beyond the reasonable control of T.E.A., T.E.A. shall, upon prompt notice of such cause or causes being given to the Customer, be excused from such performance or observation to the extent of such prevention, restriction or interference, provided that T.E.A. shall use its best efforts to avoid or remove the cause or causes of non-performance and observance.

9. LIABILITY: 9.1 The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Commonwealth) as amended and similar States and Territories legislation relating to the supply of goods protects consumers' interest by ensuring that consumers are entitled in certain situations to the benefits of various conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies (including warranties as to merchantability and fitness for purpose) associated with the supply of goods. 9.2 A consumer should seek legal advice as to the nature and extent of these protected interests. In some circumstances the supplier of goods may legally stipulate that the said conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies are limited or entirely excluded. 9.3 The warranties set out in Clause 9.2 shall be additional to any non-excludable warranties to which the Customer may be entitled pursuant to any statute. 9.4 Subject to Clause 9.3, T.E.A. gives the following warranties to the Customer: (A) Insofar as they are manufactured or imported by T.E.A. goods will upon delivery be of merchantable quality and reasonably fit for the purpose or purposes for which they are supplied by T.E.A; (B) T.E.A. will repair or, at its option, replace those goods which upon examination are found by T.E.A. to be defective in workmanship and/or materials. 9.5 In its application to goods, the warranty in Clause 9.2: (A) is conditional upon the Customer notifying T.E.A. in writing of its claim within seven (7) days of becoming aware of the basis thereof, and at its own expense returning the goods which are the subject of the claim to T.E.A., and (B) does not apply to: (I) components not of T.E.A. manufacturer, which are contained in the goods, and (II) obsolete goods sold at auction, second-hand goods and prototype goods. 9.6 T.E.A. hereby declares that to the extent permitted by law, it hereby limits its liability in respect of the supply of goods which are not of a kind ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption to anyone or more of the following (the choice of which shall be at the option of T.E.A.): (A) the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods; (B) the repair of the goods; (C) the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods; or (D) the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired. 9.7 Except as provided in Clause 9.2 to 9.4 above, to the extent permitted by statute, T.E.A. hereby excludes all liability for any loss, damage, death or injury of any kind whatsoever occasioned to the Customer and/or any third parties in respect of the supply of goods including direct, indirect, consequential or incidental loss, damage or injury of any kind. The Customer indemnifies and keeps indemnified T.E.A. against any loss, damage, claim, cost or demand sustained or made against T.E.A. by any person arising out of the supply of goods herein. 9.8 T.E.A. accepts no liability for loss of or damage to drawings, models, samples, etc. sent to us by the Customer. 10. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION: These terms and conditions and the contract evidenced thereby shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws from time to time of the State or Territory in which delivery of the goods takes place and T.E.A. and the Customer hereby submit to the jurisdiction of the Courts of the said State or Territory. 11. LIENS: In addition to any lien to which T.E.A. may be entitled by statute or the common law, T.E.A. shall in the event of the Customer's Insolvency, bankruptcy or winding up, be thereupon entitled to a general lien on all property whatsoever owned by the Customer and in the possession of T.E.A. at the time, such lien to cover the unpaid price of any goods supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer. 12. WAIVERS: Failure by T.E.A. to insist on strict performance by the Customer of any terms and conditions contained herein shall not be taken to be a waiver of any rights of T.E.A. in relation thereto and in any event shall not be taken to be a waiver of the same terms and conditions on any subsequent occasion. 13. LICENSES AND PERMITS: It shall be the responsibility of the Customer to obtain, in relation to all goods supplied by T.E.A. to the customer, all licenses and permits needed under any relevant statute, ordinance or related rule or regulation. 14 NOTICES: Notices to T.E.A. shall be hand-delivered or transmitted by pre-paid registered post to the address of T.E.A. No notice to T.E.A. shall be taken to have been given until it is actually received by T.E.A.


Terms and Conditions 1.

INTERPRETATION: In these terms and conditions unless the context otherwise requires: (a) 'T.E.A.' means T.E.A. Transmissions Pty. Ltd.; (b) 'The Customer' means the person (including his successors and assigns) acquiring goods from T.E.A.: (c) 'goods' means all goods supplied by T.E.A. to the customer; (d) 'supply' when used as a verb includes supply (including resupply) by way of sale; (e) 'person' includes corporation, firm and unincorporated association; (f) â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;corporation' includes person, firm and unincorporated association; (g) any gender imports the other genders; (h) the singular includes the plural and vice versa. Clause headings used herein are for convenience only and shall be disregarded in construing these terms and conditions.

2. OFFER AND ACCEPTANCE: 2.1 These terms and conditions shall apply to the supply of goods by T.E.A. to the Customer where: (a) the Customer places an order for the goods which either contains no terms and conditions of supply or contains terms and conditions identical to those contained herein; and (b) T.E.A. accepts such order. 2.2 No contract for the supply of goods shall exist between T.E.A. and the Customer except upon these terms and conditions. Any order placed by the Customer for goods embodying terms inconsistent with these terms and conditions of supply shall be incapable of acceptance by T.E.A. Where the Customer places an order for goods which contain terms and conditions at variance with these, any subsequent delivery of the ordered goods to the Customer shall be construed as a counter offer to supply them on the terms and conditions contained herein. Such counter offer shall be deemed to be accepted by the Customer be acceptance of the goods when delivered. 2.3 T.E.A. reserves the right to accept in whole or in part any order by the Customer or to decline any such order. Any order or part order not accepted is deemed cancelled. 2.4 The giving of a quotation by T.E.A. shall be construed as an invitation to the Customer to make an offer based on such quotation. Such an order shall not create a contract between the Customer and T.E.A. 2.5 All telephone orders should be confirmed in writing by the customer. 2.6 Unless otherwise stated in a quotation, if the Customer does not place an order based on the quotation within thirty (30) days after the date of the quotation, the quotation shall be deemed to have been withdrawn by T.E.A. 2.7 Every order, or alteration to an order, requires the written confirmation of T.E.A. to be effective in law. 3. PRICES: 3.1 Unless otherwise agreed by T.E.A. in writing, the price for goods shall be that ruling at the date of delivery thereof, notwithstanding that delivery may be delayed by agreement or otherwise. 3.2 Subject to clause 3.1 prices shall be subject to alteration by T.E.A. without notice to the Customer. 3.3 Except as otherwise stated in writing by T.E.A. prices shall be exclusive of sales tax and delivery charges. 3.4 Where a price is stated in writing by T.E.A. to be inclusive of sales tax, any increase in sales tax between the date the price is stated and the date of delivery of goods which are the subject of the sales tax, shall be for the account of the Customer. 4. PAYMENT: 4.1 When the Customer opens an account with T.E.A. the Customer may be required to nominate referees or guarantors prior to credit trading being approved. 4.2 A minimum invoice charge may apply to the supply of goods on credit. 4.3 Unless otherwise agreed by T.E.A. payment for goods shall be made directly to T.E.A. only, and not to any representatives, agents, carriers or sub-contractors. 4.4 If the customer fails to comply with T.E.A.'s terms of payment, T.E.A. may forthwith discontinue supply of further goods to the Customer, and T.E.A. may without notice charge interest at the prime rate prevailing at the date of delivery of the goods. 4.5 Notwithstanding anything contained in Clause 4.4, T.E.A. may, at the time of any particular delivery of goods, require payment therefore in advance of delivery. 5. DELIVERY AND RETURN OF GOODS: 5.1 The customer shall bear all delivery charges for delivery of goods to the Customer's premises and all risks shall pass to the Customer at the time of dispatch. If the goods are ready for dispatch but the taking of delivery is delayed for reasons for which T.E.A. is not responsible, the risk passes to the Customer at the time that the Customer receives notification that the goods are ready for dispatch. 5.2 Where, in order to deliver or collect goods, T.E.A. or its carrier enters upon the Customer's premises, the Customer shall provide full and safe access to T.E.A. or its carrier and shall be liable for, and indemnify T.E.A. against the cost of all loss, damage to property and injury to persons, occurring directly as a result of the failure by the Customer to ensure the said full and safe access. 5.3 The customer shall be responsible for providing adequate labour and/or materials-handling equipment for the loading and unloading of goods at its premises. 5.4 There shall be no return of defective goods to T.E.A. unless the Customer notifies T.E.A. within seven(7) days of the Customer's receipt of such goods. Any claims after this period for return or compensation in respect of such defective goods are expressly excluded. 5.5 Where T.E.A. agrees to collect goods from the Customers premises, the Customer shall ensure that such goods are all available for collection at an easily accessible central point and that they are ready for loading at the time T.E.A. arrives to collect them. 5.6 Where the Customer returns goods to T.E.A. other than by T.E.A.'s vehicles, T.E.A. shall be informed in advance of the details of such returns, including details of goods and the date and method of return thereof. The Customer shall label goods with the name and address of the Customer. 5.7 Whenever goods are returned to T.E.A., the Customer shall ensure that they are returned in a safe condition, both from the point of view of risk to persons handling them and in their vicinity and from the point of view of the risk of damage to the goods themselves. 5.8 Where goods are transported by T.E.A. to the Customer's premises, delivery shall be deemed to take place at the moment that the goods pass over the side of the vehicle on or in which they were transported to the Customer's premises. 5.9 In the event that goods are returned to T.E.A. there shall be no refund of the costs of the packing material and labour used to pack such goods when delivered to the Customer and T.E.A. shall not be liable for any packing costs incurred in the return of the goods to T.E.A 5.10 Delivery dates proposed by T.E.A. shall not be binding on T.E.A.. T.E.A. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions in delivery of goods by any carrier or sub-contractor. In such event the Customer has no right of withdrawal from the contract. 6. PASSING OF TITLE AND RISK: 6.1 All property and title of goods sold by T.E.A. to the Customer, together with all risks in respect

of such goods, shall pass to the Customer upon delivery of the goods, subject to T.E.A.'s right to reclaim ownership of any goods supplied until any outstanding monies whatsoever owed by the Customer to T.E.A. have been paid in full. 6.2 In the event of attachment, seizure or restraint, by any party, of goods supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer, the Customer agrees to inform T.E.A. immediately upon the occurrence of such event. Any such attachment, seizure or restraint shall not affect T.E.A.'s title to goods nor rights herein. Any goods delivered to the Customer shall not be used as security nor encumbered in any manner. 7. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: 7.1 All technical information (including drawings, specifications, catalogues, illustrations and particulars of dimensions and weight) supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer is approximate only and shall not be binding by T.E.A. 7.2 All technical information supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer shall be treated by the Customer as confidential and the Customer shall not communicate such information to third persons without the written consent of T.E.A. No such information or materials shall be reproduced nor given to third parties. T.E.A. reserves the right to make alterations to the design, dimensions and weights of its goods. 7.3 Catalogues, photographs, samples and price lists remain the property of T.E.A. and shall be returned on demand. 8.

FORCE MAJEURE: If the performance or observance by T.E.A. of its obligations (or any of them) is prevented, restricted or interfered with by reason of any cause or causes beyond the reasonable control of T.E.A., T.E.A. shall, upon prompt notice of such cause or causes being given to the Customer, be excused from such performance or observation to the extent of such prevention, restriction or interference, provided that T.E.A. shall use its best efforts to avoid or remove the cause or causes of non-performance and observance.

9. LIABILITY: 9.1 The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Commonwealth) as amended and similar States and Territories legislation relating to the supply of goods protects consumers' interest by ensuring that consumers are entitled in certain situations to the benefits of various conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies (including warranties as to merchantability and fitness for purpose) associated with the supply of goods. 9.2 A consumer should seek legal advice as to the nature and extent of these protected interests. In some circumstances the supplier of goods may legally stipulate that the said conditions, warranties, guarantees, rights and remedies are limited or entirely excluded. 9.3 The warranties set out in Clause 9.2 shall be additional to any non-excludable warranties to which the Customer may be entitled pursuant to any statute. 9.4 Subject to Clause 9.3, T.E.A. gives the following warranties to the Customer: (A) Insofar as they are manufactured or imported by T.E.A. goods will upon delivery be of merchantable quality and reasonably fit for the purpose or purposes for which they are supplied by T.E.A; (B) T.E.A. will repair or, at its option, replace those goods which upon examination are found by T.E.A. to be defective in workmanship and/or materials. 9.5 In its application to goods, the warranty in Clause 9.2: (A) is conditional upon the Customer notifying T.E.A. in writing of its claim within seven (7) days of becoming aware of the basis thereof, and at its own expense returning the goods which are the subject of the claim to T.E.A., and (B) does not apply to: (I) components not of T.E.A. manufacturer, which are contained in the goods, and (II) obsolete goods sold at auction, second-hand goods and prototype goods. 9.6 T.E.A. hereby declares that to the extent permitted by law, it hereby limits its liability in respect of the supply of goods which are not of a kind ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption to anyone or more of the following (the choice of which shall be at the option of T.E.A.): (A) the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods; (B) the repair of the goods; (C) the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods; or (D) the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired. 9.7 Except as provided in Clause 9.2 to 9.4 above, to the extent permitted by statute, T.E.A. hereby excludes all liability for any loss, damage, death or injury of any kind whatsoever occasioned to the Customer and/or any third parties in respect of the supply of goods including direct, indirect, consequential or incidental loss, damage or injury of any kind. The Customer indemnifies and keeps indemnified T.E.A. against any loss, damage, claim, cost or demand sustained or made against T.E.A. by any person arising out of the supply of goods herein. 9.8 T.E.A. accepts no liability for loss of or damage to drawings, models, samples, etc. sent to us by the Customer. 10. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION: These terms and conditions and the contract evidenced thereby shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws from time to time of the State or Territory in which delivery of the goods takes place and T.E.A. and the Customer hereby submit to the jurisdiction of the Courts of the said State or Territory. 11. LIENS: In addition to any lien to which T.E.A. may be entitled by statute or the common law, T.E.A. shall in the event of the Customer's Insolvency, bankruptcy or winding up, be thereupon entitled to a general lien on all property whatsoever owned by the Customer and in the possession of T.E.A. at the time, such lien to cover the unpaid price of any goods supplied by T.E.A. to the Customer. 12. WAIVERS: Failure by T.E.A. to insist on strict performance by the Customer of any terms and conditions contained herein shall not be taken to be a waiver of any rights of T.E.A. in relation thereto and in any event shall not be taken to be a waiver of the same terms and conditions on any subsequent occasion. 13. LICENSES AND PERMITS: It shall be the responsibility of the Customer to obtain, in relation to all goods supplied by T.E.A. to the customer, all licenses and permits needed under any relevant statute, ordinance or related rule or regulation. 14 NOTICES: Notices to T.E.A. shall be hand-delivered or transmitted by pre-paid registered post to the address of T.E.A. No notice to T.E.A. shall be taken to have been given until it is actually received by T.E.A.